Siprotec Multifunction Generator Protection Relay 7UM611/7UM612

C53000-G1176-C127-1
SIPROTEC
Multifunction Generator
Protection Relay
7UM611/7UM612
V4.0
Instruction Manual
3UHIDFH_
7DEOH_RI_&RQWHQWV_
,QWURGXFWLRQ 1
+DUGZDUH_DQG_&RQQHFWLRQV 2
,QLWLDO_,QVSHFWLRQV 3
6,3527(& __'HYLFHV 4
&RQILJXUDWLRQ 5
)XQFWLRQV 6
&RQWURO_'XULQJ_2SHUDWLRQ 7
,QVWDOODWLRQ_DQG_&RPPLVVLRQLQJ 8
5RXWLQH_&KHFNV_DQG_0DLQWHQDQFH 9
7HFKQLFDO_'DWD 10
$SSHQGL[ A
,QGH[_
Siemens Manual No. C53000-G1176-C127-1
7UM61 Manual i
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Preface
Purpose of This
Manual
This manual describes the functions, operation, installation, and placing into service
of the device. In particular, one will find:
• General information regarding operation of SIPROTEC® 4 devices → Chapter 4;
• Information regarding customizing of the device → Chapter 5;
• Descriptions of device functions and settings → Chapter 6;
• Instructions for operation while in service → Chapter 7;
• Instructions for mounting and commissioning → Chapter 8;
• Compilation of technical specifications → Chapter 10;
• As well as a compilation of the most significant data for experienced users in the
Appendix.
Target Audience Protection engineers, commissioning engineers, personnel concerned with
adjustment,
checking, and service of selective protective equipment, automatic and control
facilities, and personnel of electrical facilities and power plants.
Applicability of
This Manual
This manual is valid for: SIPROTEC® 4 7UM61 Multifunction Machine Protections;
firmware version 4.0.
Additional Support For questions regarding SIPROTEC® 4 devices, please contact your
Siemens representative.
Training Courses Individual course offerings may be found in our Training Catalog, or questions
can be
directed to our training center. Please contact your Siemens representative.
Indication of Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities
on the approximation of the laws of the member states relating to electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC Council Directive 89/336/EEC) and concerning electrical equipment
for use within certain voltage limits (Low-voltage Directive 73/23/EEC).
This conformity is proved by tests conducted by Siemens AG in accordance with Article
10 of the Council Directive in agreement with the generic standards EN 50081
and EN 50082 for EMC directive, and with the standard EN 60255–6 for the low-voltage
directive.
The product conforms with the international standard of the series IEC 60255 and the
German standard DIN 57435 /Part 303 (corresponds to VDE 0435/Part 303).
Preface
ii 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Instructions and
Warnings
The following indicators and standard definitions are used:
DANGER
means that death, severe personal injury, or considerable equipment damage will occur
if safety precautions are disregarded.
WARNING
means that death, severe personal injury, or considerable equipment damage could
occur if safety precautions are disregarded.
Caution
means that light personal injury or equipment damage may occur if safety precautions
are disregarded. This particularly applies to damage to the device and to resulting damage
of the protected equipment.
Instruction
is an important piece of information regarding the product or the part of the manual
that deserves special attention.
QUALIFIED PERSONNEL
Within the meaning of safety precautions of this manual and the instructions, qualified
personnel are those persons who are qualified to set up, install, place into service, and
operate this device, and who possess the following qualifications:
q Training and instruction (or other qualification) for switching, grounding, and designating
devices and systems.
q Training or instruction in accordance with safety standards for care and use of certain
safety equipment.
q First aid training.
Typographic and
Graphical Conventions
The following text formats are used to identify concepts giving device information described
by the text flow:
3DUDPHWHU_QDPHV, or identifiers for configuration or function parameters that appear
in the device display or on the screen of a PC (with DIGSI® 4) are shown in monoscript
(same point size) bold text. This also applies to header bars for selection menus.
Warning!
During operation of electrical equipment, certain parts of these devices are under high
voltage. Severe personal injury or significant equipment damage could result from improper
behavior.
Only qualified personnel should work on this equipment or in the vicinity of this equipment.
These personnel must be familiar with all warnings and service procedures described
in this manual, as well as with safety regulations.
Prerequisites to proper and safe operation of this product are proper transport, proper
storage, setup, installation, operation, and maintenance of the product, as well as
careful operation and servicing of the device within the scope of the warnings and instructions
of this manual.
In particular, the general facility and safety regulations for work with high-voltage
equipment (e.g. ANSI, IEC, EN, or other national or international regulations) must be
observed. Noncompliance may result in death, injury, or significant equipment damage.
Preface
7UM61 Manual iii
C53000-G1176-C127-1
3DUDPHWHU_FRQGLWLRQV, or possible settings of parameters that appear in the device
display or on the screen of a PC (with DIGSI® 4), are additionally shown in italic
style. This also applies to selection items for selection menus.
“$QQXQFLDWLRQV”, or identifiers for information produced by the device or required
by other devices or from the switch-gear is shown in mono-script (same point size) and
placed into quotation marks.
For diagrams in which the identifier type results from the representation itself, text conventions
may differ from the above-mentioned.
The following symbols are used in diagrams:
possible conditions 2Q and 2II
IL1
GND Fault device-internal (logical) input signal
GND Fault device-internal (logical) output signal
internal input signal of an analog quantity
>Release
Dev. Trip
external binary output signal with function number F# (annunciation
2Q
2II
____ )81&7,21
Parameter address
3DUDPHWHU_QDPH
Parameter Conditions
example of a parameter switch )81&7,21 with address ____ and
F#
F#
external binary input signal with function number F# (binary input,
from device)
respective annunciation to the device)
Input signal of an analog quantity
≥1
&
OR gate
AND gate
Signal inversion
OR
Preface
iv 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
I2>
____ ,_!!
0T
S
R
Q
≥ 1 Inputsignals of dynamic quantity
Formation of one output signal from a number
of analog inputs
Timer (dropout delayed)
Limit stage with parameter address and
T
Dynamic triggered pulse timer (monoflop)
Static memory (RS–flipflop) with setting input (S),
=1 Exclusive–OR gate: output is active, if only one
of the inputs is active
= Coincidence gate: output is active, if both inputs
are active simultaneously
T0
____ 7_,_!!
Timer (pick up delayed) with parameter address
and designator
resetting input (R), output (Q) and inverted Q
designator
output (Q)
Liability Statement
We have checked the text of this manual against the
hardware and software described. Exclusions and deviations
cannot be ruled out; we accept no liability for lack
of total agreement.
The information in this manual is checked periodically,
and necessary corrections will be included in future editions.
We appreciate any suggested improvements.
We reserve the right to make technical improvements
without notice.
Copyright
Copyright © Siemens AG 1999. All rights reserved.
Dissemination or reproduction of this document, or evaluation and communication
of its contents, is not authorized except where expressly permitted.
Violations are liable for damages. All rights reserved, particularly
for the purposes of patent application or trademark registration.
Registered trademarks
SIPROTEC®, SIMATIC®, SIMATIC NET ®, SINAUT ®, SICAM®, and
DIGSI® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. Other designations
in this manual may be trademarks that if used by third parties for their
own purposes may violate the rights of the owner. n
7UM61 Manual v
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Table of Contents
1
Introduction......................................................................................................................................
1-1
1.1 Overall Operation ................................................................................................................ 1-2
1.2 Applications ......................................................................................................................... 1-5
1.3 Features .............................................................................................................................. 1-7
1.4 Scope of Functions.............................................................................................................. 1-8
2 Hardware and
Connections ............................................................................................................. 2-1
2.1 Version of 7UM61 for Panel Flush-Mounting / Cubicle Mounting........................................ 2-2
2.1.1 Construction ........................................................................................................................ 2-
2
2.1.2 Connections to Threaded Terminals ................................................................................... 2-
6
2.1.3 Connections to Plug-In Terminals ..................................................................................... 2-
10
2.1.4 Connections to Optical Communication Interfaces............................................................ 2-
13
2.1.5 Connections to Electrical Communication Interfaces ........................................................ 2-
14
2.2 Version of 7UM61 for Panel Surface-Mounting................................................................. 2-15
2.2.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................... 2-
15
2.2.2 Connections to Threaded Terminals ................................................................................. 2-
17
2.2.3 Connections to Optical Communication Interfaces............................................................ 2-
18
3 Initial
Inspections ............................................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1 Unpacking and Packing....................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2 Inspections Upon Receipt.................................................................................................... 3-3
3.2.1 Inspection of Features and Ratings..................................................................................... 3-
3
3.2.2 Electrical Check................................................................................................................... 3-
3
3.3 User Interface...................................................................................................................... 3-4
3.3.1 Navigating through the Operating Menus Using the Operator Control Panel...................... 3-
4
3.3.2 Operation Using DIGSI® 4................................................................................................... 3-
7
3.4 Storage............................................................................................................................. 3-12
4 SIPROTEC 4
Devices........................................................................................................................ 4-1
4.1 General............................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.1 Protection and Control......................................................................................................... 4-
2
4.1.2 Communication................................................................................................................... 4-3
4.1.3 Settings ............................................................................................................................... 4-
4
4.1.4 Operations.......................................................................................................................... 4-4
4.1.5 Waveform Capture .............................................................................................................. 4-
4
vi 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
4.2 Operator Control Facilities................................................................................................... 4-5
4.2.1 Operating Panel On Device................................................................................................. 4-
5
4.2.2 DIGSI® 4 Tool...................................................................................................................... 4-
7
4.3 Information Retrieval............................................................................................................ 4-8
4.3.1 Annunciations ...................................................................................................................... 4-
9
4.3.2 Measurements ................................................................................................................... 4-
11
4.3.3 Waveform Capture............................................................................................................. 4-
13
4.4 Control ............................................................................................................................... 4-14
4.5 Manual Overwrite / Tagging............................................................................................... 4-16
4.6 General Setting Procedure ................................................................................................ 4-17
4.7 Device Configuration ......................................................................................................... 4-20
4.8 Configuration of Inputs and Outputs (Configuration Matrix) .............................................. 4-21
4.9 Programmable Logic CFC ................................................................................................. 4-24
4.10 Power System Data........................................................................................................... 4-26
4.11 Setting Groups................................................................................................................... 4-27
4.12 General Device Settings.................................................................................................... 4-29
4.13 Time Synchronization ........................................................................................................ 4-
30
4.14 Serial Interfaces................................................................................................................. 4-31
4.15 Passwords ......................................................................................................................... 4-
33
5
Configuration ...................................................................................................................................
5-1
5.1 Configuration of Functions................................................................................................... 5-2
5.2 Configuration of Information, Meaured Values, and Commands......................................... 5-6
5.2.1 Preparation .......................................................................................................................... 5-
6
5.2.2 Structure and Operation of the Configuration Matrix ......................................................... 5-
10
5.2.3 Establishing Information Properties................................................................................... 5-
14
5.2.4 Performing Configuration................................................................................................... 5-
20
5.2.5 Transferring Metering Values ............................................................................................ 5-
27
5.2.6 Setting of Contact Chatter Blocking................................................................................... 5-
28
5.3 Creating User Defined Functions with CFC....................................................................... 5-30
5.4 Establishing a Default Display ........................................................................................... 5-38
5.5 Serial Interfaces................................................................................................................. 5-39
5.5.1 Settings in the property dialog ........................................................................................... 5-
39
5.5.1.1 Setting of IEC- and Profibus-FMS protocol........................................................................ 5-
39
5.5.1.2 Selecting additional protocols ............................................................................................
5-40
7UM61 Manual vii
C53000-G1176-C127-1
5.5.2 Setting the ports ................................................................................................................ 5-
42
5.5.2.1 Serial port on PC............................................................................................................... 5-
42
5.5.2.2 PC and Service Port ..........................................................................................................
5-43
5.5.2.3 Profibus FMS connection .................................................................................................. 5-
44
5.5.2.4 Setting VD addresses........................................................................................................ 5-
44
5.5.2.5 Device IEC ........................................................................................................................ 5-
45
5.6 Date and Time Stamping................................................................................................... 5-47
6
Functions..........................................................................................................................................
6-1
6.1 General............................................................................................................................... 6-3
6.1.1 Introduction, reference power system ................................................................................. 6-
3
6.1.2 Brief overview of the device operation................................................................................. 6-
4
6.1.3 Power System Data 1........................................................................................................ 6-
10
6.1.4 Settings ............................................................................................................................. 6-
13
6.1.4.1 Information ........................................................................................................................ 6-
14
6.1.5 Setting groups ................................................................................................................... 6-
14
6.1.5.1 Information ........................................................................................................................ 6-
16
6.1.6 Power System Data 2........................................................................................................ 6-
16
6.1.6.1 Settings ............................................................................................................................. 6-
17
6.1.6.2 Information ........................................................................................................................ 6-
17
6.2 Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 50, 51, 67).......................................................................... 6-18
6.2.1 Overcurrent Protection (Stage I>) with undervoltage seal–in............................................ 6-
18
6.2.1.1 Functional description........................................................................................................ 6-
18
6.2.1.2 Programming settings for ttime-overcurrent protection ..................................................... 6-
19
6.2.1.3 Settings for phase overcurrent protection.......................................................................... 6-
20
6.2.1.4 Information list for phase overcurrent protection ...............................................................
6-21
6.2.2 Overcurrent protection (stage I>>) with direction .............................................................. 6-
21
6.2.2.1 Functional description........................................................................................................ 6-
21
6.2.2.2 Programming settings........................................................................................................ 6-
24
6.2.2.3 Settings for I>> time-overcurrent stage of the definite time-overcurrent protection........... 6-
25
6.2.2.4 Information List ................................................................................................................. 6-
26
6.3 Inverse O/C time protection (ANSI 51) .............................................................................. 6-27
6.3.1 Functional description........................................................................................................ 6-
27
6.3.2 Functional settings ............................................................................................................ 6-
31
6.3.2.1 Parameter list of the inverse O/C time protection.............................................................. 6-
32
6.3.2.2 Information List ..................................................................................................................
6-33
6.4 Thermal overload protection (ANSI 49) ............................................................................. 6-34
6.4.1 Description of thermal overload protection........................................................................ 6-
34
6.4.2 Programming settings........................................................................................................ 6-
37
6.4.2.1 Settings for thermal overload protection............................................................................ 6-
41
6.4.2.2 Information list for thermal overload protection ................................................................. 6-
42
6.5 Unbalanced load protection (ANSI 46) .............................................................................. 6-43
6.5.1 Description of unbalanced load protection ........................................................................ 6-
43
45
6.5.2.1 Settings for unbalanced load protection ............................................................................
6-48
6.5.2.2 Information list for unbalanced load protection.................................................................. 6-
49
viii 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6.6 Underexcitation protection (ANSI 40) ................................................................................ 6-50
50
6.6.2 Functional settings............................................................................................................. 6-
52
6.6.2.1 Parameter lists of the underexcitation protection............................................................... 6-
56
6.6.2.2 Information list of the underexcitation protection ...............................................................
6-56
6.7 Reverse power protection (ANSI 32R) .............................................................................. 6-58
58
59
6.7.2.1 Parameter list of the reverse power protection.................................................................. 6-
60
6.7.2.2 Information list of the reverse power protection................................................................. 6-
61
6.8 Forward power supervision (ANSI 32F)............................................................................. 6-62
62
63
6.8.2.1 Parameter list of the forward power monitoring .................................................................
6-64
6.8.2.2 Information list of the forward power monitoring................................................................ 6-
64
6.9 Impedance protection (ANSI 21) ....................................................................................... 6-65
65
6.9.1.1 Fault detection ...................................................................................................................
6-65
6.9.1.2 Determination of the short–circuit impedance ...................................................................
6-65
6.9.1.3 Tripping characteristic........................................................................................................ 6-
67
6.9.1.4 Tripping logic ..................................................................................................................... 6-
68
70
6.9.2.1 Parameter list of the impedance protection .......................................................................
6-73
6.9.2.2 Information list of the impedance protection...................................................................... 6-
74
6.10 Undervoltage protection (ANSI 27).................................................................................... 6-75
6.10.1 Function............................................................................................................................ 6-
75
76
6.10.2.1 Parameter list of the undervoltage protection....................................................................
6-77
6.10.2.2 Information list of the undervoltage protection...................................................................
6-77
6.11 Overvoltage protection (ANSI 59)...................................................................................... 6-78
6.11.1 Description........................................................................................................................ 6-
78
78
6.11.2.1 Parameter list of the overvoltage protection ......................................................................
6-79
6.11.2.2 Information list of the overvoltage protection.....................................................................
6-80
6.12 Frequency protection (ANSI 81) ........................................................................................ 6-
81
6.12.1 Description of frequency protection ................................................................................... 6-
81
82
6.12.2.1 Settings for frequency protection.......................................................................................
6-83
6.12.2.2 Information list for frequency protectiion............................................................................
6-85
6.13 Overexcitation (Overflux) protection U/f (ANSI 24)............................................................ 6-86
86
88
6.13.2.1 Parameter list of the overexcitation protection...................................................................
6-90
6.13.2.2 Information list of the overexcitation protection ................................................................
6-90
7UM61 Manual ix
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6.14 90–%–stator earth fault protection (ANSI 59N, 64G, 67G)................................................ 6-91
91
6.14.2 Functional settings ............................................................................................................ 6-
95
6.14.2.1 Parameter list of the 90% stator earth fault protection ......................................................
6-98
6.14.2.2 Information list of the 90% stator earth fault protection .....................................................
6-98
6.15 Sensitive earth current protection (ANSI 50/51GN, 64R).................................................. 6-99
99
6.15.2 Functional settings .......................................................................................................... 6-
101
6.15.2.1 Parameter list of the sensitive earth current detection ................................................... 6-
102
6.15.2.2 Information list of the sensitive earth current detection ...................................................
6-102
6.16 100–%–stator earth fault protection with 3rd harm. (ANSI 59TN/ 27TN (3.H.)) .............. 6-103
6.16.1 Functional description...................................................................................................... 6-
103
105
6.16.2.1 Parameter list of the 100–%–stator earth fault protection with 3rd harmonic ..................
6-106
6.16.2.2 Information list of the 100–%–stator earth fault protection with 3rd harmonic................. 6-
106
6.17 Breaker failure protection (ANSI 50BF)........................................................................... 6-107
6.17.1 Description of breaker failure protection.......................................................................... 6-
107
6.17.2 Programming settings...................................................................................................... 6-
109
6.17.2.1 Settings for breaker failure protection.............................................................................. 6-
110
6.17.2.2 Information list for breaker failure protection .................................................................. 6-
111
6.18 Inadvertent energization (ANSI 50, 27) ........................................................................... 6-
112
6.18.1 Functional description...................................................................................................... 6-
112
113
6.18.2.1 Parameter list of the inadvertent energizing protection ...................................................
6-114
6.18.2.2 Information list of the inadvertent energizing function .....................................................
6-115
6.19 Monitoring functions ........................................................................................................ 6-116
6.19.1 Description of Fuse-Failure-Monitor ................................................................................ 6-
116
6.19.2 Programming settings for Fuse-Failure-Monitor .............................................................. 6-
118
6.19.2.1 Settings for Fuse-Failure-Monitor ....................................................................................
6-118
6.19.2.2 Information ...................................................................................................................... 6-
118
6.19.3 Description of measured-value monitoring...................................................................... 6-
118
6.19.3.1 Hardware monitoring ....................................................................................................... 6-
118
6.19.3.2 Software monitoring......................................................................................................... 6-
120
6.19.3.3 Monitoring of external current transformer circuits ..........................................................
6-121
6.19.4 Programming settings for measured-value monitoring.................................................... 6-
122
6.19.4.1 Settings for measured-value monitoring.......................................................................... 6-
123
6.19.4.2 Information lists of the monitoring functions ....................................................................
6-124
6.19.5 Description of Trip Circuit Monitor (ANSI 74TC).............................................................. 6-
125
6.19.6 Programming settings for Trip Circuit Monitor ................................................................. 6-
129
6.19.6.1 Setting for Trip Circuit Monitor......................................................................................... 6-
131
6.19.6.2 Information ...................................................................................................................... 6-
131
6.19.7 Malfunction responses of the monitoring functions ......................................................... 6-
131
6.20 External trip commands via binary inputs........................................................................ 6-133
6.20.1 Description ...................................................................................................................... 6-
133
x 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
133
6.20.2.1 Parameter list................................................................................................................... 6-
134
6.20.2.2 Information list ................................................................................................................. 6-
134
6.21 Phase rotation reversal.................................................................................................... 6-136
6.21.1 Description of phase rotation reversal ............................................................................. 6-
136
137
6.22 Protection function logic................................................................................................... 6-138
6.22.1 Description...................................................................................................................... 6-
138
6.22.1.1 Pickup logic for the device............................................................................................... 6-
138
6.22.2 Tripping logic of the device.............................................................................................. 6-
139
6.22.2.1 Description...................................................................................................................... 6-
139
6.22.2.2 Programming settings for tripping logic ...........................................................................
6-140
6.22.3 Fault display on the LEDs/LCD........................................................................................ 6-
140
6.22.3.1 Description of “No Trip – No Flag” Option .......................................................................
6-140
6.22.3.2 Programming Settings .....................................................................................................
6-140
6.22.4 Statistical counters........................................................................................................... 6-
141
6.22.4.1 Description...................................................................................................................... 6-
141
6.22.4.2 Setting/Resetting ............................................................................................................. 6-
141
6.22.4.3 Information list for the device........................................................................................... 6-
142
6.23 Auxiliary functions............................................................................................................ 6-143
6.23.1 Message processing........................................................................................................ 6-
143
6.23.2 Measurements ................................................................................................................. 6-
144
6.23.3 Waveform Capture........................................................................................................... 6-
147
6.23.4 Programming Settings ..................................................................................................... 6-
147
6.23.4.1 Settings for oscillographic fault recording........................................................................ 6-
149
6.23.4.2 Fault recording information list......................................................................................... 6-
149
6.24 Breaker control ................................................................................................................ 6-150
6.24.1 Types of commands ........................................................................................................ 6-
150
6.24.2 Steps in the command sequence .................................................................................... 6-
151
6.24.3 Interlocking ...................................................................................................................... 6-
152
6.24.3.1 Interlocked/non-interlocked switching.............................................................................. 6-
153
7 Control During
Operation................................................................................................................. 7-1
7.1 Read-out of Information ....................................................................................................... 7-2
7.1.1 Messages ............................................................................................................................ 7-
2
7.1.1.1 Output of Messages.............................................................................................................
7-2
7.1.1.2 Operating Messages (Event Log) ........................................................................................
7-5
7.1.1.3 Fault Messages (Trip Log)...................................................................................................
7-6
7.1.1.4 Saving and Erasing the Messages ......................................................................................
7-8
7.1.1.5 General Interrogation......................................................................................................... 7-
10
7.1.1.6 Spontaneous Messages ....................................................................................................
7-10
7.1.2 Switching Statistics............................................................................................................ 7-
10
7.1.2.1 Viewing the Switching Statistics ........................................................................................
7-11
7.1.2.2 Resetting and Setting the Switching Statistics................................................................... 7-
12
7.1.2.3 Setting Limit Values for the Statistics Counters................................................................. 7-
12
7UM61 Manual xi
C53000-G1176-C127-1
7.1.3 Measured and Metered Values ......................................................................................... 7-
13
7.1.3.1 Measured Values .............................................................................................................. 7-
14
7.1.3.2 Energy, Metered Values.................................................................................................... 7-
17
7.1.3.3 Setting and Retrieval of User Defined Set-points ..............................................................
7-18
7.1.3.4 Resetting Metered Values and Min/Max Values................................................................ 7-
20
7.1.4 Fault Records .................................................................................................................... 7-
21
7.1.4.1 Viewing Fault Records....................................................................................................... 7-
21
7.1.4.2 Saving the Fault Records .................................................................................................. 7-
23
7.2 Control of Device Functions .............................................................................................. 7-24
7.2.1 Read and Set Date and Time............................................................................................ 7-
24
7.2.2 Switching Setting Groups .................................................................................................. 7-
29
7.2.3 Controlling Information to the System Interface during Test Operation............................. 7-
31
7.3 Control of Switchgear ........................................................................................................ 7-34
7.3.1 Display Equipment Position and Control ........................................................................... 7-
35
7.3.2 Manual Overwriting............................................................................................................ 7-
38
7.3.3 Set Status......................................................................................................................... 7-39
7.3.4 Interlocking ........................................................................................................................ 7-
41
7.3.5 Tagging ............................................................................................................................. 7-
42
7.3.6 Switching Authority ............................................................................................................ 7-
43
7.3.7 Switching Mode ................................................................................................................. 7-
43
7.3.8 Control Messages.............................................................................................................. 7-
45
7.3.9 Other Commands ............................................................................................................. 7-46
8 Installation and
Commissioning ..................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1 Installation and Connections ............................................................................................... 8-2
8.1.1 Installation ........................................................................................................................... 8-
2
8.1.2 Connections ........................................................................................................................ 8-
5
8.1.3 Hardware Modifications....................................................................................................... 8-
7
8.2 Checking Connections....................................................................................................... 8-19
8.2.1 Data Connections.............................................................................................................. 8-
19
8.2.1.1 Serial Interfaces ................................................................................................................ 8-
19
8.2.1.2 Test Mode and Blocking Data Transmission..................................................................... 8-
20
8.2.1.3 Generate indications ......................................................................................................... 8-
21
8.2.2 Checking the Device Connections..................................................................................... 8-
23
8.2.3 Checking the Integration in the Plant................................................................................. 8-
24
8.2.3.1 General Hints .................................................................................................................... 8-
24
8.2.3.2 Checking the Binary Inputs and Outputs........................................................................... 8-
26
8.2.3.3 Testing the Breaker Failure Scheme................................................................................. 8-
29
8.2.3.4 Testing User-Defined Functions (CFC) .............................................................................
8-29
8.2.3.5 Trip/Close Tests for Primary Equipment............................................................................ 8-
29
8.3 Commissioning Tests Performed with the Machine .......................................................... 8-31
8.3.1 General advices ................................................................................................................ 8-
31
8.3.2 Triggering Oscillographic Recordings................................................................................ 8-
33
8.3.3 Checking the current circuits ............................................................................................. 8-
34
8.3.4 Checking the voltage circuits............................................................................................. 8-
36
xii 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
8.3.5 Checking the earth fault protection.................................................................................... 8-
38
8.3.5.1 Block connection................................................................................................................ 8-
38
8.3.5.2 Bus–bar connection ...........................................................................................................
8-41
8.3.6 Checking the Sensitive Earth Fault Detection when Used for
Rotor Earth Fault Protection .............................................................................................. 8-45
8.3.7 Tests with the machine connected to the network............................................................. 8-
46
8.3.7.1 Checking the correct connection polarity........................................................................... 8-
46
8.3.7.2 Measurement of motoring power and angle error correction............................................. 8-
46
8.3.7.3 Calibrating the Reverse Power Protection......................................................................... 8-
48
8.3.7.4 Checking the underecxitation protection............................................................................ 8-
48
8.3.7.5 Checking the Directional Function of the Overcurrent Time Protection............................. 8-
49
8.4 Final Preparation of the Device ......................................................................................... 8-50
9 Routine Checks and
Maintenance................................................................................................... 9-1
9.1 General ............................................................................................................................... 9-2
9.2 Routine Checks ................................................................................................................... 9-3
9.3 Maintenance ........................................................................................................................ 9-4
9.3.1 Replacing the Buffer Battery................................................................................................ 9-
4
9.4 Troubleshooting.................................................................................................................. 9-7
9.5 Repairs ............................................................................................................................... 9-9
9.5.1 Software Procedures ........................................................................................................... 9-
9
9.5.2 Hardware Procedures.......................................................................................................... 9-
9
9.6 Return............................................................................................................................... 9-13
10 Technical
Data................................................................................................................................ 10-1
10.1 General Device Data ......................................................................................................... 10-2
10.1.1 Analog Inputs.....................................................................................................................
10-2
10.1.2 Power Supply.....................................................................................................................
10-2
10.1.3 Binary Inputs and Outputs .................................................................................................
10-3
10.1.4 Communications Interfaces ...............................................................................................
10-4
10.1.5 Electrical Tests ..................................................................................................................
10-8
10.1.6 Mechanical Stress Tests....................................................................................................
10-9
10.1.7 Climatic Stress Tests....................................................................................................... 10-
10
10.1.8 Service Conditions........................................................................................................... 10-
11
10.1.9 Construction.................................................................................................................... 10-
11
10.2 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 50, 67) ....................................................... 10-
12
10.3 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51).............................................................. 10-13
10.4 Thermal Overload Protection (ANSI 49) .......................................................................... 10-
18
10.5 Unbalanced load protection (ANSI 46) ............................................................................ 10-
20
10.6 Underexcitation protection (ANSI 40) .............................................................................. 10-
22
7UM61 Manual xiii
C53000-G1176-C127-1
10.7 Reverse power protection (ANSI 32R) ............................................................................ 10-
23
10.8 Forward active power supervision (ANSI 32F) ................................................................ 10-
24
10.9 Impedance protection (ANSI 21) ..................................................................................... 10-
25
10.10 Undervoltage protection (ANSI 27).................................................................................. 10-
26
10.11 Overvoltage protection (ANSI 59).................................................................................... 10-
27
10.12 Frequency Protection (ANSI 81)...................................................................................... 10-
28
10.13 Overexcitation protection U/f> (ANSI 24) ........................................................................ 10-
29
10.14 90–%–Stator earth fault protection (ANSI 59N, 64G, 67G) ............................................. 10-
31
10.15 Sensitive earth current detection (ANSI 51GN, 64F)....................................................... 10-
32
10.16 100–%–Stator earth fault protection with 3rd harm. (ANSI 27/59TN).............................. 10-
33
10.17 Breaker Failure Protection (ANSI 50BF) ......................................................................... 10-
34
10.18 Inadvertent energization (ANSI 50/27) ............................................................................ 10-
35
10.19 Additional Functions ........................................................................................................ 10-
36
10.20 Operating ranges of the protection functions................................................................... 10-
40
10.21 Dimensions..................................................................................................................... 10-
41
A
Appendix ..........................................................................................................................................
A-1
A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories ...............................................................................A-2
A.1.1 Accessories .........................................................................................................................A-
4
A.2 General Diagrams ...............................................................................................................A-6
A.3 Connection Examples........................................................................................................A-10
A.4 Definition of the Active Power Measurement.....................................................................A-17
A.5 Overview of the masking features of the user defined informations..................................A-19
A.6 Default Settings .................................................................................................................A-23
A.6.1 Binary Inputs .....................................................................................................................A-
23
A.6.2 Binary Outputs (output relays)...........................................................................................A-
23
A.6.3 LED Indicators...................................................................................................................A-25
A.6.4 Pre–defined CFC–charts ...................................................................................................A-
26
A.7 Interoperability List ............................................................................................................A-27
A.8 Settings .............................................................................................................................A-29
A.9 List of Information..............................................................................................................A-41
A.10 Protocol-Dependent Functions..........................................................................................A-76
Index
..........................................................................................................................................Index-1
xiv 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
7UM61 Manual 1-1
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Introduction 1
The SIPROTEC® 4 7UM61 devices are introduced in this section. An overview of the
devices is presented in their application, characteristics, and scope of functions.
1.1 Overall Operation 1-2
1.2 Applications 1-5
1.3 Features 1-7
1.4 Scope of Functions 1-8
Introduction
1-2 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
1.1 Overall Operation
The SIPROTEC® 4 7UM61 is a numerical, multi-functional, protective and control device
equipped with a powerful microprocessor. All tasks, such as the acquisition of the
measured quantities, issuing of commands to circuit breakers and other primary power
system equipment, are processed in a completely digital way. Figure 1-1 illustrates
the basic structure of the 7UM61.
Analog Inputs The measuring inputs (MI) section consists of current and voltage transformers.
They
convert the signals from the measuring transducers to levels appropriate for the internal
processing of the 7UM61.
Four current inputs are available in the MI section. Three inputs are used for measuring
of the phase currents. The fourth input can be used for measuring the ground current
from a separate current transformer (INs). The latter is used in a highly sensitive
ground fault protective scheme (INs).
A voltage measuring input is provided for each phase–earth voltage. A further voltage
input (UN) may optionally be used to measure either the displacement voltage (e–n–
μC
A
D
ERROR
RUN
Output
Relays, User-
Programmable
LEDs
on the Front
Panel, User-
Programmable
Display on
the Front Panel
Front
PC Port
To
PC
System
Serial Interface
To
SCADA
IL1
IL2
IL3
INs
UL1
UL2
UL3
789
456
123
(6& (17(5 . 0 +/-
Operator
Control Panel
Uaux.
Binary Inputs,
Power Supply
Rear
Service Port
MI IA AD μC AV
Figure 1-1 Hardware Structure of the Numerical Device 7UM61 (Maximum Configuration)
Status
PC/
Modem
Programmable
UN
Introduction
7UM61 Manual 1-3
C53000-G1176-C127-1
voltage) or any other voltage UX (for overvoltage protection). The analogue signals are
then routed to the input amplifier group IA.
The analog-to-digital (AD) stage consists of memory components, a multiplexer, and
an analog-to-digital (A/D) converter. The A/D converter processes the analog signals
from the IA stage. The digital signals from the converter are input to the microcomputer
system where they are processed as numerical values in the residing algorithms.
Microcomputer
System
The actual protection and control functions of the 7UM61 are processed in the microcomputer
system (μC). In addition, the μC controls the measured quantities. Specifically,
the μC performs:
− Filtering and preparation of the measured quantities
− Continuous monitoring of the measured quantities
− Monitoring of the pickup conditions for the individual elements and functions
− Evaluation of limit values and sequences in time
− Control of signals for the logic functions
− Decision for trip commands
− Recording of messages and data for events, alarms, faults, and control actions, and
provision of their data for analysis
− Management of the operating system and the associated functions such as data recording,
real-time clock, communications, interfaces, etc.
Frequency Follow-
Up Circuit
The frequency of the measured quantities is continuously measured and used in an
integrated follow-up circuit; this ensures that the protection functions are always processed
with algorithms matched to the actual frequency. Thus, a wide frequency range
from 40 Hz to 69 Hz is specified with small frequency influence. In general, processing
is even possible from approx 11 Hz on but with respectively slower speed.
The frequency follow-up circuit can, however, operate only when at least one a.c.
measured quantity is present at one of the the analog inputs, with an amplitude of at
least 10 % of rated value (operational condition 1).
If no suitable a.c. measured values are present, or if the frequency is below 11 Hz or
above 70 Hz, the relay cannot operate (operational condition 0, refer to Section
10.20).
Binary Inputs and
Outputs
The μC obtains external information through the binary inputs such as blocking commands
for protective elements or position indications of circuit breakers. The μC issues
commands to external equipment via the output contacts. These output commands
are generally used to operate circuit breakers or other switching devices. They
can also be connected to other protective devices, annunciators, or external carrier
equipment for use in Pilot-Relaying schemes.
Front Elements Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) and a display screen (LCD) on the front panel
provide
information such as messages related to events and functional status of the 7UM61.
Integrated control and numeric keys in conjunction with the LCD facilitate local interaction
with the 7UM61. All information of the device can be accessed using the integrated
control and numeric keys. The information includes protective and control settings,
operating and fault messages, and metering values (see also Chapter 7). The
settings can be modified; the procedures are discussed in Chapter 6. In addition, control
of circuit breakers and other equipment is possible from the 7UM61 front panel.
Introduction
1-4 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Serial Interfaces A serial operating interface on the front panel is provided for local
communications
with the 7UM61 through a personal computer. Convenient operation of all functions of
the device is possible using the SIPROTEC® 4 operating program DIGSI® 4.
A separate serial service interface is provided for remote communications via a modem,
or local communications via a substation master computer that is permanently
connected to the 7UM61. DIGSI® 4 is required.
All 7UM61 data can be transferred to a central master or main control system through
the serial system interface. Various protocols and physical arrangements are available
for this interface to suit the particular application.
Further communications protocols can be realized via additional interface modules.
Power Supply The 7UM61 can be supplied with any of the common power supply voltages from
24
VDC to 250 VDC. The device can also be supplied with 115 VAC. Momentary dips of
the supply voltage up to 50 ms are bridged by a capacitor (see Technical Data, Subsection
10.1). Voltage dips can occur, for example, if the voltage supply system (substation
battery) becomes short-circuited or experiences a severe variation in load.
Introduction
7UM61 Manual 1-5
C53000-G1176-C127-1
1.2 Applications
SIPROTEC® 7UM61 is a numerical machine protection unit from the “Numerical Protection
series 7UM6” and provides a practical combination of the most important generator
protection functions. It provides the scope of protection functions for the two typical
basic applications:
• Bus-bar connection
• Block connection
Figure 1-2 Typical basic connections
SIPROTEC® 7UM61 provides comprehensive and safe protection for smaller generators
such as emergency diesel generator sets, run of the river hydro plants, or private
power stations.
Additionally, the device forms the basis for the protection of larger generators and can
be used as back–up protection for larger power units. By adding 7UM62 (further device
of protection series 7UM6), all protection requirements encountered for the smallest
to the largest machines can be met.
Further applications are
• Back–up protection for transformer differential protection,
• The scope of functions of the relay allows to use it as network splitting device.
7UM61
G
7UM61
G
Bus–bar connection
Block connection
Introduction
1-6 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Messages and
Measured Values;
Storage of Data for
Fault Recordings
A series of operating messages provides information about conditions in the power
system and the 7UM61 itself. Measurement quantities and values that are calculated
can be displayed locally and communicated via the serial interfaces.
Messages of the 7UM61 can be indicated by a number of programmable LEDs on the
front panel, externally processed through programmable output contacts, and communicated
via the serial interfaces (see “Communication” below).
During a network fault (fault in the power system), important events and state changes
are stored in a fault annunciation buffer. The instantaneous measured values during
the fault are also stored in the device and are subsequently available for fault analysis.
Communication Serial interfaces are available for communications with external operating,
control,
and storage systems.
A 9-pin D-subminiature female connector on the front panel is used for local communications
with a personal computer. All of the operating and evaluation processes can
be done via this operating interface using the DIGSI® 4 software. These processes
include selecting and modifying the settings, allocation of the binary inputs and outputs,
configuration of the user-definable logic functions, reading the event and fault
data, retrieving the measured values, obtaining the oscillographic fault records, reading
the states of the 7UM61 and the measurement quantities, and issuing control commands.
Further interfaces are located on the back of the 7UM61 — dependent on the version
of the device. Comprehensive communications are possible between these interfaces
and other digital equipment used for operating, control, and data storage.
The service interface can be operated through data lines or optical fibres. Also, a modem
can be connected to this port. Servicing of the substation or plant is possible from
a remote computer with DIGSI® 4.
The system interface is for central communications between the 7UM61 and a main
or master computer station. The interface can be operated through data lines or optical
fibres. Several standard protocols are available:
− IEC 60870–5–103
Integration of the devices into the automation systems SINAUT® LSA and SICAM®
also take place with this profile.
− Profibus FMS
The PROFIBUS FMS is performed in accordance with IEC 61850, is an open communications
standard that particularly has wide acceptance in process control and
automation engineering, with especially high performance. A profile has been defined
for the PROFIBUS communication that covers all of the information types required
for protective and process control engineering. The integration of the devices
into the energy automation system SICAM® can also take place with this profile.
− Profibus DP
This protocol of automation technology allows to transmit annunciations and measured
values.This protocol do not support all possibilities which are offered by
PROFIBUS FMS.
− Modbus ASCII/RTU
This protocol of automation technology allows to transmit annunciations and measured
values. This protocol do not support all possibilities which are offered by
PROFIBUS FMS.
Introduction
7UM61 Manual 1-7
C53000-G1176-C127-1
1.3 Features
• Powerful 32-bit microprocessor system.
• Complete digital processing of measured values and control, from the sampling of
the analog input quantities to the initiation of outputs for, as an example, tripping
circuit breakers or other switch-gear devices.
• Complete galvanic and reliable separation between the internal processing circuits
of the 7UM61 and the external measurement, control, and DC supply circuits because
of the design of the analog input transducers, binary inputs and outputs, and
the DC converters.
• Complete scope of functions which are normally required for the protection of smaller
and medium-sized high-voltage machines.
• Abundance of additional protective functions available, some as options.
• Continuous calculation and display of measured quantities on the front of the device.
• Simple device operation using the integrated operator panel or by means of a connected
personal computer running DIGSI® 4.
• Storage of operational data, fault data, and oscillographic fault records with SER information
to be used for analysis and troubleshooting.
• Communication with central control and data storage equipment via serial interfaces
through the choice of data cable, modem, or optical fibers, as an option.
• Constant monitoring of the measurement quantities, as well as continuous self-diagnostics
covering the hardware and software.
Introduction
1-8 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
1.4 Scope of Functions
The protection features of a SIPROTEC® 7UM61 equipped with all options are listed
below pointing out highlights of each feature. The actual features of a 7UM61 depend
on the order number.
Definite-Time-Overcurrent
Protection
• Two instantaneous (Definite-Time) overcurrent elements for phase protection;
• undervoltage seal-in for synchronous machines, the excitation voltage of which is
derived from the machine terminals;
• Optionally additional directional determination with the I>>–stage;
• Blocking capability for reverse-interlocking busbar protection.
Inverse-Time-Overcurrent
Protection
• Common ANSI and IEC time overcurrent curves are available;
• Optionally voltage controlled or voltage restraint alteration of pick–up value during
undervoltage;
• Undervoltage influence can be blocked by fuse failure monitor or via binary input,
e.g. by a voltage transformer m.c.b..
Thermal Overload
Protection
• Temperature rise of the protected equipment is calculated using a thermal homogeneous-
body model that takes into account energy entering the equipment and
energy losses. Thermal overload protection has full memory capability;
• Adjustable warning levels based on temperature rise and current magnitude;
• input of cooling medium or ambient temperature possible (with Profibus DP–interface).
Unbalanced Load
Protection
• Evalution of negative sequence component of the three phase currents;
• Alarm stage when a set unbalanced load is exceeded;
• Thermal replica for rotor temperature rise with adjustable negative sequence factor
K and adjustable time for cool down;
• high-speed trip stage for large unbalanced loads (als Kurzschlussschutz nutzbar).
Underexcitation
Protection
• Conductance measurement from positive sequence components;
• Multi-step characteristic for steady-state and dynamic stability limits;
• Detection of the excitation voltage by input of the undervoltage criterion via BI.
Reverse Power Protection
• Calculation of power from positive sequence components;
• highly sensitive active power measurement (detection of small motoring powers
even with small power factor cos ϕ , angle error correction);
• insensitive to power swings;
• Independent long–time stage and short–time stage with stop valve tripped.
Forward active
power supervision
• Calculation of forward power from positive sequence components;
Introduction
7UM61 Manual 1-9
C53000-G1176-C127-1
• Supervision of over–power (P>) and/or under–power (P<) with individually adjustable
power limits;
• Optionally high–speed or high–accuracy power measurement.
Impedance Protection
• phase selective overcurrent fault detection with undervoltage seal-in (for synchronous
machines which take their excitation voltage from the terminal voltage);
• 2 impedance zones, 1 overreach zone for zone extension (controlled via binary input),
4 time stages;
• polygonal tripping characteristics.
Undervoltage Protection
• Two undervoltage elements, measuring positive sequence voltage.
Overvoltage Protection
• Two–stage overvoltage measurement, evaluation of the highest of the three voltages;
• Optionally with phase-to-phase voltages or with phase-to-earth voltages.
Frequency
Protection
• Four elements that are independently adjustable for function - underfrequency or
overfrequency, pickup, and time delay;
• Insensitive to harmonics and abrupt phase angle changes;
• Adjustable undervoltage blocking.
Overexcitation Protection
• Calculation of the ratio U/f;
• Adjustable warning and tripping stage;
• Standard characteristic or either optional characteristic selectable for calculation of
the thermal stress.
90–%–StatorEarth
Fault Protection
• For machines in block conection and for machines directly connected to bus-bars;
• Measurement of displacement voltage at the machine neutral earthing transformers
or the measurement winding of a line connected earthing transformer or by calculation
from phase–to–earth voltages;
• Highly sensitive earth current detection, optional with or without directional determination
with zero components (I0, U0);
• With adjustable slope of directional characteristic;
• Discrimination of the earth–faulted phase.
Sensitive earth current
protection
• Two sensitive ground fault instantaneous overcurrent elements: IEE>> and IEE>;
• Pickup currents are adjustable and can be set very sensitive (as low as 1.5 mA);
• Can be used for stator earth fault or rotor earth fault detection;
• Measured circuit monitoring when used for rotor earth fault protection.
100–%–Stator Earth
Fault Protection
• Detection of the 3rd harmonic of the voltage at the starpoint or open delta winding
of an earthing transformer;
Introduction
1-10 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
• In addition to the 90%–stator earth fault protection there is a protection of the entire
stator winding (protective range 100 %).
Breaker Failure
Protection
• Breaker failure condition determined by current flow after a trip signal has been issued.
As an option, the breaker position indication (binary input) can be evaluated;
• Breaker failure protection initiated by the tripping of any integrated protective element
that trips the circuit breaker (internal start);
• Initiation possible through a binary input from an external protective device (external
start);
Inadvertent energization
• The inadvertent accidental energizing protection serves to limit damages by accidental
connection of the standing generator by a fast actuation of the mains breaker.
• Detection of the instantaneous values of the phase currents;
• Released by operational condition check, undervoltage supervision, and fuse failure
monitor.
Phase Rotation • Selectable L1, L2, L3 or L1, L3, L2 with a setting (static) or binary input
(dynamic).
User-defined
Functions
• Internal and external signals can be logically combined to establish user-defined
logic functions;
• All common logic functions are available for programming (AND, OR,NOT, Exclusive
OR, etc.);
• Time delays and limit value inquiries are available;
• Processing of measured values, including zero suppression, adding a knee characteristic
for a transducer input, and live-zero monitoring.
Monitoring
Functions
• Availability of the 7UM61 is greatly increased because of self-monitoring of the internal
measurement circuits, power supply, hardware, and software;
• Current transformer and voltage transformer secondary circuits are monitored using
summation and symmetry check techniques;
• Trip circuit monitoring;
• Phase rotation.
Further Functions • Battery-buffered real time clock that can be synchronized with an IRIG-B
(or
DCF77) signal, binary input signal, or system interface command;
• Recording and saving of fault data in chronological order for the last eight faults;
• Recording, saving and transfer of waveform capture;
• Recording of circuit breaker statistics including the number of trip signals sent and
the accumulated, interrupted currents of each pole of the circuit breaker;
• Tracking of operating hours (time when load is supplied) of the equipment being
protected;
• Commissioning aids such as connection check, direction determination, and the
display of test recordings.
n
7UM61 Manual 2-1
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Hardware and Connections 2
An overview of the hardware of the 7UM61 and detailed information regarding connections
to the device are provided in this section.
The options for panel mounting and cubicle mounting are described. Device construction
is presented. The options for terminal connections and communication interfaces
are covered.
Data are given for wire connections and communication connections. Information on
accessories and tools is given.
2.1 Version of 7UM61 for Panel Flush-Mounting / Cubicle Mounting 2-2
2.2 Version of 7UM61 for Panel Surface-Mounting 2-15
Hardware and Connections
2-2 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
2.1 Version of 7UM61 for Panel Flush-Mounting / Cubicle
Mounting
The numerical, multi-functional SIPROTEC® 4 7UM61 for panel flush-mounting or cubicle
mounting is a sealed device in a 7XP20. 2 housing sizes are available, namely
1/3 (7UM611) and 1/2 (7UM612) (of 19 inch). Two different general types of terminals
are available, threaded terminals and plug-in terminals. The terminals provided depend
on the order number of the device.
2.1.1 Construction
The major components of a 7UM61 are the front panel, the case, and the rear panel.
The terminals for connections to external equipment are located on the rear panel,
which is bolted to the case. Inside the device are two printed circuit boards that have
the rear serial interface modules attached. The boards are connected together via a
ribbon-cable that has plug connectors. The boards are connected to the terminals and
supported in guide rails.
The front panel is removable. The screws for removing the component are located behind
the four covers at the corners. The front panel has a covered keypad with operating
and display elements necessary for equipment operation. All connections for
these elements are combined into an adapter module on the front panel that is linked
via a ribbon-cable with plug connectors to the internal processor board (CPU).
The nameplate sticker, showing important information such as power supply rating,
nominal current rating, and ordering number, is located on the top of the case and the
interior of the front panel.
View of Front Panel
(Housing Size 1/3)
Figure 2-1 Front View of a 7UM611, housing size 1/3, for Panel Flush-mounting / Cubicle
Mounting
SIEMENS SIPROTEC
12
6
3
0 +/-
45
789
RUN ERROR 7UM611
MENU
LED ESC ENTER
F4
F1
F2
F3
Event Log
Operation.
MAIN MENU 01 / 04
Annunciation 1
Measurement 2
1)
2)
4)
5)
7) 6)
10)
9)
8)
3)
11) 11)
11) 11)
Trip Log
Min/Max
Device faulty
Pickup GND
Pickup L3
Pickup L2
Pickup L1
Trip
Pri
Pickup
Reset

7UM61 Manual 2-3
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Referring to the operating and display elements in Figure 2-1:
1. Display (LCD)
The LCD shows processing and device information as text in various lists. Commonly
displayed information includes measured values (metering), counter values,
binary information regarding the condition of circuit breakers, status of the device,
protection information, general reports, and alarms.
2. Navigation Keys
These keys serve for navigation through operating menus.
3. MENU Key
This key activates the main menu.
4. ESC and ENTER Keys
These keys serve to escape from specific menues or execute changes (such as
setting changes).
5. Numerical Keys
These keys serve for entry of numerical values, such as protective settings.
6. Function Keys
Four function keys allow the quick and simple execution of frequently used actions.
Typical applications include, for example, jumping to a particular position in the
menu tree such as the fault data in the Trip Log (F1) or the metering values (F2).
The function keys are programmable, and may be used to execute control functions
such as closing or tripping circuit breakers. Next to the keypad, a labeling strip
is provided on which the user-specified key functions may be written.
7. Serial Communication Interface, 9-pin Female D-subminiature connector
This serial interface is for the connection of a local PC running DIGSI® 4.
8. LED Key
This key has the dual purpose of resetting latched LEDs and the latched contacts
of binary outputs, as well as testing all of the LEDs.
9. LEDs
The function of these indicators can be programmed. There is a vast selection of
signals from which to choose. Some examples are protective element status, related
to specific protective elements, processing or control information, and binary input
or output status. Next to the LEDs on the front panel, a labeling strip is provided
on which the user-specified LED functions may be written.
10.Operating Condition Indicators
The two LEDs “RUN” (green) and “ERROR” (red) indicate the operating condition
of the device.
11.Coverings for the screws that secure the front panel.
2-4 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
View of Front Panel
(Housing Size 1/2)
The significance of the operating and display elements is the same as explained after
Figure 2.1.
Figure 2-2 Front view of a 7UM61, housing size 1/2, for panel flush mounting or cubicle
mounting
SIEMENS SIPROTEC
12
6
3
0 +/-
45
789
RUN ERROR 7UM612
MENU
LED ESC ENTER
F4
F1
F2
F3
Event Log
Operation.
0$,1_0(18_________________
$QQXQFLDWLRQ_____________
0HDVXUHPHQW______________
Trip
Pickup
Pickup L1
Pickup L2
Pickup L3
Pickup GND
Device faulty
1)
3)
4)
5)
8)
9)
10)
2)
11)
11)
11)
11)
7)
6)
Pri

7UM61 Manual 2-5
C53000-G1176-C127-1
View of Rear Panel
(Housing Size 1/3)
Figure 2-3 is a simplified view of the rear panel of the version of the device with threaded
(screw-type) terminals and optical fiber ports for the service interface at location B.
Figure 2-3 Rear View of a 7UM611 with Screw-type Terminals (example only)
View of Rear Panel
(Housing Size 1/2)
Figure 2-3 is a simplified view of the rear panel of the version of the device with threaded
(screw-type) terminals (example only).
Figure 2-4 Rear view of a 7UM612, housing size 1/2 (terminal arrangement example
only)
1
2
43
5
6
87
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Ch1 Ch2
BA
C
RF
Q
UHUH+
P-Slave
P-Master
RS232
RS485
1
2
43
5
6
87
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Ch1 Ch2
BA
C
KF
J
UHUH+
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
R
Q
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
P-Slave
P-Master
RS232
RS485

2-6 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
2.1.2 Connections to Threaded Terminals
Terminal blocks for the threaded connections are designated as:
Terminal blocks for voltage connections, and
Terminal blocks for current connections.
A simple flat-blade 6x1-mm screwdriver can be used to turn the slotted screws in either
terminal block type.
Terminal Blocks for
Voltage
Connections
The two available versions of terminal blocks for voltage connections are shown in the
following figure:
Figure 2-5 Terminal Blocks of Threaded Terminals for Voltage Connections — Rear View
The numbering system for the threaded terminals is illustrated in Figure 2-6.
Figure 2-6 Correlation between Threaded Terminals and Connection Numbers (example)
18 Terminal 12 Terminal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
2 Connection Terminal 1
Connection Terminal 2
7UM61 Manual 2-7
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Terminal Block for
Current
Connections
There is one version of a terminal block for current connections to a 7UM61. The terminal
block is illustrated in Figure 2-7.
Figure 2-7 Terminal Block of Threaded Terminals for Current Connections - Rear View
The correlation between threaded terminals and connection numbers is the same for
both the current connections and the voltage connections. Compare Figures 2-6 and
2-7.
In the terminal block for current connections, the terminals are grouped in pairs. Two
neighboring terminals such as terminals 5 and 6 form one pair. The terminal block contains
four pairs, one for each of the input currents.
The current transformers present low burden to the main current transformers.
When the I/O board is extracted, the current circuits are automatically short-circuited
prior to the separation of the current transformers from the current circuits. This prevents
hazards to service personnel due to the high voltages that can occur if the secondary
circuits of the current transformers are open.
When the I/O board is properly inserted into the case of the 7UM61, the short-circuits
of the current paths are removed after the transformers of the device are connected
to the terminal-pairs.
The short-circuit feature of the 7UM61 is an important and reliable safety feature; however,
the feature does not relieve the user from exercising proper care when working
with current transformer secondary circuits.
Connections to
Voltage Terminals
Ring or spade lugs may be used. To maintain proper isolation of the circuits, the lugs
must be insulated or insulating sleeves must be fitted to cover the exposed crimp
zones.
The following must be observed:
Connections with Cable lugs: inner diameter of lugs, 4 mm;
maximum outer width of lugs, 10 mm;
conductor with cross-section of 1.0 mm2 to 2.6 mm2 or AWG 16 to 14.
Use 60/75 °C copper conductors only!
Cable lugs of series PIDG from Tyco Electronics AMP Co. are recommended, e.g.
Ring cable lug: PIDG PN 320565–0
Spade lug: PIDG PN 321233–0.
8 Terminal
21
43
65
87
2-8 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Direct Cable Connections: solid or stranded conductor with connector sleeve;
When using one single conductor, the conductor end must be inserted such that it will
be drawn into the contact cavity while tightening the screw.
Wire Strip Length solid conductor 0.354 in to 0.394 in.
Maximum Tightening Torque: 1.3 ft-lb or 16 in-lb (1.8 Nm).
Connections to
Current Terminals
Ring or spade lugs may be used. To maintain proper isolation of the circuits, the lugs
must be insulated or insulating sleeves must be fitted to cover the exposed crimp
zones.
The following must be observed:
Connections with Cable lugs: inner diameter of lugs, 5 mm;
maximum outer width of lugs, 12 mm;
Cable lugs of series PIDG from Tyco Electronics AMP Co. are recommended, e.g.,
Ring cable lug: PIDG PN 130171–0
Spade lug: PIDG PN 326865–0
Direct Cable Connections: solid or stranded conductor with connector sleeve;
copper conductor with cross-section of 2.6 mm2 to 3.3 mm2 or AWG 14 to 12.
When using one single conductor, the conductor end must be inserted such that it will
be drawn into the contact cavity while tightening the screw.
Wire Strip Length solid conductor 0.394 in to 0.433 in.
Maximum Tightening Torque: 2.0 ft-lb or 24 in-lb (2.7 Nm).
Short-Circuit Links Short-circuit links are available for convenience in making terminal
connections.
The links can be used to connect two terminals located on the same side of the terminal
block. Thus, if the 7UM61 is the last device in the current transformer circuits, the
links provide a convenient way to terminate the circuits. The links are useful in connecting
the neutral point of wye-connected VTs at the 7UM61. The links can be useful
for other connections as well.
Each terminal can receive two links, one link and one cable lug, or one single wire.
The links meet the safety requirements for protection against electric shock.
There are two types of links, one for voltage connections and one for current connections.
The links are illustrated in Figure 2-8.
Ordering information for the links is provided in Section A.1 in the Appendix.
7UM61 Manual 2-9
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 2-8 Short-circuit Links for Voltage Connections and Current Connections
Covering Caps Covering caps are available for terminal blocks with threaded terminals. The
caps enhance
the safety of personnel by covering the terminal screws; thereby, decreasing
the likelihood of inadvertent contact with the live terminals.
The caps snap on to the terminal blocks, and can easily be removed with a 6x1-mm
screwdriver. All of the terminal block screws must be tightened to apply a cap.
There are two types of covering caps, as shown in Figure 2-9. Ordering information is
provided in Section A.1 in the Appendix.
Figure 2-9 Covering Caps for Terminal Blocks with Threaded Terminals
Short-Circuit Links for
Voltage Connections
Short-Circuit Links for
Current Connections
Covering Cap for
18 Terminal Voltage
Covering Cap for
12 Terminal Voltage
Connection Terminal Block or 8 Terminal Current
Connection Terminal Block
SIEMENS
C73334-A1-C31-1
:AMP >PCGF<
SIEMENS
C73334-A1-C32-1
:AMP >PCGF<

2-10 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
2.1.3 Connections to Plug-In Terminals
Plug-in terminals are only available for voltage connections. Current connections are
made with threaded terminals on all 7UM61.
Terminal Blocks for
Voltage
Connections
There are two versions of plug-in terminal blocks.
Figure 2-10 Terminal Blocks of Plug-in Terminals for Voltage Connections — Rear View
The system of numbers and letters used to designate the plug-in terminals is illustrated
in Figure 2-11.
Figure 2-11 Correlation between Plug-in Terminals and Connection Numbers / Letters
Each plug-in terminal forms a complete set of connections that consists of three pins
arranged as follows:
Pin a: Signal Connection
Pin b: Common Connection
Pin c: Shielding Connection
The signal pins are the only terminal pins that are directly connected to the internal
printed circuit boards of the 7UM61. Depending on the version of the terminal block,
18 or 12 signal connections are provided. Refer to Figure 2-12.
There are two isolated groups of common pins. Within a group the pins are inter-connected
as shown in Figure 2-12. The common pins “b” are not connected to the boards
9
7
5
3
1
cba
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
abc
13
11
15
17
9
7
5
3
1
cba
2
4
6
8
10
12
abc
11
1
cba
2
12
abc
Plug-in Terminal 2
Plug-in Terminal 1
7UM61 Manual 2-11
C53000-G1176-C127-1
inside the 7UM61. Each common group can, for example, be used for signal replication
or as a common point for a signal (independent of the signals on the pin “a” terminals).
Depending on the version of the terminal block, 18 or 12 common connections
are available.
Grouping of common connections within a terminal block is as follows:
12 Terminal Block: Group 1 Terminals 1 through 6
Group 2 Terminals 7 through 12
18 Terminal Block: Group 1 Terminals 1 through 9
Group 2 Terminals 10 through 18
All shielding pins are connected together as shown in Figure 2-12. The shielding pins
are also connected to the rear panel of the 7UM61. Depending on the version of the
terminal block, 18 or 12 shielding connections are provided.
Figure 2-12 Schematic Diagram of the Plug-in Terminal Blocks
Connections to
Plug-In Terminals
Connections to plug-in terminals are made with pin connectors.
There are two versions of pin connectors:
Version 1: 2-pin connector
Version 2: 3-pin connector
Signal Connection
Common Connection
Shielding Connection
Common Connections, Group 1
Looped Together
Common Connections, Group 2
Looped Together
Shielding Connections
Looped Together
abc
cba
cba
cba
cba
cba
cba
abc
abc
abc
abc
abc
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
abc
cba
cba
cba
cba
cba
cba
abc
abc
abc
abc
abc
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
cba
cba
cba
abc
abc
abc
13
14
15
16
17
18
2-12 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 2-13 2-Pin Connector and 3-Pin Connector
Ordering information for the pin connectors is provided in Section A.1 of the Appendix.
The design of the pin connectors is such that only correct connections can be made.
For example, the design of the 2-pin connector allows connection only to pins “a” and
“b”. An erroneous connection to pins “b” and “c” is not possible.
The pin connectors snap-in to the plug-in terminals. The connectors can be removed
without tools.
Control wires are connected to contacts of the pin connectors. AWG 20 to 14 wire
(0.5 mm2 to 2.5 mm2 diameter) can be accommodated.
Use only flexible copper control wire!
The following crimp connectors can be used:
Tin-plated version:
Section 0.5 mm2 to 1.0 mm2:
e.g. Bandware 4000 Pieces Type: 0–827039–1 from Tyco Electronics AMP Corp.
Individual Piece Type: 0–827396–1 from Tyco Electronics AMP Corp.
Connection of a conductor to a contact is performed using the following tools:
e.g. Hand crimping tool Type: 0–734372–1 from Tyco Electronics AMP Corp.
Stencil Type: 1–734387–1 from Tyco Electronics AMP Corp.
The use of individual pieces is recommended.
Gold-plated version (recommended):
Connection of a conductor to a contact is performed using the following tools:
e.g. Hand crimping tool Type: 0–539635–1 from Tyco Electronics AMP Corp.
Stencil Type: 1–539668–2 from Tyco Electronics AMP Corp.
The use of individual pieces is recommended.
ba
cba
7UM61 Manual 2-13
C53000-G1176-C127-1
After the wires are crimped, the contacts are pressed into the terminals of the connector
until they snap into place.
The following separation tool must be used to remove the contacts from the pin connectors:
Type: 725840–1 from Tyco Electronics AMP Co.
The separation tool contains a small tube that is subject to wear. The tube can be ordered
separately:
Type: 725841–1 from Tyco Electronics AMP Co.
2.1.4 Connections to Optical Communication Interfaces
Optical
Communication
Interfaces
(ST–Connector)
The 3 available versions of optical communication interfaces are shown in Figure 2-
14. The ports are supplied with caps to protect the optical components against dust or
other contaminants. The caps can be removed by turning them 90° to the left.
Figure 2-14 Optical Communication Interfaces with Protective Caps
Connections to
Optical
Communication
Interfaces
(ST–Connector)
Optical Connector Type: ST–Connector
Fiber Type: Multimode graded-index (“G”) optical fiber
G50/125 μm,
G62.5/125 μm,
G100/140 μm
Wavelength: λ = 820 nm (approximately)
Allowable Bending Radius: For indoor cable rmin = 2 in (5 cm)
For outdoor cable rmin = 8 in (20 cm)
Laser class 1 (acc. EN 60825–1) is achieved with fiber type G50/125 μm and
G62.5/125 μm.
Note:
Stress relief for individual pin connector must be provided with cable ties. Stress relief
should also be provided for the entire set of cables, e.g., cable ties.
2 Channel 1 Channel
Ch1 P-Slave P-Master Ch2
UART
Ch1 P-Slave AMO
1 Channel
2-14 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
2.1.5 Connections to Electrical Communication Interfaces
Electrical
Communication
Interfaces
9 pin D-subminiature female socket connectors are provided for all electrical communication
interfaces of the 7UM61. The connector is illustrated in Figure 2-15. The pin
assignments are described in Sub-section 8.2.1.
Figure 2-15 9 pin D-subminiature Connector
Connections to
Serial
Communication
Interfaces
Standard 9-pin D-subminiature plug connectors per MIL–C–24308 and DIN 41652
can be used.
The necessary communication cables are dependent on the interface:
• EIA 232: Three-wire or five-wire, twisted and shielded, e.g. interface cable
7XV5100–4.
• EIA 485: Three-wire, twisted and shielded.
• Profibus: Two-wire or four-wire, twisted and shielded:
Wire Type A, DIN 19245, Part 2 and EN 50170 vol. 2, twisted and shielded,
Wire Resistance: 135 Ω to 165 Ω (f > 100 kHz)
Capacitance: < 30 nF/km or < 48 nF/mile
Circuit Resistance: < 110 Ω /km or 177 Ω /mile
Conductor Diameter: > 0.64 mm
Conductor Cross-sectional Area: > 0.34 mm2
e.g., SINEC L2 Industrial twisted pair installation wire (see catalog 1K 10 “SIMATIC
NET, Industrial Communications Networks”).
• Time synchronization: at least two-wire, shielded.
P-Slave
AME RS232
RS232-LWL
RS485
16
59
59
16
operating interface
16
59
front side
Serial system interface
rear side
Time synchronization interface
rear side
7UM61 Manual 2-15
C53000-G1176-C127-1
2.2 Version of 7UM61 for Panel Surface-Mounting
The numerical, multi-functional SIPROTEC® 4 7UM61 for panel surface-mounting is
enclosed in a 7XP20 housing. 2 housing versions are available, 1/3 (7UM611) and 1/2
(7UM612) of 19 inch. The device is fitted into a surface mounting housing.
2.2.1 Construction
The case is inserted in a housing and secured with four screws that are located at the
corners of the front panel behind the covers. The front panel is attached to the case.
The terminals for connections to external equipment are grouped into two blocks that
are fastened to the top and the bottom of the housing. Inside the device are two printed
circuit boards that are connected together with a ribbon-cable with plug connectors.
The boards are supported with guide rails inside the case.
The front panel is removable. The screws for removing the component are located behind
the four covers at the corners. The front panel has a covered keypad with operating
and display elements necessary for equipment operation. All connections for
these elements are combined into an adapter module on the front panel that is linked
via a ribbon-cable with plug connectors to the internal processor board (CPU).
The nameplate sticker, showing important information such as power supply rating,
nominal current rating, and ordering number, is located on the top of the housing and
the interior of the front panel.
View of Front Panel Referring to the operating and display elements in Diagram 2-16:
1. Display (LCD)
The LCD shows processing and device information as text in various lists. Commonly
displayed information includes measured values (metering), counter values,
binary information regarding the condition of circuit breakers, status of the device,
protective information, general reports, and alarms.
2. Navigation Keys
These keys serve for navigation through operating menus.
3. MENU Key
This key activates the main menu.
4. ESC and ENTER Keys
These keys serve to escape from specific menues or execute changes (such as
setting changes).
5. Numerical Keys
These buttons serve for the entry of numerical values, such as protective settings.
6. Function Keys
Four function keys are typically used for quick and simple execution of frequently
performed actions. The function of the keys can be defined (programmed) by the
user. For example, the F1 key could be set to activate the display of operational
reports, and the F2 key could be set to cause the display of operating values. The
keys can also be programmed for control purposes. For example, the F3 key could
be programmed to initiate a close command for a circuit breaker, while the F4 key
could be programmed to initiate a trip command. Next to the keypad, a labeling
strip is provided on which the user-specified key functions can be written.
2-16 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
7. Serial Communication Interface, 9-pin D-subminiature Connector
This serial interface is for the connection of a local PC running DIGSI® 4.
8. LED Key
This key is used to reset latched LEDs and the latched contacts of binary outputs,
and provide a test of all LEDs in the group.
9. LEDs
The function of these indicators can be programmed. There is a vast selection of
signals to choose from. Next to the LEDs on the front panel, a labeling strip is provided
on which the user-specified LED functions can be written.
10.Operating Condition Indicators
The two LEDs "RUN" (green) and "ERROR" (red) indicate the operating condition
of the device.
11.Coverings for the screws that secure the front panel.
View of Front Panel
(Housing Size 1/3)
Figure 2-16 Front View, 7UM611, housing size 1/3, for Panel Surface-mounting, Without Optical
Connections
SIEMENS SIPROTEC
12
6
3
0 +/-
45
789
Trip
Pickup B
Pickup L3
RUN ERROR 7UM611
MENU
LED ESC ENTER
F4
F1
F2
F3
Event Log
MAIN MENU 01 / 05
Annunciation 1
Measurement 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 L+ L- 12 13 14 15
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
11)
11)
11)
11)
1)
2)
4)
5)
3)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
Trip Log
Operation.
Pri
Pickup GND
Device faulty
Pickup L1
L2
Pickup

7UM61 Manual 2-17
C53000-G1176-C127-1
View of Front Panel
(Housing Size 1/2)
The significance of the operating and display elements is the same as explained for
Figure 2-16.
Figure 2-17 Front view, 7UM612, housing size 1/2, for panel surface mounting, without
optical connections
2.2.2 Connections to Threaded Terminals
Terminal Blocks All connections to the device are by means of two-tier screw terminals located
at the
top and bottom of the surface mounting housing. For the housing size 1/3 there are 60
such terminals and for the housing size 1/2 there are 100 such terminals.
The 7UM61 is equipped with a short-circuit safety feature for the current circuits. If the
internal board that is connected to the current circuits is extracted, the current circuits
are short-circuited before the board breaks from the current circuits. When the board
is replaced, connections are first made to the current circuits, and then the short-circuit
connection is removed. This safety feature does not relieve the user from exercising
proper care when working with current transformer secondary circuits.
Connections to
Terminals
Solid conductor or stranded wire with lugs can be used.
The following specifications must be observed:
Direct Cable Connections: solid or stranded conductor with connector sleeve
conductor with cross-section of 0.5 mm2 to 7 mm2 or AWG 20 to 9.
Wire strip length: solid conductor 0.276 to 0.315 in
66 67 68 69 70 11 72 73 74 75
76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90
51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65
91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
11 12 13 14 L+ L- 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SIEMENS SIPROTEC
12
6
3
0 +/-
45
789
RUN ERROR 7UM612
MENU
LED ESC ENTER
F4
F1
F2
F3
Event Log
Operation.
0$,1_0(18_________________
11)
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
11)
11)
11)
8)
6)
7)
9)
10)
Pri

2-18 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Maximum Tightening Torque: 15 in-lb (1.7 Nm).
2.2.3 Connections to Optical Communication Interfaces
Optical
Communication
Interfaces
There are two versions of optical communication interfaces – 1 channel and 2 channels.
The optical interface is mounted in a housing that is located on the bottom of the
7UM61. See Figure 2-18.
A front view of the optical interface housing is shown in Figure 2-19. The optical ports
are located at the bottom of the housing panel. The transmitters and receivers are
marked. A table is provided to indicate the channels that are configured. For example,
Figure 2-19 illustrates a case in which channels B and C are configured. For the
7UM61 the channels D and E are not available.
All configured optical ports are covered with caps to protect the optical components
against dust and other contaminants. These caps should remain in-place until the
ports are used. The caps can be removed by turning them 90° to the left. Non-configured
optical interfaces are replaced with plastic plugs.
Connections to
Optical
Communication
Interfaces
(ST–Connector)
Optical Connector Type: ST–Connector
Fiber Type: Multimode graded-index (“G”) optical fiber
G50/125 μm,
G62.5/125 μm,
G100/140 μm
Wavelength: λ = 820 nm (approximately)
Allowable Bending Radius: For indoor cable rmin = 2 in (5 cm)
For outdoor cable rmin = 8 in (20 cm)
Laser class 1 (acc. EN 60825–1) is achieved with fiber type G50/125 μm and
G62.5/125 μm.
7UM61 Manual 2-19
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 2-18 Side View of 7UM61, Panel Surface-mounting, Optical Communication Interface
For a version of the device with Profibus, the optical ports for Channel B are replaced
with a D-subminiature port containing the Profibus interface. See Figure 2-16.
Figure 2-19 Housing Panel with Optical Communication Interfaces
n
Housing for optical communication interfaces
Channel B
Channel D
Channel C
Channel E
Channel B
Channel D
Channel C
Channel E
Optical communication interfaces Optical communication interfaces
and D-subminiature connector
2-20 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
7UM61 Manual 3-1
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Initial Inspections 3
This section describes the first steps that should be taken upon receiving the
SIPROTEC® 4 7UM61.
Unpacking and packing is explained.
Please note the SIPROTEC® 4 family of devices is described in general in this section,
and the examples shown may differ in detail from a specific device. Also, depending
on the version of the specific device, some of the functions discussed may not be
available.
Visual and electrical checks that are appropriate for initial inspection are discussed.
The electrical tests include navigating through the operating menus of the device using
the operator control panel on the front of the device, and the operator control windows
in DIGSI® 4. For personnel inexperienced with the 7UM61, these checks also
provide a quick and simple method for understanding the operation of the control panel
and DIGSI® 4. The electrical tests can be done without measuring quantities being
applied.
Observations relevant to long-term storage of the device are noted.
3.1 Unpacking and Packing 3-2
3.2 Inspections Upon Receipt 3-3
3.3 User Interface 3-4
3.4 Storage 3-12
Initial Inspections
3-2 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
3.1 Unpacking and Packing
The 7UM61 is packaged at the factory to meet the requirements of IEC 60255–21.
Unpacking and packing must be done with normal care, without using force, and with
appropriate tools. Visually check the device immediately upon arrival for correct mechanical
condition.
Please observe also the brief reference booklet and all notes and hints that are enclosed
in the packaging.
The shipping packaging can be reused in the same manner for further shipment. Storage
packaging alone, for individual devices, is not sufficient for shipping. If other packaging
is used, shock requirements under IEC 60255–21–1 Class 2 and IEC 60255–
21–2 Class 1 must be met.
The device should be in the final operating area for a minimum of two hours before the
power source is first applied. This time allows the device to attain temperature equilibrium,
and dampness and condensation to be avoided.
Initial Inspections
7UM61 Manual 3-3
C53000-G1176-C127-1
3.2 Inspections Upon Receipt
3.2.1 Inspection of Features and Ratings
Ordering Number Verify that the 7UM61 has the expected features by checking the complete
ordering
number with the ordering number codes given in Sub-section A.1 of the Appendix.
Also check that the required and expected accessories are included with the device.
The ordering number of the device is on the nameplate sticker attached to the top of
the case or housing. The nameplate also indicates the current, voltage, and power
supply ratings of the device. A verification that these ratings are the expected values
is especially important. The jumpers for the control voltage of the binary inputs are set
at the factory for a DC control voltage equal to the DC voltage rating of the power supply.
The jumpers can be changed if a different control voltage is to be used.
3.2.2 Electrical Check
Operating conditions that meet VDE 0100 and VDE 0105 Part 1, or national and international
standards, are to be observed.
Before applying power supply voltage or measuring quantities for the first time, be
sure the device has been in the operating area for at least two hours. This time period
allows the device to attain temperature equilibrium, and prevents dampness and condensation
from occurring.
Power-Up Ensuring safe grounding and applying power supply voltage are sufficient for a first
electrical inspection of the device.
o Connect the ground of the device to the ground of the location. The ground of a 7UM61
designed for flush-mounting is on the back panel. The ground of a device designed for
surface-mounting is on the terminal with the grounding symbol.
o With the protective switches (e.g. test switches, fuses, or miniature circuit breakers)
for the power supply open, prepare the connections to the power supply. Verify that
the power supply voltage has the correct magnitude. Check polarity connections to the
device inputs. Follow the appropriate connection diagram in the Appendix A.2.
o Close the protective switches to apply the power supply.
o The green “RUN” LED on the front panel must light after no more than 0.5 second, and
the red “ERROR” LED must go out after no more than 10 seconds.
o After no more than 15 seconds, the start-up messages must vanish from the display
(in which the complete ordering number, the version of firmware implemented, and the
factory number are shown) and the default display must appear. Depending on the
masking of the LEDs, some indicators may light up during and after power-up.
Warning!
The following inspection steps are done in the presence of dangerous voltages. Only
appropriately qualified personnel familiar with and adhering to safety requirements
and precautionary measures shall perform these steps.
Initial Inspections
3-4 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
3.3 User Interface
3.3.1 Navigating through the Operating Menus Using the Operator Control
Panel
Operator Control
Panel
The device has a hierarchically structured operating tree, within which movements
and actions are made using the , , , keys and the , , and keys
on the front panel.
The brief discussions below illustrate the navigation techniques using the integrated
operations in the operator control panel. Some typical operations are covered. For
easier understanding, the accompanying figures show the entire contents of the
menus, while only a limited number of lines can be seen in the display at any time.
Ordering Number /
Version Reading
To view the complete ordering number of the device, the version of firmware implemented,
and the serial number:
q When the device is ready for operation, first press the key. The 0$,1_0(18 appears.
q Using the key, select the menu item 6HWWLQJV, and move to the device settings
using the key. The 6(77,1*6 menu appears, as shown in Figure 3-1.
q Using the key, select the menu item 6HWXS_([WUDV and switch to the selection
6(783_(;75$6 using the key. See Figure 3-2.
Figure 3-1 Sub-menu 6(77,1*6
q Using the key, select the menu 0/)%_9HUVLRQ and view the selection 0/)%_
9(56,21 using the key.
The device-specific data appear in two or three locations. Press the key as necessary
to view all of the data:
MENU ENTER ESC
MENU
_0_$_,_1___0_(_1_8________________________
_$QQXQFLDWLRQ__²!____
_0HDVXUHPHQW___²!____
_&RQWURO_______²!____
!6HWWLQJV______²!____
_7HVW_'LDJQRVH_²!____
_6_(_7_7_,_1_*_6__________________________
_'HYLFH_&RQILJ__²!___
_0DVNLQJ__,_2___²!___
_3_6\VWHP_'DWD__²!___
_*URXS_$________²!___
_*URXS_%________²!___
_*URXS_&________²!___
_*URXS_'________²!___
_&KDQJH_*URXS___²!___
_2VF_)DXOW_5HF__²!___
!6HWXS_([WUDV___²!___
_'HYLFH_________²!___
Initial Inspections
7UM61 Manual 3-5
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 3-2 Display of Device-specific Data - Examples
Measurement
Viewing
To view the measured values:
q If the main menu is not shown, press the key. The 0$,1_0(18 appears.
q Using the key, select the menu item 0HDVXUHPHQW, and move to the measurement
values using the key. The 0($685(0(17 menu appears.
q Using the key, select the menu item 2SHUDWLRQ__VHF (operating measured
values, secondary), and switch to the 23(5$7,21__6(& menu using the key.
q Using the and keys, all operating measured values can be viewed.
Since no AC voltages or currents are present at this time, all operating measured values
show near zero. Deviations of the last digit are insignificant.
Event Messages
Reading
Reading the event messages is described to serve as an additional example.
q If the main menu is not shown, press the key. The 0$,1_0(18 appears.
q Using the key, select the menu item $QQXQFLDWLRQ, and switch to the annunciation
using the key. The $1181&,$7,21 menu appears.
q Using the key, select the menu item (YHQW_/RJ, and move to the (9(17_/2*
menu using the key.
The last quantity in the upper right corner of the display indicates the number of event
messages stored in memory. The number before the slash indicates the message
presently being displayed. Upon entering the menu, the latest (newest) message is
shown. The date and time of the event are shown in the display line above the message.
q Use the key to read other event messages.
q Press the key; all LEDs should illuminate. Press the key. The newest message
in the event log should be “5HVHW_/('”, and the number of messages in
memory should increase by one (maximum of 200).
To return to the main menu, press the key once, or repeatedly press the key
or the key.
Display Contrast
Setting
If the image in the integrated LCD does not have satisfactory contrast, adjustments
can be made. A stronger contrast serves, among other purposes, to improve the readability
of the image from an angle. With increasing numbers, the contrast is increased
and the picture gets darker. If the contrast is too weak or too strong, there is a risk that
0/)%_9(56,21_________
0/)%___80____²_($__
_&$_
%)²1U_____________
_6_(_7_8_3___(_;_7_5_$_6__________________
_'DWH_7LPH______²!___
_&ORFN_6HWXS____²!___
_6HULDO_3RUWV___²!___
_'HYLFH_,'______²!___
!0/)%_9HUVLRQ___²!___
_&RQWUDVW_______²!___
0/)%_9(56,21_________
)LUPZDUH_____________
%RRWV\VWHP___________
MENU
MENU
LED
MENU ESC
Initial Inspections
3-6 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
the display will be unreadable and that no operation will be possible using the integrated
operator control panel. Therefore, the preset contrast value should only be
changed in small steps (1 or 2 levels).
q When the device is ready for operation, first press the key. The 0$,1_0(18 appears.
q Using the key, select the menu item 6HWWLQJV, and switch to the settings using
the key. The 6(77,1*6 menu appears.
q Using the key, select the menu item 6HWXS_([WUDV and switch to the selection
6(783_(;75$6 using the key. See Figure 3-3.
q Using the key, select the menu item &RQWUDVW.
q If a change of the contrast of the integrated LCD is desired, press the key. The
existing setting appears in a frame with a blinking cursor.
q Overwrite the present setting with the desired setting using the numerical keys. The
setting range is [11 to 22].
q Confirm the change with the key, or cancel the change with the key.
Exit the menu using the key, or return to the main menu using the key.
Figure 3-3 Operating Sub-menu for Adjusting the Display Contrast
MENU
ENTER
ENTER ESC
ESC MENU
ENTER 6(783_(;____________
____________________
_0/)%_9H____Q__²!___
_&RQWUDVW______²!___
__
_6_(_7_8_3___(_;_7_5_$_6_______________
_'DWH_7LPH_____²!___
_&ORFN_6HWXS___²!___
_6HULDO_3RUWV__²!___
_'HYLFH_,'_____²!___
_0/)%_9HUVLRQ__²!___
!&RQWUDVW______²!___
Initial Inspections
7UM61 Manual 3-7
C53000-G1176-C127-1
3.3.2 Operation Using DIGSI® 4
DIGSI® 4 Operator
Control Panel
DIGSI® 4 has the typical PC application Windows operating environment to guide the
user. The software has a modern, intuitive, user-interface. Further details are found in
Section 4, as well as in the DIGSI® 4 handbook “Device Operation”.
Some applications of DIGSI® 4 are described below. They include viewing the measurement
values, reading messages in the Event Log, and setting the clock. The handling
of the operator control windows of DIGSI® 4 can be learned quickly by following
the simple examples as descibed below. To perform the steps in the examples, first
connect the SIPROTEC® 4 device to the PC and match the DIGSI® 4 interface data
with the equipment. To accomplish this task:
q Establish a physical connection between a serial interface of the PC and the operating
serial interface of the device on the front panel.
q Open the DIGSI® 4 application in the PC.
q Generate a new project by clicking on )LOH → 1HZ in the DIGSI® 4–Manager menu
bar.
Figure 3-4 Dialog box to Open a New Project
q Enter a name for the new project in the 1DPH entry field (e.g. test 1) and close the
box with 2..
q Select )ROGHU by clicking on the item in the newly opened window. Then click on
',*6,_!_'HYLFH__3OXJ_ _3OD\_. The Plug & Play dialog box opens, as shown
in Figure 3-6.
Initial Inspections
3-8 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 3-5 Menu Device with option 'HYLFH_!_',*6,_3OXJ_ _3OD\)
q Enter the designation of the PC serial interface (COM 1,2, 3, or 4) and select in the
popup list under )UDPH the transfer format, to be used in making the connection.
q Click on 2.. DIGSI® 4 automatically determines the type of device present and
reads the settings needed for communication (transfer format, transfer speed)
through the interface.
Figure 3-6 Plug & Play Dialog Box for Communication between Device and PC
A direct connection is then established (on-line), the data are exchanged between the
PC and the device, and the initial window for DIGSI® 4 opens, as shown on Figure 3-7.
q By double clicking 2QOLQH in the navigation window (left window), the structure
opens (directory tree).
q By clicking on one of the menu items offered there, the associated contents become
visible in the right window.
Initial Inspections
7UM61 Manual 3-9
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 3-7 DIGSI® 4 — Online Initial Window - Example
Measurement
Viewing
As an example the procedure for viewing the measured values is described.
q Double click on 0HDVXUHPHQW in the navigation window (left).
q Double click on the subdirectory 6HFRQGDU\_9DOXHV in the navigation window.
q Click on 2SHUDWLRQDO_YDOXHV__VHFRQGDU\.
q Date and time are shown in the data window (right), as illustrated in Figure 3-8.
q Double click on this entry in the data window.
Figure 3-8 DIGSI® 4 — Viewing the Secondary Operating Measured Values - Example
A table of the secondary operating measured values appears, as shown in Figure 3-9.
Since no AC currents or voltages are present, all measured values are close to zero.
Deviations of the last digit are insignificant. The measured values are automatically
updated.
In the same manner, other measured and counter values can be viewed.
Initial Inspections
3-10 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 3-9 DIGSI® 4 — Table of Secondary Operating Measured Values – Example
Event Messages
Reading
The readout of operating messages is described and serves as an additional example.
q Double click on $QQXQFLDWLRQV in the navigation window.
q Click on (YHQW_/RJ in the data window (right side).
The present date and time are shown in the data window.
q Double click on this entry in the data window.
A table of the accumulated event messages is displayed. See Figure 3-10. The number
designation for an event is provided with a description of the event. The corresponding
cause, value (ON or OFF), and date and time of the event are given. The
events are listed chronologically; the newest message is shown first.
Figure 3-10 DIGSI® 4 — Event Log Messages Window – Example
q Press the key on the device; all LEDs should light while the key is pressed.
q The message “Reset LED” appears as the newest message as soon as the window
is updated. The window is updated by clicking on 9LHZ in the menu bar, and then
on 5HIUHVK. Pressing the F5 function key on the keyboard also updates the window.
The operating messages can be saved in DIGSI® 4, and also deleted from the device’s
memory. For detailed information refer to Section 7.1.1).
LED
Initial Inspections
7UM61 Manual 3-11
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Date and Time
Setting
To enter the date and time:
q Click on 'HYLFH in the menu bar. See Figure 3-11.
q Select 6HW_FORFN.
Figure 3-11 DIGSI® 4 — Selection of the Option 6HW_&ORFN_
The dialog field 6HW_FORFN_ _GDWH_LQ_GHYLFH opens. The field shows the
present
date and the approximate present time according to the device. The day of the week
is automatically derived from the date and cannot be edited.
• Edit the input fields 'DWH and 7LPH. The format depends on your regional settings
of the PC. See Figure 3-12.
Date: mm/dd/yyyy or dd.mm.yyyyy
Time: hh.mm.ss
Click 2. to download the entered values to the device. The former values are
changed and the dialog field is closed.
Figure 3-12 DIGSI® 4 — Dialog Field: 6HW_FORFN_ _GDWH_LQ_GHYLFH
Initial Inspections
3-12 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
3.4 Storage
If the device is to be stored, note:
SIPROTEC® 4 devices and associated assemblies should be stored in a dry and clean
place, with a maximum temperature range of [–12 °F to 131 °F], or [–25 °C to +55 °C].
See also Section 10.1 under Technical Data.
To avoid premature aging of the electrolyte capacitors in the power supply, a temperature
range of [50 °F to 95 °F], or [+10 °C to +35 °C], is recommended for storage.
The relative humidity must not lead to condensation or ice buildup.
After extended storage, the power supply of the device should be energized, approximately
every two years, for one or two days to regenerate the electrolytic capacitors
in the power supply. This procedure should also be done prior to the device being put
in-service. Under extreme climatic conditions (tropics), preheating is achieved at the
same time, and condensation is prevented.
After long storage, power should not be applied until the device has been in the operating
area for a minimum of two hours. This time period allows the device to attain temperature
equilibrium, and prevents dampness and condensation from occurring.
n
7UM61 Manual 4-1
C53000-G1176-C127-1
SIPROTEC 4 Devices 4
This section provides an overview of the family of SIPROTEC® 4 devices and the integration
of the devices into process control systems. Principle procedures are provided
for setting the devices, controlling primary equipment with the devices, and performing
general operations with the devices.
Please note the SIPROTEC® 4 family of devices is described in general in this section,
and the examples shown may differ in detail from a specific device. Also, depending
on the version of the specific device, some of the functions discussed may not be
available.
Details about the extent of the functions of the devices, the individual settings, and the
representation structure of the system data are found in the following sections and the
DIGSI® 4 instruction book.
4.1 General 4-2
4.2 Operator Control Facilities 4-5
4.3 Information Retrieval 4-8
4.4 Control 4-14
4.5 Manual Overwrite / Tagging 4-16
4.6 General Setting Procedure 4-17
4.7 Device Configuration 4-20
4.8 Configuration of Inputs and Outputs (Configuration Matrix) 4-21
4.9 Programmable Logic CFC 4-24
4.10 Power System Data 4-26
4.11 Setting Groups 4-27
4.12 General Device Settings 4-29
4.13 Time Synchronization 4-30
4.14 Serial Interfaces 4-31
4.15 Passwords 4-33
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
4-2 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
4.1 General
The SIPROTEC® 4 family is an innovative product series of numerical protective and
control devices with open communication interfaces for remote control and remote
setting, ergonomically designed control panels, and highly flexible functionality.
4.1.1 Protection and Control
The devices utilize numerical measuring techniques. Complete numerical signal processing
offers high measurement accuracy and long-term consistency, as well as reliable
handling of harmonics and transients. Digital filtering techniques and dynamic
stabilization of measured values ensure the highest security in establishing the devices’
correct responses. Device errors are recognized and quickly annunciated by integrated
self-monitoring routines. Failure of protection during a fault is therefore almost
entirely prevented.
The user can choose devices with separate protective and process control functions,
or select a solution that implements both requirements.
The following solutions are available:
q Protection and control in separate devices,
q Protective devices that provide the capability of control of a circuit breaker or primary
switching equipment through a communication interface,
q Devices with combined features that, in addition to protective functions, offer on-site
operation for several circuit breakers and primary switching equipment and extensive
process control functions.
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
7UM61 Manual 4-3
C53000-G1176-C127-1
4.1.2 Communication
SIPROTEC® 4 devices are completely suited for the requirements of modern communication
technology. They have interfaces that allow for integration into higher-level
control centers, and user friendly operation through an on-site PC or via a modem connection.
Simple, comfortable device setup and operation are provided.
SIPROTEC® 4 devices support the widespread, internationally accepted communication
standards
q PROFIBUS FMS,
q PROFIBUS DP,
q IEC 60870-5-103
q DNP3.0 Level 2 and
q MODBUS ASCII/RTU
Figure 4-1 Integration of Field Devices in the SICAM Station Control System, examples
Operation and Observation
SICAM WinCC
DIGSI 4
SICAM SC
To SCADA
IEC60870-5-101
IEC60870-5-103
Profibus FMS
Time Synchronization
DCF, GPS
Field Devices
Profibus DP, DNP3.0
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
4-4 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Refer to the sample configurations in Figure 4-1. In the case when data is transmitted
from the field devices it can be processed in the sub-station control device SICAM SC,
displayed at the operating and observation station SICAM WinCC, and transferred by
the remote terminal unit interfaces (via the network channels) to SCADA.
In the case when commands are sent to the devices, equally flexible processing is
possible; that is, substation control operations can be initiated from the network control
centers (SCADA), as well as from the operation and observation unit of the substation
control system.
The protocol PROFIBUS DP enables the uncomplicated integration of SIPROTEC®
devices into PLC-based process control systems (e.g. SIMATIC S5/S7). The protocols
DNP3.0 and MODBUS ASCII/RTU allow the integration into a large number of process
control systems and control systems of different manufacturers.
4.1.3 Settings
The devices in the SIPROTEC® 4 family are delivered with factory default settings. After
settings are made for specific applications, the devices are suitable for direct use
in power systems.
The windows-based DIGSI® 4 software program offers an application-oriented interface
with thorough guidance for quick and simple setting of the devices.
DIGSI® 4 is installed on a normal PC. For local use, the PC is connected to the operating
serial interface on the front panel of the device.
4.1.4 Operations
All on-site operations of a SIPROTEC® 4 device can be done with DIGSI® 4. Examples
of operations are breaker control, retrieval of information, or changing of setting
groups. All of the operations can also be performed using the HMI on the front of the
SIPROTEC® 4 device.
4.1.5 Waveform Capture
DIGSI® 4 can also be used to retrieve waveform data and SER information captured
by the SIPROTEC® 4 device. The DIGRA® 4 software program can then be used to
provide several different graphical representations of the captured signals. DIGRA® 4
also calculates additional values on the basis of the captured signals. The program
presents the data in analogue curves with time base, vector diagrams, circle diagrams,
and harmonic charts.
Note:
All SIPROTEC® 4 devices also operate with the proven star coupler (e.g. 7XV5). Thus,
for simple applications, the user can retrieve all information from the office or while on
the road.
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
7UM61 Manual 4-5
C53000-G1176-C127-1
4.2 Operator Control Facilities
4.2.1 Operating Panel On Device
The operating panels of SIPROTEC® 4 devices are ergonomically designed and easy
to read. The operating panels allow on-site control operations to be done, individual
settings to be entered, and all information required for operations to be displayed.
The operating panel contains either a full graphical display or a 4-line display, depending
on the specific device of the SIPROTEC® 4 family.
HMI with Four-Line
Display
Figure 4-2 SIPROTEC® 4 Device, HMI with Four-line Display, example
The functions of the operating and display elements are described below.
Note:
Refer to Section 2 to determine the type of HMI for the specific SIPROTEC®4 device.
SIEMENS SIPROTEC
12
6
3
0 +/-
45
789
RUN ERROR 7SA522
MENU
LED ESC ENTER
F4
F1
F2
F3
Event Log
Operation.
MAIN MENU 01/05
Annunciation 1
Measurement 2
SIEMENS SIPROTEC
12
6
3
0 +/-
45
789
RUN ERROR 7SA522
MENU
LED ESC ENTER
F4
F1
F2
F3
Meldungen
Meßwerte
MAIN MENU 01/04
Annunciation 1
Measurement 2
SIEMENS SIPROTEC
12
6
3
0 +/-
45
789
Trip
Pickup A
Pickup B
Pickup C
Pickup GND
Device faulty
RUN ERROR 7SJ61/62
MENU
LED ESC ENTER
F4
F1
F2
F3
Event Log
Operation.
MAIN MENU 01/05
Annunciation 1
Measuremen 2
Trip Log
Pri
Pri
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
4-6 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Display Process and device information are displayed in the LCD. Commonly displayed
information
includes measured values, counter values, binary information regarding the
condition of the device, protection information, general messages, and alarms.
The light for the display is normally off. The light automatically turns on whenever a
key is pressed on the HMI. If no input from the HMI occurs for ten minutes, then the
light turns off again. The light can be controlled via a binary input that is configured
(programmed) for this purpose.
Keys The keys have various functions.
q Navigation through the operating menus of the device are accomplished with the
, , , keys.
q The main menu is opened with the key.
q Changes are cancelled or confirmed with the and keys, respectively.
q Numerical values are entered with the to keys, the key for a decimal
point, and the key for a negative sign. If a value of infinity (∞) is desired, press
the decimal point key twice; ∞ appears in the display.
q The to keys are programmable. The keys are typically used to execute commonly
performed actions. Labeling strips are provided.
q Latched LEDs and binary outputs are reset and the group of LEDs are tested with
the key (dual purpose).
LEDs q “RUN” and “ERROR” LEDs indicate the condition of the device.
q All other LEDs are freely configured to indicate process information, status, etc. Labeling
strips are provided.
Operating Serial
Interface
Local communication with the device is established through the front operating serial
interface with a PC running DIGSI® 4. The interface on the device is a 9-pin, female,
D-subminiature port.
MENU
ESC ENTER
09.
+/–
F1 F4
LED
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
7UM61 Manual 4-7
C53000-G1176-C127-1
4.2.2 DIGSI® 4 Tool
DIGSI® 4 uses the familiar Windows operating environment.
User Guide In DIGSI® 4 only the settings that are available within a specific device are shown in
the specific windows. If a protective feature is changed from disabled to enabled in the
Device Configuration, then the settings relevant to that feature become available.
Entering settings for SIPROTEC® 4 devices is simplified due to many types of assistance
offered, such as context menus, pop-up lists for the selection of available options,
and specific limits for the entry of numerical values.
Masking Inputs
and Outputs
(Configuration
Matrix)
A configuration matrix is used to mask the binary inputs, binary outputs, and LEDs.
Information to be saved in the various buffers and transmitted via the system interface
is also selected in this matrix. The setting options are presented in an easy-to-read
tabular format. Parts of the matrix can be minimized or expanded as desired to simplify
the displayed sections, and therefore the setting process. Filter functions can reduce
the size of the matrix to display only relevant information.
Passwords Password entry is required for tasks such as changing settings, executing control
commands, or exercising the test and diagnostics features. The passwords protect
against unauthorized access to these critical tasks.
Commissioning
Aids
DIGSI® 4 simplifies commissioning with test functions for the binary inputs, outputs
and LEDs. Control of primary equipment can be done. The measured values of the
device can be viewed with the program. Waveform capture can be triggered with
DIGSI® 4.
Help System The help system clarifies the individual functions and settings, and provides
additional
support.
Note:
Detailed information about DIGSI® 4 can be found in the DIGSI® 4 instruction book,
order number E50417-H1176-C097.
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
4-8 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
4.3 Information Retrieval
A SIPROTEC® 4 device has an abundance of information that can be used to obtain
an overview of the present and past operating conditions of the device and the portion
of the power system being protected or controlled by the device. The information is
represented in separate groups:
q Annunciation,
q Measurements,
q Waveform capture.
Remote If the device is integrated into a process control system, then information transfer can
take place, via a connection to the system interface of the SIPROTEC® 4 device, to:
q SCADA, or
q substation controller device, e.g. SICAM SC
Local On site, the HMI of the SIPROTEC® 4 device can be used to retrieve information.
DIGSI® 4 Information retrieval is simple and fast when DIGSI® 4 is used. For local use, connect
a PC to the operating serial interface at the front of the SIPROTEC® 4 device. For remote
retrieval of information, communication occurs via a modem connected to the
service serial interface. DIGSI® 4 must operate in the Online mode to obtain information
from the device.
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
7UM61 Manual 4-9
C53000-G1176-C127-1
4.3.1 Annunciations
The scope of the indication (messages) that are given under Annunciation is automatically
determined when settings for the basis configuration of functions are applied to
the SIPROTEC® 4 device.
The messages are divided into the following categories, and displayed using DIGSI® 4
or the HMI of the device:
q Event Log: Operational messages independent of network faults, e.g. messages
about control operations or monitoring functions;
q Trip Log: Fault messages;
q Sensitive Ground Fault Log: Ground fault messages for devices with sensitive
ground fault detection;
q General Interrogation: Display of present condition messages;
q Spontaneous Annunciation: Continuous display of important messages from the
device; e.g., after faults, control operations, etc. This feature is very helpful during
commissioning.
k451.gif
Figure 4-3 DIGSI® 4, Annunciation

Display in DIGSI® 4 To view the indications in the DIGSI® 4 Tool 2QOLQH:
• Select $QQXQFLDWLRQ in the navigation window.
All annunciation groups are shown in the data window.
• Double click on an annunciation group in the data window, such as (YHQW_/RJ.
The data and time appear. Double click on the entry. The list of indications appears.
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
4-10 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Display on
the Device
To display messages in the HMI of the SIPROTEC® 4 device:
• Select 0DLQ_0HQX → $QQXQFLDWLRQ → e.g. (YHQW_/RJ or 7ULS_/RJ.
Figure 4-4 SIPROTEC® 4, Device Display of Operating Messages in the Event Log, Example
Figure 4-5 SIPROTEC® 4, Device Display, Trip Log and Ground Fault Messages, Example
_$_1_1_8_1_&_,_$_7_,_2_1__________________
!(YHQW_/RJ______²!___
!7ULS_/RJ_______²!___
_0_$_,_1___0_(_1_8________________________
!$QQXQFLDWLRQ___²!___
!0HDVXUHPHQW____²!___
_(_9_(_1_7___/_2_*________________________
_____________________
5HVHW_/('__________21_
_7_5_,_3___/_2_*__________________________
!/DVW_)DXOW_____²!___
!_QG_/DVW_)DXOW_²!___
_/_$_6_7___)_$_8_/_7______________________
_____________________
1HWZRUN_)DXOW______21_
_*_5_2_8_1_'___)_$_8_/_7__________________
!/DVW_)DXOW_____²!___
_/_$_6_7___)_$_8_/_7______________________
_____________________
*URXQG_)DXOW_______21
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
7UM61 Manual 4-11
C53000-G1176-C127-1
4.3.2 Measurements
The measured values that are registered are divided into the following categories for
display in DIGSI® 4 or on the HMI of the device:
q Primary values, based on the measured secondary values and the settings entered
for the current transformers and voltage transformers.
q Secondary values, which are the measured values or are derived from the measured
values.
q Percentage values, relative to nominal ratings.
q Other values including thermal values and user-defined values.
q Statistics values.
k452.gif
Figure 4-6 DIGSI® 4 Measured value display, Example

Display in DIGSI® 4 To display the measured values using the DIGSI® 4 2QOLQH control
panel:
• Select 0HDVXUHPHQW in the navigation window. The measured value groups appear
in the data window.
• Double click on a group, for example 3ULPDU\_9DOXHV.
• Double click on the next item in the data window, 2SHUDWLRQDO_YDOXHV__SUL_
PDU\ in the example. The date and time appear.
• Double click on the date and time, and the measured values appear.
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
4-12 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Display on
the Device
To display the measured values in the HMI of the SIPROTEC® 4 device:
• Select 0DLQ_0HQX → 0HDVXUHPHQW →
e.g. 2SHUDWLRQ__SUL_² or 2SHUDWLRQ__VHF_².
Figure 4-7 SIPROTEC® 4, Device Display of Measured Values, Example
_0_(_$_6_8_5_(_0_(_1_7___________________
!2SHUDWLRQ__SUL_²!___
!2SHUDWLRQ__VHF_²!___
_0_$_,_1___0_(_1_8________________________
!0HDVXUHPHQW____²!___
_0_(_$_6_8_5_(_0_(_1_7____________________
!2SHUDWLRQ__SUL_²!___
!2SHUDWLRQ__VHF_²!___
_2_3_(_5_$_7_,_2_1_____3_5_,______________
!,D_ ___________$
!,E_ ___________$
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
7UM61 Manual 4-13
C53000-G1176-C127-1
As an option, SIPROTEC® 4 devices can have waveform capturing that includes Sequence
of Event Report (SER) for the elements in the device. Furthermore, the elements
that are shown in the SER can be selected by the user.
The waveform and SER data are retrieved from the device memory by DIGSI® 4 and
are saved as waveform capture in standard COMTRADE format.
The DIGRA® 4 program is used to convert the oscillographic data into graphical representations
that can be used to analyze the fault or the event captured by the device.
DIGRA® 4 calculates additional values from the waveform data, e.g. impedances and
rms values, and displays the captured and calculated values in:
q Analogue Curves with timebase (Time Signals),
q Vector Diagrams,
q Circle Diagrams, and
q Harmonic graphs.
digra009
Figure 4-8 DIGRA® 4 Graphical Representations of the Waveform Data, View Examples
Details can be found in the DIGSI® 4 instruction book, order number E50417-H1176-
C097, and the DIGRA® 4 instruction book, order number E50417-H1176-C070.
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
4-14 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
4.4 Control
The multiple application possibilities for SIPROTEC® 4 devices require an equally
flexible concept for command editing and control.
Remote If the device is integrated into a control system, then command outputs can be remotely
controlled via the system interface using telegrams from
q SCADA or
q substation controller devices such as SICAM SC.
Local On-site, the SIPROTEC® 4 device offers the possibility to control a circuit breaker or
primary switching equipment using the HMI.
For devices with a four-line display, control operations are carried out using:
• 0DLQ_PHQX → &RQWURO → %UHDNHU_6ZLWFK → &RQWURO → Equipment
and intended
direction 21 or 2)) (Figure 4-9), or
• The Function Keys F1 to F4.
The functionality of these keys is programmable using CFC. Their factory default function
does not do any breaker control.
Figure 4-9 On-site Control Using the HMI
_0_$_,_1___0_(_1_8________________________
_0HDVXUHPHQW____²!___
!&RQWURO________²!___ _&_2_1_7_5_2_/__________________________
!%UHDNHU_6ZLWFK²!___
!7DJJLQJ_______²!___
_&_2_1_7_5_2_/__________________________
!%UHDNHU_6ZLWFK²!___
!7DJJLQJ_______²!___
%5($.(5_6:,7&+______
____________________
!'LVSOD\_______²!___
!&RQWURO_______²!___
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
7UM61 Manual 4-15
C53000-G1176-C127-1
The status of a primary switch can be read out on the display using %5($.(5_6:,7&+
→ 'LVSOD\ (Figure 4-10).
Figure 4-10 Determining Primary Switch Status using the HMI
DIGSI® 4 Control operations can be carried out using the DIGSI® 4 Tool. Connect a PC to the
PC-interface at front of the device on site, or communicate with the SIPROTEC® device
using a modem and the service interface.
DIGSI® 4 must operate in the On-line mode for this function.
• Select &RQWURO in the Navigation window and double click on %UHDNHU___
6ZLWFKHV in the data window.
In the dialog window that follows, all relevant primary control equipment is displayed
in a table with the present status.
• Enter the intended device position in the Scheduled column. Answer the question
with <HV.
The password is requested, the interlocking conditions are checked, and the command
is issued.
CFC Using the graphically supported design tool CFC for logic functions in DIGSI® 4, information
can be logically combined. Command outputs can be derived from the output
of logic functions. The link of the output of the CFC functions to the respective device
outputs is determined in the configuration matrix.
Password Only authorized personnel shall perform control operations. Control operations are
protected by passwords.
Interlocking Command outputs are subject to interlocking checks, which can be configured
individually
and graphically using the CFC logic too. Standard interlockings, such as ground
switch closed status indication are already contained in the basic settings of the device
when delivered from the factory.
Command Processing
Times
Details about the command output time, checkback indication monitoring time, etc.,
are entered within the framework of the settings.
Event Recording All control operations are recorded in the message list with date and time.
_'_,_6_3_/_$_<__________________________
!__%UHDNHU______23(1
___'LVF_6ZLW____&/26
_%_5_(_$_._(_5___6_:_,_7_&_+______________
!'LVSOD\________²!___
!&RQWURO________²!___
Note:
The control option of DIGSI® 4 is typically used during commissioning, and for test and
diagnostic purposes.
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
4-16 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
4.5 Manual Overwrite / Tagging
Manual Overwrite If the breaker/switch position is not available, the status of the switchgear can
be manually
set to the actual present position using the HMI: 0DLQ_0HQX → &RQWURO →
%UHDNHU_6ZLWFK → 0DQ__2YHUZULWH. The simulated breaker/switch position is
used for interlocking checks, and for automatically initiated control operations.
Set Status For convenience during commissioning or at other times, decoupling of the
switchgear
and the protective device may be desired for a short period, without disconnecting the
wires. This function is activated using the HMI: 0DLQ_0HQX → &RQWURO →
%UHDNHU_
6ZLWFK → 6HW_6WDWXV.
Tagging To identify unusual operating conditions in the power system, tagging can be done.
The tagging can, for example, be entered as additional operating conditions in interlocking
checks, which are set up with CFC. Tagging is configured in the same way as
for operating devices.
• The status of the tagging is displayed on the HMI, 0DLQ_0HQX → &RQWURO → 7DJ_
JLQJ → 'LVSOD\ (Figure 4-11),
or changed using
• 0DLQ_0HQX → &RQWURO → 7DJJLQJ → 6HW.
Figure 4-11 Tagging Equipment from the HMI
_7_$_*_*_,_1_*____________________________
'LVSOD\_________²!___
6HW_____________²!___
_&_2_1_7_5_2_/______________________________
%UHDNHU_6ZLWFK__²!____
7DJJLQJ_________²!___
,QWHUORFN_______²!___
_0_$_,_1___0_(_1_8______________________
$QQXQFLDWLRQ___²!___
0HDVXUHPHQW____²!___
&RQWURO________²!___
Note:
The Manual Overwrite function is always done using the HMI on the SIPROTEC® 4
devices.
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
7UM61 Manual 4-17
C53000-G1176-C127-1
4.6 General Setting Procedure
The SIPROTEC® 4 devices are delivered with standard default settings. Changes to
the settings are done with DIGSI® 4.
The setting procedure for a SIPROTEC® 4 device consists of:
q Overall Protection and Control Design:
q Determining the functions that are to be used (device configuration),
q Masking the binary inputs, outputs, LEDs, buffers, system port, etc.
q Defining special logic functions (CFC).
q Specific Settings:
q Settings for all elements to be used,
q Settings of the protective functions,
q Settings of the process control functions.
Settings are first done Off-line. The settings are then loaded into the SIPROTEC® 4
device on-site using the operating serial interface, or remotely by modem and the service
interface.
K450.gif
Figure 4-12 Setting a SIPROTEC® 4 device using DIGSI® 4

The transfer of data from DIGSI® 4 to the SIPROTEC® 4 device is indicated in the display.
The progress of the transfer is displayed. See Figure 4-13.
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
4-18 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 4-13 Display of Device during Settings Transfer
Setting Sequence When setting a SIPROTEC® 4 device, adhere to the following sequence:
q Specify the interfaces, the device data, and the time synchronization,
q Determine the device configuration to be used,
q Design the masking of the inputs and outputs using the configuration matrix,
q Set the default display,
q Design all of the special logic that is to be employed using CFC,
q Enter the power system data,
q Apply the settings to groups A to D (groups B to D optional),
q Set the passwords.
Setting steps partially build on the decisions from the previous steps. By following the
sequence listed, unnecessary changes and rework are avoided. The sequence ensures
that information required for an individual step will be available.
/2$'_3$5$0(7(5
_____________________
_____________________
'RZQORDG_DFWLYH
Note:
Online changes to the configuration matrix and the control display are protected by
Password No. 7 (Password for parameter set).
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
7UM61 Manual 4-19
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Settings for
Protective
Elements
Setting changes to individual protective elements can be done using the local HMI on
the SIPROTEC® 4 device.
Other settings such as input/output masking and device configuration can be viewed
from the front panel, but not changed.
• Display the settings on the LCD using 0DLQ_0HQX → 6HWWLQJV → e.g. 0DVNLQJ_
_,_2_.
• Change settings such as date and time using 0DLQ_0HQX → 6HWWLQJV → 6HWXS_
([WUDV.
Figure 4-14 Changing Settings using the HMI, Example
_0_$_,_1___0_(_1_8________________________
$QQXQFLDWLRQ____²!___
0HDVXUHPHQW_____²!___
&RQWURO_________²!___
6HWWLQJV________²!___
7HVW_'LDJQRVH___²!___
_6_(_7_7_,_1_*_6__________________________
'HYLFH_&RQILJ__²!____
0DVNLQJ__,_2___²!____
3_6\VWHP_'DWD__²!____
*URXS_$________²!____
*URXS_%________²!____
*URXS_&________²!____
*URXS_'________²!____
&KDQJH_*URXS___²!____
2VF_)DXOW_5HF__²!____
6HWXS_([WUDV___²!____
'HYLFH_________²!____
_____________________
$FWLYH_*URXS_LV_____$
Note:
Online changes to the individual settings are protected by Password No. 5 (Password
for single settings).
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
4-20 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
4.7 Device Configuration
The individual devices within the SIPROTEC® 4 family can be supplied with various
protective functions. The ordering number of the device determines the available functions.
The functions are specified more precisely through the process of enabling and
disabling in the Device Configuration area of the settings.
To specify the active functions using DIGSI® 4:
• Double click on 'HYLFH_&RQILJXUDWLRQ in the data window.
• Click on the individual fields and select the functions to be enabled., e.g. 66 Startup
Counter for Motors.
k453.gif
Figure 4-15 DIGSI® 4, Setting the Device Configuration, Example

The Device Configuration can be viewed from the HMI on the SIPROTEC® 4 device.
• In the main menu, select 6HWWLQJV → 'HYLFH_&RQILJ.
.
Figure 4-16 Viewing Device Configuration from the HMI, Example

'(9,&(_&21),*___________
____________________
_____&ROGORDG_3LFNXS
_____(QDEOHG
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
7UM61 Manual 4-21
C53000-G1176-C127-1
4.8 Configuration of Inputs and Outputs (Configuration Matrix)
A configuration matrix is used to determine processing of the binary inputs, outputs,
LEDs, and indication buffers.
Configuration is performed with DIGSI® 4.
The configuration matrix is primarily divided into the following columns:
q Device functions with a selection field for the function settings;
q messages, e.g. indications or command with
q Information number, identification of the information, and a description in the appropriate
device documentation,
q Display text, representative of the information on the device display,
q Long text, extensive description of the information,
q Type, identification of the information, e.g. BR_D2 Double command with checkback
indication;
q Source, that is, origin of the information with
q Binary inputs for initiating indications,
q Function key F, freely programmable key on the HMI, e.g. assigned to trigger
events,
q CFC (Programmable logic), user-specific logic outputs as the origin of the information;
q Destination of the information, with
q Binary outputs for the output of signals,
q LED, display of information, e.g. messages,
q System interface, transmission of information, e.g. to SCADA or substation controller,
q CFC (Programmable logic), information as an input to a user-specified logic,
q Buffer, in which the information should be entered,
– Operation buffer or
– Sensitive Ground Fault buffer or
– Trip Log,
q Display within
– – Default Display,
q Control Menu, primary device can be controlled or tagging can be set.
The user determines the configurations by
q Clicking on the appropriate column, or by
q Using the context menu: L (latched), U (Unlatched), H (activate high), L (activate
low), _ (not configured), etc.
DIGSI® 4 checks the entry for plausibility and locks the input field if necessary. A
locked input field is shown in gray.
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
4-22 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
k4111.gif
Figure 4-17 DIGSI® 4, Input/Output Masking with the Configuration Matrix, Example
Filter Function With the use of filters, either all information can be displayed or a selection can
be
done according to indications, commands, or measured values.
Additionally, there is a filter setting that differentiates between information configured
and not configured.
The filters allows for a quick overview and simple checking of the configuration settings.
Also, columns and rows can be temporarily hidden from view, so that the user can
combine only the sections of the total matrix that are relevant.
New Information A further function of the configuration matrix is the capability to define new
information.
This is accomplished by inserting a new line, assigning the appropriate information
type, and configuring the source with an output (binary outputs, LED, etc.). The new
information can also be displayed in the LCD of the SIPROTEC® 4 device.
Function Keys The function keys on the HMI of the SIPROTEC® 4 device can be assigned to
commonly
performed operating functions, e.g. initiation of a control operation. Select the
appropriate function key to in the Source F column for the related information
(e.g. control command).
F1 F4
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
7UM61 Manual 4-23
C53000-G1176-C127-1
CFC SIPROTEC® 4 device information can be connected in a user-specified manner using
the programmable logic components of the DIGSI® 4 CFC. For example, the user can
implement interlocking checks, create grouped messages, or derive limit value violation
messages.
Information can be both a source and a destination in combined CFC editing. The specific
logic’s inputs, e.g. the individual messages that are to be combined to form a
grouped message, must be marked in the 'HVWLQDWLRQ_& column. The logic’s output,
the grouped message in this example, is derived from the 6RXUFH_& column.
Displaying Masking
in the HMI
The masking can be seen in the HMI of the SIPROTEC® 4 device.
• In the main menu, select 6HWWLQJV → 0DVNLQJ__,_2_.
.
• In the next menu, select 0DVNLQJ__,_2_ → e.g. %LQDU\_,QSXWV.

.
Figure 4-18 Reading the Masking using the HMI, example Binary Input 2
_0_$_6_._,_1_*_____,___2__________________
!%LQDU\_,QSXWV__²!___
!/('____________²!___
_%_,_1_$_5_<___,_1_3_8_7_6________________
!%LQDU\_,QSXW___²!__²
!%LQDU\_,QSXW___²!__²
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
4-24 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
4.9 Programmable Logic CFC
The CFC program in DIGSI® 4 can be used to create additional logic in SIPROTEC®
4 devices. For example, special interlocking conditions for controlled equipment can
be designed. Limit checks for measured values can be created, and corresponding
control can be designed.
SIPROTEC® 4 devices have some CFC functions set at the factory, according to the
version of the device.
User-defined CFC functions are done in graphical form. Generic logic modules (AND,
OR, NAND, etc.) and analog modules that are specially created for the requirements
of process control engineering (e.g., MAX, MIN, etc.) are available.
The CFC-modules are combined to form complete CFC-Logic Functions in order to
q perform system-specific checks (interlocking),
q generate messages if measured values approach a critical value, or
q build group messages for transfer to higher-level control systems.
k4122.gif
Figure 4-19 DIGSI® 4, CFC Basic Options, Example
CFC Designing Figure 4-20 shows the graphical nature of the CFC logic tool, and some of the
components
that can be used to build the logic.
Details about designing with the CFC program can be found in the instruction book,
order number E50417-H1176-C098.
Note:
Online changes are protected in DIGSI® 4 by Password No. 7 (Password for parameter
set).
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
7UM61 Manual 4-25
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 4-20 CFC Logic, example
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
4-26 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
4.10 Power System Data
Power System
Data 1
In the window for Power System Data 1, important settings are entered that relate to
the power system and primary equipment connected to the device. The settings include:
q Power system data such as frequency, voltage, etc.
q Data for the main current transformers and voltage transformers,
q Circuit breaker or primary switchgear information, including a current threshold setting
that is used to indicate the open/close position of the primary equipment in several
protection functions.
k4124.gif
Figure 4-21 DIGSI® 4 Window for Setting the Power System Data 1, example
Power System
Data 2
Power System Data 2 are part of the setting groups, which can be switched over during
operation (see chapter 4.11). These include for example:
q Primary Operating Voltage
q Primary Operating Current
q Characteristic Data of the protected object etc.
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
7UM61 Manual 4-27
C53000-G1176-C127-1
4.11 Setting Groups
A SIPROTEC® 4 device has four setting groups A through D. The setting options for
each group are the same; however, the applied settings can be, and are typically intended
to be, different in each group. The active setting group can easily be changed
while the device is in-service. A major advantage of multiple setting groups is the capability
of optimizing the protection and control for the existing configuration of the network
being protected. In other words, the protection and control can be changed as
the network changes.
The setting groups are saved in the device. The setting groups can be changed during
operation using DIGSI® 4, from the HMI on the device, by triggering binary inputs, or
via the system interface.
k4114.gif
Figure 4-22 DIGSI® 4, Entering Settings in Setting Group A; Other Groups are Similar
Note:
Settings that are common to all protective functions, such as Power System Data 2,
can be dynamically activated like the settings in Groups A through D.
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
4-28 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Settings Double click on a protective function shown in the smaller window of Figure 4-22or on
the button Settings (when the desired function has been selected) to obtain a window
for entering the general settings associated with the function and the settings of the
protective elements belonging to the function (Fig. 4-23).
f
Figure 4-23 DIGSI® 4, Entering Settings for a Protective Function, example

Changing Setting
Groups
The setting groups can be changed during operation using DIGSI® 4, from the HMI on
the device, by triggering binary inputs, or via the system interface. The active setting
group is indicated.
Figure 4-24 SIPROTEC® 4 Device, Changing Setting Groups on the HMI
*URXS_$
*URXS_%
*URXS_&
*URXS_'
%LQDU\_,QSXW
,(&_____²_²___ via protocol
_&_+_$_1_*_(___*_5_2_8_3________________
_____$&7,9(_*5283
_____*URXS_$_
_____&+$1*(_WR
_____*URXS_$
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
7UM61 Manual 4-29
C53000-G1176-C127-1
4.12 General Device Settings
The settings of the display to show information of network faults on the LEDs and the
LCD on the front of the SIPROTEC® 4 device are defined in the DIGSI® 4 window
shown below.
k4123.gif
Figure 4-25 DIGSI® 4, General Device Settings (Targets), example
The setting can also be changed at any time using the HMI on the SIPROTEC® 4 device:
0DLQ_0HQX → 6HWWLQJV → 'HYLFH.
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
4-30 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
4.13 Time Synchronization
Time tracking in a SIPROTEC® 4 device can be implemented using:
q DCF77 Radio Receiver (Time Signal from PTB Braunschweig),
q IRIG-B Radio Receiver (Time Signal from the global positioning satellite (GPS) system),
q Signals via the system interface from SCADA, for example,
q Radio clock using a system-specific synchronizer box,
q Minute impulses on a binary input,
q Inter-device communication (field bus).
The possibilities of time synchronization are protocol-dependent and are listed in the
table “Protocol-dependent functions” in the Appendix.
Time signal generators are connected via a 9-pin D-subminiature port on the back
panel of the device.
Setting of the time synchronization is done exclusively with DIGSI® 4:
• Double click on 7LPH_6\QFKURQL]DWLRQ in the data window and enter the settings.
ka455.gif
Figure 4-26 DIGSI® 4 Setting of the Time Synchronization, example
Readout in the
HMI
Using the SIPROTEC® 4 device HMI, the time synchronization settings can be
checked: 0DLQ_0HQX → 6HWWLQJV → 6HWXS_([WUDV → &ORFN_6HWXS.
.
Figure 4-27 Readout of Time Synchronization Settings from the HMI

_&_/_2_&_.___6_(_7_8_3____________________
2IIVHW____________PLQ
(UURU_7LPH________PLQ
6RXUFH_______,QWHUQDO
_6_(_7_8_3___(_;_7_5_$_6__________________
'DWH_7LPH_______²!___
&ORFN_6HWXS_____²!___
6HULDO_3RUWV____²!___
'HYLFH_,'_______²!___
0/)%_9HUVLRQ____²!_____
&RQWUDVW________²!___
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
7UM61 Manual 4-31
C53000-G1176-C127-1
4.14 Serial Interfaces
Devices in the SIPROTEC® 4 family can be equipped with up to four serial interfaces
and a time.
q The system interface on the back panel of the device is used for connection with
higher-level control centers. The following protocols are presently available:
• IEC 60870-5-103,
• PROFIBUS FMS,
• PROFIBUS DP,
• DNP3.0 Level 2,
• MODBUS ASCII/RTU
q The time control interface on the back panel of the device is used for time synchronization
(e.g. IRIG B),
q The service interface (DIGSI® 4, Modem) on the back panel is for connection to
remote diagnostic facilities, e.g. DIGSI® 4 via modem and/or a star connection. All
DIGSI® 4 operations are possible via this interface,
q The PC-interface at front is used for on-site connection of a PC, on which DIGSI® 4
is installed. All operations that are possible using DIGSI® 4 can be done at this interface.
In the DIGSI® 4 Interface Settings window (under Serial Ports) you can define,
among other items, settings for:
q Transmission protocols and
q Transmission speeds.
Note:
The service (DIGSI® 4, Modem) and system interface (SCADA) can be equipped with
different modules for connection to other devices via optical fibers or an RS 232/485
bus.
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
4-32 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
The following an example for the configuring of an IEC-interface. In Chapter 5 you will
learn more about how to configure further protocols.
To set the framing and baud rate:
• Double click on 6HULDO_3RUWV in the data window and enter the specific settings
in the window that follows.
Figure 4-28 DIGSI® 4, Interface Settings Window
Readout in the
HMI
The interface settings can be checked using the SIPROTEC® 4 device HMI.
In the main menu, select 6HWWLQJV → 6HWXS_([WUDV → 6HULDO_3RUWV
→ following
menus.
Figure 4-29 Readout of Serial Interface Settings from the HMI, example
_6_(_5_,_$_/___3_2_5_7_6__________________
)URQW_3RUW______²!___
6\VWHP_3RUW_____²!___
6HUYLFH_3RUW____²!___
_6_(_7_8_3___(_;_7_5_$_6__________________
'DWH_7LPH_______²!___
&ORFN_6HWXS_____²!___
6HULDO_3RUWV____²!___
'HYLFH²,'_______²!___
0/)%_9HUVLRQ____²!_____
&RQWUDVW________²!___
Note:
The interface for connecting a time control device is described in the Sub-section 4.14,
Time Synchronization.
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
7UM61 Manual 4-33
C53000-G1176-C127-1
4.15 Passwords
Passwords are assigned to a SIPROTEC® 4 device to protect against unintended
changes to the device or unauthorized operations from the device, such as control.
The following access levels are defined at the factory:
q Switching/tagging/manual overwrite,
q Non-interlocked switching,
q Test and diagnostics,
q Hardware test menus,
q Individual settings,
q Setting Groups.
ka458.gif
Figure 4-30 DIGSI® 4, Window Indicating the Active Passwords, example
When using DIGSI® 4 or the HMI on the SIPROTEC® 4 device, a password is requested
for the specific function.
Note:
Password protection against unauthorized access is only in place during on-line operation.
The passwords for setting changes are first activated when the settings are
loaded into the device. The passwords are irrelevant in the DIGSI® 4 off-line mode.
To deactivate a password, the password must be known.
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
4-34 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Passwords can only be changed using DIGSI® 4.
To change an existing password:
• In the Passwords window shown in Figure 4-30, double click on the password to be
changed. In the next window (Figure 4-31), enter the present password, the new
password, and confirm with the new password again and 2..
k4119.gif
Figure 4-31 DIGSI® 4, Changing Passwords
Passwords are numbers up to 8 digits.
At delivery all passwords are set to 000000.
n
Note:
If the password for setting group switching has been forgotten, a temporary password
can be received from Siemens. The temporary password can be used to define a new
password for this function.
The registration number of the DIGSI® 4 software package will be required to receive
the temporary password.
7UM61 Manual 5-1
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Configuration 5
Configuration is the process of customizing the relay for the intended application.
To accomplish this, the following questions must be answered:
• Which functions are needed?
• Which data and measured quantities need to be retrieved via which inputs?
• Which control actions need to be issued via which outputs?
• Which user-definable functions need to be performed in CFC (Continuous Function
Chart)?
• Which information is to be presented on the display of the device?
• Which interfaces are to be used?
• Which time source is to be used to synchronize the internal clock?
This chapter describes in details how to configure the 7UM61.
5.1 Configuration of Functions 5-2
5.2 Configuration of Information, Meaured Values, and Commands 5-6
5.3 Creating User Defined Functions with CFC 5-30
5.4 Establishing a Default Display 5-38
5.5 Serial Interfaces 5-39
5.6 Date and Time Stamping 5-47
Configuration
5-2 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
5.1 Configuration of Functions
General The 7UM61 relay contains a series of protective and additional functions. The scope
of hardware and firmware is matched to these functions. Furthermore, commands
(control actions) can be suited to individual needs of the protected object. In addition,
individual functions may be enabled or disabled during configuration, or interaction between
functions may be adjusted.
The available functions must be configured as HQDEOHG RU GLVDEOHG. For individual
functions, the choice between several alternatives may be presented, as described
below.
Functions configured as GLVDEOHG are not processed by the 7UM61. There are no
messages, and corresponding settings (functions, limit values) are not displayed during
detailed settings.
Determination of
Functional Scope
Configuration settings may be entered using a PC and the software program DIGSI® 4
and transferred via the operating interface on the device front, or via the rear serial
service interface. Operation via DIGSI® 4 is described in Chapter 4 as well as in the
DIGSI® 4 manual, order number E50417–H1176–C097.
Entry of password No. 7 (for setting modification) is required to modify configuration
settings (see Section 4.16). Without the password, the settings may be read, but cannot
be modified and transmitted to the device.
The functional scope with the available options is set in the 'HYLFH_&RQILJXUDWLRQ
dialogue box (see Figure 5-1) to match equipment requirements. To change a function,
click on the corresponding line under 6FRSH, and select the desired option in the
list which appears. The drop-down list closes automatically upon selection of an item.
Note:
Available functions and default settings are depending on the ordering code of the relay
(see table 6-1 and ordering code in the appendix for details).
Configuration
7UM61 Manual 5-3
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 5-1 Device Configuration dialogue box in DIGSI® 4 — example
Before closing the dialogue box, transfer the modified functional setting to the relay by
clicking on the item ',*6, → 'HYLFH. The data is stored in the relay in a non-volatile
memory buffer.
The configured functional scope can be viewed at the front of the relay itself, but cannot
be modified there. The settings associated with the functional scope can be found
in the 0$,1_0(18 under → 6HWWLQJV → 'HYLFH_&RQILJ.
Special Cases Most settings are self-explanatory. The special cases are described below.
If the setting group change-over function is to be used, the setting in address ____
*US_&KJH 237,21 must be set to (QDEOHG. In this case, it is possible to apply two
groups of settings for the function parameters (refer also to Sub-section 6). During normal
operation, a convenient and fast switch-over between these setting groups is possible.
The setting 'LVDEOHG implies that only one function parameter setting group
can be applied and used.
Parameter 01___)$8/7_9$/8( is used to specify whether the oscillographic fault recording
should record 0HDQ_YDOXHV or 506_YDOXHV. If 506_YDOXHV are recorded,
the available recording time increases by the factor 16.
For the I>> stage of the overcurrent protection, address ____ 2_&_3527__,!! allows
to seth that stage to 1RQ²'LUHFWLRQDO or 'LUHFWLRQDO. By setting 'LVDEOHG,
this overcurrent stage can be excluded altogether. For the inverse time overcurrent
protection set in address _____2_&_3527__,S, different sets of inverse characteristics
are available, depending on the version ordered; these are either according to
IEC (ZLWK_,(&_FKDUDFW_) or according to ANSI (ZLWK_$16,_FKDUDFW_). Inverse
time overcurrent protection can be excluded altogether by setting 'LVDEOHG.
For earth fault protection, address ____ 6_(_)_3527_ presents the options QRQ²
GLU__RQO\_8_, QRQ²GLU__8_ ,_ and 'LUHFWLRQDO, unless the whole function
is 'LVDEOHG. The first option evaluates only the displacement voltage (to be used with
block connection). The second option evaluates in addition to the displacement voltage
the magnitude of the earth fault current (or the difference between the starpoint
current and the total current of a cable CT, as is the case in busbar systems with lowohmic
switchable starpoint resistors). The third option considers as a third criterion the
Configuration
5-4 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
direction of the earth fault current in the case of machines in busbar connection where
the magnitudes of displacement voltage and earth fault current alone are not sufficient
to distinguish between system earth faults and machine earth faults.
For trip circuit monitoring, address ____ ___7ULS_&LU__6XS_ is used to specify
whether two binary inputs should be utilized, one binary input should be utilized, or the
function should be disabled.
Adr. Setting Setting Options Default Setting Explanation
103 Grp Chge OPTION Disabled
Enabled
Disabled Setting group switching
(A, B)
104 FAULT VALUE Disabled
Mean values
RMS values
Mean values Waveform capture
112 O/C PROT. I> Disabled
Enabled
Enabled Overcurrent time protection
(definite time element I>)
113 O/C PROT. I>> Disabled
Non–Directional
Directional
Non–Directional Overcurrent time protection
(definite time element I>>)
114 O/C PROT. Ip Disabled
with IEC–characteristic
with ANSI–characteristic
Disabled Overcurrent time protection
(inverse–time element)
116 Therm.Overload Disabled
Enabled
Enabled Thermal overload protection
117 UNBALANCE LOAD Disabled
Enabled
Enabled Unbalance load protection
130 UNDEREXCIT. Disabled
Enabled
Enabled Underexcitation protection
131 REVERSE POWER Disabled
Enabled
Enabled Reverse power protection
132 FORWARD POWER Disabled
Enabled
Enabled Forward power supervision
133 IMPEDANCE PROT. Disabled
Enabled
Enabled Impedance protection
140 UNDERVOLTAGE Disabled
Enabled
Enabled Undervoltage protection
141 OVERVOLTAGE Disabled
Enabled
Enabled Overvoltage protection
142 FREQUENCY Prot. Disabled
Enabled
Enabled Frequency protection (over and
under-frequency)
143 OVEREXC. PROT. Disabled
Enabled
Enabled Overexcitation protection
150 S/E/F PROT. non–dir only U0
non–dir. U0&I0
Directional
Disabled
non–dir. U0&I0 Stator earth fault protection
151 O/C PROT. Iee> Disabled
Enabled
Enabled Sensitive earth current protection
Configuration
7UM61 Manual 5-5
C53000-G1176-C127-1
152 SEF 3rd HARM. Disabled
Enabled
Enabled 100–%–Stator earth fault protection
with 3rd harmonic
170 BREAKER FAILURE Disabled
Enabled
Enabled Breaker failure protection
171 INADVERT. EN. Disabled
Enabled
Enabled Inadvertent energisation protection
180 FUSE FAIL MON. Disabled
Enabled
Enabled Fuse Failure Monitor
181 M.V. SUPERV Disabled
Enabled
Enabled Measured values monitoring
182 Trip Cir. Sup. Disabled
with 2 Binary Inputs
with 1 Binary Input
Disabled Trip circuit (e.g. breaker) monitoring
and method - using one
binary input or two.
186 EXT. TRIP 1 Disabled
Enabled
Enabled External trip command 1 via
binary input
Enabled
binary inpu
Enabled
binary inpu
Enabled
binary inpu
Adr. Setting Setting Options Default Setting Explanation
Configuration
5-6 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
5.2 Configuration of Information, Meaured Values, and
Commands
General Upon delivery, the display on the front panel of the relay, some of the function keys,
the binary inputs and outputs (output contacts) are assigned to certain information.
These assignments may be modified, for most information, allowing adaptation to the
local requirements.
During configuration, certain information within the relay is assigned to certain physical
interfaces (e.g., binary inputs and output contacts) or logical interfaces (e.g., userdefined
logic, CFC).
It must be determined which information should be linked with which device interface.
It may also be determined which properties the information and the interfaces should
have.
Messages and statistical values from earlier events can be lost during configuration;
therefore, operational and fault data and statistic counters which are memorized in the
relay should be read and saved if desired, prior to changing the configuration.
5.2.1 Preparation
Before configuration is started, the overall interfacing requirements must be assessed.
The required inputs and outputs must be compared with the number of physical inputs
and outputs present on the relay. The types of indications and commands, and their
requirements, should be taken into account.
Indications Indications may be information of the device regarding events and conditions that
can
be transmitted via output contacts (e.g. start-up of the processor system or a trip signal
initiated by a protective function). These are defined as output indications. Indications
also include information from the plant to the relay regarding plant events and
conditions (e.g. position or condition of a circuit breaker). These are defined as input
indications.
Depending on the type, indications may be further classified. Figures 5-2 and 5-3
show typical indication types schematically. Two binary inputs whose normal conditions
are opposite, and which are monitored by the relay, are required for a double
point indication.
Figure 5-2 Output indication (OUT)
Restart
L+
(Internal logic
information)
Output indication via relay contact
(Plant)
(7UM61)
Configuration
7UM61 Manual 5-7
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 5-3 Input indications (SP & DP)
Commands Commands (control actions) are output indications which are specially configured for
the transmission of control signals to switching devices (circuit breakers, isolators,
etc.).
q For each device to be controlled, determine if switching is to be done with 1 contact,
11/2 contacts (single contact and common), or 2 contacts; with a single or double
command; and with or without feedback signals. See Table 5-1 and Figures 5-4 to
5-12. The information to be processed and the command type are determined with
these decisions.
q Assign the necessary binary inputs and outputs in the SIPROTEC® device to the
specific function. Important to note are:
− Messages and commands associated with a switching device must always occupy
sequential binary inputs and outputs in the SIPROTEC® device;
− The TRIP (OFF)–command is always configured prior to the associated CLOSE
(ON)–command;
− Limitations may arise because of the commoning of some binary inputs and outputs
in the SIPROTEC® device.
When the types of commands have been established, DIGSI® 4 reserves a corresponding
number of relay outputs contacts. For this, the corresponding output contacts
are numbered consecutively. This must be observed when wiring the relays to
the corresponding equipment to be controlled.
Table 5-1 shows the most important command types. They are made available as options
in the Configuration Matrix for the SIPROTEC® device (see also “Binary Outputs
for Switching Devices” in Sub-section 5.2.4). All double commands, with and without
feedback indications, are also available as transformer step commands. The following
Figures 5-4 through 5-9 show time diagrams, control settings, and the sequence of relay
positioning in the configuration matrix for frequently used command types.
L+
L–
e.g. mcb
L+
L–
e.g. Isoloation
switch
M
Single point indication (SP) Double point indication (DP)
Binary input
(e.g. BI1) Binary input
(e.g. BI 2)
Binary input
(.e.g. BI 3)
(Plant)
(7UM61) (7UM61)
(Plant)
Table 5-1 Most Important Command Types
Single Command with Single
Output
With 1 contact without feedback
with feedback
&B6_
&)B6
Double Command with Single
Outputs
With 2 contacts without feedback
with feedback
&B'_
&)B'_
Outputs plus Common Output
with feedback
&B'_
&)B'_
Configuration
5-8 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
For double commands, the first output relay is selected using DIGSI® 4. The other output
relays will automatically be selected by DIGSI® 4. In the sequence of output relays,
each TRIP command is placed before the associated CLOSE command. For
commands with processing of feedback indications, DIGSI® 4 reserves a line in the
configuration matrix for the switching device feedback indications. Here, the OPEN
position feedback is placed before the CLOSED position feedback as well.
For Figures 5-4 through 5-9, the following abbreviations apply:
− C+ Relay Contact for Closing
− C– Relay Contact Tripping
− CC Relay Contact is Common
− CCC Relay Contact is Common to a Bus
− L+, L– Control Voltage
Figure 5-4 Single command with single contact
Figure 5-5 Double command with single contacts
Outputs and Common Bus Output
Minimum 3
contacts
without feedback
with feedback
C_D2
CF_D2
Double Command with Double
Outputs
with feedback
&B'_
&)B'_
Double Command with Double
(Close) and Single (Trip) Outputs
with feedback
&B'__
&)B'__
Table 5-1 Most Important Command Types
C+
X
C+
t
CLOSESwitching
device
C+
L+
L–
Matrix configuration:
1
CLOSE
command
CLOSE
command
C+
C–
TRIP
command
t
CLOSE Switching TRIP
device
C+ C–
L+
L–
C+
X
1 C–
X
2
Configuration
7UM61 Manual 5-9
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 5-6 Double command with single contacts plus common contact
Figure 5-7 Double Command on Common Bus with Single Contacts and Common Contact
Figure 5-7 shows the common output relay with several switching devices, in contrast
to all other output relays. Simultaneous control of multiple switching devices is
blocked, for safety reasons.
The common output relay automatically acquires the characteristics of the controlling
relay upon issuing of a command to a switching device and, therefore, is not individually
configured. The final command output is via a single contact.
CLOSE
command
C+
C–
TRIP
command
CC
t
device
C+ C–
L+
L–
CC
C+
X
1
C–
X
23
X
CC
CLOSING
Command
C+
C–
TRIPPING
Command
CCC
t
Switching
Device 2...n
CCC
Matrix Configuration:
C+
X
BO 1
C–
X
2
X
CCC
n
CLOSE TRIP
COIL COIL
CLOSESwitching TRIP
device
C+ C–
L+
L–
Configuration
5-10 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 5-8 Double command with double contacts (with 4 relays)
Figure 5-9 Double command with double and single contacts (with 3 relays)
5.2.2 Structure and Operation of the Configuration Matrix
General This section deals with the structure and operation of the configuration matrix. The
configuration matrix can be viewed without making any configuration changes. Information
characteristics and configuration steps are described in Section 5.2.3, and
configuration is demonstrated in Section 5.2.4.
Configuration of information is performed, using a PC and the DIGSI® 4 software program,
via the operator or service interface. The configuration is represented in
DIGSI® 4 as a matrix (Figure 5-10). Each row is assigned to an information of the device.
It is identified by a function number No, brief text (display text D), an explanation
CLOSE
command
C+1
C+2
TRIP
command
C–1
t
device
C+1 C–1
L+
L–
C+2
C–2
C–2
C+1
X
1
C–1
X
234
C+2
X
C–2
X
CLOSE
command
C+1
C+2
TRIP
command
C–
t
device
C+1 C–
L+
L–
C+2
C+1
X
1
C–
X
23
X
C+2
Configuration
7UM61 Manual 5-11
C53000-G1176-C127-1
(long text L, minimized in Figure 5-10), and an information type T. The columns give
the interfaces which should be the sources and/or destinations of the information. In
addition to physical device inputs and outputs, there may be internal interfaces for
user definable logic (CFC), message buffers, or the device display.
Figure 5-10 Extract from the Configuration Matrix in the DIGSI® 4 Software — Example
Information in the rows is assigned to appropriate interfaces in the columns via an entry
in the intersecting cell. This establishes which information controls which destination,
or from which source information is received.
In the configuration matrix, not only the configuration is shown, but also the type of
configuration. For example, information regarding an event which is configured for
display on a LED may be latched or unlatched.
The possible combinations of information and interfaces is dependent on the information
type. Impossible combinations are mostly filtered out by DIGSI® 4 plausibility
checks.
The matrix columns are divided into three types: Information, Source, and Destination.
To the left of the matrix, information is divided into information groups.
Filter Information Catalog Standard View Short view
Configuration
5-12 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Reducing the Matrix
The matrix may become very extensive because of the amount of information contained
within. Therefore, it is useful to limit the display (via filtering) to certain information,
thus reducing the number of rows.
The toolbar below the menu line contains two pull-down menus by which information
may be filtered. Using the first menu, the rows can be limited to indications, commands,
indications and commands, or measured and metered values. The second
menu allows display of configured information, information configured to physical inputs
and outputs, or non-configured information.
A further reduction in the number of rows is possible, by compressing an information
group to one row. This is done by double-clicking on the group label area (located to
the far left). If this is done, the number of rows is reduced, allowing the user to focus
on the information group of interest. A second double-click restores all rows in the information
group.
To limit the width of the matrix, two possibilities exist: The tool bar allows to switch between
standard view and short view, or individual columns can be hidden.
In the latter case you double-click on the field with the column heading thus hiding the
contents of the associated column. In the example of Figure 5-10, the long text (/) under
IQIRUPDWLRQ is not shown. By double-clicking on long text field (/), the long text
becomes visible again, and vice versa.
With two options on the tool bar you may switch between standard view and short
view, thus modifying the all columns under the 6RXUFH and 'HVWLQDWLRQ title
blocks. The columns associated with the ,QIRUPDWLRQ block remain unchanged.
In standard view, all binary inputs, binary outputs, and LEDs are accessible, as shown
in Figure 5-10 for the binary outputs and LEDs.
In short view (not illustrated in the figure), a common column is displayed for each of
the sources and destinations. Within the individual cells of a common column, information
regarding the configuration type is available in an abbreviated form. For example,
the abbreviation H1 in a cell of the common binary input (BI) column means that
the corresponding information is configured with active voltage (High) to binary input
1. If an information is assigned to several sources or destinations, the abbreviations
of all destinations are shown, separated by commas. If there is not enough space in
the cell for the simultaneous display of all abbreviations, a double-click on the cell and
movement of the text cursor within the cell allows to scroll through the entire contents
of the cell.
To switch between standard view and short view, the menu item 9LHZ can also be
used.
Information Groups All information is organized into information groups. In addition to general
relay information,
information regarding individual device functions is also included.
By clicking on an information group title area with the right mouse button, a context
menu can be viewed, which contains information regarding the properties of that information
group. This is particularly useful if the information group is associated with a
function that contains parameter settings.
If the information group belongs to a protective function for the relay, a dialogue window
can be accessed in which the settings of the protective function may be read out
and modified. The procedure for entering settings of a protective function is described
in general in Chapter 4. Details regarding the settings for various functions are found
in Chapter 6.
The settings group to be processed may be selected via the menu item 9LHZ → 6HW_
WLQJ_*URXS.
Configuration
7UM61 Manual 5-13
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Information The column header ,QIRUPDWLRQ comprises the function number, the brief text
(display
text), an explanation (long text), and the information type. The following abbreviations
are used for the information types:
• Messages:
− SP Single Point Indication
− DP Double Point Indication
− OUT Output Indication
− IntSP Internal Single Point Indication
− IntDP Internal Double Point Indication
− TxTap Transformer Tap Changer
• Commands:
− C_S Single Command with Single Output without feedback
− CF_S Single Command with Single Output with feedback
− C_SN Single Command with Single Output Negated without
feedback
− CF_SN Single Command with Single Output Negated with feedback
− C_D2 Double Command (2 relays) with Single Outputs without
feedback
− CF_D2 Double Command (2 relays) with Single Outputs with
feedback
− C_D12 Double Command with Single Trip Outputs and Double Close
Outputs without feedback
− CF_D12 Double Command with Single Trip Outputs and Double Close
Outputs with feedback
− C_D3 Double Command (3 relays) with Single Outputs and
Common Output without feedback
− CF_D3 Double Command (3 relays) with Single Outputs and
Common Output with feedback
− C_D4 Double Command (4 relays) with Double Outputs without
feedback
− CF_D4 Double Command (4 relays) with Double Outputs with
feedback
− C_D2N Double Command (2 relays) with Single Outputs Negated
without feedback
− CF_D2N Double Command (2 relays) with Single Outputs Negated
with feedback
• Measured Values:
− MV Measured Value
− MVU Measured Value, User Defined
− MVT Measured Value with time
− LV Limit Value
− LVU Limit Value, User Defined
• Metered Values:
− MVMV Metered Value of Measured Values
− PMV Pulse Metered Value
Configuration
5-14 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
The information contains various properties depending on the information type, which
are partially fixed and may be partially influenced.
Source The source indicates the origin of the information which the device receives for further
processing. Possible sources are:
Destination The destination indicates to which interface the information is forwarded. Possible
destinations are:
For additional information please refer to appendix A.7.
5.2.3 Establishing Information Properties
General Different types of information contain different types of properties. To view the properties
associated with a specific information unit (indication, command, etc.), position the
mouse on the specific row under ,QIRUPDWLRQ, and then use the right mouse button
to access a context menu where 3URSHUWLHV can be selected.
For example, if the cursor is positioned on a specific output indication, the right mouse
button is pressed, and the menu item 3URSHUWLHV is selected, then a choice of
whether the indication should appear in the oscillographic fault records (Figures 5-11,
5-12, and 5-13) is presented. For internal single point indications, the default status of
the indication (on, off, or undefined) after device reset can be selected as well (Figure
5-12).
− BI Binary input
− F Function key, which may serve to introduce a control action
− C CFC, i.e., message comes from user-definable logic
− BO Binary output
− LED LED display on the device front panel
− Buffer O Operational indication buffer in the device
− Buffer T Trip Log buffer in the device
− S System interface
− C CFC, information is processed by CFC program of the user-definable
logic
− CM Control of switching devices, if a switching object should be controlled
from control display/menue of the device
Configuration
7UM61 Manual 5-15
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Output Indication
(OUT)
Figure 5-11 Information properties — example for the information type “Output Indication”
(OUT)
Internal Single
Point Indication
(IntSP)
Figure 5-12 Information properties — example for the information type “Internal Single Point
Indication” (IntSP)
Singe Point Indication
(SP)
Figure 5-13 Information properties — example for information type “Single Point Indication”
(SP)
Double Point Indication
(DP)
In addition to the properties entered for single point indications, a “Suppress intermediate
position” check box is available, which may be checked to suppress the intermediate
indication during operations. If this field is marked, then the filter time, which can
Configuration
5-16 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
also be set (see margin heading “Filtering/Contact Chatter Suppression” below), is
only effective for the intermediate (= undefined position) indication. Hence, briefly undefined
conditions or contact chattering will not lead to an alarm; however, defined
changes in the condition (final positions) are immediately reported.
Figure 5-14 Information properties — example for information type “Double Point Indication”
(DP)
Filtering / Contact
Chatter Suppression
For input indications (single point indications 63, double point indications '3), filter
times may be entered (pick-up and drop-out delays) to suppress momentary changes
in potential at the binary input (e.g. contact chatter), refer also to Figure 5-13 and 5-
14. Filtering occurs during an input change of state, with the same setting values
whether coming or going. Information is only distributed when the new state continues
to exist after a preset time interval (in milliseconds). The setting range is from 0 to
86,400,000 ms, or 24 hours. Whether or not the filter interval is restarted for each
change of state during the filtering (filter re-triggering) is selectable.
It is also possible to set chatter suppression for each indication (Figure 5-13 and 5-14).
The contact chatter settings, themselves, are set the same for all input indications (see
Sub-section 5.2.6).
Transformer Tap
Changer (TxTap)
The transformer tap changer position is communicated, via binary inputs, in a specified
encoding format (maximum of 62 positions). Only binary inputs that are in direct
order with regard to numbering can be used.
For the encoding formats available (binary code, BCD code, “1 of n” code), four settings
(number of positions, number of bits, display offset, and position change) may be
programmed. Their bit pattern corresponds to an individual transformer tap changer
position which is represented in the device display and in the indication buffers (Figure
5-15).
Configuration
7UM61 Manual 5-17
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 5-15 Information Properties Example for Information Type “Transformer Tap Changer”
(TxTap)
If none of the available encoding formats are selected, each individual tap changer position
may be set in a table. The table is accessed after the pull-down menu 7DEOH for
encoding is opened, by selecting the button to the side.
The encoded transformer tap changer position bit pattern is transformed into digital
values between 1 and 62. An unrecognized pattern is interpreted as position 63.
The number of bits coincides with the number of the binary inputs to be configured,
and limits the number of positions to be represented.
Using the display offset, the beginning of the evaluated bits may have an offset of a
programmed number. The stepping of the transfomer taps may be modified, using the
tap interval feature (see example).
Example:Four transformer position settings are to be represented by three binary inputs,
using the designators 3 through 6. The encoding is binary.
Using three binary inputs (= 3 bits), a maximum of 23 = 8 position settings may be represented
in binary code. In order to begin the representation of transformer tap changer
positions with the value 3, the display offset is chosen accordingly. The following
must be set on the information property window:
Encoding %LQDU\_
Number of positions _
Number of bits _
Display offset _
Position change _
Orientation Desired representation
BI1 BI2 BI3
- - - 63.00
X - - 3.00
- X - 4.00
X X - 5.00
- - X 6.00
X - X 63.00
Configuration
5-18 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
The three binary inputs used for this must have sequential numbers, such as BI 1, BI
2, and BI 3.
User Defined Measured
Values (MVU)
and Limit Values
(LVU)
For the information type “Measured Values User Defined” (098), the units, the conversion
factor, and the number of significant digits following the decimal point may be
specified. For the information type “Limit Values User Defined” (/98), a limit value may
be programmed (Figure 5-16).
Figure 5-16 Information properties example for information type “Limit Value User Defined”
(LVU)
If, for example, a low current reporter should be established using the CFC logic, and
the percentage of the measured current should be matched to a certain amp value,
the following values are entered in window according to Figure 5-16:
The 'LPHQVLRQ is A (amps). The &RQYHUVLRQ_)DFWRU is 150: 150 A corresponds
to 100 % input current. The limit value upon start-up is set for 120 A.
Entering Your Own
Information
The available information in the configuration matrix is determined by the device type
and the configured functional scope. If necessary, you may extend the configuration
matrix to information groups or individual information defined and entered by yourself.
Such user defined groups and information may be deleted at any time, in contrast to
predefined groups and information.
In order to insert a new information group, click on a cell within a group that is next to
the location where the new group should be located. After pressing the right mouse
button, a context menu appears (Figure 5-17).
Figure 5-17 Dialogue box to insert a new information group
If one of the first two alternatives is selected, a second dialogue box opens, in which
the name of the new information group is entered, in short text (display text) and in
long text (Figure 5-18). After clicking 2., the new group is positioned.
Configuration
7UM61 Manual 5-19
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 5-18 Entry of the name of a user defined information group
Information may be entered into the new information group using the information catalog
(Figure 5-19). The information catalog is found in the menu bar under the 9LHZ
option, or via an icon in the toolbar. User information may be entered into both the user
defined groups and any other available information group.
Figure 5-19 Information catalog window
The information catalog is basically structured the same way as the DIGSI® 4 Manager
with folders and sub-folders. To proceed to information of sub-folders in the catalog,
click on a plus symbol or double-click on an folder icon. The designation of the initial
levels of the catalog correspond to the information groups $QQXQFLDWLRQV, &RP_
PDQGV, 0HDVXUHG_9DOXHV and &RXQWHU_9DOXHV.
To insert a specific information unit into an information group, first select it in the catalog,
and using the left mouse button, it should then be dragged from the information
catalog window to a group area on the left of the matrix. After the mouse button is released,
the new information unit is inserted into the proper group.
In order to change the user defined information, double-click on the field containing
the new information and edit the text.
Deleting Groups
and Information
Only user defined groups and information can be deleted. To delete an entire group,
click on the field containing the group designator, then press the right mouse button to
Note:
When inserting information of the type &RQWURO_ZLWK_)HHG%DFN, two new rows will
be created within the group: one line for the actual command, and one for the associated
feedback message.
Configuration
5-20 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
open the context menu, and select 'HOHWH_*URXS. A confirmation window will appear
(Figure 5-20).
Figure 5-20 Confirmation window before deleting a user defined group
Click <HV if you actually want to delete the group.
To delete individual entries, click under ,QIRUPDWLRQ in the line with the entry to be
deleted. Then press the right mouse button to open the context menu, and select 'H_
OHWH_,QIRUPDWLRQ. The remaining steps are the same as those for deleting a
group.
5.2.4 Performing Configuration
The actual assignment between the information (rows) and the sources and destinations
(columns) of the information is made in the cell of intersection. You click into the
cell and press the right mouse button. A pull down menu appears where you may determine
the properties of the assignment.
In certain cases, the pull down menu will offer ; (allocated) or B (not allocated) as the
configuration choices. In other cases, three options will be offered (e.g. / = latched, 8
= unlatched, and B = not allocated). Entries resulting in an implausible configuration
are blocked and inaccessible to the user.
Configuring Binary
Inputs as Sources
Single point indications, double point indications, and pulse metered values can all be
configured as binary inputs. In addition, whether or not binary inputs are activated by
the presence of control voltage can be established. That is,
• “H” (High with voltage active): Control voltage at the binary input terminals activates
the indication;
• “/” (Low with voltage active): Control voltage at the binary input terminals deactivates
the indication.
Note:
When deleting a group, all information definitions within this group will be deleted.
Note:
A single logical indication should not be configured to two binary inputs, since an ORcombination
of both signals is not ensured. The operating program allows only one
combination, and deletes the first combination when a second is established.
Configuration
7UM61 Manual 5-21
C53000-G1176-C127-1
In addition, a single point indication cannot be configured to a binary input and to CFC
as a source at the same time. In this case, an error message would be displayed. Click
on 2., and select another configuration.
Figure 5-21 Error message resulting from double configuration
If a double point indication (DP) is configured to one binary input (e.g. feedback indications
from switching devices), the next binary input is also set in the matrix. If this
configuration is undone, the second binary input is automatically de-configured.
If a transformer tap changer indication is configured to a binary input, the next binary
inputs in order are also configured. Their total number is the same as the number of
bits configured for the transformer tap changer. If one of these inputs is deconfigured,
all related binary inputs are automatically deconfigured.
Configuring a
Function Key as a
Source
The four function keys on the front of the relay may also be configured as sources in
order to establish a link using CFC. In this situation, each function key may be linked
with one single internal indication. A function key may be occupied because it has already
been set as an operating function for the relay. As delivered from the factory, all
the device’s function keys are pre-configured:
In order to configure a new indication, select one of the options (OPEN/CLOSE, ON/
OFF, etc.) from the indication group in the information catalog and drag it to the left
side of the matrix. Upon release, a new row appears in the matrix. If the mouse is positioned
at the intersection of this row with column F, and the right mouse button is
pressed, a context menu opens (Figure 5-22) in which the function key may be set as
a source by clicking the proper choice.
F1 operating messages
F2 primary measured values
F3 overview of the last eight fault messages
F4 Reset of minimum/maximum measured values
Note:
When an indication is configured to a function key, its factory-assigned function is deleted.
Re-establishment of the factory default function of the F-keys is only possible
by initializing the relay with a new factory parameter set created within DIGSI® 4. All
device settings have to be re-entered.
Configuration
5-22 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 5-22 Selecting a function key as an information source
Configuring CFC as
a Source
If certain information should be created as a result of the implementation of a user defined
logic function (CFC), this information must appear in the matrix as a source from
CFC. Otherwise, this information will not be available to the user when editing the CFC
logic.
You must not configure information to CFC as a source if it is already configured to a
binary input.
Configuring Binary
Outputs as a
Destination
Up to 30 information units (commands and indications) may be configured to one binary
output (output relay). One indication may be configured to up to ten (10) binary
outputs (LEDs and output relays).
During configuration of binary outputs, you may select, for each output relay (besides
of the logic function itself), whether it should be latched (/) or unlatched (8). If you select
latched, the output relay remains energized, even after the indication is no longer
present. It must be manually reset by pressing the LED Reset button on the front panel
of the device, or via a binary input with the indication function “!/('_5HVHW”, or via
the serial system interface. If unlatched is selected, the output relay disengages as
soon as the indication disappears.
Binary Outputs for
Switching Devices
The user must be cautious when configuring binary outputs for switching devices. For
switching devices, the type of command (e.g., single or double commands, with or
without feedback) is defined and configured to the output relay. If the preset command
types are not desired, then appropriate command types can be selected from the Information
catalog (see also “Entering Your Own Information” in the previous sub-section)
and inserted into the Configuration Matrix.
Warning!
CFC connection have to be reestablished after renaming of a display text of an user
defined information. Within the CFC the old name is shown at the right column. Delete
this connection. Make connection to the desired blocks using the renamed information.
Configuration
7UM61 Manual 5-23
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 5-23 Window Information Catalog (Example: Different Command Types)
If a command with multiple outputs is configured, all binary outputs required in the matrix
for the configuration are automatically defined. If one of these outputs is deconfigured,
all other binary outputs associated with the command will be automatically deconfigured.
Please pay attention to the comments and switching examples in Section 5.2.1, particularly
the fixed defined sequence of relay assignments (TRIP before CLOSE).
When configuring commands, the context menu is dependent on the type of command.
In some cases, the selection latched/unlatched is not available. Instead, the alternatives
are ; (configured), B (not configured), and ) (busy flag). The latter means,
independent of the switching direction, an indication is always issued during activation
of the switching device.
For double commands with a common output, a fourth alternative & (Common contact)
appears. Using this, the binary output may be defined as the common relay (common
contact). When this is the case, several double commands with common contacts may
be assigned to the same common relay (common contact), thus saving binary outputs.
This assumes the signals at the common outputs have the same potential.
Using the 2EMHFW_3URSHUWLHV dialog window, additional properties for commands
issued to the switching device may be defined. Thus, the operating mode (pulse or
latched) output of a switching command, the seal-in time for pulse commands, the output
delay of the command, and feedback monitoring may be set (see Figure 5-24). The
output delay is only relevant for equipment which removes an indication before the
switching is completed.
Example:
Double Command with
2 Contacts (acc. Table 5-1)
Configuration
5-24 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 5-24 Dialog Box - Object Properties for a Command with Feedback (Example: Double
Command with Single Trip Outputs and Double Close Outputs, CF_D12)
The conditional checks that should be conducted before execution of a switching command
can also be defined:
• System Interlocking (Substation controller): Checks the system interlocking status
(configured from the substation controller).
• Zone controlled (Bay Specific Interlocking): Logic functions created with CFC in the
relay are processed for interlocked switching.
• Device status (Open/Closed; scheduled/actual): The switching command is ignored
and a corresponding indication is issued if the switching device is already in the desired
position. If this check is activated, switching direction control occurs not only
for interlocked, but also for non interlocked switching.
• Blocked by protection: CLOSE–switching command for switchgear is blocked as
soon as one of the protective functions or elements in the relay has picked up.
OPEN commands, in contrast, can always be executed. Please be aware, activation
of thermal overload protection can create and maintain a fault condition indication,
and can therefore lead to the blocking of CLOSE commands.
• Double operation: Parallel switching operations are blocked with respect to each
other; while one switching operation is being conducted, a second one may not be
performed.
• Switching Authority – Local commands: A local control switching command is only
allowed if local control is enabled on the relay (via a setting).
• Switching Authority - Remote commands: A remote control switching command is
only allowed if remote control is enabled on the relay (via a setting).
Configuring a LED
Display as a Destination
Single point indications (SP), output indications (OUT), and internal single point indications
(IntSP) may be assigned to LEDs. When this is done, you may select whether
the indications are to be latched (/) or unlatched (8).
Up to 30 indications may be assigned to a LED display. One indication may be assigned
to a maximum of ten (10) outputs (LEDs and output relays).
Configuration
7UM61 Manual 5-25
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Configuring an
Indication Buffer
as a Destination
Two indication buffers are available for selection: Operation (Event Log) Buffer (() and
Trip Log (7). The indications from protective functions are firmly assigned to these indication
buffers. For the others, Table 5-2 provides an overview of which indication
type may be configured to which buffer.
One of the following options should be selected for all configured indication types:
• 2 (on) – the indication is stored in the buffer with the time of its arrival
• RR (on/off) – the indication is stored in the buffer with the time of its arrival and departure
• B (not configured) – the indication is not stored in a buffer.
Configuring the
SCADA Interface
as a Destination
Depending on the SCADA interfaces connected to the relay, the types of information
displayed in Table 5-3 may be configured. By placing an ; in the matrix cell, the information
is transferred to connected systems via the SCADA interface.
.
Table 5-2 Overview of Indication Buffers
Information type ↓ \Message buffer → E T
Single Point Indications (SP) X X
Double Point Indications (DP) X
Output Indications (OUT) X X
Internal Single Point Indications (IntSP) X X
Internal Double Point Indications (DP) X
Transformer Tap Change Indications (TxTap) X
Table 5-3 Overview of SCADA Interfaces
SCADA Interface →
Information Type ↓
IEC Profibus
FMS
Profibus
DP
DNP3.0 Modbus
Single Point Indication (SP) X X X X X
Double Point Indication (DP) X X X X X
Output Indication (OUT) X X X X X
Internal Single Point Indicator (IntSP) X X X X X
Internal Double Point Indicator (IntDP) X X
Transformer Tap Change Indicator (TxTap) X
Command with/without Feedback (C_**) X X X X X
Protective Measurement Value X X X X
Protective Measurement Value with Time
(MVT)
XX
Configuration
5-26 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
User-defined information (switching devices, indications, metered values, etc.) can be
entered in the matrix. However, a transmission to the substation control is only possible
with IEC 60870-5-103 and Profibus FMS. For other protocols, you will have to use
predefined CFC indications (see also Table “Protocol-dependent functions” in the Appendix).
Configuring CFC
as a Destination
Single point, double point, and output indications, as well as limit and measured values,
may be configured to CFC as the destination.
Configuring the
Default Display and
Control Diagram
as a Destination
All information, including limit values, may be configured, both in the default and control
display. By placing an ; in the matrix cell, the information may be used within the
default and control control display. This feature is not available on the 7SJ61_62 series
of relays.
Configuring Control
Display as a
Destination for
Command Initiation
Single point and double point indications, transformer tap change indications, and all
types of commands may be configured to the control display as the destination. These
indications and commands then become available in the relay’s control display for operational
control.
Configuring the
Measured Value
Window as a
Destination
In addition to the measured values available in the relay, user defined measured and
limit values may be configured into the measured value window. These values then
become available in the device display in the assigned measurement window.
Configuring the
Metered Value
Window as a
Destination
In addition to the metered values available in the device, user defined pulse and metered
values derived from the measured values may be configured into the metered
value window so that they may be shown at the front display.
Protective Measurement Value, User
Defined (MVU)
X
Pulsed Metered Value (PMV) X X X X
Metered Value from Measurement Value
(MVMV)
XXXX
Table 5-3 Overview of SCADA Interfaces
SCADA Interface →
Information Type ↓
IEC Profibus
FMS
Profibus
DP
DNP3.0 Modbus
Warning!
CFC connection have to be reestablished after renaming of a display text of an user
defined information. Within the CFC the old name is shown at the left column. Delete
this connection. Make connection to the desired blocks using the renamed information.
Configuration
7UM61 Manual 5-27
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Retrieving Device
Configurations
from the Device
Front
Retrieving the configurations is also possible from the device front. You may access
configuration information under 0DLQ_0HQX: → 6HWWLQJV → 0DVNLQJ__,_2_.
The menu title 0$6.,1*__,_2_ appears in the title bar. Configuration information regarding
each (physical) input and output is indicated in the display.
Any new user defined information is also shown in the display once loaded into the
relay from DIGSI® 4.
When selecting the 0$6.,1*__,_2_ menu, either binary inputs, LEDs, or binary outputs
may be selected. Selection of binary inputs is illustrated in Figure 5-25.
Figure 5-25 Reading the configuration in the front display of the device — example
Information regarding a binary input may be displayed by using the navigation keys to
select the binary input. See Figure 5-26.
Figure 5-26 Selection of binary input 2 — example
In the example of Figure 5-26, information is displayed regarding binary input 2. The
display for binary input 2 indicates that it is configured as reset of the latched LEDs
using a single point indication with voltage active (High). The present conditions of binary
input 2 is also given as 0 (not active). If a binary input is active, a 1 is displayed.
Assignment of LEDs may be indicated at the relay, itself, using a replaceable labelling
strip with plain text on the front panel located, directly next to the LEDs.
Preset Configurations
The pre-set configurations of the binary inputs and outputs and for the LED displays
upon relay delivery are listed in tables in Appendix A.5.
5.2.5 Transferring Metering Values
The transferring of metered values from the buffer of the device to SCADA or substation
controller may be performed both cyclically and/or by external polling.
_0_$_6_._,_1_*_____,___2__________________
!%LQDU\_,QSXWV__²!___
!/('____________²!___
_%LQDU\_2XWSXWV_²!___
_%_,_1_$_5_<___,_1_3_8_7_6________________
!%LQDU\_,QSXW__²!___²
!%LQDU\_,QSXW__²!___²
%_,_1_$_5_<___,_1_3_8_7_______________
!!5HVHW_/('_63______+
_____________________
6WDWXV_DW_7HUPLQDO___
Configuration
5-28 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
In the configuration matrix, click on 2SWLRQV and then on 5HVWRUH_0HWHUHG_9DO_
XHV. A dialog box, which contains a register for editing the individual values for cyclical
transferring will open.
Cyclic Restoring Here the origin of the initiation for the cyclic transfer is defined. Furthermore,
the transfer
interval is set here, as well as the selection whether the counter buffer in the device
must be reset following the transfer.
Figure 5-27 Dialogue box to restore values, cyclic restoring
The initiation is defined as an absolute time corresponding to the set time interval.
5.2.6 Setting of Contact Chatter Blocking
Contact Chatter
Blocking
The contact chatter filter checks whether the number of condition changes at a binary
input exceeds a preset value during a predetermined time interval. If this occurs, the
binary input will be blocked for a certain time, so the event list does not contain a large
number of unnecessary entries. The setting values necessary for this feature may be
entered in a dialogue box, as shown in Figure 5-28. This dialogue box can be found
from the open configuration matrix by clicking 2SWLRQV in the menu bar and then selecting
&KDWWHU_%ORFNLQJ.
Figure 5-28 DIGSI® 4: Setting the chatter blocking feature
Defining the Monitoring
Criteria
The operating mode of the chatter blocking feature is determined by five settings:
Configuration
7UM61 Manual 5-29
C53000-G1176-C127-1
• 1XPEHU_RI_SHUPLVVLEOH_VWDWH_FKDQJHV
This setting establishes how often the state of a binary input within the ,QLWLDO_
7HVW_7LPH may change. If this number is exceeded, the binary input is or remains
blocked. If the setting is 0 the chatter blocking is disabled.
• ,QLWLDO_WHVW_WLPH
Within this time interval (in seconds), the number of state changes of a binary input
is checked. The time interval begins with the first activation of a signal to the binary
input.
• 1XPEHU_RI_FKDWWHU_WHVWV
This number represents how many check cycles should be conducted before the
binary input is finally blocked. Please consider that even a high set value can be
reached over the normal life span of the device and could lead to blocking of the
binary input. Therefore this value can also be set to infinity. For this, enter the character
sequence of oo.
• &KDWWHU_,GOH_7LPH
If the 1XPEHU_RI_SHUPLVVLEOH_VWDWH_FKDQJHV at a binary input is exceeded
during the ,QLWLDO_WHVW_WLPH or the 6XEVHTXHQW_WHVW_WLPH, the
&KDWWHU_
LGOH_WLPH interval is initiated. The affected binary input is blocked for this time
interval. The &KDWWHU_LGOH_WLPH setting is entered in minutes. This settings can
only be programmed if the 1XPEHU_RI_FKDWWHU_WHVWV is not set to zero.
• 6XEVHTXHQW_WHVW_WLPH – Within this time interval, the number of state changes
at a binary input is checked again. This interval begins after the &KDWWHU_LGOH_
WLPH interval has expired. If the number of state changes is within allowable limits,
the binary input is released. Otherwise, the idle interval is restarted, until the maximum
1XPEHU_FKDWWHU_WHVWV is reached again. The 6XEVHTXHQW_WHVW_WLPH
setting is entered in seconds. This settings can only be programmed if the 1XPEHU_
RI_FKDWWHU tests is not set to zero.
The settings for the monitoring criteria of the chatter blocking feature are set only once
for all binary inputs; however, the status of the chatter suppression can be set individually
for each binary input. See “Filtering / Contact Chatter Suppression” in Sub-section
5.2.3.
The following should be noted:
• If there is contact chatter at a binary input and the input is blocked, the corresponding
indication will be displayed with “CCF” (example: “!'RRU_RSHQ_&&)_21”). Also,
the indication “&RQWDFW_FKDWWHU_ILOWHU” reports this condition. Both messages
are shown in the operating buffer.
• Chattering of a single point indication is set as ON (coming) if the binary input has
been in an active state.
• Chattering of a single point indication is set as OFF (going) if the binary input has
been in an inactive state.
• If this behaviour causes undesired results in individual situations, a blocking may
be configured in CFC.
• Chattering of a double point indication will be considered an “intermediate” condition.
Note:
Chatter blocking cannot be activated for any of the standard protective indications.
Configuration
5-30 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
5.3 Creating User Defined Functions with CFC
General The 7UM61 relay is capable of implementing user defined logic functions which may
be processed by the relay. This CFC feature (Continuous Function Chart) is needed
to process user defined supervision functions and logic conditions (e.g. interlocking
conditions for switching devices) or to process measured values. Interlocking conditions
and command sequences, for example, may be programmed, using pre-defined
function modules, by persons without any specialized software programming abilities.
A total of 22 types of functional modules (FM), with which the desired functions may
be composed, are saved in a library. Detailed explanations are in the CFC manual,
order number E50417–H1176–C098, or in the DIGSI® 4 manual, order number
E50417–H1176–C097.
The creation of a logical PLC function is performed by means of a personal computer
using application DIGSI® 4 and transferred via the operator or service interface. In order
to create user defined logic functions, the indications and measured values required
by these functions must first be configured in the matrix with CFC as the source
or destination (see Section 5.2).
CFC can be started by double-clicking on &)&. The names of all available CFC charts
will appear. The desired CFC chart for processing can be selected via a double-click
of the mouse. The CFC program will start, and the chart will be displayed. If no chart
is available yet, you can create a new chart via the menu &UHDWH → &)&²&KDUW.
Run-Time Properties
The functions to be implemented in CFC may be divided into four task levels:
• Measured values: This task is processed cyclically every 600 milliseconds
(09B%($5% = measurement value processing) and might become slower if the device
is in pick-up state.
• System logic: Operation is triggered by events (i.e. these functions are processed
for each change of state at one of its inputs). System logic has lower priority than a
protection function and will be suppressed as soon as the relay picks up
(3/&_B%($5% = slow PLC processing).
• Protective functions: These functions have the highest priority, and, like the system
logic functions, are event-controlled and processed immediately after a change of
state (3/&B%($5% = fast PLC processing).
• Switchgear Interlocking: This task is triggered by commands. In addition it is processed
cyclically approximately every second. It might becomes slower if device is
in pick-up state (6)6B%($5% = interlocking).
The function to be implemented must be associated to one of these four task levels.
To implement a function from the 6HWWLQJV → &)& menu, activate the menu by selecting
(GLW, and then 5XQ_6HTXHQFH, and then the desired task level (See Figure
5-29).
Configuration
7UM61 Manual 5-31
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 5-29 Establishing the task level
Within the Run Sequence menu, select (GLW, and then 3UHGHFHVVRU_IRU_,Q_
VWDOODWLRQ, to ensure that the function modules selected from the library will be
implemented
into the desired task level (Figure 5-30).
Figure 5-30 Assignment of function modules to the selected task level
The proper assignment is important for several reasons. For example, if interlocking
logic were to be set up in the measured values task level, indications would constantly
be created by the cyclical processing, filling the buffer unnecessarily. On the other
hand, the interlocking condition at the moment of a switching operation may not be
processed at the right time, since measured value processing is done only every
600 ms.
Table 5-4 Selection guide for function modules and task levels
Function Modules Description
Run-Time Level
MW_BEARB
Meter
processing
PLC1_BEARB
Slow PLC
PLC_BEARB
Fast PLC
SFS_BEARB
Interlocking
ABSVALUE Magnitude calculation X – – –
AND AND–Gate – X X X
BOOL_TO_CO Boolean to Control
(conversion)
–XX–
Configuration
5-32 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
BOOL_TO_DI Boolean to Double Point
(conversion)
–XXX
BUILD_DI Create Double Point
annuciation
–XXX
CMD_INF Command information – – – X
CONNECT Connection – X X X
D_FF D–Flipflop – X X X
DI_TO_BOOL Double Point to Boolean
(conversion)
–XXX
LIVE_ZERO Live–zero, non linear Curve X – – –
LOWER_SETPOINT Lower limit X – – –
NAND NAND–Gate – X X X
NEG Negator – X X X
NOR NOR–Gate – X X X
OR OR–Gate – X X X
RS_FF RS–Flipflop – X X X
SR_FF SR–Flipflop – X X X
TIMER Timer – X X –
LONG_TIMER Timer (max. 1193 h) – X X –
UPPER_SETPOINT Upper limit X – – –
X_OR XOR–Gate – X X X
ZERO_POINT Zero suppression X – – –
Table 5-4 Selection guide for function modules and task levels
Function Modules Description
Run-Time Level
MW_BEARB
Meter
processing
PLC1_BEARB
Slow PLC
PLC_BEARB
Fast PLC
SFS_BEARB
Interlocking
Configuration
7UM61 Manual 5-33
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Configuration
Sheet
The configuration is performed within the configuration sheets (see Figure 5-31).
Figure 5-31 Principal representation of function modules in a CFC working page
The left border column of the configuration sheet shows the inputs; the right border
column shows the outputs of a function. In the above diagram the inputs are connected
with input signals IS1 to IS3. These may be indications from the breaker (via binary
inputs), from device function keys, or from a protective function. The output signal
(OS4 in the diagram) may control an output relay, for example, and can create entries
in the message buffers, depending on the preset configuration.
Configuring and
Connecting Function
Modules
The default run-time sequence is determined by the sequence of the insertion of the
logic modules. You may redefine the run-time sequence by pressing <CTRL> – <F11>
on the PC keyboard. Please refer to the CFC manual. The necessary function modules
(FM) are contained in a library located to the right of the configuration chart. The
module also indicates to which of the four run-time levels (MW_BEARB,
PLC1_BEARB, PLC_BEARB, SFS_BEARB) it is assigned. The modules possess at
least one input and one output. In addition to these inputs and outputs, which are displayed
on the configuration sheet, a module may have additional inputs. The additional
inputs can be made visible by selecting the module title block, pressing the right
mouse button, selecting the menu option 1XPEHU_2I_,_2V___ (see Figure 5-32),
and then increasing the number.
Figure 5-32 Example of an OR gate: module menu
Under the 2EMHFW_3URSHUWLHV menu, you may edit the name of the module, insert
a comment, or edit run-time properties and connection parameters.
Connecting modules with each other, and linking them with system input and output
signals, is performed by selection of the desired modules input or output and subse-
IS1
IS2
IS3
OS4
1 FM2
2
3
1 FM1
2
3 FM3
12
Configuration sheet 1
Input
signals
Output
signals
Function modules
Configuration
5-34 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
quently pressing the right mouse button, and selecting the menu option ,QVHUW_&RQ_
QHFWLRQ_WR_2SHUDQG (see Figure 5-33).
Figure 5-33 Example of module input menu
A window with a list of input signals will appear. By selecting one of these signals and
activating with 2., the selected signal is entered into the left border panel and, from
there, a connection is created to the module input. Selection of an output is done in
the same manner. A connection between two modules is established by a simple sequential
clicking on the two connections.
If the link line display becomes unwieldy or impossible because of space limitations,
the CFC editor creates a pair of connectors (target icons) instead. The link is recognizable
via correlated numbering (see Figure 5-34).
Figure 5-34 Connector
For additional information please refer to Appendix A.7.
Consistency check In addition to the sample configuration chart 1, shown in Figure 5-36, other
configuration
sheets may exist. The contents of any particular configuration sheet is compiled
by DIGSI® 4 into a program and processed by the protective device. For CFC charts
developed by the user, syntactic correctness can be verified by clicking the menu
command &KDUW, and then &KHFN_&RQVLVWHQF\. The consistency check will
determine
if the modules violate conventions of various run-time levels, or any of the principles
below.
Check of functional correctness must be performed manually.
The completed CFC chart can be saved via menu item &KDUW, and &ORVH. Likewise,
the CFC chart may be reopened and edited by clicking on &KDUW, selecting the appropriate
chart, and clicking on 2SHQ.
Please be aware, certain limitations exist, because of memory space and processing
power. The limits listed in Table 5-5 are generally applicable. The limits given in Table
Connector
Configuration
7UM61 Manual 5-35
C53000-G1176-C127-1
5-6 are relay-specific. These limits must not be exceeded because adverse effects to
the protective functionality (e.g. slower trip times) would result.
Table 5-6 Maximum Number of Modules per Process Area for SIPROTEC® 7UM61
The limits are monitored by the DIGSI® 4 operating program. When 100 % of the allowed
memory is used, DIGSI® 4 issues a warning message. See Figure 5-35.
Figure 5-35 Warning message from DIGSI® 4 when 100 % of allowed memory is used
After acknowledgement of the warning, the register sheet Compile under Option →
5HSRUWV can be accessed. By scrolling, an area can be reached in which statements
Table 5-5 Maximum Number of Charts and Inputs
Limit Description Limit Comment
Total number of all CFC charts for all
processing areas
32
Allowable number of CFC charts in a
single processing area
16
Total number of inputs on the left
panel for all CFC charts in eventdriven
process areas
100*)
*) If a message is used in two charts, it counts as two.
Valid for process areas:
PLC1_BEARB (system logic)
PLC_BEARB (protective
functions)
Maximum number of different inputs
on the left panel for all CFC charts in
event-driven process areas
50 Valid for process areas:
PLC1_BEARB (system logic)
PLC_BEARB (protective
functions)
Process Area (running level) Number of
Blocks
Comment
MW_BEARB (Meter processing) < 100
PLC1_BEARB (Slow PLC Logic) approx 30 Depends on the type of functional
blocks used and the number of
PLC_BEARB (Fast PLC Logic) approx 12 connections
SFS_BEARB (Interlocking) < 100
Configuration
5-36 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
are given regarding the memory usage, as a percentage of the portion reserved for
CFC. In Figure 5-36 for example, an overload of 56 % is presented for the run-time
level PLC_BEARB (specially noted), while the other running levels are within the allowed
range.
Figure 5-36 Reading the loading level for CFC–diagrams
The following contains a few examples. A summary of the CFC configurations provided
at the factory is shown in Appendix A.5.4.
Example 1 (MW):
Low Current
Monitor
A configuration for low-current monitoring alarm (see Figure 5-37) which can be produced
using CFC, should be a first example. This element may be used to detect operation
without load, or to recognize open circuited conditions. By connecting measured
current values with a limit function via an OR function, an indication may be generated
which can be used to cause switching operations.
• The configuration sheet is assigned to task level MW_BEARB.
• Four function modules (3 lower-value limit modules and an OR gate), are taken
from the function module library and copied into the configuration sheet.
• In the left panel, the measurement values to be monitored (IL1, IL2, IL3 in % of the
nominal current) are each selected and connected with the measured value inputs
of each limit module function.
• A lower limit setpoint value (IL<) is linked with the limit inputs of each of three limit
sensor functions.
• The limit value function outputs are passed on to the OR gate.
• The output of the OR gate is connected to the right border column at annunciation
“,__DODUP”.
The limit value message is triggered when the preset limit value is below the setpoint
(low current) in at least one of the three phases. The hysteresis of the limit values is
fixed and need not be entered (5 % of set point plus 0.5 % of nominal value).
Configuration
7UM61 Manual 5-37
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 5-37 Under-current monitoring as an example of user defined measurement value
processing
Example 2 (PLC1):
Additional Logic
By using slow PLC processing, an additional, event-driven logic condition may be constructed
which delivers indications regarding facility operating status. These indications
may be passed externally via LEDs or relays, or used as input signals for further
logical links. In the example (see Diagram 5-38), the single-point indication
“!'DWD6WRS“ that can be injected by binary inputs is converted by means of a NEGATOR
block into an indication “8QORFN'7“ that can be processed internally (internal
single point indication, IntSP), and assigned to an output. This would not be possible
directly, i.e. without the additional block.
Figure 5-38 Logical link between input and output
FM:
Lower
Setpoint
Limit Vol
I<
alarm OUT
Measurement
IL1
FM:
Vol
Annunciation BO
Limit
FM:
Vol
Annunciation BO
Limit
Lower
Setpoint
Lower
Setpoint
FM:
Set points
IL<
Measurement
IL2
Set points
IL<
Set points
IL<
Measurement
IL3
Annunciation BO
>1
_*HQHUDO_!'DWD6WRS_63 287_'HYLFH__8QORFN'7_,QW63
,1__'HYLFH_
Configuration
5-38 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
5.4 Establishing a Default Display
Under normal conditions, a preset image is shown as the default display. It shows operating
information and/or measured values of the protected equipment. Depending
on the relay type, a number of predefined basic displays are available. Using the
and keys, one of the displayed images may be selected (see example in the following
figure), causing it to appear as the default display under normal conditions.
Figure 5-39 Example of a Basic Display
_______N$__________N9_
_______N$__________N9
_______N$__________N9
(______$___(_______9
Configuration
7UM61 Manual 5-39
C53000-G1176-C127-1
5.5 Serial Interfaces
The device contains one or more serial ports — a PC port is integrated into the front
panel. Depending on the model ordered, a rear service port and a SCADA port for connection
of a substation control system are integrated. Certain standards are necessary
for communication via these ports, which contain protection device identification,
transfer protocol, and transfer speed.
Configuration of these interfaces is performed in a first step in the property dialog. Details
are set when setting the port.
5.5.1 Settings in the property dialog
Select a project in the DIGSI® 4 Manager via )LOH → 2SHQ. For this, the button
3URMHFWV is to be activated.
Select a device with the right mouse key in the open menu 3URSHUWLHV: The system
interface is defined with the tab &RPPXQLFDWLRQV_PRGXOH. The protocol is selected
in the respective drop-down menu.
5.5.1.1 Setting of IEC- and Profibus-FMS protocol
These protocols are selected directly in the drop-down list (see Figure 5-40).
Figure 5-40 DIGSI® 4, Selecting IEC- and Profibus-FMS protocols
After the selection, another configuration has to take place on the tab )06_,(&_6HW_
WLQJV (see Figure 5-41).
Configuration
5-40 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 5-41 DIGSI® 4, Configuration of FMS and IEC settings
The left layer address is to be entered for IEC, according to the selected protocol; for
Profibus FMS you have to state also the communications reference and the VFD
name.
5.5.1.2 Selecting additional protocols
Additional protocols can be delivered for SIPROTEC® devices. At the moment these
are the protocols Profibus–DP, DNP3.0 and MODBUS. Select the option )XUWKHU_
3URWRFROV and /_____ is activated. Select and press /_(see Figure 5-42).
The window $GGLWLRQDO_LQIRUPDWLRQ opens. Select 3URWRFROV for the 1st
system
interface; with the 2nd interface you select the actual protocol. Confirm your selection
with 2..
The selected protocol is marked with an altered /_ button.
Note:
Refer to the SICAM center for the following configuration!
Configuration
7UM61 Manual 5-41
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 5-42 DIGSI® 4, Selecting Other protocols
The settings for these protocols have to be carried out on the tab 2WKHU_SURWRFROV
afterwards (see Figure 5-43).
Figure 5-43 DIGSI® 4, Settings for Further protocols
A matching mapping file has to be selected. A mapping file contains references of deice
objects for the communications objects which are located on the bus. Without the
selection of such a mapping the faultfree operation of the interface cannot be guaranteed.
Select a mapping to view the changeable parameters in the window below. They
can be set directly (careful!) (see Figure 5-44).
Configuration
5-42 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 5-44 Mapping file with changeable parameters
Note, these parameters have to react to certain syntactic rules; this is why only the relevant
numerical values can be changed in the described way, if necessary!
The relevant protocol only works when the mapping has been selected and, if necessary,
set. Further information on the mapping files and additional protocols can be
found in the internet: see http//:www.siemens.com (English) or http//:www.siemens.de
(German; the protocol documentation is normally only available in English - also on
the German internet sites)
5.5.2 Setting the ports
It is necessary to set further parameters of the port. For this, double click on the device
to open it. DIGSI® 4 is now busy with extremely complex functions. Afterwards, the
settings can be carried out via 3DUDPHWHUV → 3RUWV. The ports are selected and set
via tabs. Values which cannot be changed anymore are grayed out.
5.5.2.1 Serial port on PC
In the first tab, the user should enter the communication port of the PC (&20___&20__
etc.) which is connected to the 7UM61 relay. Manual entry of settings for data format
and baud rate can not be entered, since these values were taken from the “3&_SRUW_
RQ_GHYLFH” tab or the “6HUYLFH_SRUW” tab (if present). In fact, many settings are
read from DIGSI® 4 directly via the port, and the corresponding setting fields are made
inaccessible (see Figure 5-40). On the other hand, for those settings that must be entered
by the user, the option ,QGHSHQGHQW_RI_GHYLFH should be selected.
The settings RQ 1 and RQ 2 are intended for Siemens use only. Please do not modify
these settings.
Configuration
7UM61 Manual 5-43
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 5-45 DIGSI® 4, Parameters of the PC port
5.5.2.2 PC and Service Port
Both ports have the same settings and as described here.
Configuration
5-44 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 5-46 Parameters of the Service port - Example
Besides the usual parameters you can also set a permissible telegram gap. A gap is
the maximum allowable time duration of interrupted transmission within one telegram
transmission. With it, an adaptation to special features of the line or the modem can
be carried out. For good data transmission between modems, a setting of ___ sec is
recommended. For poor connections, this value should be increased. In this case, the
transmission speed is decreased. When using a direct PC connection, 0D[__PHV_
VDJH_JDSV may be set to ___ sec.
5.5.2.3 Profibus FMS connection
The PC can be equipped with a module CP5412A2. In this case, it is possible to connect
the PC with the device via the Profibus FMS. For this, the settings on the tab
352),%86_)06_DW_3& are necessary. Normally, presettings exist which have to be
checked for their correctness concerning the Profibus configuration.
5.5.2.4 Setting VD addresses
These settings agree with the parameters and are to be checked accordingly.
Note:
Do not use front port for modem communication!
Configuration
7UM61 Manual 5-45
C53000-G1176-C127-1
5.5.2.5 Device IEC
These settings are necessary, if the protocol IEC was selected for the system port (see
Figure 5-47).
.
Figure 5-47 Parameters for a FO port

A special feature for this configuration is the signal idle state.
Signal idle state For FO connections, the signal idle state is preset with “Light off”. Alter the
signal idle
state with the tab of the Interface settings (see Figure 9-8).
Reading and Modifying
Interface Settings
at the Device
Reading and partial modification of the most important interface settings is possible,
using the operator interface at the device itself. The user may access the setting page
for the interface via 0$,1_0(18 through 6HWWLQJV → 6HWXS_([WUDV → 6HULDO_
3RUWV. Under the menu title 6(5,$/_32576, the user will find Front Port, System
Port, and Service Port, and selections may be made using the navigation button.
By pressing the button, the sub-menu for a particular interface can be accessed.
The display and the ability to change settings directly at the device are the same at
both the front and service interfaces. Figure 5-48 shows the operator interface, as an
example.
Configuration
5-46 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 5-48 Reading and Setting the Front DIGSI Port at the Device Controls
The type of system port(s) depends on the device type and version; this port can even
be completely absent. Whereas data related to the front port or the service port can
be modified from the device, system port data can only be read out there. In addition
to the parameters described in connection with the front port and the service port, it is
also possible to read out the signal idle state of FO connections (“OFF-Signal”, see
Figure 5-49). With an electrical connection, this information is marked as “LQHIIHF_
WLYH“.
Figure 5-49 Reading out the IEC Port Setting Values from the Operator Interface on the
Front Panel
If the protocol assigned to the device is one of the )XUWKHU_SURWRFROV, the parameters
can as of now not be modified from the front panel display but only with
DIGSI® 4.
.
_3_&___3_2_5_7____________________________
!3K\V_$GGU______!____
!%DXGUDWH________%DXG
_3DULW\____(___',*6,_
_*DSV_____________VHF
_6_<_6_7_(_0_____3_2_5_7_______________
!,(&_____²_²____²!___
!3URILEXV_______²!___
_,_(_&___________²___²_____________
!3K\V_$GGUHVV________
!%DXGUDWH________%DXG
_3DULW\___________(_
_*DSV______________V
_2))_6LJ____
Configuration
7UM61 Manual 5-47
C53000-G1176-C127-1
5.6 Date and Time Stamping
Integrated date and time stamping allows for the exact evaluation of sequence of
events (e.g. operations or error messages, or limit violations). The clock may be influenced
by:
• the internal RTC clock (Real Time Clock),
• external synchronization sources (DCF, IRIG B, SyncBox, IEC 60870–5–103,
PROFIBUS),
• external minute impulses via a binary input.
Time Synchronization
Settings for time synchronization may be found in DIGSI® 4 under 6HWWLQJV → 7LPH_
V\QFKURQL]DWLRQ (Figure 5-50).
Figure 5-50 Setting window in DIGSI® 4
To open the 7LPH_6\QFKURQL]DWLRQ_ _)RUPDW window, double-click on 7LPH_
6\QFKURQL]DWLRQ. See Figure 5-51.
Note:
The device is delivered from the factory with the internal RTC clock selected as the
time source, independent of whether the device is equipped with a system interface
or not. If external synchronization is desired, it must be configured accordingly.
Configuration
5-48 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 5-51 Dialogue box for time synchronization and format in DIGSI® 4
Here you may select the time standard for internal time stamping by selecting from the
following modes:
The RTC runs, even when the auxiliary voltage is absent, by means of an internal battery.
During the device powering up, or if the auxiliary voltage has failed, this RTC is
the first synchronization source for the internal clock, independent of operating mode
selected.
In “,QWHUQDO” mode, the system time is controlled using only the RTC as the
synchronization
source. It may be set manually. The procedure for manual date/time setting
is given in Section 7.2.1.
If an external source is selected, only the selected synchronization source is used. If
the source fails, the internal clock continues unsynchronized.
If time synchronization is to take place via a master control system, the option ,(&²
_____²_²___ or 352),%86_)06 must be selected (Figure 5-51).
Table 5-7 Operating modes for time synchronization
Item Operating Mode Explanations
1 ,QWHUQDO Internal synchronization using RTC (pre-set)
2 ,(& _____²_²___ External synchronization using the system interface and the
IEC 60870–5–103 protocol
3 352),%86_)06 External synchronization using PROFIBUS interface
4 ,5,*_%_7LPH_VLJQDO External synchronization using IRIG B
5 '&)___7LPH_VLJQDO External synchronization using DCF 77
6 SIMEAS Time signal
6\QF__%R[
External synchronization using SIMEAS Sync. Box
7 3XOVH_YLD_ELQDU\_
LQSXW
External synchronization with pulse via binary input
Configuration
7UM61 Manual 5-49
C53000-G1176-C127-1
When using radio clock signals, you must take into account that it can take up to three
minutes after device start-up or restored reception for the received time signal to be
decoded. The internal clock is not re-synchronized until then.
With IRIG B, the year must be set manually, because this standard does not include
a year value.
For synchronization using pulses via a binary input, the present device time will advance
to 00 seconds of the next minute for values greater than 30 seconds when the
positive slope of the pulse arrives. For second values less than 30, the device time will
be set to 00 seconds of the current minute. Because this signal is not monitored, each
pulse has a direct effect on the internal clock.
Synchronization
Offset
The “Synchronization Offset” (2IIVHW) setting allows correlation of the time signal received
from the radio clock to local time (time zone). The maximum settable offset is
± 23 h 59 min = ±1439 min.
Error Message
Based on Tolerance
Time
The tolerance time ((UURU_7LPH / )DXOW_LQGLFDWLRQ_DIWHU) for time
synchronization
fault indicates how long cyclical synchronization may be absent until an alarm
is given.
External or internal synchronization normally occurs every minute. The setting for the
tolerance time must, therefore, always be at least two minutes. Under poor radio clock
reception conditions, you may delay the trigger of the “error” status condition even
longer.
Changing the Synchronization
Mode
When changing synchronization mode, the hardware will change over to the new
source within one second. This causes breakdown of cyclical synchronization, and the
internal clock will be disrupted — as at start-up — until the new synchronization
source takes over.
After modification to the synchronization offset in the time signal/operating mode, or
when changing year in IRIG B, the cyclical synchronization is not lost, but there is a
jump. To call attention to this, the time value causing a jump is reported with “7LPH_
LQWHUUXSWLRQ_21” — without the synchronization offset, and subsequently with
“7LPH_LQWHUUXSWLRQ_2))” — with the synchronization offset.
Operating Messages
from the Timing
System
After the “7LPH_LQWHUUXSWLRQ_21” message, the you must take into account that
the clock will jump. This message is issued under the following circumstances:
− if a synchronization interruption lasts longer than the tolerance time interval mentioned
above, or as mentioned above, if the synchronization mode is changed;
− if a time jump is anticipated. The message itself is stamped with the old time.
The message “7LPH_LQWHUUXSWLRQ_2))” is triggered:
− when the synchronization is re-established (e.g., after a break in reception by the
radio clock);
− immediately after a time jump. This message is stamped with the new time after the
jump, thus allowing determination of the jump interval.
Time Format The time display may be set using either the European format (DD.MM.YYYY) or
the
US format (MM/DD/YYYY).
n
Configuration
5-50 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
7UM61 Manual 6-1
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Functions 6
This chapter describes the numerous functions available on the SIPROTEC® 7UM61
relay. The setting options for each function are defined, including instructions for reporting
setting values and formulae where required.
6.1 General 6-3
6.2 Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 50, 51, 67) 6-18
6.3 Inverse O/C time protection (ANSI 51) 6-27
6.4 Thermal overload protection (ANSI 49) 6-34
6.5 Unbalanced load protection (ANSI 46) 6-43
6.6 Underexcitation protection (ANSI 40) 6-50
6.7 Reverse power protection (ANSI 32R) 6-58
6.8 Forward power supervision (ANSI 32F) 6-62
6.9 Impedance protection (ANSI 21) 6-65
6.10 Undervoltage protection (ANSI 27) 6-75
6.11 Overvoltage protection (ANSI 59) 6-78
6.12 Frequency protection (ANSI 81) 6-81
6.13 Overexcitation (Overflux) protection U/f (ANSI 24) 6-86
6.14 90–%–stator earth fault protection (ANSI 59N, 64G, 67G) 6-91
6.15 Sensitive earth current protection (ANSI 50/51GN, 64R) 6-99
6.16 100–%–stator earth fault protection with 3rd harm. (ANSI 59TN/ 27TN
(3.H.)) 6-103
6.17 Breaker failure protection (ANSI 50BF) 6-107
6.18 Inadvertent energization (ANSI 50, 27) 6-112
6.19 Monitoring functions 6-116
6.20 External trip commands via binary inputs 6-133
6.21 Phase rotation reversal 6-136
6.22 Protection function logic 6-138
6.23 Auxiliary functions 6-143
6.24 Breaker control 6-150
Functions
6-2 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Regionalization The SIPROTEC® 7UM61 protective relays are offered in regional versions. The
prepared
functions are adapted to the technical requirements of the regions. The user
should purchase only the functional scope that is needed.
Legend
(X) – Selectable option
(–) – Function not available for this region
Table 6-1 Regionalization
Function Region DE
Germany
Region worldwide
Worldwide
Region US
USA
Language German English American
English
Frequency 50 Hz 50 Hz / 60 Hz
Default 50 Hz
60 Hz
Characteristic curves for
inverse time-overcurrent
elements
IEC curves
ANSI curves
X
–
X
Default IEC
Characteristic
Curves
X
–
X
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-3
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6.1 General
6.1.1 Introduction, reference power system
The following chapters explain the individual protective and additional functions and
provide information about on the setting values. The calculation examples are based
on two reference power systems with the two typical basic connections, i.e. the busbar
connection and the block connection (see figure 6-1). All default settings of the relay
are adapted accordingly.
Figure 6-1 Reference systems
Technical data of
the reference
power systems
Generator: SN, G = 5.27 MVA
UN, G = 6.3 kV
IN, G = 483 A
cos ϕ = 0.8
7UM61
7UM61
G
a) Busbar connection
b) Block connection
UE IL IEE UL
6.3 kV
√3
/ 500 V 500 A/1 A
5.27 MVA
6.3 kV
6.3 kV
√3
100 V
√3
5.3 MVA
20 kV/6.3 kV 20 kV
IL UL UE IEE
500 A/1 A
5.27 MVA
6.3 kV 6.3 kV
√3
100 V
√3
3∼
100 V
3 60/1 A
RL
Earthing
transformer
G
3∼
Functions
6-4 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Current transformer: IN,prim = 500 A; IN, sek = 1 A
Toroidal current transformerIN,prim = 60 A; IN, sek = 1 A
Voltage transformer: UN, prim = (6.3/√3) kV UN, sek = (100/√3) V
Uen/3 = (100/3) V
Transformer: SN, T = 5.3 MVA
UOS = 20 kV
UUS = 6.3 kV
uK = 7 %
Neutral earthing
transformer: ü =
Resistor divider: 5 : 1
Further technical data is provided within the framework of the functional setting specifications
of the individual protective functions.
The calculated setting values are secondary setting values related to the device and
can be modified immediately by way of local operation.
The use of the DIGSI® 4 operating program is recommended for a complete reparameterization.
In this way, the user has the possibility to specify primary values in addition
to secondary settings. Within the framework of the 7UM61, the specification of primary
values is performed as a setting related to the nominal quantities of the object to be
protected (IN, G; UN, G; SN, G). This procedure has the advantage that system-independent,
typical settings of the protective functions can be pre-specified. The data of the
individual power system are updated in the power system data (see sections 6.1.3 and
6.1.6) and the conversion to secondary values is executed via a mouse click (conversion
to secondary values, see 6.1.2). All necessary conversion formula of the individual
functions are stored in the operating program.
6.1.2 Brief overview of the device operation
A few seconds after the device is powered up, the default display will appear showing
measured values by the 7UM61 protective relay.
The settings associated with the various device functions may be modified using the
controls on the front panel of the device or by using the DIGSI® 4 operator and service
interface on a personal computer. Password No. 5 is required to modify individual settings.
From the
Device Front
Select the 0$,1_0(18 by pressing the key. Using the key, select 6HWWLQJV,
and then press the key to navigate to the 6(77,1*6 display (see Figure 6-2).
In the 6(77,1*6 display, use the key to select the desired function, and then use
the key to navigate to that function (e.g., use the key to select the 3_6\VWHP_
'DWD_ function, and then use the key to navigate to the 3_6<67(0_'$7$_display,
as shown in Figure 6-3.
6.3 kV
√3
500 V
MENU
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-5
C53000-G1176-C127-1
In general, an item number appears in the menu list to the right of each selection. Navigation
can be accomplished using the item number in place of the and keys.
This feature is particularly helpful in large menus (e.g., setting lists). Based on the example
above, from the 0$,1_0(18, the 6(77,1*6 display can be reached by pressing
on the keypad, and then the 3_6<67(0_'$7$_ display can be reached by
pressing on the keypad.
Figure 6-2 Example of navigation from the front control panel
Each setting contains a four-digit address number followed by the setting title as
shown in Figure 6-3. The value of the current setting is displayed in the line just below
the setting address number and title. The value may be text (Figure 6-3, setting ____)
or numerical (Figure 6-3, setting ____).
Figure 6-3 Example of power system data display
Settings are selected using the and keys. When the key is pressed, the
user is prompted for a password. The user should enter Password No. 5 and then
press the key. The current value of the setting appears in a text box, with a blinking
text insertion cursor.
Text Values A text setting may be modified using the and keys to select one of two or more
options.
Numerical Values
(including ∞)
A numerical setting may be modified by overwriting the current value using the numerical
keypad. See Figure 6-4. A value of “infinity” may be entered by pressing the decimal
key twice . The “∞”−symbol will appear in the display.
If the number entered is not within allowable limits, the maximum or minimum allowable
value will appear in the lower portion of the display. To enter a new, allowable value,
the key should be pressed again.
Note that measured values and limit values must be entered in secondary quantities
when using the front control panel of the device.
4
03
_0_$_,_1___0_(_1_8________________________
$QQXQFLDWLRQ__²!_____
0HDVXUHPHQW___²!_____
&RQWURO_______²!_____
6HWWLQJV______²!_____
7HVW_'LDJQRVH_²!_____
_6_(_7_7_,_1_*_6__________________________
'HYLFH_&RQILJ_²!_____
0DVNLQJ__,_2__²!_____
3_6\VWHP_'DWD_²!_____
$FWLYH_*URXS_LV_____$_
_3___6_<_6_7_(_0___'_$_7_$________________
_____&7_6WDUSRLQW
_____WRZDUGV_/LQH
_____8QRP_35,0$5<
__________N9
ENTER
ENTER
..
ENTER
Functions
6-6 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Confirmation Any modification to a setting value must be confirmed by pressing the key. A
blinking asterisk is an indication that setting modification mode is still open. Other
modifications can be made to settings, even in sub-menus (if present), as long as setting
modification mode is still open. The actual modification of settings occurs once
setting modification mode is closed (see below, “Exiting the Setting Mode”).
Figure 6-4 Example of setting modification using the front control panel
If a setting modification is not confirmed with the key, the original value reappears
after one minute, and a message window appears after three minutes notifying the
user that the setting modification period has expired. When the key is pressed, a
further message window appears, notifying the user that the setting modifications
were discarded. Further modification of settings is possible by pressing the key
and re-entering the password.
Exiting the Setting
Mode
If an attempt is made to exit setting modification mode using the key or the key,
the message $UH_\RX_VXUH" will be displayed followed by the responses <HV__1R_
and (VFDSH (see Figure 6-5). If the response <HV is selected, modification of settings
can be confirmed by pressing the key. To cancel pending modifications to settings
and exit setting modification mode, the response 1R must be selected. Press the
key until the response 1R_is highlighted. Press the key to confirm and exit. Incorrect
entries may be retracted in this manner. To remain in the setting modification
mode, press the key until the response (VFDSH_is highlighted. Press the key
to confirm, and the user can remain in setting modification mode without down-loading
modifications.
Figure 6-5 Ending the setting mode using the front control panel
ENTER
ENTER
3:_6HWWLQJV"
_____ _______
Enter password No. 5 and confirm with
ENTER
____
8QRP_35,0$5<____________
3_6<67(0_'$7$__[_____
_____________________
_____8QRP_35,0$5<
> > > _____N9
The modified setting value appears in the
list; a blinking asterisk in the title bar indicates
setting modification mode is still
open.
Example for numerical setting:
Enter the new value and confirm with ENTER
3_6<67(0_'$7$________
_____________________
____!8QRP_35,0$5<
!___!_____N9
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
MENU
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
$UH_\RX_VXUH"
!<HV_1R_(VFDSH
ENTER
6HWWLQJV_DUH_RN
______!&RQWLQXH
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-7
C53000-G1176-C127-1
From PC with
DIGSI® 4
Using DIGSI® 4 to modify settings.
To select a function, double-click on 6HWWLQJV, and then double-click on the desired
setting function (e.g., 3RZHU_6\VWHP_'DWD__ is selected by double-clicking 6HW_
WLQJV, and then double-clicking 3RZHU_6\VWHP_'DWD__ as illustrated in Figure 6-6).
K450.gif
Figure 6-6 Navigating using DIGSI® 4 — example

A dialogue box associated with the selected function is displayed (e.g., if 3RZHU_6\V_
WHP_'DWD__ function is selected, the dialogue box shown in Figure 6-7 will appear).
If a function contains many settings, the dialogue box may include multiple windows.
In this situation, the user can select individual windows via tabs located at the top of
the dialogue box (e.g., in Figure 6-7, tabs exist for 3RZHU_6\VWHP, &7·V, 97·V, and
%UHDNHU).
:
Functions
6-8 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 6-7 Power system data dialogue box in DIGSI® 4 — example
The left column of the dialogue box (identified as the 1R_ column) contains the fourdigit
address number of the setting. The middle column of the dialogue box (identified
as the 6HWWLQJV column) contains the title of the setting, and the right column of the
dialogue box (identified as the 9DOXH column) contains the current value of the setting
in text or numerical format. When the mouse cursor is positioned over a numerical field
in the 9DOXH column, the allowable range is shown.
To modify a setting, click on the setting value which is displayed in the 9DOXH column.
Text Values When a text setting value is selected, a pull-down menu of possible setting options
is
displayed. To modify the setting, simply click on the desired option. The pull-down
menu closes, and the new setting value appears in the 9DOXH column.
Numerical Values
(including ∞)
When a numerical setting value is selected, the setting is modified using the number
keys, if applicable, with a decimal comma (not a decimal point). A value of “infinity”
may be entered by pressing the small o key twice. Confirm the setting modification by
clicking on $SSO\, or select another setting to modify.
If the value entered is outside the allowable range, a message block appears on the
screen describing the error and displaying the acceptable range of values. To acknowledge
the message, click 2., and the original value reappears. A new entry can
be made or another setting value can be modified.
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-9
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Primary or
Secondary Values
Setting values can be entered and displayed in primary terms or secondary terms, as
desired. DIGSI® 4 automatically performs the conversions based on the settings entered
for the transformer data and conversion ratios.
To switch between primary values and secondary values:
q Click on 2SWLRQV in the menu bar, as shown in Figure 6-8.
q Click on the desired alternative.
Figure 6-8 Selection of primary or secondary value entry — example
Additional Settings Those settings that are modified only in special cases are typically hidden.
They may
be made visible by checking on 'LVSOD\_$GGLWLRQDO_6HWWLQJV.
Confirmation Each entry may be confirmed by clicking $SSO\. Valid values are accepted
automatically
when another field is selected.
The final acceptance of a modified setting takes place once the setting mode is exited
(see below “Exiting the Setting Mode”).
The dialogue box may be closed by clicking 2.. Once closed, another function may
be selected for setting modification, or you can exit the setting mode.
Exiting the Setting
Mode
In order to transfer the modified setting values to the relay, the user should click on
',*6, → 'HYLFH. The user will be prompted for Password No. 5. After entering the
password and confirming with 2., data is transferred to the relay where modifications
become effective.
Functions
6-10 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6.1.3 Power System Data 1
The device requires certain basic data regarding the protected equipment, so that the
device will be compatible with its desired application. Phase sequence data, nominal
system frequency data, CT&PT ratios and their physical connections, as well as,
breaker operating times and minimum current thresholds are selected in the 3RZHU_
6\VWHP_'DWD__ display.
To modify these settings from the front of the device, the user should press the key
and wait for the 0$,1_0(18 to appear. From the 0$,1_0(18, the user should use the
key to select 6HWWLQJV, and then use the key to navigate to the 6(77,1*6
display. To obtain the 3_6\VWHP_'DWD_ display, the user should use the key to
select 3_6\VWHP_'DWD_ in the 6(77,1*6 display, and then press the key.
To modify settings associated with 3RZHU_6\VWHP_'DWD__ using DIGSI® 4, the user
should double-click 6HWWLQJV, and then 3RZHU_6\VWHP_'DWD__, and the of theired
selection options will be displayed.
Polarity of current
transformers
At address _____&7_6WDUSRLQW, the polarity of the wye-connected current transformers
is specified (see Figure 6-9 for options). Modifying this setting also results in
a polarity reversal of the ground current inputs IN or INS.
Figure 6-9 Current Transformer Polarity
Nominal values of
voltage transformers
and current
transformers
At addresses ____ 8QRP_35,0$5< and ____ 8QRP_6(&21'$5<, information is entered
regarding the primary nominal voltage and secondary nominal voltages (L-L) of
the connected voltage transformers. At addresses ____ &7_35,0$5< and ____ &7_
6(&21'$5<, information is entered regarding the primary and secondary ampere ratings
of the current transformers. It is important to ensure that the rated secondary current
of the current transformer matches the rated current of the device, otherwise the
device will incorrectly calculate primary amperes.
W0 correction
angle
A correction of the angle faults of the current transformers and voltage transformers is
particularly important with regard to the reverse power protection (address _____&7_
$1*/(_:_), as in this case, a very low active power is calculated from a very high apparent
power (for small cos ϕ ).
The ∆ ϕ angle fault difference between the current transformers and voltage transformers
is particularly important in this context. As a correction, the sum of the medium angle
faults of the current transformers and voltage transformers is set. The corrective
value can be determined within the framework of machine commissioning (see section
8.3.7.2).
MENU
ENTER
$GGUHVV______ $GGUHVV_____
WRZDUGV__PDFKLQH_ WRZDUGV_VWDUSW_
GG
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-11
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Uph/Udelta
adaptation factor
The address _____8SK_8GHOWD serves to communicate the adaptation factor between
the phase voltage and the displacement voltage to the device. This information
is relevant for measured-quantity monitoring.
If the voltage transformer set has e–n–windings and if these windings are connected
to the device (UE–input), this must be specified accordingly in address ____ (see below
at „displacement voltage“ paragraph title). As the transformation ratio of the voltage
transformers is usually:
the factor Uph/Uen (secondary voltage, address ____ 8SK_8GHOWD) in relation to 3/
√3 = √3 = 1.73 must be used if the Uen voltage is connected. For other transformation
rations, i.e. the formation of the displacement voltage via an interconnected transformer
set, the factor must be corrected accordingly.
Iee transformation
ratio
For the conversion of the sensitive ground current (INs) in primary quantities, the device
requires the primary/secondary transformation ratio of the transformer. The address
____ )$&725_,(( serves to communicate this transformation ratio to the device.
UE transformation
ratio
For the conversion of the UE displacement voltage in primary quantities, the device
requires the primary/secondary transformation ratio of the transformer delivering the
UE voltage. The following specification generally applies for this ratio _____)$&725_
8(:
In this context, UWdl, prim is the primary voltage and UE, sec is the secondary displayement
voltage applied to the device. If a voltage divider is used, its division ratio also
influences this factor. The following equation results for the example in figure 6-1b with
the power system data selected there and an 1:5 voltage divider ratio
Displacement
voltage
The address ____ 8(_&211(&7,21 serves for specifying whether the displacement
voltage is connected or QRW_FRQQHFWHG at the QHXWUDO_WUDQVIRUPHU or at
the
open GHOWD_ZLQGLQJ, e.g. of an earthing transformer. In the latter case, the device
calculates the displacement voltage from the phase-to-ground voltages. This information
is of primary importance for the 100–%–stator earth fault protection, whose measuring
procedure depends on the displacement voltage detection method.
If this voltage stage shall be used for monitoring any other voltage instead of the displacement
voltage, the user may select as fourth option 8(_FRQQHFWHG_WR_DQ\_97
under address 0211.
phase rotation reversal
Address ____ 3+$6(_6(4_ is used to establish phase rotation reversal. The default
phase sequence is “/_ /_ /_”. For systems that use a phase sequence of
“/_ /_ /_”, address ____ should be set accordingly. A temporary reversal of rotation
is also possible using binary inputs (see Section 6.21).
UNprim
3
-----------------
UNsek
3
---------------
UNsek
3
⁄ ⁄ ---------------
UWdl, prim
UE, sek
_____)$&725_8( = ------------------------
6.3 kV ⁄( 3)
500 V ⁄ 5
_____)$&725_8( = --------------------------------- = 36.4
Functions
6-12 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 6-10 Phase sequences
Trip command
duration
Address ____ 7PLQ_75,3_&0' is used to set the minimum time the tripping contacts
will remain closed. This setting applies to all protective functions that initiate tripping.
Current flow monitoring
Address ____ %NU&ORVHG_,_0,1 corresponds to the threshold value of the integrated
current flow monitoring feature. This setting is used for the elapsed-time meter and
the overload protection. If the threshold value set at address ____ is exceeded, the
circuit breaker is considered closed and the power system is considered to be in operation.
In the case of overload protection, this criterion serves for distinguishing between
the standstill and the motion of the machine to be protected.
Operating mode The _____6&+(0( setting is used for specifying if the generator to be protected
is operated
in the 8QLW_7UDQVI_ or the %XVEDU mode. This specification is important for
the inverse O/C time protection with undervoltage consideration, as different voltages
are used here, depending on the corresponding operating mode (see „Undervoltage
consideration“ in section 6.3.1).
Rated Frequency Address ____ 5DWHG_)UHTXHQF\ corresponds to the frequency at which
the power
system operates. The setting is dependent on the model number of the relay purchased,
and must be in accordance with the nominal frequency of the power system.
Starpoint earthing The _____67$5_32,17 setting serves to specify if the generator starpoint is
operated
in the ORZ_UHVLVWDQFH or the KLJK_UHVLVWDQFH mode. This specification is
important
for the measured-value monitoring. The total current monitoring of the three
phase currents is only useful for an isolated or high-resistance starpoint and earth
fault-free operation. For all other applications, it is not executed.
Settings In the list below, the setting ranges and default setting values of the pickup currents
are for a device with a nominal current rating IN = 1 A. For a nominal current rating IN
= 5 A, multiply the setting options values and default setting values by 5. Consider the
current transformer ratios when setting the device with primary values.
L1
L3 L2
L1
L2 L3
Clockw. rot. phase sequ. L1, L2, L3 Anti-clockw. rot. ph. sequ. L1, L3, L2
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-13
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6.1.4 Settings
1) depending of the ordering code, please refer to Table 6-1
Addr. Setting Title Setting Options Default Setting Comments
209 PHASE SEQ. L1 L2 L3
L1 L3 L2
L1 L2 L3 Phase Sequence
213 SCHEME Direct connected to busbar
Unit transformer connected
Direct connected
to busbar
Scheme Configuration
214 Rated Frequency 50 Hz
60 Hz
50 Hz1) Rated Frequency
217 STAR-POINT Starpoint earthing: high resistance
Starpoint earthing: low resistance
Starpoint earthing:
high resistance
Earthing of Machine Starpoint
201 CT Starpoint CT starpoint towards
machine
CT starpoint towards starpoint
CT starpoint
towards machine
CT Starpoint
204 CT PRIMARY 10..50000 A 500 A CT Rated Primary Current
205 CT SECONDARY 1A
5A
1A1) CT Rated Secondary Current
207 CT ANGLE W0 -5.00..5.00 ° 0.00 ° Correction Angle CT W0
208 FACTOR IEE 1.0..300.0 60.0 CT Ratio Prim./Sec. Iee
202 Unom PRIMARY 0.10..400.00 kV 6.30 kV Rated Primary Voltage
203 Unom SECONDARY
100..125 V 100 V Rated Secondary Voltage (Ph-Ph)
206 Uph / Udelta 1.00..3.00 1.73 Matching Ratio Ph.-VT to Broken-
Delta-VT
211 UE CONNECTION UE connected to neutral
transformer
UE connected to broken
delta winding
not connected
UE connected to any VT
UE connected to
neutral transformer
UE Connection
218 FACTOR UE 1.0..2500.0 36.4 VT Ratio Prim./Sec. Ue
210 TMin TRIP CMD 0.01..32.00 sec 0.15 sec Minimum TRIP Command Duration
212 BkrClosed I MIN 0.04..1.00 A 0.04 A1) Closed Breaker Min. Current
Threshold
Functions
6-14 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6.1.4.1 Information
6.1.5 Setting groups
Purpose of setting
groups
A setting group is nothing more than a collection of setting values to be used for a particular
application. In the 7UM61 relay, two independent setting groups (A and B) are
possible. The user can switch back and forward between setting groups locally, via binary
inputs (if so configured), via the operator or service interface using a personal
computer, or via the system interface.
A setting group includes the setting values for all functions that have been selected as
(QDEOHG during configuration (see Chapter 5). While setting values may vary among
the two setting groups, the selected functions of each setting group remain the same.
Multiple setting groups allows a specific relay to be used for more than one application.
While all setting groups are stored in the relay, only one setting group may be active
at a given time.
If multiple setting groups are not required, Group A is the default selection, and the
following paragraph is not applicable.
If multiple setting groups are desired, address ____ *US_&KJH_237,21 must be set
to (QDEOHG in the relay configuration. Refer to chapter 5.
Copying setting
groups
In most cases, only a few settings will vary from setting group to setting group. For this
reason, an option exists to copy stored setting values from one setting group to another
setting group using DIGSI® 4:
To copy the setting values from one setting group to another setting group, the user
should highlight the setting group in the list whose setting values are to be copied.
Next, the user should go to the menu bar, click on_(GLW and select &RS\ (see Figure
6-11).
F.No. Alarm Comments
5145 >Reverse Rot. >Reverse Phase Rotation
5147 Rotation L1L2L3 Phase Rotation L1L2L3
5148 Rotation L1L3L2 Phase Rotation L1L3L2
361 >FAIL:Feeder VT >Failure: Feeder VT (MCB tripped)
5002 Operat. Cond. Suitable measured quantities present
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-15
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 6-11 Copying a setting group in DIGSI® 4
The next step is to highlight the name of setting group in the list into which the setting
values should be copied. The user should go to the menu bar, click on (GLW and select
3DVWH. A confirmation box will appear (see Figure 6-12). Select <HV to copy the setting
values.
Figure 6-12 DIGSI® 4: Confirmation before copying a setting group
Setting groups may be copied more easily using the “Drag & Drop” feature. To use the
“Drag & Drop” feature, the name of the setting group in the list whose setting values
are to be copied should be highlighted. Holding down the left mouse button, the cursor
can then be dragged to the name of the setting group into which the setting values are
to be copied.
After copying setting groups, it is only necessary to modify those setting values that
are to be set differently.
Note:
All existing setting values in the setting group that has been copied to will be overwritten.
An inadvertent copy operation can be undone by closing and reopening the
DIGSI® 4 session without saving changes.
Functions
6-16 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Restoring factory
settings
The factory settings may be restored for a modified setting group. To restore factory
settings to a setting group, the name of the setting group whose settings are to be restored
should be highlighted. Next, the user should select the menu option (GLW and
then click on 5HVHW. A confirmation box appears, and the user should click on <HV to
confirm restoration of factory settings.
Switching between
setting groups
The procedure to switch from one setting group to another during operations is of thecribed
in Subsection 7.2.2. The option of switching between several setting groups
externally via binary inputs is of thecribed in Subsection 8.1.2.
6.1.5.1 Information
6.1.6 Power System Data 2
General protective data (3_6<67(0_'$7$_) includes settings associated with all
functions rather than a specific protective or monitoring function. In contrast to the
3_6<67(0_'$7$_ as discussed in Sub-section 6.1.1, these settings can be changed
over with the setting groups. To modify these settings, the user should select the 6(7_
7,1*6 menu option *URXS_$ (setting group A), and then 3_6\VWHP_'DWD_.
The other setting group is *URXS_%_ as described in Subsection 6.1.2.
Definition of nominal
system values
At addresses ____ 8_35,0$5<_23_ and _____,_35,0$5<_23_, the nominal voltage
(phase-to-phase) and current (phase) of the protected equipment is entered (e.g.,
motors). These values do not effect pickup settings. They are generally used to show
values in reference to full scale. For example, if a CT ratio of 500/1 is selected and the
full load current of a motor is 483 amps, a value of 500 amps should be entered for
____&7 35,0$5< and a value of 483 amps should be entered for _____,_35,0$5<_
23_. 483 amps are now displayed as 100 % in the percentage metering display (Subsection
6.1.3).
Note:
All setting values in the setting group being restored to factory settings will be overwritten.
An inadvertent reset operation can be reversed by closing and reopening the
DIGSI® 4 session without saving changes.
Addr. Setting Title Setting options Default Setting Comments
302 CHANGE to Group A
Group B
Binary input
Protocol
Group A Change to Another Setting Group
7 >Set Group Bit0 >Setting Group Select Bit 0
Group A Group A
Group B Group B
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-17
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Active power
direction
Address _____$&7,9(_32:(5 is used to specify the active power direction in the
normal mode (*HQHUDWRU = output or 0RWRU = input) or to adapt it to the power system
conditions without any recabling on the device.
6.1.6.1 Settings
6.1.6.2 Information
1101 U PRIMARY OP. 0.10..400.00 kV 6.30 kV Primary Operating Voltage
1102 I PRIMARY OP. 10..50000 A 483 A Primary Operating Current
1108 ACTIVE POWER Generator
Motor
Generator Measurement of Active Power for
FNo AlarmComments Comments
533 IL1 = Primary fault current IL1
5012 UL1E= Voltage UL1E at trip
5015 P= Active power at trip
5016 Q= Reactive power at trip
5017 f= Frequency at trip
Functions
6-18 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6.2 Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 50, 51, 67)
General The overcurrent time protection represents the short-circuit protection for extra-low or
low-voltage machines. For larger machines it is used as back-up protection for the machine
short-circuit protection (differential protection and/or impedance protection). It
provides back-up protection for network faults which are not promptly disconnected
and thus may endanger the machine.
In order to ensure that pick-up always occurs even with internal faults, the protection
- for generators - is always connected to the current transformer set in the neutral
leads of the machine. If this is not the case for an individual power system, the I>>
stage can be combined with a short-circuit direction determination and switch off a
generator short circuit by way of an undelayed tripping.
Initially, the currents are numerically filtered so that only the fundamental waves of the
currents are used for the measurement. This makes the measurement insensitive to
transient conditions at the inception of a short-circuit and to asymmetrical short-circuit
currents (d.c. component).
For each stage, the time stage can be blocked via binary input, thus avoiding a trip
command. The time stage is restarted if the blocking is canceled during a pickup.
In generators where the excitation voltage is derived from the machine terminals, the
short-circuit current subsides very quickly in the event of close-up faults (i.e. in the
generator or unit transformer range) due to the absence of excitation current and decreases
within a few seconds to a value below the pick-up value of the overcurrent
time protection. For this reason, the overcurrent time protection includes an undervoltage
stage which maintains the pick-up signal I> for a set seal-in time if the positive sequence
component of the voltages drops below a set level following pick-up of the
overcurrent time protection, even if the overcurrent drops below the set value. In this
way, the running of the trip delay time and tripping of the associated circuit-breakers
is ensured even for those cases. The undervoltage influencing can be switched off and
made ineffective by means of a binary input.
6.2.1 Overcurrent Protection (Stage I>) with undervoltage seal–in
6.2.1.1 Functional description
I> stage Each phase-to-phase current is compared individually with the ,!_common setting
value and each overrange of the common setting value is signalled separately. As
soon as the corresponding 7_,!_time delay has elapsed, a trip signal is transmitted
to the matrix. In the delivery status of the device, the drop-out value is set about 95 %
below the pick-up value. For special applications, it is also possible to specify a higher
value.
The I> stage has a (disconnectable) undervoltage stage. This stage maintains the
pick-up signal for a selectable seal-in time if the value falls below a selectable threshold
of the positive-sequence component of the voltages after an overcurrent pickup -
even if the value falls again below the overcurrent value. In this way, the elapsure of
the trip time delay and the tripping of the related breakers is also ensured in these cases.
If the voltage recovers before the seal-in time has elapsed or if the undervoltage
seal-in is blocked via a binary input, e.g. in case of a tripping of the voltage transformer
protective breaker or in case of a machine stopping, the protective relay drops out immediately.
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-19
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Fig 6-13 shows the logic diagram of the overcurrent time protection.
Figure 6-13 Logic diagram of the overcurrent stage I> with undervoltage seal-in
6.2.1.2 Programming settings for ttime-overcurrent protection
General The time-overcurrent protection feature is only effective and accessible if ____ 2_&_
3527__,! = (QDEOHG was specified at address 0112. 'LVDEOHG is specified if this
function is not needed.
Stage I> At address ____ 2_&_,!, the definite time-overcurrent stage I> may be switched 21
or 2)). As an alternative, it is also possible to block only the trip command (%ORFN_
UHOD\). The pickup value of the I> stage (set at address _____,!) should be set
above the maximum anticipated load current. Pickup due to overload should never occur
since the I> stage is designed only for fault protection. For this reason, a setting
equal to 120 % of the expected peak load is recommended for generators, and a setting
equal to 140 % of the expected peak load is recommended for transformers and
motors.
The trip time delay (parameter ____ 7_,!) must be coordinated with the time grading
of the network in order to ensure that the protective equipment next to the corresponding
fault location switches off first (selectivity).
The selected time is only an additional time delay and does not include the operating
time (measuring time, drop-out time). The delay can also be set to ∞. In this case, the
stage does not trigger after pickup. However, the pickup is signalled. If the I> stage is
FNo. 1966
>BLOCK I> I > BLOCKED
FNo. 1722
Pickup IL1>
Tripping
matrix
70LQ
75,3_&0'
Pickup IL3>
Pickup IL2>
OR
&
OR
OR
FNo. 1970
U< seal in
&
& OR
FNo. 1811
I > Fault L1
FNo. 1812
I > FaultL2
FNo. 1813
I > Fault L3
____ 7_,!
FNo. 1815
I > TRIP
>Useal-in BLK
FNo. 1950
Pickup U1<
Fuse Failure &
OR
&
____ 7_6($/_,1
SQ
R
____ 8__6($/_,1
OR
Functions
6-20 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
not required at all, 2_&_,! = 2)) is specified under address ____. In this case, there
is neither a pickup signalization nor a trip.
The _____8__undervoltage stage (positive-sequence voltage) is set to a value below
the lowest phase-to-phase voltage permissible during operation, e.g. 80 V.
The seal-in time _____7²6($/²,1 limits the pickup seal-in introduced by the overcurrent/
undervoltage. It must be set to a value higher than the 7,!_time delay.
The drop-out ratio r = Iab/Ian of the I> overcurrent pickup is specified at the address
_____,!_'287_5$7,2. The recommended value is r = 0.95. For special applications,
e.g. overload warning, it can be set to a higher value (0.98).
Example:
Pick-up value 1.4 ⋅ IN Mach.
Tripping time delay 3 s
Undervoltage seal-in 0.8 ⋅ UN Mach.
Seal-in time of U< 4 s
Drop-out ratio 0.95
Nominal current IN, Mach 483 A Nominal voltage UN, Mach 6.3 kV
Nominal current IN, transf., prim500 A Nominal voltage UN, transf., prim 6.3 kV
Nominal current IN, sec 1 A Nominal voltage UN, sec 100 V
The following secondary setting values result from this specification:
6.2.1.3 Settings for phase overcurrent protection
In the list below, the setting ranges and default setting values for the pickup currents
1.4 ⋅ IN, Mach
IN, transf., prim
= --------------------------------- ⋅ IN, sec 1.4 ⋅ 483 A
500 A
=---------------------------- ⋅ 1 A=1.35 A
0.8 ⋅ UN, Mach
UN, transf., prim
= ----------------------------------- ⋅ UN, sec 0.8 ⋅ 6.3 kV
6.3 kV
=----------------------------- ⋅ 100 V=80 V
,!
8_
1201 O/C I> ON
OFF
Block relay for trip commands
OFF Overcurrent Time Protection I>
1202 I> 0.10..8.00 A 1.35 A I> Pickup
1203 T I> 0.00..60.00 sec 3.00 sec T I> Time Delay
1204 U< SEAL-IN ON
OFF
OFF State of Undervoltage Seal-in
1205 U< 10.0..125.0 V 80.0 V Undervoltage Seal-in Pickup
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-21
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6.2.1.4 Information list for phase overcurrent protection
6.2.2 Overcurrent protection (stage I>>) with direction
6.2.2.1 Functional description
I>> stage Each phase current is compared individually with the ,!!_common pick-up value and
signalled in case of an overrange. A trip signal is transmitted to the matrix as soon as
the corresponding 7_,!! time delays have elapsed. The drop-out value is about 95 %
below the pick-up value.
Direction detection The I>> stage is equipped with a (disconnectable) direction element
permitting a tripping
only for faults in backward (i.e. machine) direction.
For this reason, this stage can be used especially in cases where no current transformers
exist in the generator starpoint and if a disconnection via an undelayed tripping
is nevertheless to take place in case of generator faults (see figure 6-14).
Figure 6-14 Selectivity via short-circuit direction detection
1206 T-SEAL-IN 0.10..60.00 sec 4.00 sec Duration of Undervoltage Seal-in
1207 I> DOUT RATIO 0.90..0.99 0.95 I> Drop Out Ratio
FNo Alarm Comments
1722 >BLOCK I> >BLOCK I>
1950 >Useal-in BLK >O/C prot. : BLOCK undervoltage seal-in
1965 I> OFF O/C prot. stage I> is switched OFF
1966 I> BLOCKED O/C prot. stage I> is BLOCKED
1967 I> ACTIVE O/C prot. stage I> is ACTIVE
1811 I> Fault L1 O/C fault detection stage I> phase L1
1970 U< seal in O/C prot. undervoltage seal-in
1815 I> TRIP O/C I> TRIP
G
backward
Functions
6-22 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
The direction is detected phase-selectively by means of a cross-polarized voltage.
The phase-to-phase voltage located perpendicular to the pointer of the fault current is
typically used as cross-polarized voltage (Figure 6-15). This is considered during the
calculation of the direction vector in the clockwise rotating phase sequence by way of
a rotation by +90° and in the anti-clockwise rotating phase by way of a rotation by –
90°. In case of phase-to-phase faults, the position of the direction straight line may
change in relation to the collapse of the short-circuit voltage.
Figure 6-15 Cross-polarized voltages for direction determination
The phase carrying the highest voltage is selected for the direction decision. In case
of equal current levels, the phase with the smaller number is chosen (IL1 before IL2 before
IL3). Table 6-2 shows the assignment of voltage and current values for the determination
of the fault direction for various types of short-circuit faults..
Table 6-2 Voltage and Current Values for the Determination of Fault Direction
Pick up Current Voltage
L1 IL1 UL2 – UL3
L2 IL2 UL3 – UL1
L3 IL3 UL1 – UL2
L1, L2 mit IL1>IL2 IL1 UL2 – UL3
L1, L2 mit IL1=IL2 IL1 UL2 – UL3
L1, L2 mit IL1<IL2 IL2 UL3 – UL1
L1, L2, L3 mit IL1>(IL2, IL3) IL1 UL2 – UL3
L1, L2, L3 mit IL2>(IL1, IL3) IL1 UL2 – UL3
UL3-L1
UL1-L2
UL1
UL3 UL2
UL2-L3 UL2-L3
UL3 UL2
UL1
Local phase sequences
Short circuit in phase L2–L3; cross-polarized voltage UL3 - L1
Remote phase sequences
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-23
C53000-G1176-C127-1
If the phase-to-phase voltage used for the direction decision is below the minimum value
of 7 V, the voltage is taken from a voltage memory. This voltage also allows an unambiguous
direction determination if the short-circuit voltage has seriously collapsed
(short circuit close to generator terminals). After the expiration of the storage period (2
cycles), the detected direction is saved, provided that and as long as no sufficient
measuring voltage is available. If a short circuit already exists by the moment of the
generator startup (or, in case of motors or transformers, during connection), so that no
voltage is present in the memory and no direction can be determined, a tripping is executed.
The direction detection can be blocked via a binary input and thus made ineffective.
Figure 6-16 indicates the I>> stage logic diagram with the direction element.
Figure 6-16 Logic diagram of I>> stage with direction element
Pickup IL1>>
>BLOCK I>>
FNo. 1721
&
&
&
OR &
FNo. 1808
I>> picked up
70LQ
75,3_&0'
Tripping
matrix
____ 7_,!!
FNo. 1809
I>> TRIP
FNo. 1803
I >> Fault L3
FNo. 1802
I >> Fault L2
FNo. 1801
I >> Fault L1
FNo. 1956
I>> BLOCKED
OR
OR
OR
FNo. 1806
I >> forward
FNo. 1807
I >> backward
Direction
detection no
“1”
Forward
Reverse
undeterminable
____ 3KDVH_'LUHFWLRQ
Pickup IL3>>
Pickup IL2>>
&
&
&
>BLOCK dir.
FNo. 1720
Ux
Ix
Functions
6-24 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6.2.2.2 Programming settings
General The I>> time-overcurrent stage of the time overcurrent protection can only be effective
and accessible if it was specified at address ____ 2_&_3527__,!! = 1RQ²'LUHF_
WLRQDO or 'LUHFWLRQDO within the framework of project configuration. 'LVDEOHG is
selected if the function is not needed.
I>>time-overcurrent
stage
At address _____2_&_,!!, the I>> definite time-overcurrent stage may be switched
21 or 2))___In addition to this, it is also possible to block only the trip command
(%ORFN_UHOD\). As a rule, the ,!!_time-overcurrent stage (parameter ____ and
corresponding
delay 7_,!!, ____) is used for current grading with large impedances existing
for example with transformers, motors or generators. The definite time-overcurrent
stage must be specified in a way ensuring that it picks up for short circuits up to
this impedance.
Current transformer
in the starpoint
(without direction detection)
Example: Block connection
a) Short-circuit current calculation:
Three-pole short circuit
b) Setting value:
The setting value is achieved by means of a conversion on the sedondary side. In or
to exclude an unwanted operation caused by overvoltages or transient phenomena,
an additional safety factor of about 1.2 to 1.3 is recommended
A value of 7,!! = 0,1 s is recommended as tripping time delay, in order to enable a
preferred tripping of the differential protection.
Rated apparent power - generator SN, G = 5.27 MVA
Rated voltage - generator UN, G = 6.3 kV
Direct-axis transient reactance x’d = 29 %
Transient synchronous generated voltage
(Salient-pole generator)
U’P =1.2 ⋅ UN, G
Rated apparent power - transformer SN, T = 5.3 MVA
Rated voltage, on the generator side UN, T = 6.3 kV
Short-circuit voltage uk = 7 %
Current transformer IN, prim =500 A
IN, sek =1 A
IK 3pol
U’P ⁄( 3)
x’d
100 %
----------------
UN, G
2
SN, G
⋅ -------------- 0.5
uK
100 %
----------------
UN, T
2
SN, G
+ ⋅ ⋅ -------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.2 ⋅ 6.3 kV ⁄( 3)
2.18Ω + 0.26Ω
≈ ≈ --------------------------------------------- ≈ 1789 A
1.2
IK 3pol
IN prim
⋅ ---------------⋅ IN sec 1.2
1789 A
500 A
,!! = = ⋅ ------------------⋅ 1 A=4.3 A
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-25
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Current transformer
on the output
side
(with direction
detection)
The addresses _____3KDVH_'LUHFWLRQ and _____/,1(_$1*/( are only accessible
if_2_&_3527__,!! was configured as 'LUHFWLRQDO_at the address ____ (see
section 5.1). The inclination of the direction straight line (see figure 6-17) representing
the separating line between the tripping and the blocking zone can be adapted to the
network conditions by way of the /,1(_$1*/( parameter. To do this, the line angle
of the network is set. The direction straight line is perpendicular to the set direction angle.
Together with the parameter _____3KDVH_'LUHFWLRQ = )RUZDUG or 5HYHUVH,
this parameter covers the entire impedance level. This is the UHYHUVH direction, provided
that the protective relay has been connected correctly according to one of the
diagrams in annex A.3. A small zone is located between the forward and the reverse
zone. Due to phase displacement angles of the transformers, a safe direction decision
is not possible in this small zone. Consequently, there is no tripping in the parameterized
preferred direction in this zone.
.
Figure 6-17 Definition of the parameters _____3KDVH_'LUHFWLRQ and _____/,1(_

$1*/(
The setting value of the direction straight line results from the short-circuit angle of the
feeding network. As a rule, it will be > 60°. The current pick-up value results from the
short-circuit current calculation. Acceptable pick-up values are situated at about (1.5
to 2) ⋅ IN, G. In order to wait until the expiration of transient phenomena, a short tripping
time delay is recommended (7_,!! ≈ 0.05 s to 0.1 s).
6.2.2.3 Settings for I>> time-overcurrent stage of the definite time-overcurrent protection
are for a device with a nominal current IN = 1 A. For a nominal current IN = 5 A, multiply
the setting option values and default setting values by 5. Consider the current transformer
ratios when setting the device with primary values.
ZLine
IL1
UL1
ϕ L = 3+,_',5(&7,21
Direction straight line
)25:$5'
%$&.:$5'
_1HWZRUN_
_*HQHUDWRU_
Functions
6-26 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6.2.2.4 Information List
1301 O/C I>> ON
OFF
OFF Overcurrent Time Protection I>>
1302 I>> 0.10..8.00 A 4.30 A I>> Pickup
1303 T I>> 0.00..60.00 sec 0.10 sec T I>> Time Delay
1304 Phase Direction Forward
Reverse
Reverse Phase Direction
1305 LINE ANGLE -90..90 ° 60 ° Line Angle
FNo Alarm Comments
1721 >BLOCK I>> >BLOCK I>>
1720 >BLOCK dir. >BLOCK direction I>> stage
1955 I>> OFF O/C prot. stage I>> is switched OFF
1956 I>> BLOCKED O/C prot. stage I>> is BLOCKED
1957 I>> ACTIVE O/C prot. stage I>> is ACTIVE
1806 I>> forward O/C I>> direction forward
1807 I>> backward O/C I>> direction backward
1801 I>> Fault L1 O/C fault detection stage I>> phase L1
1808 I>> picked up O/C prot. I>> picked up
1809 I>> TRIP O/C I>> TRIP
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-27
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6.3 Inverse O/C time protection (ANSI 51)
6.3.1 Functional description
General The overcurrent time protection represents the short-circuit protection for small or
lowvoltage
machines. For larger machines it is used as back-up protection for the machine
short-circuit protection (differential protection and/or impedance protection). It
proviof the back-up protection for network faults which are not promptly disconnected
and thus may endanger the machine.
In generators where the excitation voltage is taken from the machine terminals, the
short-circuit current subsdes very quickly in the event of close-up faults (i.e. in the generator
or unit transformer range) due to the absence of the excitation current and decreases
within a few seconds to a value below the pick-up value of the overcurrent
time protection. In order to avoid a drop out of the pickup, the positive-sequence component
is monitored additionally. This component can influence the overcurrent detection
according to two different methods. The undervoltage influencing can be switched
off.
The protective function operates, depending on the ordering variant, with a currentdepending
characteristic according to the IEC or ANSI standards. The characteristic
curves and the corresponding formulas are represented in technical data (figures 10-
1 to 10-3 in section 10.3). If one of the voltage-dependent characteristics are configured,
the independent stages I>> and I> become effective, too (see section 6.2).
Pickup,
trip
Each phase current is compared individually with the ,S_common setting value. If a
current exceeds 1.1 times the setting value, the stage picks up and is signalled phaserelated.
The r.m.s. values of the fundamental waves are used for the pickup. During
the pickup of an Ip stage, the tripping time is calculated from the flowing fault current
by means of an integrated measuring procedure, depending on the selected tripping
characterisitc. After the expiration of this period, a trip command is transmitted.
Drop out The dropout of a picked up stage is performed as soon as the value falls below
approximately
95 % of the pick-up value (0.95 ⋅ 1.1 = 1.045 ⋅ setting value). The period
starts again in case of a new pickup.
Undervoltage
consideration
The inverse O/C time protection is equipped with a (disconnectable) undervoltage detection
which can influence the overcurrent detection in two different manners:
• Voltage controlled:
If the value falls below a selectable voltage threshold, an overcurrent stage is activated
with a lower pick-up value.
• Voltage restraint:
The pickup threshold of the overcurrent stage depends on the voltage level. A lower
voltage reduces the current pick-up value (see figure 6-18). A linear, directly proporional
dependency is realized in the zone between U/UNom = 1.00 and 0.25. Consequently,
the following rule applies:
Functions
6-28 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
:
Figure 6-18 Pick-up value voltage restraint

The Ip reference value is decreased proportional to the voltage decrease. Consequently,
for a constant current I, the I/Ip ratio is increased and the trip time is reduced.
Compared with the standard characteristics represented in section 10.3, the tripping
characteristic shifts to the left side in relation to the decreasing voltage.
The changeover to the lower pick-up value or the reduction of the pickup threshold are
performed phase by phase. The assignments of voltages to the current-carrying phases
represented in table 6-3 are valid. As the protection used in the generator range is
incorporated in the network grading plan, the conversion of the voltages by the clock
transformer must also be considered. This facts requires principle distinction between
a block connection and a busbar connection, which must be communicated to the device
by means of the parameter _____6&+(0(. As phase-to-phase voltages are referred
to in any case, faulty measurements in case of earth faults are avoided.
In or to avoid an unwanted operation in case of a voltage transformer fault, a function
blocking is implemented via a binary input controlled by the voltage transformer protective
breaker as well as via the device-internal measuring voltages failure detection
(„Fuse–Failure–Monitor“, also refer to section 6.19.1).
Figure 6-19 illustrates the logic diagram of the inverse O/C time protection without undervoltage
influencing, whereas the figures 6-20 and 6-21 illustrate the logic diagrams
with undervoltage influencing.
I(U) pick – up Ip
U
UNom
= ⋅ --------------- for 0.25
U
UNom
≤ --------------≤ 1.00
I(U) pick – up = Ip ⋅ 1.00 for 1.00 U
UNom
≤ --------------≤∞
I(U) pick – up = Ip ⋅ 0.25 for 0.00 U
UNom
≤ --------------≤ 0.25
U⁄ UNom
Factor
1.0
0.25
0.5
0.75
0.25 0.5 0.75 1.0
with UNom – Generator nominal voltage = parameter _____8_35,0$5<_23_
I(U)pick-up – Voltage-influenced pick-up value
Ip – Inverse O/C time protection pickup value = parameter _____,S
Table 6-3 Controlling voltages in relation to the fault currents
Current Voltage
Busbar connection Block connection
IL1 UL1 – UL2 ((UL1 – UL2) – (UL3 – UL1)) / √3
IL2 UL2 – UL3 ((UL2 – UL3) – (UL1 – UL2)) / √3
IL3 UL3 – UL1 ((UL3 – UL1) – (UL2 – UL3)) / √3
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-29
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 6-19 Logic diagram of the inverse O/C time protection without undervoltage influencing
70LQ
75,3_&0'
Tripping
matrix
>BLOCK O/C Ip
FNo. 1883
&
____ 7_,S
____ 7_,S
____ 7_,S
&
Pickup IL1
Pickup IL2
Pickup IL3
& OR
FNo. 1900
O/C Ip TRIP
FNo. 1892
O/C Ip BLOCKED
FNo. 1897
O/C Ip Fault L2
FNo. 1896
O/C Ip Fault L1
FNo. 1898
O/C Ip Fault L3
OR
FNo. 1899
O/C Ip pick. up
Functions
6-30 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 6-20 Logic diagram of the inverse O/C time protection without undervoltage influencing
The changeover to the lower current pick-up value in case of decreasing voltage (loop
release) is performed phase by phase according to table 6-3.
____ 7_,S
____ 7_,S
____ ,S
70LQ
75,3_&0'
Tripping
matrix
>BLOCK O/C Ip
FNo. 1883
&
____ 7_,S
&
& OR
FNo. 1900
O/C Ip TRIP
FNo. 1892
O/C Ip BLOCKED
FNo. 1897
O/C Ip Fault L2
FNo. 1896
O/C Ip Fault L1
FNo. 1898
O/C Ip Fault L3
____ ,S
>FAIL:Feeder VT
FNo. 0361
OR
Fuse Failure
Loop
release
IL1
IL2
IL3
UL1
UL2
UL3
____ ,S
OR
FNo. 1899
O/C Ip pick. up
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-31
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 6-21 Logic diagram of the voltage-restraint inverse O/C time protection
The reduction of the current pick-up threshold in case of a decreasing voltage (control
voltage assignment) is performed phase by phase according to table 6-3.
6.3.2 Functional settings
General The inverse O/C time protection is effective and accessible if this function was set to
2_&_3527__,S = ZLWK_,(&_or ZLWK_$16, at the address ____ within the framework
of project configuration. If the function is not needed, it is set to 'LVDEOHG.
Ip overcurrent
stage
The address ____ 2_&_,S is used to switch the inverse O/C time protection 21 or
2)) or to block only the trip command (%ORFN_UHOD\). In this context, it must be considered
that, for the inverse O/C time protection, a safety factor of about 1.1 has already
been included between the pick-up value and the setting value. This means that
____ 7_,S
____ 7_,S
____ ,S
____ ,S
70LQ
75,3_&0'
Tripping
matrix
&
____ 7_,S
&
& OR
FNo. 1900
O/C Ip TRIP
FNo. 1897
O/C Ip Fault L2
FNo. 1896
O/C Ip Fault L1
FNo. 1898
O/C Ip Fault L3
____ ,S
IL1
IL2
IL3
>BLOCK O/C Ip
FNo. 1883 FNo. 1892
O/C Ip BLOCKED
>FAIL::Feeder VT
FNo. 0361
OR
Fuse Failure
Control
voltage
assignm.
UL1
UL2
UL3
Ux1
Ux2
Ux3
Ux=Unom.
OR
FNo. 1899
O/C Ip pick. up
Functions
6-32 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
a pickup is only performed if a current of about 1.1 of the setting value is present. The
dropout is performed as soon as the value falls below 95 % of the pick-up value.
The current value is set at address ____ ,S. The maximally occuring operating curent
is of primary importance for the setting. A pickup caused by an overload must be excluded,
as the device operates in this mode as a short-circuit protection with correspondingly
short command times and not as an overload protection.
The corresponding time multipier can be accessed at the address ____ 7_,S within
the framework of the IEC characteristic curve configuration (address _____2_&_
3527__,S = ZLWK_,(&).
Within the framework of the ANSI characteristic curve configuration (address ____ 2_
&_3527__,S = ZLWK_$16,), the corresponding time multiplier is located at address
____ 7,0(_',$/__7'.
The time multipliers must be coordinated with the network grading plan.
The time multipliers can also be set to ∞. In this case, the stage does not trip after pickup,
but the pickup is signalled. If the Ip stage is not required at all, the address ____
2_&_3527__,S = 'LVDEOHG is to be selected during the configuration of the protective
functions (section 5.1). However, it is also possible to switch off this function at
address _____2_&_,S = 2)).
The address ____ serves to predefine the 8__pick-up value for the undervoltage trip
of the Ip pickup value for voltage-controlled inverse O/C time protection/AMZ (parameter
_____92/7__,1)/8(1&( = 9ROWDJH_FRQWUROOHG). The parameter is set to
a value situated just below the lowest phase-to-phase voltage permissible during operation,
e.g. from 75 to 80 V. In this context, the same rules as for the undervoltage
seal-in of the definite O/C time protection are valid (see also subsection 6.2.1.2).
If 92/7__,1)/8(1&( = 9ROWDJH_UHVWUDLQW or ZLWKRXW was selected at address
____, the parameter _____8_ has no function.
6.3.2.1 Parameter list of the inverse O/C time protection
1401 O/C Ip ON
OFF
OFF Inverse O/C Time Protection Ip
1402 Ip 0.10..4.00 A 1.00 A Ip Pickup
1403 T Ip 0.05..3.20 sec 0.50 sec T Ip Time Dial
1404 TIME DIAL: TD 0.50..15.00 5.00 TIME DIAL: TD
1405 IEC CURVE Normal Inverse
Very Inverse
Extremely Inverse
Normal Inverse IEC Curve
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-33
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6.3.2.2 Information List
1406 ANSI CURVE Very Inverse
Inverse
Moderately Inverse
Extremely Inverse
Definite Inverse
Very Inverse ANSI Curve
1407 VOLT. INFLUENCE without
Voltage controlled
Voltage restraint
without Voltage Influence
1408 U< 10.0..125.0 V 75.0 V U< Threshold for Release Ip
1883 >BLOCK O/C Ip >BLOCK inverse O/C time protection
1891 O/C Ip OFF O/C protection Ip is switched OFF
1892 O/C Ip BLOCKED O/C protection Ip is BLOCKED
1893 O/C Ip ACTIVE O/C protection Ip is ACTIVE
1896 O/C Ip Fault L1 O/C fault detection Ip phase L1
1899 O/C Ip pick. up O/C Ip picked up
1900 O/C Ip TRIP O/C Ip TRIP
Functions
6-34 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6.4 Thermal overload protection (ANSI 49)
6.4.1 Description of thermal overload protection
General The thermal overload protection feature of the 7UM61 is designed to prevent overloads
from damaging the protected equipment.
The device is capable of projecting excessive operating temperatures for the protected
equipment in accordance with a single-body thermal model, based on the following
differential equation:
The thermal overload protection feature models a heat image of the equipment being
protected. Both the previous history of an overload and the heat loss to the environment
are taken into account.
Thermal overload protection calculates the operating temperature of the protected
equipment in per cent of the maximum allowable operating temperature. When the
calculated operating temperature reaches a settable percentage of the maximum allowable
operating temperature, a warning message is issued to allow time for the load
reduction measures to take place. When the calculated operating temperatur e reaches
100 % of the maximum allowable operating temperature, a trip signal is initiated to
de-energize the overloaded equipment. Initiation of a trip signal is based on the phase
with the highest calculated temperature.
The maximum thermally-permissible continuous current Imax is described as a multiple
of the IN nominal current:
Imax = k · IN
For thermal overload protection to calculate operating temperature in per cent of the
maximum allowable operating temperature, it is necessary to enter the k factor setting,
the time constant setting τ and the warning temperature level Θ .
Thermal overload protection also features a current warning element in addition to the
temperature warning stage. The current warning element may report an overload current
prematurely, even if the calculated operating temperature has not yet attained the
warning or tripping levels.
During the coolant-temperature detection, the maximum permissible current Imax is influenced
by the coolant temperature difference, as a lower ambient or coolant temperature
can lead to a higher current loading than a higher temperature value.
dΘ
dt
------- 1
τ + --- ⋅ Θ 1
τ
--- I2 ⋅ 1
τ = + --- ⋅ Θ K
where Θ – Actual operating temperature expressed in per cent of the
operating temperature corresponding to the maximum
permissible operating current (k · IN)
Θ K – Coolant temperature as a difference to the 40 °C reference
temperature
τ – Thermal time constant for the heating of the equipment being
protected
I – Operating current expressed in per cent of the maximum
permissible operating current (k · IN)
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-35
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Current limiting In order to avoid that the thermal overload protection reaches extremely short
trip
times on occurrance of high short-circuit currents (and on selection of a small time
constant) and thus perhaps affects the time grading of the short-circuit protection, it is
possible to determine a current limiting of the overload protection. Currents exceeding
the value specified at parameter _____,_0$;_7+(50_ are limited to this value. For
this reason, they don’t further reduce trip time in the thermal image.
Blocking The thermal overload protection feature may be blocked via a binary input. When
blocking occurs, the thermal image is simultaneously reset.
When machines must be started for emergency reasons, operating temperatur es
above the maximum permissible operating temperatur es can be allowed by blocking
the tripping signal via a binary input. Since the calculated operating temperatur e may
be higher than the maximum allowable operating temperatur e after drop out of the binary
input has taken place, the thermal overload protection function features a programmable
run-on time interval which is started when the binary input drops out. Tripping
will be defeated until this time interval elapses. On a final note, the binary input
used for emergency starting affects only the tripping signal. There is no effect on the
fault condition protocol nor does the thermal image reset.
Figure 6-22 shows the logic diagram for thermal overload protection.
Functions
6-36 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 6-22 Logic diagram for thermal overload protection
dΘ
dt
------- 1
τ
+ --- ⋅ Θ
1
τ
--- I
2⋅ 1
τ
= + --- ⋅ Θ K
_____,_$/$50
2Q
2))
„1“
_____7KHU__29(5/2$'
Θ PD[
L1
IL1
IL2
IL3
$ODUP_RQO\
Θ =0
_____7,0(_&2167$17_
_____._)$&725
3URILEXV_'3 127_(;,67,1*
(Θ K = 40 °C) 70LQ
75,3_&0'
Tripping
matrix
____ Θ _$/$50
100 % (fix)
OR &
OR OR
&
>BLK ThOverload
FNo. 1503
FNo. 1515
O/L I Alarm
FNo. 1516
O/L Θ Alarm
FNo. 1521
ThOverload TRIP
FNo. 1512
Th.Overload BLK
FNo. 1513
Overload ACT
FNo. 1511
Th.Overload OFF
>RM th.repl.Θ
FNo. 1506
OR
%ORFN_UHOD\
FNo. 1517
& O/L Th. Pickup

_____7(03_,1387
FNo. 1519
RM th.repl.Θ
>EmergencyStart
FNo. 1507
____ 7_(0(5*(1&<_
OR
____ ,_0$;_7+(50_
,
4
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-37
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6.4.2 Programming settings
General Thermal overload protection is only effective and accessible if address ____ was set
to (QDEOHG during configuration of protective functions. If the thermal overload protection
is not required, address ____ 7KHUP_2YHUORDG should be set to 'LVDEOHG.
Transformers and generators are prone to damage by overloads which last for an extended
period of time. For this reason, fault protection elements such as the overcurrent
elements should not be used to protect against overload. The short time delays
associated with fault protection elements do not allow sufficient time for the orderly
curtailment of load by operating personnel. In addition, fault protection elements set to
trip for overload will not allow short-duration, non-damaging overloads – a practice
which is often required in real operating situations.
The 7UM61 protective relay features an thermal overload protective function with a
thermal tripping characteristic curve which may be adapted to the overload tolerance
of the equipment being protected.
Thermal overload protection may be switched 21 or 2)) or $ODUP_2QO\ or %ORFN_
UHOD\ at address _____7KHU_29(5/2$'. If switched 21, tripping is also possible.
k factor The overload protection is set with quantities per unit. The nominal current IN, machine
of the object to be protected (generator, motor, transformer) is typically used as base
current. The thermally permissible continuous current Imax prim can be used to calculate
a factor kprim:
The thermally permissible continuous current for the equipment being protected is indicated
in the manufacturer’s specifications. If no specifications are available, a value
of 1.1 times the nominal current rating is assumed.
When determining the nominal current rating of the protected equipment, it is important
to relate this current to the nominal current rating of the device. For example, the
maximum permissible continuous current for a machine and the nominal current rating
of the machine are given in primary amperes.
For the k factor to be set based on the nominal device current, the following equation
must be used:
where Imax prim Maximum permissible continuous motor current in primary
amperes
IN Machine Nominal machine current in primary amperes
IN CT prim Current transformer primary nominal current
kprim
Imax prim
IN, Maschine
= ----------------------------
k
Imax prim
INMachine
-----------------------
INMachine
IN CT prim
Set the .²)$&725 = ⋅ -----------------------
Functions
6-38 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Example: Generator and current transformer with the following data:
Time constant τ The thermal overload protection element tracks excessive temperature
progression,
employing a thermal differential equation whose solution is an exponential function.
The 7,0(_&2167$17 τ (set at address ____) is used in the calculation to determine
the operating temperature. This is expressed as a maximum allowable operating temperature.
If the overload characteristic of the machine to be protected is pre-determined, the
user must select the protection trip characteristic in a way that it covers the overload
characteristic to a large extent, at least with small overloads.
This is also the case if the permissible power-up time corresponding to a certain overload
value is indicated.
Warning temperature
level
By setting the thermal warning level Θ $/$50 at address ____, a warning message
can be issued prior to tripping, thus allowing time for load curtailment procedures to
be implemented. This warning level simultaneously represents the dropout level for
the tripping signal. In other words, the tripping signal is interrupted only when the calculated
operating temperature falls below the warning level, thus allowing the protected
equipment to be placed back into service.
The thermal warning level is given in % of the tripping temperature level (maximum
allowable operating temperature).
Note: With the typical value of ._)$&725 = ___, the following final tripping overtemperature
value results in case of the application of the machine nominal current and
adapted primary transformer current:
Consequently, the warning stage should be set between the final overtemperature
with the nominal current (in this case 83 %) and the tripping overtemperature (100 %).
In the present example, the thermal memory reaches the following value if the nominal
current is applied:
A current warning level is also available (,_$/$50 ____). The setting at address ____
corresponds to secondary amperes, of course, and should be set equal to, or slightly
less than, permissible continuous current (._)$&725 · IN sec). The current warning
level may be used in lieu of the thermal warning level by setting the thermal warning
level to 100 %.
Permissible continuous current: Imax prim= 1.15 · IN, Machine
Motor nominal current IN Machine= 483 A
Current transformer ratio 500 A/1 A
Set Value K-FACTOR 1.15
483 A
500 A
= ⋅ --------------- ≈ 1.11
Θ ⁄ Θ TRIP 1
1.12
=----------=83 %
Θ ⁄ Θ TRIP 1
1.152
=--------------=76 %
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-39
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Extension of time
constants_
The time constant programmed at address 1603 is valid for a running machine. On
slowing down or standstill, the machine may cool down much slower. This behavior
can be modeled by means of a prolongation of the time constant by the .τ _)$&725
(set at address ____) on machine standstill. In this context, a machine standstill represents
the moment when the current falls below the threshold value %NU&ORVHG_,_
0,1 (see paragraph title “Current flow monitoring” in section 6.1.3).
If no distinguishing of the time constants is necessary (e.g. externally-cooled machines,
transformers, etc.) the .τ )$&725 is set at _ (Default Setting value).
Current limiting The parameter _____,_0$;_7+(50_ specifies up to which current value the trip
times
are calculated according to the pre-defined formula. In the trip characteristics of figure
10-4 in section 10.4, this limit value determines the transition to the horizontal part of
the characteristics, in which there is no further trip time reduction despite of increasing
current values. The limit value must be specified at a value ensuring that, even in case
of highest possible short-circuit current, the trip times of the overload protection exceed
in any case the trip times of the short-circuit protective relays (differential protection,
impedance protection, time overcurrent protection). As a rule, a limitation to a
secondary current corresponding to roughly the triple of the nominal machine current
will be sufficient.
Emergency starting The drop-out time to be entered at address _____7_(0(5*(1&< must be
sufficient
to allow the calculated operating temperature to decrease below the drop out level.
Ambient or coolant
temperature
The indications specified up to now are sufficient for modeling the overtemperature. In
addition to this, the machine protection can also process the ambient or coolant temperature.
This temperature value can be communicated to the relay as digitalized
measuring via the Profibus DP. The address _____7(03__,1387 serves to select
the temperature input procedure. If the coolant temperature is not detected, the address
____ is set to 'LVDEOHG. The assignment between the input signal via Profibus
DP and the temperature can be set at address 1608 (in °C) or ____ (in °F) 7(03__
6&$/_ In the default setting, 100 % correspond to 100 °C.
If the ambient temperature detection is used, the user must be aware that the ._)$&_
725 to be set refers to an ambient temperature of 40 °C, i.e. that it corresponds to the
maximum permissible current at a temperature of 40 °C.
As all calculations are performed with standardized quantities, the ambient temperature
must be standardized, too. The temperature with the nominal machine current is
used as standardization quantity. If the nominal machine current deviates from the
nominal transformer current, the temperature must be adapted according to the following
formula. The temperature adapted to the nominal transformer current is set at address
_____or _____7(03__5,6(_,. This setting value is used as standardization
quantity of the ambient temperature input.
withΘ Nsec – machine temperature with secondary nominal current = setting
at 7UM61 (address 1605 or 1606)
Θ NMach – machine temperature with nominal machine current
INprim – primary nominal current of the current transformers
INMach – nominal machine current
Θ N sec Θ NMach
INprim
IN Mach
------------------  
 2
=⋅
Functions
6-40 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
If the temperature input is not used, the address ____ must be set to 'LVDEOHG. In
this case, the settings of the addresses ____ or ____ and ____ or ____ are not
considered.
If the temperature input is used, the trip times change if the coolant temperature deviates
from the internal reference temperature of 40 °C. The following formula can be
used to calculate the trip time:
with τ – time constant (address ____)
k – ._)$&725 (address ____)
IN – nominal device current
I – actually flowing secondary current
Ipre – previous load current
Θ N – temperature with nominal current IN (address __05)
Θ K – coolant temperature input (scaling with address __08 or 1609)
Example:
Machine: INMach = 483 A
ImaxMach = 1.15 IN with Θ K = 40 °C
Θ NMach = 93° C temperature with INMach
τ = 600 s (thermal machine time constant)
Current transformer: 500 A/1 A
tτ
I
k⋅ IN
------------  
  2 Θ K – 40 °C
k2 ⋅ Θ N
----------------------------
Ipre
k⋅ IN
------------  
  2
+–
I
k⋅ IN
------------  
  2 Θ K – 40 °C
k2 ⋅ Θ N
+ ---------------------------- – 1
= ⋅ ln ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.15 483 A
500 A
⋅ --------------- ≈ 1.11
(to be set at address
._)$&725 = 1602)
Θ Nsec 93° C
500
483
---------  
  2
= ⋅ ≈ 100° C
(to be set at address
1605 or 1606))
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-41
C53000-G1176-C127-1
The following trip times result for different Θ K ambient temperatures with a supposed
load current of I = 1.5 ⋅ IN, device and a preload Ipre = 0:
6.4.2.1 Settings for thermal overload protection
In the list below, the setting range and default setting value for I ALARM is for a device
with a nominal current rating IN = 1 A. For a nominal current rating IN = 5 A, multiply
the Setting options values and default setting value by 5. Consider the current transformer
ratios when setting the device with primary values.
.
t 600s
1.5
1.1
--------  
  2 40 °C – 40 °C
1.12 ⋅ 100 °C
+ ----------------------------------- – 0
1,5
1.1
---------  
  2 40 °C – 40 °C
1.12 ⋅ 100 °C
+ ----------------------------------- – 1
⋅ ln ----------------------------------------------------------------------
 
 
 
 
 
 
bei Θ K = 40 °C: = ≈ 463 s
t 600s
1.5
1.1
 --------
  2 80 °C – 40 °C
1.12 ⋅ 100 °C
+ ----------------------------------- – 0
1.5
1.1
 --------
  2 80 °C – 40 °C
1.12 ⋅ 100 °C
+ ----------------------------------- – 1
⋅ ln --------------------------------------------------------------------
 
 
 
 
 
 
bei Θ K = 80 °C: = ≈ 366 s
t 600s
1.5
1.1
--------  
  2 0 °C – 40 °C
1.12 ⋅ 100 °C
+ --------------------------------- – 0
1.5
1.1
--------  
  2 0 °C – 40 °C
1.12 ⋅ 100 °C
+ --------------------------------- – 1
⋅ ln ------------------------------------------------------------------
 
 
 
 
 
 
bei Θ K = 0 °C: = ≈ 637 s
1601 Ther. OVER LOAD OFF
ON
Alarm Only
OFF Thermal Overload Protection
1602 K-FACTOR 0.50..2.50 1.11 K-Factor
1603 TIME CONSTANT 30..32000 sec 600 sec Thermal Time Constant
1604 Θ ALARM 70..100 % 90 % Thermal Alarm Stage
1610 I ALARM 0.10..4.00 A 1.00 A Current Overload Alarm Setpoint
1612 Kτ -FACTOR 1.0..10.0 1.0 Kt-Factor when Motor stops
1615 I MAX THERM. 0.50..8.00 A 3.30 A Maximum Current for Thermal
Replica
1616 T EMERGENCY 10..15000 sec 100 sec Emergency Time
16051) TEMP. RISE I 40..200 °C1) 100 °C1) Temperature rise at rated sec.
curr.
16061) TEMP. RISE I 104..392 °F1) 212 °F1) Temperature rise at rated sec.
curr.
1) depending of the ordering code (region world / region US)
Functions
6-42 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6.4.2.2 Information list for thermal overload protection
1607 TEMP. INPUT Disabled
Profibus DP
Disabled Temperature input
16081) TEMP. SCAL. 40..300 °C1) 100 °C1) Temperature for scaling
16091) TEMP. SCAL. 104..572 °F1) 212 °F1) Temperature for scaling
FNo Alarm Comments
1503 >BLK ThOverload >BLOCK thermal overload protection
1506 >RM th.repl.Θ >Reset memory for thermal replica
1507 >EmergencyStart >Emergency start of motors
1508 >Fail.Temp.inp >Failure temperature input
1511 Th.Overload OFF Thermal Overload Protection OFF
1512 Th.Overload BLK Thermal Overload Protection BLOCKED
1513 Overload ACT Overload Protection ACTIVE
1514 Fail.Temp.inp Failure temperature input
1519 RM th.repl.Θ Reset memory for thermal replica
1515 O/L I Alarm Overload Current Alarm (I alarm)
1516 O/L Θ Alarm Thermal Overload Alarm
1517 O/L Th. Pickup Thermal Overload picked up
1521 ThOverload TRIP Thermal Overload TRIP
1) depending of the ordering code (region world / region US)
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-43
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6.5 Unbalanced load protection (ANSI 46)
General Unbalance load protection detects unbalanced loads on the system. The negative
sequence
currents associated with unbalanced loads create counter-rotating fields in
three-phase induction machines, which act on the rotor at double frequency. Eddy currents
are induced at the rotor surface, and local overheating of the rotor begins to take
place. In addition, it may be used to detect interruptions, faults, and polarity problems
with current transformers. It is particularly useful in detecting phase-to-ground, phaseto-
phase, and double phase-to-ground faults with magnitudes lower than the maximum
load current.
6.5.1 Description of unbalanced load protection
Determination The unbalanced load protection feature of the 7UM61 relay uses filtering to
dissect the
phase currents into their symmetrical components. It evaluates the negative-phase
sequence system, the negative phase-sequence current I2. If the negative phase-sequence
current exceeds a parameterized threshold value, the trip time starts. A trip
command is transmitted as soon as this trip time has expired.
Warning stage If the value of the continuously permissible, negative phase-sequence current ,_!
is
exceeded, a warning message L_!_:DUQ_is transmitted after a selectable time 7_
:$51 (see figure 6-23).
Thermal
characteristic
The machine manufacturers indicate the permissible unbalanced load by means of the
following formula:
The asymmetry factor depends on the machine and represents the time in seconds
during which the generator can be loaded with a 100 % unbalanced load. This factor
is typically in a range between 5 s and 30 s.
The heating up of the object to be protected is modeled in the equipment as soon as
the ,_!_permissible unbalanced load is exceeded. In this context, the current-timearea
is calculated constantly to ensure a correct consideration of various load cases.
The thermal characteristic is tripped as soon as the current-time-area ((I2/IN)2 ⋅ t) has
reached the K asymmetry factor.
Limitation The model of the heating of the object to be protected is limited to a 200 % trip
temperature
overrange.
Cool down A parameterizeable cool-down time starts as soon as the value falls below the
constantly
permissible unbalanced load ,_!. The parameter 7_&22/_'2:1 serves to set
the time running until the object to be protected cools down to the start value Θ /Θ TRIP
= 0 %, after a loading with the permissible previous load ,_!. The cool-down time depends
on the construction type of the generator, and especially on the damper winding.
If there is again an asymmatrical loading during the cool-down phase, the preloading
is considered. In this case, the protective relay trips in a shorter time.
tperm
K
I2
IN
 -----
  2
= -------------
with tperm = Max. perm. applic. time of the I2 neg. ph.-sequ. cur.
K = Asymmetry factor (machine constant)
I2/IN = Unbal. load (ratio neg. phase-sequ./nom. cur. IN
Functions
6-44 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Independent
trip stage
High negative phase-sequence currents can only be caused by a two-pole power system
short circuit which must be covered in accordance with the network grading plan.
For this reason, the thermal characteristic is cut by a selectable, independent, negative
phase-sequence current time stage (parameter _____,_!! and _____7_,_!!)
- see figure 6-23.
Please also observe the instructions regarding the phase rotation (phase sequence)
provided in sections 6.1.3 and 6.21.
Figure 6-23 Tripping zone of the unbalanced load protection
I2
t
Unbal. load warn. level I2>
Thermal
trip stage
Unbal. load
tripping range I2>>
I2> I2>>
T I2>>
T WARN
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-45
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 6-24 Logic diagram of the unbalanced load protection
Logic Figure 6-24 shows the logic diagram of the unbalanced load protection. The protection
may be blocked via a binary input („!%/2&._,_“). Pickups and time stages are reset
and the metered values in the thermal model are cleared. The binary input „!50_
WK_UHSO_“ only serves to clear metered values of the thermal characteristic.
General The unbalance load protection is only effective and accessible if it was selected at
address
____ 81%$/$1&(_/2$' = (QDEOHG_within the framework of project configuration.
'LVDEOHG is set if this function is not needed.
Unbalanced load protection is switched 21 or 2))_ As an alternative, it is also possible
to block only the trip command (%ORFN_UHOD\) at address ____ 81%$/$1&(_
/2$'.
The maximum permissible, constant negative phase-sequence current is relevant for
the thermal model. For machines of up to 100 MVA with non-salient pole rotors, this
current typically amounts to a value in a range from 6 % to 8 %. With salient-pole rotors,
it is at least 12 % of the nominal machine current. For larger machines and in cases
of doubt, please observe the instructions of the machine manufacturer.
It is important to ensure that the values given by the manufacturer represent the primary
values for the machine. For example, if the long-term allowable thermal inverse
current (with respect to the nominal machine current) is given, this value is used to calculate
the settings for the unbalanced load time-overcurrent element. For this situation:
>RM th.repl.
FNo. 5146
IL1
IL2
IL3
>BLOCK I2
FNo. 5143
____ 7_:$51
____ ,_!
____ ,__!! ____ 7_,_!!_
70,1
75,3_&0'
75,3²
PDWUL[
FNo.5156
I2 > Warn
OR
&
&
FNo.5160
I2 >> TRIP
FNr.5158
RM th. repl.
&
____ )$&725_.
FNo.5165
I2> picked up
FNo.5152
I2 BLOCKED
FNo.5159
I2 >> picked up
FNo.5161
I2 Θ TRIP
0
1I2
In
---
2
∑ ⋅ ∆t
I2
Icool
Reset
I2=0
Functions
6-46 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Pickup threshold /
warning stage
The pickup and delay settings associated with the unbalanced load protection are set
at addresses _____,_! and _____7_:$51 respectively.
IExample:
Negative sequence
factor K
If the machine manufacturer has indicated the loadability duration due to an unbalanced
load by means of the constant K = (I2/IN)2 ⋅ t, it is set immediately at the address
_____)$&725_.. The constant K is proportional to the permissible energy loss.
Conversion to secondary
values
The factor K can be derived from the unbalanced load characteristic according to figure
6-25 by reading the time corresponding to the )$&725_. at the point I2/IN = 1.
Example:
tperm =20 s for I2/IN =1
The constant KMachine = 20 s determined in this way is valid for the machine side.
The factor KMachine can be converted to the secondary side by means of the following
formula:
The asymmetry factor Ksec determined in this way is set as )$&725_. at address
____.
where I2 perm prim Permissible thermal inverse current of the machine
IN Machine Nominal machine current
ICT prim Primary nominal current of the current transformer
I2
I2perm prim
INMachine
 ---------------------------
  INMachine
ICT prim
Pickup Setting = ⋅ -------------------------
Machine: IN Machine = 483 A
I2 perm prim / IN Machine = 11 % permanent (salient-pole
machine), see figure 6-25
Current
transformer:
IN CTprim = 500 A
Setting value I2 perm. = 11 % · (483 A/500 A) = 10.6 %
Example: IN Machine = 483 A
IN CT prim = 500 A
Factor KMachine = 20 s
Ksek KMachine
IN Machine
IN CTprim
------------------------  
  2
=⋅
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-47
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Setting value at address ____:
Figure 6-25 Example of an unbalanced load characteristic specified by the machine manufacturer
Time for cool down The parameter _____7_&22/_'2:1 serves to specify the time elapsing until
the object
to be protected cools down to the original value, after a loading with the permissible
,_! unbalanced load. If the machine manufacturer does not provide any information
on this subject, the setting value can be found out by supposing an equal value
for the cool-down and the heating time of the object to be protected. The formula below
describes the relation between the K asymmetry factor and the cool-down time:
Example:
The following cool-down time results for a K = 20 s asymmetry factor and a I2/IN =
11 % permissible constant unbalanced load:
This value 7_&22/_'2:1 is set at address ____.
Definite time
elements
Asymmetrical faults also cause high negative phase-sequence currents. As, for reasons
of protection coordination, the thermal characteristic is limited to about ten times
the permissible negative phase-sequence current, an independent negative phase-
20 s 483 A
500 A
 ---------------
  2
)$&725_. = ⋅ = 18.7 s
10 50 100 500 1000
0.06
1.0
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.1
0.2
0.11
t/s
I2/IN
maxim. permiss. I2/IN in permanent operation
maxim. permiss. I2/IN in case of a system fault
20 30 40
tcool down
K
(I2 ⁄ IN) 2
= ---------------------
tcool down
20 s
(0.11) 2
= ------------------- ≈ 1650 s
Functions
6-48 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
sequence current–stage characteristic _____,_!! can detect asymmetrical power
system short circuits. A setting to about 60 % to 65 % ensures that a trip is always performed
according to the thermal characteristic in case of a phase failure (unbalanced
load always < 100/√3 %, i.e. I2 < 58 %). On the other hand, a two-pole short circuit can
be supposed for an unbalanced load of more than 60 % to 65 %. The 7_,_!! time
delay (address ____) must be coordinated with the system grading of phase-tophase
short circuits.
Contrary to the time-overcurrent protection, the ,_!! stage is able to detect fault currents
at nominal current. The following conditions are valid:
− a phase-to-phase fault (I) results in the following negative sequence current:
− a phase-to-ground fault (I) corresponds to the following negative sequence current:
With an isolated starpoint, the I current value is particularly low and can be neglected.
With a low-resistance grounding, however, it is determined by the resistance.
6.5.2.1 Settings for unbalanced load protection
I2
1
3
=------- ⋅ I=0.58 ⋅ I
I2
1
3
=--- ⋅ I=0.33 ⋅ I
1701 UNBALANCE LOAD OFF
ON
OFF Unbalance Load Protection
1702 I2> 3.0..30.0 % 10.6 % Continously permissible current I2
1703 T WARN 0.00..60.00 sec 20.00 sec Warning Stage Time Delay
1704 FACTOR K 2.0..40.0 sec 18.7 sec Negativ sequence factor K
1705 T COOL DOWN 0..50000 sec 1650 sec Time for cool down
1706 I2>> 10..100 % 60 % I2>> Pickup
1707 T I2>> 0.00..60.00 sec 3.00 sec T I2>> Time Delay
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-49
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6.5.2.2 Information list for unbalanced load protection
FNo Alarm Comments
5143 >BLOCK I2 >BLOCK I2 (Unbalance Load)
5146 >RM th.repl. >Reset memory for thermal replica I2
5151 I2 OFF I2 switched OFF
5152 I2 BLOCKED I2 is BLOCKED
5153 I2 ACTIVE I2 is ACTIVE
5158 RM th. repl. Reset memory of thermal replica I2
5156 I2> Warn Unbalanced load: Current warning stage
5165 I2> picked up I2> picked up
5159 I2>> picked up I2>> picked up
5160 I2>> TRIP Unbalanced load: TRIP of current stage
5161 I2 Θ TRIP Unbalanced load: TRIP of thermal stage
Functions
6-50 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6.6 Underexcitation protection (ANSI 40)
General The underexcitation protection protects a synchronous machine from asynchronous
operation in the event of a malfunction in the excitation system and from local overheating
of the rotor. Furthermore, it prevents endangering of the network stability in
the case of underexcitation of large synchronous machines.
Underexcitation
determination
In order to detect underexcitation, the unit processes all three phase currents and all
three voltages to form the stator circuit criterion. It also processes the excitation voltage
and/or the signal from an external excitation voltage monitor to form the rotor circuit
criterion.
For the stator circuit criterion, the admittance is calculated from the positive sequence
system of the currents and voltages. In the admittance plane, the stability limit of the
machine is independent of the voltage: thus, the protection characteristic can be optimally
matched to the stability characteristic of the machine. By evaluating the positive
sequence system, underexcitation conditions are reliably detected even during asymmetrical
faults within or outside of the machine.
Characteristics Figure 6-26 shows the loading diagram of the synchronous machine in the
admittance
plane (Iactive/U; Ireactive/U) with the steady-state stability limit which intersects the reactive
axis in close proximity to 1/Xd (reciprocal value of the synchronous direct reactance)
Figure 6-26 Admittance diagram of turbo generators
Ia
U
------ P
U2
= ------
IEN
UN
--------
IN
UN
-------
1
Xd
---------
Ir
U
---- Q
U2
= ------
ϑN
ϕN
UN rated voltage U terminal voltage
IN rated current Ia active current
IEN rated excitation current Ir reactive current
ϑ N rated pole angle P active power
ϕ N rated load angle Q reactive power
Xd synchronous reactance
underexcitated overexcitated
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-51
C53000-G1176-C127-1
The 7UM61 underexcitation protection makes available three independent, freely
combinable characteristics. As illustrated in figure 6-27, it is, for example, possible to
model the static machine stability characteristic by means of two partial characteristics
with the same time delays (T CHAR. 1 = T CHAR. 2). The partial characteristics are
distinguished by the corresponding distance from the zero point (1/xd CHAR. 1) and
(1/xd CHAR. 2) the corresponding inclination angle α 1 and α 2.
If the resulting characteristic (1/xd CHAR.1)/α 1; (1/xd CHAR.2)/α 2 is exceed (in figure
6-27 to the left side), a delayed warning (e.g. by 10 s) or a trip signal are transmitted.
The delay is necessary to ensure that the voltage regulator can enhance the excitation
voltage.
Figure 6-27 Stator criterion: pick–up characteristic in admittance diagram
A further characteristic(1/xd CHAR. 3) /α 3 can be matched to the dynamic stability
characteristic of the synchronous machine. Since stable operation is impossible if this
characteristic is exceeded, immediate tripping is required in this case (7_&+$5____
time stage).
Excitation voltage
request
In case of a faulty voltage regulator or a failure of the excitation voltage, it is possible
to switch up with a short delay (time stage 7_6+57_8H[_, e.g. 1,5 s). For this purpose,
excitation voltage failure must be communicatee to the device via a binary input.
Undervoltage
blocking
The admittance calculation requires a minimum measurement voltage. During a severe
collapse (short-circuit) or failure of the stator voltages, the protection is therefore
blocked by an integrated a.c. voltage monitor.
Figure 6-28 illustrates the logic diagram of the underexcitation protection.
1/xd CHARl.1
characteristic 2
characteristic 3
characteristic1
α3 θ
α2
α1
Ia ⁄ U
Ir ⁄ U
E/U
I/U
1/xd CHAR.2
1/xd CHAR.3
Functions
6-52 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 6-28 Logic diagram of underexcitation protection
General The underexcitation protection is only effective and accessible if this function was set
within the framework of the protective function configuration (section 5.1, address
____, 81'(5(;&,7_ = (QDEOHG). If the funciton is not needed, it is set to 'LVDEOHG.
At address ____ 81'(5(;&,7__The function can be switched 21 and 2)). Additionally,
it is also possible to block only the trip command at this address (%ORFN_5HOD\).
The correct power system data input according to section 6.1.3 is another prerequisite
for the parameterization of the underexcitation protection.
FNr. 5328
OR
&
____ $1*/(__
____ __[G_&+$5___
>Char. 1 BLK.
FNo. 5329
____ $1*/(__
____ __[G_&+$5___
>Char. 2 BLK
FNo. 5330
____ $1*/(__
____ __[G_&+$5___
>Char. 3 BLK
FNo. 5327
>Uexc fail.
>Exc. BLOCK
FNo. 5323
&
&
____ 7_&+$5___
FNo. 5337
Excit < Pickup
FNo. 5344
Exc<1 TRIP
FNo. 5345
Exc< 2 TRIP
FNo. 5343
Exc<3 TRIP
____ 7_&+$5___
____ 7_&+$5___
OR
FNo. 5334
Exc. U< blk
FNo. 5332
Excit.BLOCKED
70LQ
75,3_&0'
Tripping
matrix
____ 7_6+57_8H[_
&
FNo. 5346
Exc<U<TRIP.
____ 8PLQ
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-53
C53000-G1176-C127-1
The trip characteristics of the underexcitation protection in the admittance value diagram
are composed of straight lines which are respectively defined by their conductance
section 1/xd (= coordinate distance) and their inclination angle α . The straight
lines (1/xd CHAR.1)/ANGLE 1 (characteristic 1) and (1/xd CHAR. 2)/ANGLE 2) (characteristic
2) form the static underexcitation limit (see figure 6-29). (1/xd CHAR. 1) corresponds
to the reciprocal value of the related synchronous direct reactance.
If the voltage regulator of the synchronous machine features an underexcitation limiting,
the static caracteristics are set in a way that an intervention by means of the underexcitation
limiting is possible before characteristic 1 is reached (see figure 6-31).
Figure 6-29 Underexcitation protection characteristics in the admittance plane
Characteristiccurve
values
The setting can be performed immediately via the generator power diagram (see figure
6-30). If the axis sizes are divided by the nominal apparent power, the generator
diagram is indicated per unit (the latter diagram corresponds to a per unit representation
of the admittance diagram).
1
xd
----- 1
Xd
------
UN
3⋅ IN
= ⋅ -----------------
λ 3
λ 2
α 3 α 2
α 1
321 Ga
P SN ⁄
(U⁄ UN)2
= --------------------
1/xd CHAR.1
1/xd CHAR.2
1/λ x2d CHAR.3
Gr
Q SN ⁄
(U⁄ UN)2
= --------------------
Functions
6-54 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
.
Figure 6-30 Power diagram of a salient-pole generator, indicated per unit

The primary setting values can be read out directly from the diagram. The related values
must be converted for the protection setting. The same conversion formula can be
used if the protection setting is performed with the predefined synchronous direct reactance.
with xdsec secondary per unit synchronous direct reactance,
xd mach per unit synchronous direct reactance of machine,
IN mach rated machine current
UN mach rated machine voltage
UN VT prim primary rated voltage of the voltage transformer
IN CT prim primary rated current of the current transformer
Setting example:
Machine: UN mach = 6.3 kV
IN mach = 483 A
xd mach = 2.47 (= machine manufact.indicat. in fig. 6-30)
Current transformer: IN CT prim = 500 A
Voltage transformer: UN VT prim = 6.3 kV
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
1.2
1.4
–0.2 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8
P/SN
Q/SN
Limit of the statorwinding
heating
Limit of the rotor
winding heating
Overexcitated
Measuring point
Phase
–0.8 –0.6 –0.4
Underexcitated
U = UN = 6300 V
I = IN
SN = 5270 kVA
fN = 50.0 Hz
nN = 1500 RPM
cos ϕ = 0.800
Xd = 2.470
Xq = 1.400
angle
1
xd sec
-------------- 1
xd mach
------------------
IN mach
UN mach
--------------------
UN VT prim
IN CT prim
= ⋅ ⋅ -------------------------
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-55
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Multiplied by a safety factor of about 1.05, the setting value __[G_&+$5__ at address
_____results.
For α 1 , the angle of the underexcitation limiting of the voltage regulator is selected or
the inclination angle of the machine stability characteristic is used. α 1 is typically situated
in a range between 60 ° to 80 °.
In most cases, the machine manufacturer prescribes a minimum excitation value for
small active powers. For this purpose, characteristic 1 is cut from characteristic 2 in
case of a low active-power load. Consequently, __[G_&+$5__ is set to about
0,9 ⋅ ( __[G_&+$5__), α 2 to 90 °. The kinked tripping limit according to figure 6-29
(CHAR. 1, CHAR. 2) results in this way, if the corresponding time delays 7_&+$5___
and 7_&+$5___ of both characteristics are set equally.
Characteristic 3 serves to adapt the protection to the dynamic machine stability limits.
If there are no precise indications, the user must select a value situated approximately
between the synchronous direct reactance xd and the transient reactance xd'. However,
it should be greater than 1.
A value between 80 ° and 110 ° is usually selected for the angle α 3, which ensures
that only a dynamic instability can lead to a pickup with characteristic 3.
Figure 6-31 Admittance diagram of a turbo generator
Time delays If the static limit curve consisting of the characteristics 1 and 2 is exceeded, the
voltage
regulator must first have the opportinuty of enhancing the excitation. For this reason,
a warning message due to this criterion is „long-time“ delayed (at least 10 s for _____
7_&+$5___ and _____7_&+$5___).
However, if an external excitation monitoring signals the failure of an excitation voltage
to the protective relay via a binary input, a switch-off can be performed with a short
time delay. The following messages and trip commands are typically assigned:
1
xd sec
-------------- 1
2.47
----------- 483 A
6300 V
------------------- 6300 V
500 A
= ⋅ ⋅ -------------------=0.39
simulated
characteristic
Underexcitation limiter
(regulator)
ϕ Ν
θ Ν
Ia
U
---- P
SN
= -------
IE
UN
-------
1
Xd
-------
Ir
UN
------- Q
SN
= -------
IN
UN
-------
consit. of
charc. curve 1
& char. curve 2
1.05 ⋅ 1
Xd
-------
Functions
6-56 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
The following messages and trip commands are typically assigned
Note: Upon selection of very short time delays, dyncamic balancing procedures may
cause unwanted operations. For this reason, it is recommended to set time values of
0.05 s or higher.
6.6.2.1 Parameter lists of the underexcitation protection
6.6.2.2 Information list of the underexcitation protection
Table 6-4 Setting of the underexcitation protection
characteristic 1 and 2
steady–state stability
not delayed Annunciation:
([F__SLFNHG_XS
characteristic 1 and 2
steady–state stability
long–time delayed
7_&+$5___ = 7_&+$5___ ≈ 10 s
Trip
Exc<1 TRIP/ Exc<2 TRIP
characteristic 1 and 2 and
excitation voltage failure
short–time delayed
7_6+57_8H[__≈ 1.5 s
Trip
Exc<U<TRIP
characteristic 3
dynamic stability
short–time delayed
7_&+$5____≈ 0.5 s
Trip
Exc<3 TRIP
3001 UNDEREXCIT. ON
OFF
OFF Underexcitation Protection
3011 T SHRT Uex< 0.00..60.00 sec 0.50 sec T-Short Time Delay (char. & Uexc<)
3014 Umin 10.0..125.0 V 25.0 V Undervoltage blocking Pickup
3002 1/xd CHAR. 1 0.25..3.00 0.41 Conductance Intersect Characteristic 1
3003 ANGLE 1 50..120 ° 80 ° Inclination Angle of Characteristic 1
3004 T CHAR. 1 0.00..60.00 sec 10.00 sec Characteristic 1 Time Delay
3007 T CHAR. 2 0.00..60.00 sec 10.00 sec Characteristic 2 Time Delay
3010 T CHAR 3 0.00..60.00 sec 0.30 sec Characteristic 3 Time Delay
FNo Alarm Comments
5323 >Exc. BLOCK >BLOCK underexcitation protection
5329 >Char. 1 BLK. >BLOCK underexc. prot. char. 1
5328 >Uexc fail. >Exc. voltage failure recognized
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-57
C53000-G1176-C127-1
5331 Excit. OFF Underexc. prot. is switched OFF
5332 Excit.BLOCKED Underexc. prot. is BLOCKED
5333 Excit.ACTIVE Underexc. prot. is ACTIVE
5334 Exc. U< blk Underexc. prot. blocked by U<
5337 Exc< picked up Underexc. prot. picked up
5344 Exc<1 TRIP Underexc. prot. char. 1 TRIP
5346 Exc<U<TRIP Underexc. prot. char.+Uexc< TRIP
FNo Alarm Comments
Functions
6-58 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6.7 Reverse power protection (ANSI 32R)
General Reverse power protection is used to protect a turbo-generator unit in case of failure of
energy to the prime mover. In this case the synchronous generator runs as a motor
and drives the turbine whereby the required motoring energy is taken from the network.
This condition leads to overheating of the turbine blaof the and must be interrupted
within a short time by tripping the network circuit-breaker.
For the generator, there is the additional risk that, in case of a malfunctioning residual
steam pass (defective stop valves) after the switching off of the circuit breakers, the
turbine-generator-unit is speeded up, thus reaching an overspeed. For this reason,
the system isolation should only be performed after a detected active power input.
Reverse power
determination
The reverse power protection of the 7UM61 precisely calculates the active power from
the symmetrical components of the fundamental waves of the voltages and currents
by averaging the values of the last 16 a.c. periods. The evaluation only of the positive
phase-sequence systems makes the reverse power determination independent of
current and voltage asymmetries and corresponds to the actual load of the drive end.
The calculated active power value corresponds to the overall active power. By taking
the error angles of the instrument transformers into account, the active power component
is calculated even with very high apparent powers and low power factor. The correction
is performed by a W0 constant correction angle (see section 6.1.3), determined
during the commissioning of the protective relayes in the system. The correction
angle is set at power system data 1 (see section 6.1.3).
Pickup seal-in time To ensure that frequently occuring short pickups can cause a tripping, it is
possible to
perform a selectable prolongation of these pickup pulses at parameter _____7²+2/'.
Each positive edge of the pickup pulses triggers this time stage again. For a sufficient
number of pulses, the pickup signals become longer than the time delays.
Trip signal For bridging a perhaps short power input during synchronization or during power
swings by system faults, the trip command is delayed by a selectable time 7²69²
23(1. In case of a closed emergency tripping valve, a short delay is, however, sufficient.
By means of entering the emergency tripping valve position via a binary input,
the short time delay 7²69²&/26(' becomes effective with an emergency tripping.
The time 7²69²23(1 is still efective as back-up stage.
It is also possible to block the tripping via an external signal.
Figure 6-32 illustrates the logic diagram of the reverse power protection.
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-59
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 6-32 Logic diagram of the reverse power protection
General The reverse power protection is only effective and accessible if this function was set
____, 5(9(56(_32:(5 = (QDEOHG). 'LVDEOHG_is selected if this function is not
needed. The address ____ 5(9(56(_32:(5 serves to switch the function 21 or 2))
or to block only the trip command (%ORFN_UHOD\).
In case of a reverse power, the turbine set must be disconnected from the system as
the turbine operation is not permissible without a certain minimum steam throughput
(cooling) or, in case of a gas turbine set, the motor load would be too heavy for the
network.
Pickup seal-in time The _____7²+2/' pickup duration serves to extend pulsed pickups to the
parameterized
minimum duration.
Time delays In case of a reverse power without emergency tripping, a corresponding time delay
must be considered for bridging a perhaps occurring short reverse power input after
the synchronization or power swings subsequent to system faults (e.g. 3-pole short
circuit). A 7²69²23(1_time delay of about 10 s is the typical setting.
In case of faults causing an emergency tripping, the reverse power protection performs
a short-time delayed switchoff subsequent to the emergency tripping via an oilpressure
switch or a position switch at the emergency trip valve. For the tripping, it
must be ensured that the reverse power is only caused by the missing drive power at
the turbine side. A time delay is necessary to bridge the active power swing in case of
a sudden valve closing, until a stationary active-power value is set. A 7²69²&/26('
time delay of about 1 to 3 s is sufficient for this purpose, whereas a time delay of about
0,5 s is recommended for gas turbine sets. The set times are additional time delays
not including the operating times (measuring time, drop-out time) of the protective
function.
>Pr BLOCK
FNo. 5083
>SV tripped
FNo. 5086
&
&
FNo. 5096
Pr picked up
FNo. 5092
____ 3!_5(9(56(
____ 7²69²&/26('
____ 7²69²23(1
FNo. 5097
Pr TRIP
FNo. 5098
Pr+SV TRIP
70LQ
75,3_&0'
7ULSSLQJ
PDWUL[
____ 7²+2/'
Pr BLOCKED
Functions
6-60 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Pick-up values The level of the active power input is determined by the friction losses to be
overcome
and are situated in the following range, depending on the individual system:
• steam turbines: PReverse/SN ≈ 1 % to 3 %
• gas turbines: PReverse/SN ≈ 3 % to 5 %
• diesel drives: PReverse/SN > 5 %
For the primary test, the reverse power should be measured with the actual protection
(section 8.3.7.2). As setting value, the user should select 0.5 times the value of the
measured motoring energy. This value can be found at the per cent operational measured
values. The feature of correcting angle faults of the current and voltage transformers
should be used especially in case of very large machines with a particularly
low motoring energy (see sections 6.1.3 and 8.3.7.2).
The 3!_5(9(56( pick-up value must be set in per cent of the secondary rated apparent
power
SNsec = √3 ⋅ UNsec ⋅ INsec. If the primary motoring energy is known, it must be converted
to secondary quantities using the following formula:
with Psec secundary active power according to setting value
SN sec secundary rated apparent power = √3 ⋅ UNsek ⋅ INsek
Pmach active power of machine according to setting value
SN mach rated apparent power of machine
UN mach rated voltage of machine
IN mach rated current of machine
UN prim primary rated voltage of voltage transformers
IN prim primary rated current of current transformers
6.7.2.1 Parameter list of the reverse power protection
Setting
Psec
SN sec
----------------
Pmach
SN mach
--------------------
UN mach
UN prim
--------------------
IN mach
IN prim
= = ⋅ ⋅ ------------------
3101 REVERSE POWER ON
OFF
OFF Reverse Power Protection
3102 P> REVERSE -30.00..-0.50 % -1.93 % P> Reverse Pickup
3103 T-SV-OPEN 0.00..60.00 sec 10.00 sec Time Delay Long (without Stop Valve)
3104 T-SV-CLOSED 0.00..60.00 sec 1.00 sec Time Delay Short (with Stop Valve)
3105 T-HOLD 0.00..60.00 sec 0.00 sec Pickup Holding Time
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-61
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6.7.2.2 Information list of the reverse power protection
FNo Alarm Comments
5083 >Pr BLOCK >BLOCK reverse power protection
5086 >SV tripped >Stop valve tripped
5091 Pr OFF Reverse power prot. is switched OFF
5092 Pr BLOCKED Reverse power protection is BLOKKED
5093 Pr ACTIVE Reverse power protection is ACTIVE
5096 Pr picked up Reverse power: picked up
5097 Pr TRIP Reverse power: TRIP
5098 Pr+SV TRIP Reverse power: TRIP with stop valve
Functions
6-62 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6.8 Forward power supervision (ANSI 32F)
General The machine protection 7UM61 includes an active power supervision which monitors
whether the active power falls below one set value as well as whether a separate second
set value is exceeded. Each of these Functions can initiate different control Functions.
When, for example, with generators operating in parallel, the active power output of
one machine becomes so small that other generators could take over this power, then
it is often appropriate to shut down the lightly loaded machine. The criterion in this
case is that the "forward" power supplied into the network falls below a certain value.
In some applications it can be desirable to output a control signal if the active power
output exceeds a certain value.
Another possibility to use power direction is in case of network splitting. To reduce as
far as possible the effect on any network, of disturbances which occur on another network
to which it is coupled, so-called decoupling or network splitting is used at the coupling
point. For example, an industrial network which has certain measures of its own
generation is coupled via a coupling circuit breaker with a HV utility network and
should be decoupled when a fault in the utility network is not cleared within a critical
time. As a criterion for decoupling, underfrequency, undervoltage, overcurrent, power
direction, or combinations of these can be used. These criteria are available in
7UM61.
Active power
measuring
For power measurement, two measurement method are available in 7UM61. Depending
on the application either high-speed measurement or high-accuracy measurement
(average about 16 a.c. period) may be selected. High-speed measurement is suitable
e.g. for network splitting.
The device calculates the active power from the positive sequence systems of the
generator currents and voltages. This value is compared with the set values. Each
stage can be blocked individually, as can be the complete forward active power supervision,
via binary inputs.
Figure 6-33 shows the logic diagram of the forward active power supervision.
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-63
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 6-33 Logic diagram of the forward active power supervision
General The forward power protection is only effective and accessible if this function was set
within the protective function configuration (section 5.1, address ____, )25:$5'_
32:(5 = (QDEOHG). If the function is not needed, the user must select 'LVDEOHG.
The address ____ )25:$5'_32:(5 serves to switch the function 21 or 2)) or to
block the trip command (%ORFN_UHOD\).
Pick-up values,
time delays
The setting of the forward power protection strongly depends on the intended purpose.
For this reason, general setting instructions are not possible. The pick-up value must
be set in per cent of the secondary rated apparent power SNsec = √3 ⋅ UNsec ⋅ INsec.
Consequently, the machine power must be converted to secondary quantities:
with Psec secondary active power according to setting value
SN sec secondary rated apparent power = √3 ⋅ UNsec ⋅ INsec
Pmach active power of machine according to setting value
SN mach rated apparent power of machine
UN mach rated voltage of machine
IN mach rated current of machine
UN prim primary rated voltage of voltage transformers
IN prim primary rated current of current transformers
Address 3202 serves to set the threshold of the forward power to underrange (3I_)
and the address 3203 (3I!) serves to set it to overrange. The corresponding time delays
are parameterized at address _____7²3I_ and _____7²3I!.
>Pf> BLOCK
FNo. 5117
> Pf BLOCK
FNo. 5113
&
FNo. 5126
Pf< picked up
____ 3I_
FNo. 5128
Pf< TRIP
FNo. 5129
Pf> TRIP
70LQ
75,3_&0'
Tripping
matrix
____ 3I!
FNo. 5122
Pf BLOCKED
>Pf< BLOCK
FNr. 5116
FNo. 5127
Pf> picked up
&
____ 7²3I_
____ 7²3I!
Setting
Psec
SN sec
----------------
Pmach
SN mach
--------------------
UN mach
UN prim
--------------------
IN mach
IN prim
= = ⋅ ⋅ ------------------
Functions
6-64 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Address 3202 serves to set the threshold of the forward power to underrange (3I_)
and the address 3203 (3I!) serves to set it to overrange. The corresponding time delays
are parameterized at address _____7²3I_ and _____7²3I!.
At address _____0($6_0(7+2', the user can select whether a fast or a precise measuring
procedure shall be used for the forward power calculation. In most cases, the
precise measuring procedure is preferred in the power station sector (as a rule),
whereas the fast procedure is applied for use as mains decoupling.
The set times are additional time delays not including the operating times (measuring
time, drop-out time) of the protective function.
6.8.2.1 Parameter list of the forward power monitoring
6.8.2.2 Information list of the forward power monitoring
3201 FORWARD
POWER
ON
OFF
OFF Forward Power Supervision
3202 Pf< 0.5..120.0 % 9.7 % P-forw.< Supervision Pickup
3204 T-Pf< 0.00..60.00 sec 10.00 sec T-P-forw.< Time Delay
3203 Pf> 1.0..120.0 % 96.6 % P-forw.> Supervision Pickup
3205 T-Pf> 0.00..60.00 sec 10.00 sec T-P-forw.> Time Delay
3206 MEAS. METHOD Method accurate
Method fast
Method accurate Method of Operation
FNo Alarm CAlarmomment
5113 >Pf BLOCK >BLOCK forward power supervision
5116 >Pf< BLOCK >BLOCK forw. power superv. Pf< stage
5117 >Pf> BLOCK >BLOCK forw. power superv. Pf> stage
5121 Pf OFF Forward power supervis. is switched OFF
5122 Pf BLOCKED Forward power supervision is BLOKKED
5123 Pf ACTIVE Forward power supervision is ACTIVE
5126 Pf< picked up Forward power: Pf< stage picked up
5127 Pf> picked up Forward power: Pf> stage picked up
5128 Pf< TRIP Forward power: Pf< stage TRIP
5129 Pf> TRIP Forward power: Pf> stage TRIP
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-65
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6.9 Impedance protection (ANSI 21)
General The machine impedance protection is used as a selective time graded protection to
provide shortest possible tripping times for short-circuits in the synchronous machine,
on the terminal leads as well as in the lower voltage winding of the unit transformer. It
thus provides a fast back-up protection to the generator and transformer differential
relays.
6.9.1.1 Fault detection
General Fault detection has the duty to detect a faulty condition in the power system and to
initiate all the necessary procedures for selective clearance of the fault:
− Start the delay times,
− Selection of the measured values,
− Release of impedance calculation,
− Release of tripping command,
− Indication/output of the faulty conductor(s).
Overcurrent fault detection is used for the machine impedance protection, which can
be supplemented by an undervoltage seal-in circuit. Following numeric filtering, the
currents in each phase are monitored in comparison with a set threshold value. A pickup
signal is output for that (those) phase(s) in which the set threshold has been exceeded.
The overcurrent fault detector is reset when 95% of the pick-up value is fallen
below unless it is maintained by the undervoltage seal-in feature.
Undervoltage
seal–in
In case of excitation systems deriving their power from the machine terminals or from
the network, the excitation voltage can rapidly decay to almost zero. This results in decreasing
short-circuit current, in spite of the short-circuit, and consequently drop-off of
the overcurrent fault detectors. In such cases the impedance protection pick-up is
maintained for a sufficiently long period by means of an undervoltage controlled sealin
circuit using the positive sequence voltage. Fault detection will drop off only when
the voltage has reappeared to a magnitude of 105% of the predetermined value, or
when the holding time has expired.
Figure 6-34 shows the logic diagram of the fault detection module of the impedance
protection.
6.9.1.2 Determination of the short–circuit impedance
For calculation of the fault impedance, the currents and voltages of the faulty loop are
decisive. The phase selective fault detector determines the faulted loop and releases
the corresponding measurement values for impedance calculation (see table 6-5)
Loop selection − The corresponding phase-earth loop is used for a 1-pole pickup.
Functions
6-66 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
− With a 2-pole pickup, the phase-phase loop with the corresponding phase-to-phase
voltage is used for impedance calculation.
− With a 3-pole pickup, the phase-phase loop with the highest current value is used
and with equal current amplitudes, the procedure described in the lowest line of table
6-5 is applied.
This loop selection type ensures that the fault impedance of system faults is measured
correctly via the block transformer. A measuring error occurs with a 1-pole system
short-circuit, as the zero phase-sequence system is not transmitted via the machine
transformer (switching group e.g. Yd5). Table 6-6 describes the fault imaging and the
measuring errors.
Table 6-5 Measuring loop selection
Pickup Measuring loop
1-pole L1
L2
L3
Phase-earth L1–E
L2–E
L3–E
2-pole L1, L2
L2, L3
L3, L1
Phase-phase,
calculation of UI I and II I
L1– L2
L2– L3
L3– L1
3-pole, with unequal
amplitudes
L1,2*L2,L3
L2,2*L3,L1
L3,2*L1,L2
Phase-earth, selection of the
loop with the highest current
UI (Imax) and II (Imax)
L2–E
L3–E
L1–E
3-pole, with
equal amplitudes
L1, L2, L3 Phase-earth, any, maximum
current amount
IL1=IL2=IL3 => IL1
IL1=IL2 > IL3 => IL1
Table 6-6 Fault modeling and measuring errors on the generator side in case of system
faults
System faults Fault model on the
generator side
Loop selection Measuring errors
3–pole short
circuit
3–pole short circuit phase-earth always correct
measuring
2–pole short
circuit
3–pole short circuit phase-earth loop
with highest current
always correct
measuring
1–pole short
circuit
2–pole short circuit phase-phase loop impedance measured
too high by the zero impedance
Z
G
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-67
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 6-34 Logic diagram of the fault detection stage of the impedance protection
6.9.1.3 Tripping characteristic
The tripping zones of the machine impedance protection relay have a polygonally
shaped trip characteristic (see also Figure 6-35). It is a symmetrical characteristic,
even though a fault in reverse direction (negative R and X values) is impossible provided
the usual connection to the current transformers at the star-point side of the machine
is used. The polygon is identified by one parameter: impedance Z.
As long as a fault detector has picked up, the impedance calculation is effected continuously.
This is carried out by complex division of the voltage and current phases derived
from the loop selection. When the calculated fault impedance lies within the set
trip characteristic, the protection issues a trip command which may be delayed according
to the time setting.
Pickup IL1>
Pickup IL2>
Pickup IL3>
> Imp. BLOCK
FNo. 3953
FNo. 3966
Imp. picked up
OR
OR
OR
&
&
&
OR
FNo. 3968
Imp. Fault L2
FNo. 3967
Imp. Fault L1
FNr. 3970
Imp. I> & U<
FNo. 3969
Imp. Fault L3
FNo. 3962
Imp. BLOCKED
>Useal–in BLK
FNo. 3958
Pickup U1<
Fuse Failure &
&
____ 7²6($/²,1
SQ
R
____ 8__6($/_,1
OR
OR
Functions
6-68 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
The protected zones can be chosen such that the first stage (=21(_=_, 7²=_) covers
faults in the generator and the lower voltage side of the unit transformer, whereas the
second stage (=21(_=_, =21(__7_) measures into the network. It should be noted
that faults in the system cause impedance measurement errors due to the connection
group (star-delta) of the unit transformer (see subsection 6.9.1.2). An unwanted operation
of the stage can be excluded as the fault impedances of power system faults are
modeled too high.
Faults outside this range are switched off by the 7_(1'_final time stage.
Depending on the switching status of the system, it may be useful to extend the =21(_
=_, 7_²=__undelayed tripping range. If, for example, the high-voltage side circuit
breaker is open, the pickup can only be caused by a fault in the power station block.
If a consideration of the circuit breaker auxiliary contact is possible, a so-called =21(_
=_%_overreach zone can be switched effective (see figure 6-37).
Figure 6-35 Tripping characteristics of the impedance protection
6.9.1.4 Tripping logic
The 7_(1' time delay is started subsequent to the protection pickup. The fault loop is
determined now. The loop impedance components are compared with the limit values
of the zones previously set. The tripping is executed if the impedance is within its zone
during the expiration of the corresponding time stage. For the first Z1 zone and also
for the Z1B overreach zone, the time delays 7²=_ and 7²=_% will in most cases be
R1=Z1
X2=Z2
X1b=Z1b
X1=Z1
R2=Z2
R1b=Z1b
R
X
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-69
C53000-G1176-C127-1
zero or at least very short. This means that the tripping is executed as soon as it is
determined that the fault is within this range.
The Z1B overreach stage can be switched effective from outside, via a binary input.
For the Z2 zone which may reach into the network, a time delay =21(__7_ is selected
overreaching the first stage of the power system protection.
A drop-out can only be caused by a drop-out of the overcurrent pickup and not by leaving
the tripping polygon.
Figure 6-36 illustrates the logic diagram of the impedance protection.
Figure 6-36 Logic diagram of the impedance protection
____ =21(_=_
____ 7_(1'
>FAIL:Feeder VT.
FNo. 0361
FNo. 3980
Imp. T3> TRIP
&
____ =21(_=_
SQ
R
>Extens. Z1B
FNo. 3956
>Imp. BLOCK
FNo. 3953
____ 7²=_%
____ 7²=_
____ =21(__7_
SQ
R
SQ
R
&
&
70LQ
75,3_&0'
Tripping
matrix
____ =21(_=_%
FNo. 3978
Imp.Z1B< TRIP
FNo. 3979
Imp.Z2< TRIP
FNo. 3977
Imp.Z1< TRIP
FNo. 3970
Imp. I> & U<
FNo. 3969
Imp. Fault L3
FNo. 3968
Imp. Fault L2
FNo. 3967
Imp. Fault L1
Loop
selection
Pickup
Z
IL1,IL2,IL3
U1
IL1,IL2,IL3
UL1,UL2,UL3
FNo. 3966
Imp. picked up
FNo. 3962
Imp. BLOCKED
UI
OR
FNo. 3958
>Useal–in BLK
Fuse-Failure-M.
see Fig. 6-59 in
Section 6.19.1
Functions
6-70 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
General The machine impedance protection is only effective and accessible if this function was
set within the framework of the protective function configuration (section 5.1, address
____, ,03('$1&(_3527_ = (QDEOHG). If this function is not needed, it is set to 'LV_
DEOHG. At address ____ ,03('$1&(_3527_, the user can switch the function 21 or
2)) or only block the trip command (%ORFN_UHOD\).
Pickup The maximum load current during operation is the most important criterion to be
considered
when setting the overcurrent pickup. A pickup by an overload must be excluded
in any case! For this reason, the _____,03_,!_pick-up value must be set above
the maximum (over) load current to be expected. Recommended setting: 1,2 to 1,5
times the nominal machine current. The pickup logic corresponds to the logic of the
UMZ I> definite time-overcurrent protection.
If the pickup is derived from the generator terminals and if, for this reason, the short
circuit can fall below the pickup value (address ____) due to the collapsing voltage,
the undervoltage auto-seal-in feature is used, i.e. the address _____8__6($/²,1 is
switched 21.
The undervoltage auto-seal-in feature (address ____) is set to a value below the lowest
phase-to-phase voltage occurring during operation, e.g. to 8_ = 75 % to 80 % of
the nominal voltage. The seal-in time (address _____7²6($/²,1) must exceed the
maximum fault clearance time in a back-up case (recommended setting: 7_(1' + 1 s).
Impedance stages As illustrated in figure 6-35, the protection has the following characteristics
which may
be set independently:
− 1st zone (Z1 instantaneous zone) with the setting parameters
=21(_=_ reactance = reach,
7²=_ = 0 or short delay, if required.
− Z1B overreach zone, externally controlled via binary input, with the setting parameters
=21(_=_% reactance = reach,
7²=_% T1B = 0 or short delay, if required.
− 2nd zone (Z2 zone) with the setting parameters
=21(_=__ reactance = reach,
=21(_ 7_ The user must select a value for T2 which is situated above the
grading time of the power system protection.
− Non-directional final stage with the setting parameter
7_(1' The user must select a value for T END which ensures that the 2nd
or 3rd stage of the series-connected power system distance
protection is overreached.
The resistance setting value is determined by the desired electric arc backup and is
situated between (0,6 to 1) ⋅ reactance. The amount of the impedance |Z| ≈ reactance
X ≈ resistance R was selected in the presetting.
As the user can proceed on the assumption that the impedance protection measuring
influences the machine transformer, it must be ensured that the parameterization selection
sufficiently considers the transformer control range.
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-71
C53000-G1176-C127-1
For this reason, a reach of about 70 % of the range to be protected (i.e. about 70 % of
the transformer reactance) without or with a slight time delay (i.e. 7²=_ = 0,00 s to
0,50 s) is selected for =RQH_=_. In this case, the protective relay will switch off faults
on this distance with its operating time or with a slight time delay (undelayed tripping).
A 0.1 s time delay is preferred.
For =RQH_=_, the reach could be set to about 100 % of the transformer reactance, or
in addition to a power system impedance. The corresponding =RQH__7_ time stage
is to be selected in a way that it overreaches the power system protective relays of the
following lines. The 7_(1' time is the last back-up time.
The following formula is generally valid for the primary impedance (with limiting to the
machine transformer):
with kR zone reach of zone Z1 in [%]
uK percent impedance voltage of the unit transformer [%]
SN rated apparent power of the unit transformer [MVA]
UN rated voltage of the unit transformer [kV]
The values determined such must be converted for the secondary side of current and
voltage transformers. In general:
The nominal current of the protective relay (= secondary nominal current of the current
transformer) is automatically considered by the relay. You have already communicated
the transformation ratios of the current and voltage transformers to the relay by entering
the nominal transformer quantities (see section 6.1.3).
Example:
Transformer data:
uK = 7 %
SN = 5.3 MVA
UN= 6.3 kV
Transformation ratios:
Current transformer transformation ratio = 500 A/1 A
This results to a 70 % reach for zone 1:
Zprim
kR
100
---------
uK
100
---------
UN
2
SN
= ⋅ ⋅ -------
Zsecondary
Current transformer ratio
Voltage transformer ratio
= ----------------------------------------------------------------- ⋅ Zprimary
6.3 kV
3
---------------- 100 V
3
Voltage transf. transform. ratio = ⁄ ---------------
Z1prim
70
100
--------- 7
100
--------- 6.32
5.3
= ⋅ ⋅ ----------=0.3669 Ω
Functions
6-72 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Consequently, the secondary side setting value of zone 1 at address _____=21(_=__
is:
Note: The following ratio would result from the connection of a 5 A device to a 5 A
transformer:
The following primary reactance results for a 100 % reach for zone 2:
The following secondary side setting value of zone 2 results at address _____=21(_
=_:
Figure 6-37 Time grading for machine impedance protection – example
Z1B overreach
zone
The Z1B overreach zone is an externally controlled stage which does not influence the
Z1 normal stage. Consequently, there is no changeover, but the overreach zone is
switched effective or ineffective, depending on the position of the high-voltage side circuit
breaker.
Z1secondary
500 A ⁄ 1 A
6.3 kV ⁄ 100 V
=------------------------------------ ⋅ 0.3669 Ω =2.91 Ω
Z1secondary
500 A ⁄ 5 A
6.3 kV ⁄ 100 V
=------------------------------------ ⋅ 0.3669Ω =0.58 Ω
Z2prim
100
100
--------- 7
100
--------- 6.32
5.3
= ⋅ ⋅ ----------=0.5242 Ω
Z2secondary
500 A ⁄ 1 A
6.3 kV ⁄ 100 V
=------------------------------------ ⋅ 0.5242 Ω =4.16 Ω
Z<
t
T3
Z
Z1
(X1,
R1)
T1
T2
Z1B
(X1B,
R1B)
Z2
(X2,
R2)
internal cons.
BI
X1=0,70*X1Trafo
X1=X1Trafo
G
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-73
C53000-G1176-C127-1
The Z1B zone is usually switched effective with an open high-voltage circuit breaker.
In this case, every impedance protection pickup can only be due to a fault in the protection
zone of the block, as the power system is disconnected from the block. Consequently,
the undelayed tripping zone can be extended to 100 % to 120 % of the protection
zone without any loss of selectivity.
The Z1B zone Z1B is activated via a binary input controlled by the circuit breaker auxiliary
contact (see figure 6-37). The overreach zone is assigned to an individual _____
7²=_% time delay.
Final stage In case of short circuits outside the Z1 and Z2 zones, the relay functions as a
timedelayed
overcurrent protection. Its nondirectional final time 7_(1' is selected in a way
that its time value overreaches the second or third stage of the series-connected power
system distance protection.
6.9.2.1 Parameter list of the impedance protection
3301 IMPEDANCE PROT. ON
OFF
OFF Impedance Protection
3302 IMP I> 0.10..8.00 A 1.35 A Fault Detection I> Pickup
3303 U< SEAL-IN ON
OFF
3304 U< 10.0..125.0 V 80.0 V Undervoltage Seal-in Pickup
3305 T-SEAL-IN 0.10..60.00 sec 4.00 sec Duration of Undervoltage Seal-in
3312 T END 0.00..60.00 sec 3.00 sec T END: Final Time Delay
3306 ZONE Z1 0.05..130.00 Ohm 2.91 Ohm Impedance Zone Z1
3307 T-Z1 0.00..60.00 sec 0.10 sec Impedance Zone Z1 Time Delay
3308 ZONE Z1B 0.05..65.00 Ohm 4.99 Ohm Impedance Zone Z1B
3309 T-Z1B 0.00..60.00 sec 0.10 sec Impedance Zone Z1B Time Delay
3310 ZONE Z2 0.05..65.00 Ohm 4.16 Ohm Impedanz Zone Z2
3311 ZONE2 T2 0.00..60.00 sec 0.50 sec Impedance Zone Z2 Time Delay
Functions
6-74 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6.9.2.2 Information list of the impedance protection
FNo Alarm Comments
3953 >Imp. BLOCK >BLOCK impedance protection
3956 >Extens. Z1B >Zone 1B extension for impedance prot.
3958 >Useal-in BLK >Imp. prot. : BLOCK undervoltage seal-in
3961 Imp. OFF Impedance protection is switched OFF
3962 Imp. BLOCKED Impedance protection is BLOCKED
3963 Imp. ACTIVE Impedance protection is ACTIVE
3966 Imp. picked up Impedance protection picked up
3970 Imp. I> & U< Imp.: O/C with undervoltage seal in
3967 Imp. Fault L1 Imp.: Fault detection , phase L1
3977 Imp.Z1< TRIP Imp.: Z1< TRIP
3978 Imp.Z1B< TRIP Imp.: Z1B< TRIP
3979 Imp. Z2< TRIP Imp.: Z2< TRIP
3980 Imp.T3> TRIP Imp.: T3> TRIP
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-75
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6.10 Undervoltage protection (ANSI 27)
Application Undervoltage protection detects and reports abnormally low voltage conditions,
some
of which could be related to system stability problems (voltage collapse, etc.).
Two-pole short circuits or earth faults cause an asymmetrical voltage collapse. Com
pared with three monophase measuring systems, the detection of the positive phase
sequence system is not influenced by these procedures and is advantageous especially
with regard to the judgement of stability problems.
6.10.1 Function
For this, the fundamental wave of the positive sequence system is paramount. The
phase voltages are filtered by the protection (Fourier analysis) and only the fundamen
tal waves are evaluated. Of these, the protection only detects the positive sequence
system.
Undervoltage protection consists of two definite time elements. The pickup and delay
settings of each element are individually adjustable. A pickup is signalled as soon as
the value falls below the selectable voltage thresholds. A trip signal is transmitted if a
voltage pickup exists for a selectable time.
In order to ensure that the protection does not accidentally pick up due to a secondary
voltage failure, each stage can be blocked individually or both stages can be blocked
in common via binary input(s), e.g. by a voltage transformer protective breaker. In ad
dition to this, the integrated Fuse–Failure–Monitor blocks both stages (see section
6.19.1).
When the undervoltage protection has picked up while the relay changes to the oper
ational condition 0 - i.e. no suitable measured quantities are present or the permissible
frequency range has been left - pick-up will be sealed in. Thus, trip is ensured even
after the voltages have completely collapsed. This seal-in can be cancelled only afte
the voltage has reverted to a value above the undervoltage drop-off value or by activating
the blocking input for undervoltage protection.
There is no pickup and trip if no pickup exists before the device is in operating status
0 (thus e.g. upon switchon of the device without present measuring quantities). An im
mediate tripping may be caused on transition into operating status 1 (i.e. by applying
measuring quantities). For this reason, it is recommended to activate the blocking in
put of the undervoltage protection via the circuit breaker auxiliary contact and to block
the protective function in this way, e.g. after a protection tripping.
Figure 6-38 shows the logic diagram of the undervoltage protection.
Functions
6-76 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 6-38 Logic diagram of the undervoltage protection
General The undervoltage protection is only effective and accessible if this function was set
____, 81'(592/7$*( = (QDEOHG). If this function is not needed, the parameter is
set to 'LVDEOHG. At address ____ 81'(592/7$*(__the function can be switched
21 or 2)) or only the trip command can be blocked (%ORFN_UHOD\).
Setting values It must be considered that the positive phase-sequence system of the voltages
and
thus also the pickup thresholds are evaluated as phase-to-phase quantities (terminal
voltage ⋅ √ 3). The first undervoltage protection stage is typically set to about 75 % of
the nominal machine voltage, i.e. address _____8__= 75 V. The user must select a
value for the _____7_8_ time setting that ensures that voltage dips affecting the operating
stability are disconnected. On the other hand, the time delay must be big
enough to avoid disconnections in case of permissible short-time voltage dips.
For the second stage, lower pickup threshold _____8___H.g. = 65 V should be combined
with a shorter trip time _____7_8__ z.B. = 0.5 s to perform an approximate adaptation
to the stability behavior of the consumers.
All setting times are additional time delays which do not include the operating times
(measuring time, drop-out time) of the protective function.
The drop-out ratio can be adapted in small steps to the operating conditions at address
_____8__'287_5$7,2.
>BLOCK U<<
FNo. 6508
>BLOCK U/V
FNo. 6503
&
FNo. 6533
U< picked up
____ 8_
FNo. 6539
U< TRIP
FNo. 6540
U<< TRIP
70LQ
75,3_&0'
Tripping
matrix
____ 8__
FNo. 6531
Undervolt. BLK
>BLOCK U<
FNo. 6506
FNo. 6537
U<< picked up
&
____ 7_8_
____ 7_8__
FuseFailureM. OR
see Fig. 6-59 in
Section 6.19.1
>FAIL:Feeder VT
FNo. 361
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-77
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6.10.2.1 Parameter list of the undervoltage protection
6.10.2.2 Information list of the undervoltage protection
4001 UNDERVOLTAGE OFF
ON
OFF Undervoltage Protection
4002 U< 10.0..125.0 V 75.0 V U< Pickup
4003 T U< 0.00..60.00 sec 3.00 sec T U< Time Delay
4004 U<< 10.0..125.0 V 65.0 V U<< Pickup
4005 T U<< 0.00..60.00 sec 0.50 sec T U<< Time Delay
4006 U< DOUT RATIO 1.01..1.20 1.05 Drop Out Ratio for U< and U<<
FNo Alarm Comments
6503 >BLOCK U/V >BLOCK undervoltage protection
6506 >BLOCK U< >BLOCK undervoltage protection U<
6508 >BLOCK U<< >BLOCK undervoltage protection U<<
6530 Undervolt. OFF Undervoltage protection switched OFF
6531 Undervolt. BLK Undervoltage protection is BLOCKED
6532 Undervolt. ACT Undervoltage protection is ACTIVE
6533 U< picked up Undervoltage U< picked up
6537 U<< picked up Undervoltage U<< picked up
6539 U< TRIP Undervoltage U< TRIP
6540 U<< TRIP Undervoltage U<< TRIP
Functions
6-78 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6.11 Overvoltage protection (ANSI 59)
General Overvoltage protection serves to protect the electrical machine, and the associated
electrical plant connected to it, from the effects of impermissible voltage increases.
Overvoltages can be caused by incorrect manual operation of the excitation system,
faulty operation of the automatic voltage regulator, (full) load shedding of a generator,
separation of the generator from the system or during island operation.
6.11.1 Description
By means of the overvoltage protection feature, the user can select if he wants to monitor
the phase-to-phase voltages or the phase-earth-voltages. In case of a high overvoltage,
the switchoff is performed with a short-time delay, whereas in case of lower
overvoltages, the switchoff is performed with a longer time delay. In this way, the voltage
regulator can take the voltage back into the nominal range. The user can specify
the voltage limit values and the time delays individually for both stages.
Each stage can be blocked individually and/or both stages can be blocked in common
via binary input(s).
Figure 6-39 shows the logic diagram of the overvoltage protection.
Figure 6-39 Logic diagram of the overvoltage protection
General The overvoltage protection is only effective and accessible if this function was set within
the framework of protective function configuration (section 5.1, address ____, 29_
(592/7$*( = (QDEOHG). If the function is not required, this parameter is set to 'LV_
DEOHG. At address ____ 29(592/7$*(, the function can be switched 21 or 2)). As
an alternative, the user can only block the trip command (%ORFN_UHOD\).
>BLOCK O/V
FNo. 6513
FNo. 6571
U> picked up
____ 7_8!!
& Pickup U>>
Pickup U>
>BLOCK U>
FNo. 6516
>BLOCK U>>
FNo. 6517
&
70LQ
75,3_&0'
Tripping
matrix
FNo. 6570
U> TRIP
FNo. 6573
U>> TRIP
FNo. 6566
Overvolt. BLK
FNo. 6568
U>> picked up
____ 7_8!
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-79
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Setting values Address _____9$/8(6_8! serves to specify the measured quantities used by the
protection feature. The default setting (normal case) is specified for phase-to-phase
voltages (= 8²SK²SK). The phase-earth-voltages should be selected for low-voltage
machines with grounded neutral conductor (= 8²SK²H). In this case, however, the
user must select lower values for the pickup thresholds (ULE = ULL/√3).
The setting of limit values and time delays of the overvoltage protection depends on
the speed with which the voltage regulator can regulate voltage variations. The protection
must not intervene into the regulation process of the fault-free functioning voltage
regulator. For this reason, the two-stage characteristic must always be above the
voltage time characteristic of the regulation procedure.
The long-time stage _____8! and _____7_8! must intervene in case of stationary
overvoltages. It is set to approximately 110 % to 115 % UN and, depending on the regulator
speed, to a range between 1.5 s and 5 s.
In case of a full-load rejection of the generator, the voltage increases first in relation to
the transient voltage. Only by this time, the voltage regulator reduces it again to its
nominal value. The U>>-stage is set as short-time stage in a way that the transient
procedure in case of a full-load rejection does not lead to a tripping. For example, for_
_____8!! about 130 % UN with a _____7_8!!_delay of zero to 0.5 s are typical
values.
All setting times are additional time delays which do not include the operating times
(measuring time, drop-out time) of the protective function.
The drop-out ratio at the address _____8!_'287_5$7,2 can be adapted in small
steps to the operating conditions and used for highly precise signalizations (e.g. network
input of wind power stations).
6.11.2.1 Parameter list of the overvoltage protection
4101 OVERVOLTAGE OFF
ON
OFF Overvoltage Protection
4102 U> 30.0..170.0 V 115.0 V U> Pickup
4103 T U> 0.00..60.00 sec 3.00 sec T U> Time Delay
4104 U>> 30.0..170.0 V 130.0 V U>> Pickup
4105 T U>> 0.00..60.00 sec 0.50 sec T U>> Time Delay
4106 U> DOUT RATIO 0.90..0.99 0.95 Drop Out Ratio for U> and
U>>
4107 VALUES U> Voltage protection with U-Phase-Phase
Voltage protection with U-Phase-earth
Voltage protection
with U-Phase-Phase
Measurement Values for
U> and U>>
Functions
6-80 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6.11.2.2 Information list of the overvoltage protection
6513 >BLOCK O/V >BLOCK overvoltage protection
6516 >BLOCK U> >BLOCK overvoltage protection U>
6517 >BLOCK U>> >BLOCK overvoltage protection U>>
6565 Overvolt. OFF Overvoltage protection switched OFF
6566 Overvolt. BLK Overvoltage protection is BLOCKED
6567 Overvolt. ACT Overvoltage protection is ACTIVE
6568 U> picked up Overvoltage U> picked up
6571 U>> picked up Overvoltage U>> picked up
6570 U> TRIP Overvoltage U> TRIP
6573 U>> TRIP Overvoltage U>> TRIP
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-81
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6.12 Frequency protection (ANSI 81)
6.12.1 Description of frequency protection
General The frequency protection function detects abnormally high and low frequencies in the
system. If the frequency lies outside the allowable range, appropriate actions are initiated,
such as separating a generator from the system.
A decrease in system frequency occurs when the system experiences an increase in
the real power demand, or when a malfunction occurs with a generator governor or
automatic generation control (AGC) system. The frequency decrease protection is
also used for generators which (for a certain time) function on an island network. This
is due to the fact that the reverse power protection cannot operate in case of a drive
power failure. The generator can be disconnected from the power system by means
of the frequency decrease protection.
An increase in system frequency occurs when large blocks of load are removed from
the system, or again when a malfunction occurs with a generator governor or AGC
system.
Through the use of filters and repeated measurements, the frequency evaluation is
free from harmonic influences and very accurate.
Underfrequency
and overfrequency
protection
Frequency protection consists of four frequency elements. Any given frequency element
can be set to pickup for either overfrequency or underfrequency conditions. Each
element can be independently set, and utilized to perform different functions within the
system. The parameterization determines the individual application purpose of the
corresponding stage. For the f4 frequency stage, the user can specify independently
of the parameterized limit value if this stage shall function as decrease or increase
stage. For this reason, it can also be used for special applications, if, for example, the
user desires a signalization in case of a frequency overrange below the nominal frequency.
Operating ranges The frequency can be determined as long as the positive sequence voltages
are
present and of sufficient magnitude. If the measurement voltage drops below a settable
value 8PLQ, then frequency protection is blocked, as precise frequency values can
no longer be calculated from the signal under these conditions.
With the frequency increase protection, there is a seal-in of the overfrequency pickup
during the transition to the 0 mode, if the last measured frequency amounted to
>66 Hz. The switch-off command drops out by a function blocking or by the transition
into operational condition 1. The pickup drops out if the frequency measured last before
the transition into operational condition 0 is <66 Hz.
With the frequency decrease protection, there is no precise frequency calculation during
the transition into the 0 mode due to a too low frequency. Consequently, the pickup
or tripping drop out.
Logic Each frequency element has an associated settable time delay. When a frequency element
picks up and the time delay elapses, a trip signal is generated. When a frequency
elements drops out, the control signal (tripping or alarm signal) is immediately terminated,
but not before the minimum command duration _____70LQ_75,3_&0' has
elapsed. Each of the four frequency elements can be blocked individually by binary
inputs. Figure 6-40 shows the logic diagram for the frequency protection function.
Functions
6-82 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 6-40 Logic diagram of the frequency protection
General The frequency protection will only be effective and accessible if address _____)5(_
48(1&<_3URW_ is set to (QDEOHG during configuration of protective functions. If the
frequency protection function is not required, then address ____ should be set to
'LVDEOHG. The function can be turned 21 or 2))_ As an alternative, the user can
only specify a trip signal blocking (%ORFN_5HOD\) at address _____2_8_)5(48(1&<.
Frequency
protection settings
The nominal system frequency is programmed in 32:(5_6<67(0_'$7$__ and the
pickup settings for each of the frequency elements should be set higher than nominal
frequency if the element is to be used for overfrequency protection or lower than the
nominal frequency if the element is to be used for underfrequency protection.
For the f4 frequency stage, the previously explained circumstances are only relevant
if the _____7+5(6+2/'_I_ parameter is set to DXWRPDWLF (default setting). If desired,
this parameter can also be set to RYHUIUHTXHQF\ or XQGHUIUHTXHQF\ and
thus, the evaluation direction (increase or decrease detection) can be specified independent
of the parameterized I__3,&.83 limit value.
If underfrequency protection is used for load shedding purpose, then the frequency
settings relative to other feeder relays are generally based on the priority of the cus-
FNo. 5203
FNo. 5206...
>BLOCK f1
FNo. 5236...
f1 TRIP
FNo. 5232...
f1 picked up
____ I__3,&.83 & ____ 7_I_
____ 8PLQ
U123
f
OR
OR OR
> BLOCK Freq.
FNo. 5214
Freq. UnderV Blk
____ )5(48__3527_
FNo. 5212
Freq. BLOCKED
FNo. 5213
Freq. ACTIVE
FNo. 5211
Freq. OFF
“1”
ON
OFF
0HDVXUHPHQW_
/RJLF
U>Umin
Note:
If the element is not required, the frequency setting should be set equal to the nominal
frequency, in which case the element becomes inactive.
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-83
C53000-G1176-C127-1
tomers served by the protective relay. The actual settings of the underfrequency elements
must be based on network stability requirements.
Further application examples exist in the field of power stations. The frequency values
to be set mainly depend, also in these cases, on the specifications of the power system/
power station operator. In this context, the frequency decrease protection ensures
the power station’s own demand by disconnecting it from the power system on time.
The turbo regulator regulates the machine set to the nominal speed. Consequently,
the station’s own demands can be continuously supplied at nominal frequency.
Under the assumption that the apparent power is reduced to the same degree, turbine-
driven generators can, as a rule, be continuously operated down to 95 % of the
nominal frequency. However, for inductive consumers, the frequency reduction does
not only mean an enhanced current input but also endangers stabile operation. For
this reason, only a short-time frequency reduction down to about 48 Hz (for fN = 50 Hz)
or 58 Hz (for fN = 60 Hz) is permissible.
A frequency increase can, for example, occur due to a load shedding or malfunction
of the speed regulation (e.g. in an island network). In this way, the frequency increase
protection can, for example, be used as overspeed protection.
Setting example:
Delays The time delays (definite time) entered at addresses ____, ____, ____, and ____,
allow the device to prioritize or sort corrective actions based on the degree to which
the actual system frequency departs (upward or downward) from the nominal system
frequency. The set times are additional time delays which do not include the operating
times (measuring time, drop-out time) of the protective function.
Minimum Voltage The minimum voltage is set at address ____ 8PLQ. If the positive sequence
voltage
is less than this value, the frequency protection is blocked. the recommended value is
approximately 65 % UN. The minimum voltage limiting can be deactivated by means
of the “_” setting.
6.12.2.1 Settings for frequency protection
For 50 Hz systems:
Stage Cause Setting values
with fN = 50 Hz with fN = 60 Hz Delay
f1 Disconnection from the
network
48.00 Hz 58.00 Hz 1.00 s
f2 Stopping 47.00 Hz 57.00 Hz 6.00 s
f3 Warning 49.50 Hz 59.50 Hz 20.00 s
f4 Warning or tripping 52.00 Hz 62.00 Hz 10.00 s
4201 O/U FREQUENCY OFF
ON
OFF Over / Under Frequency Protection
4202 f1 PICKUP 40.00..65.00 Hz 48.00 Hz f1 Pickup
Functions
6-84 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
For 60 Hz systems:
4204 T f1 0.00..600.00 sec 1.00 sec T f1 Time Delay
4214 THRESHOLD f4 Freq. prot. stage automatic
Freq. prot. stage overfreqency
Freq. prot. stage underfreqency
Freq. prot. stage
automatic
Handling of Threshold Stage f4
4215 Umin 10.0..125.0 V 65.0 V Minimum required voltage for operation
4201 O/U FREQUENCY OFF
ON
4214 THRESHOLD f4 Freq. prot. stage automatic
Freq. prot. stage
automatic
Handling of Threshold Stage f4
4215 Umin 10.0..125.0 V 65.0 V Minimum required voltage for operation
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-85
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6.12.2.2 Information list for frequency protectiion
FNo Alarm Comments
5203 >BLOCK Freq. >BLOCK frequeny protection
5206 >BLOCK f1 >BLOCK stage f1
5211 Freq. OFF Frequency protection is OFF
5212 Freq. BLOCKED Frequency protection is BLOCKED
5213 Freq. ACTIVE Frequency protection is ACTIVE
5214 Freq UnderV Blk Frequency protection undervoltage Blk
5232 f1 picked up f1 picked up
5236 f1 TRIP f1 TRIP
Functions
6-86 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6.13 Overexcitation (Overflux) protection U/f (ANSI 24)
General The overexcitation protection is used to detect impermissible overexcitation conditions
which can endanger generators and transformers. Such conditions are caused by an
increase in voltage and/or a reduction in frequency. The overexcitation protection
must pick up when the induction admissible for the protected object (e.g. power station
unit transformer) is exceeded. The transformer is endangered, for example, if the power
station block is disconnected from the system from full-load, and if the voltage regulator
either does not operate or does not operate sufficiently fast to control the associated
voltage rise.
Similarly, decrease in frequency (speed), e.g. in island systems, can endanger the
transformer because of increased induction.
An increase in induction above the rated values leads very quickly to saturation of the
iron core and to large eddy current losses.
Measuring
procedure
The overexcitation protection feature servers to measure the voltage/frequency ratio
which is proportional to the B induction and puts it in relation to the BN nominal induction.
In this context, both voltage and frequency are related to nominal values of the
object to be protected (generator, transformer).
The calculation is based on the maximum voltage of the three phase-to-phase voltages.
The frequency range from 10 Hz to 70 Hz can be monitored in this way.
Transformer adaptation
A perhaps existing deviation between the primary nominal voltage of the voltage transformers
and the object to be protected is compensated by means of the internal correction
factor (UN prim/UN mach). For this reason, pick-up values and characteristics
don’t need to be converted to secondary values. As a prerequisite, however, the system
quantities ’primary nominal transformer voltage’ and ’nominal voltage of the object
to be protected’ must be entered correctly (see sections 6.1.3 and 6.1.6).
Characteristics The overexcitation protection feature includes two staged characteristics and
one
thermal characteristic for an approximate modeling of the heating which the overexcitation
may cause to the object to be protected. As soon as a first pickup threshold
(warning stage______8_I!) has been exceeded, a 7_8I! time stage starts. A warning
message is transmitted subsequent to the expiration of this time stage. A counter
switching is activated when the pickup threshold is exceeded. This weighted counter
is incremented according to the present U/f value. Consequently, the trip time results
from the parameterized characteristic. A trip signal is transmitted as soon as the trip
counter state has been reached.
BU
f
∼ ----
B
BN mach
--------------------
U
UN mach
--------------------
f
fN
-----
--------------------- U
f
= =---- (simplified
notation)
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-87
C53000-G1176-C127-1
The trip signal is canceled as soon as the value falls below the pickup threshold and
the counter is decremented according to a parameterizeable cool-down time selection.
The thermal characteristic is prespecified by 7 value pairs concerning the U/f overexcitation
(related to nominal values) and the t trip time. In most cases, the specified
characteristic related to standard transformers provides for sufficient protection. If this
characteristic does not correspond to the actual thermal behavior of the object to be
protected, each desired characteristic can be implemented by entering customer-specific
trip times for the specified U/f overexcitation values. Intermediate values are determined
by a linear interpolation within the device.
In the default setting, the ____ 8_I!_pickup threshold_and the first setting value of
the thermal characteristic _____W__8_I _____ are identical (1.1 x nominal excitation,
see figure10-6 in the technical data, section 10.13). Figure 6-41 illustrates the behavior
of the protection on the assumption that deviating setting values were selected
for these limits within the framework of parameterization.
Figure 6-42 illustrates the logic diagram of the overexcitation protection. The counter
can be reset to zero by means of a blocking input or a reset input.
Figure 6-41 Tripping time characteristic of the overexcitation protection
Thermal
trip stage
t
T U/f >>
U/f >>
U/f
Tripping area
Overexcitation
trip stage U/f >>
1.10
(1st setting value
of the thermal characteristic )
(Setting of stepped
characteristic)
Pick-up threshold U/f> (parameter 4302)
1.40
t1.10
1.20 1.30
Thermal
trip stage
t
T U/f >>
U/f >>
U/f
Tripping area
Overexciitation
trip stage U/f >>
1.10
(1st setting value
of the thermal characteristic)
(Setting of stepped
characteristic)
Pick-up threshold U/f> (parameter 4302)
1.40
t1.10
1.20 1.30
a) The U/f> pickup threshold
is less than the 1st setting
value of the thermal characteristic
b) The U/f> pickup threshold
is greater than the 1st setting
value of the thermal
characteristic
Functions
6-88 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 6-42 Logic diagram of the overexcitation protection
General The overexcitation protection is only effective and accessible if it was previously set at
address ____ 29(5(;&__3527__= (QDEOHG within the framework of project configuration.
If the function is not needed, this parameter is set to 'LVDEOHG. At address
____ 29(5(;&__3527_, the function can be switched 21 or 2)). As an alternative,
the user can only the trip command (%ORFN_UHOD\).
The overexcitation feature serves to measure the voltage/frequency quotient proportional
to the B induction. The protection feature must intervene as soon as the induction
limit value specified by the object to be protected, e.g. the block transformer, has
been exceeded. The transformer is endangered, if, for example, the power station
block is switched off at full-load operation and the voltage regulator does not respond
at all or does not respond fast enough to avoid the related voltage increase.
A frequency (speed) reduction, e.g. in case of an island system, can also cause a nonpermissible
induction increase.
In this way, the U/f protection monitors the correct function both of the voltage regulators
and of the speed regulation in all operating states.
Independent
stages
The limit-value setting at address _____8_I! is based on the induction limit value in
relation to the nominal induction (B/BN) specified by the manufacturer of the object to
be protected.
A pickup message is transmitted as soon as the induction limit value U/f set at address
4302 is exceeded. A warning message is transmitted subsequent to the corresponding
_____7_8_I! time delay.
The _____8_I!!, _____7_8_I!! trip stage characteristic serves to switch off particularly
strong overexcitations within a short time.
The time set for this purpose is an additional time delay which does not include the
operating time (measuring time, drop-out time).
____ 8_I_!
>RM th.repl..
FNo. 5357
OR
&
Tripping
matrix
U/f
> U/f BLOCK
FNo. 5353
&
0
1
t(U/f)
Reset
counter=0
&
FNo. 5370
U/f> picked up.
FNo. 5367
U/f> warn
FNo. 5372
U/f> th. TRIP
____ 7_8_I_!! FNo. 5371
U/f>> TRIP
____ 7_8_I!
U
f
____ 8_I_!!
U/f heating
U/f cool down
FNo. 5362
U/f> BLOCKED
70LQ
75,3_&0'
FNo. 5373
U/f>> pick.up. FNo. 5369
RM th. repl.
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-89
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Thermal
characteristic
A thermal characteristic is superimposed to the trip stage characteristic. For this purpose,
the overtemperature created by the overexcitation is approximately modeled.
Not only the already mentioned pickup signalization is generated on exceeding the
protection U/f induction limit value set at address _____ but a counter is tripped additionally.
Depending on the set characteristic, this counter provokes the tripping after
the specified time.
Figure 6-43 Tripping time characteristic of the overexcitation protection – presettings
The characteristic of a Siemens standard transformer was selected as a presetting. If
the manufacturer of the object to be protected did not include any instructions on this
subject, the preset standard characteristic should be used. Otherwise, any trip characteristic
can be specified by point-wise entering of parameters by maximally 6
straight lenghtes. To do this, the trip times of the overexcitation values U/f = 1.10; 1.15;
1.20; 1.25; 1.30; 1.35 und 1.40 are read out from the predefined characteristic and entered
at the addresses _____W_8_I _____ to _____W_8_I _____. The protective
relay executes a linear interpolation between the points.
Time for cool down The tripping by the thermal image drops out by the time of the pickup
threshold dropout.
However, the counter content is reset to zero with the cool-down time parameterized
at address _____7_&22/_'2:1. In this context, this parameter is defined as the
time required by the thermal image to cool down from 100 % to 0 %.
Transformer
adaptation
A perhaps existing deviation between the primary nominal voltage of the voltage transformers
and of the object to be protected is compensated via an internal correction factor
(UN prim/UN Mach). As a prerequisite, however, the incoming power system parameters
8QRP_35,0$5< and 8_35,0$5<_23_ must have been entered correctly according
the sections 6.1.3 and 6.1.6.
1111
1
2
3
5
1
2
3
5
1
2
3
5
1
2
3
1 00
t [s]
U⁄ f
U N ⁄ fN
-----------------
.1 .2 .3 .4
0
0
0
0
00
00
00
00
000
000
0000
Functions
6-90 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6.13.2.1 Parameter list of the overexcitation protection
6.13.2.2 Information list of the overexcitation protection
4301 OVEREXC. PROT. ON
OFF
OFF Overexcitation Protection
4302 U/f > 1.00..1.20 1.10 U/f Pickup
4303 T U/f> 0.00..60.00 sec 10.00 sec T U/f Time Delay
4304 U/f >> 1.00..1.40 1.40 U/f >> Pickup
4305 T U/f >> 0.00..60.00 sec 1.00 sec T U/f>> Time Delay
4306 t(U/f=1.10) 0..20000 sec 6000 sec U/f = 1.10 Time Delay
4313 T COOL DOWN 0..20000 sec 3600 sec Time for cool down
FNo Alarm Comments
5353 >U/f BLOCK >BLOCK overexcitation protection
5357 >RM th.repl. >Reset memory of thermal replica U/f
5361 U/f> OFF Overexcitation prot. is swiched OFF
5362 U/f> BLOCKED Overexcitation prot. is BLOCKED
5363 U/f> ACTIVE Overexcitation prot. is ACTIVE
5369 RM th. repl. Reset memory of thermal replica U/f
5367 U/f> warn Overexc. prot.: U/f warning stage
5370 U/f> picked up Overexc. prot.: U/f> picked up
5373 U/f>> pick.up Overexc. prot.: U/f>> picked up
5371 U/f>> TRIP Overexc. prot.: TRIP of U/f>> stage
5372 U/f> th.TRIP Overexc. prot.: TRIP of th. stage
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-91
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6.14 90–%–stator earth fault protection (ANSI 59N, 64G, 67G)
General The stator earth fault protection detects earth faults in the stator windings of threephase
machines. The machine can be operated in bus-bar connection (directly connected
to the network) or in block connection (via machine transformer). The criterion
for the occurrence of an earth fault is mainly the occurrence of a neutral displacement
voltage. This principle results in a protected zone of 90% to 95% of the stator winding.
Displacement
voltage
The displacement voltage can be measured either at the machine star-point via voltage
transformers or neutral earthing transformers (Figure 6-44) or via the e-n winding
(open delta winding) of a voltage transformer set or the measurement winding of a line
connected earthing transformer (Figure 6-45). Since the neutral earthing transformer
or the line connected earthing transformer usually supply a displacement voltage of
500 V (with full displacement), a voltage divider 500 V/100 V is to be connected in such
cases.
If the displacement voltage can not be directly applied to the device, the device calculates
the displacement voltage from the phase-to-ground voltages. The address ____
8(_&211(&7,21 serves for specifying whether the displacement voltage is connected
or is not connected at the neutral transformer or at the open delta winding, e.g. of
an earthing transformer.
In all kinds of displacement voltage formation, the components of the third harmonic
in each phase are summed since they are in phase in the three-phase system. In order
to obtain reliable measured quantities, only the fundamental of the displacement voltage
is evaluated in the stator earth fault protection. Harmonics are filtered out by numerical
filter algorithms.
For machines in block connection the evaluation of the displacement voltage is sufficient.
The achieved sensitivity of the protection is only limited by power frequency interference
voltages during an earth fault in the network. These interference voltages
are transferred to the machine side via the coupling capacitances of the unit transformer.
If necessary, a loading resistor can be provided to reduce these interference
voltages. The protection initiates disconnection of the machine when an earth fault in
the machine zone has been present for a set time.
Functions
6-92 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 6-44 Block connected generator with neutral earthing transformer
Figure 6-45 Block connected generator with line connected earthing transformer
Earth current
direction detection
For machines in bus-bar connection, it is not possible to differentiate between a network
earth fault or a machine earth fault by the displacement voltage alone. In this
case the earth fault current is used as a further criterion. During a network earth fault,
the machine supplies only a negligible earth fault current across the measurement location,
which must be situated between the machine and the network. During a machine
earth fault, the earth fault current of the network is available. However, since the
network conditions generally vary according to the switching status of the network, a
loading resistor, which supplies an increased earth fault current on the occurrence of
a displacement voltage, is used in order to obtain definite measurement conditions independent
of the switching status of the network. The earth fault current produced by
the loading resistor must always flow across the measurement location.
UE
RB
7UM61
CG CL
CC
CTr
RT
RB – Load resistor
RT – Voltage divider
UE – Displacement voltage
CG – Generator-earth capacitance
CL – Conductor-earth capacitance of line connection
CTr – Winding-earth capacitanceof block transformer
CC – Coupling capacitance of block transformer
UE
RB
7UM61
RT
CC
CG CL CTr
RB – Load resistor
UE – Displacement voltage
CL – Conductor-earth capacitance
of line connection
CTr – Winding-earth capacitance
of block transformer
CC – Coupling capacitance
of block transformer
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-93
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 6-46 Earth fault direction detection with busbar connection
Consequently, the loading resistor must be situated on the other side of the measurement
location (current transformer, toroidal current transformer) when viewed from the
machine. Apart from the magnitude of the earth fault current, the direction of this current
in relation to the displacement voltage can be used for the safe recognition of a
machine earth fault in the case of bus-bar connection. The directional border between
"machine direction" and "network direction" can be altered in the 7UM61 (refer to Figure
6-47). The protection decides on machine earth fault when all three criteria are
met, i.e.
− displacement voltage larger than set value 8_!,
− earth fault current across the measurement location larger than set value _,_!,
− earth fault current is flowing in the direction of the protected machine.
Figure 6-47 Characteristic of directional stator earth fault protection
On the occurrence of earth fault in the machine zone, the disconnection of the machine
is initiated after a set delay time.
G
7UM61
IEE UE
RB
IE ohmic
Uen
I earth>
IE capacitive IE inductive
Network
direction
Generator
direction
adjustable direction characteristic angle
IE
ϕ öEE
IE
Functions
6-94 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
When the earth current is not decisive to detect an earth fault, e.g. because the circuit
breaker is open, the earth current detection can be switched off by a control signal via
a binary input of the relay. During this time, the displacement voltage stage is fully operative
as the only earth fault protection (e.g. during run-up of the machine).
Figure 6-49 shows the logic diagram of the stator earth fault protection.
If the stator earth fault protection is used as directional busbar connection protection,
this feature is assigned to the sensitive current measuring input of the 7UM61device.
The user must be aware that the sensitive earth fault detection uses the same measuring
input and thus the same measuring quantity. For this reason, two additional, independent
pickup thresholds Iee> and Iee>> could be formed for this measuring
quantity by means of the sensitive earth fault detection (see section 6.15). If the user
does not desire this, he should remove the sensitive earth fault configuration at address
0151.
Earth current
detection (earth
differential
protection with
tripping via
displacement
voltage)
In the industrial sector, busbar systems are implemented with high- or low-resistance,
switcheable starpoint resistances. For earth-fault detection, the starpoint current and
the total current are detected via toroidal current transformed and transmitted to the
protective relay as current difference. In this way, both the earth current portion derived
from the starpoint resistance and the earth current portion derived from the power
system contribute to the total earth current. In order to exclude an unwanted operation
due to transformer faults, the displacement voltage is used for tripping (see figure
6-48). The protection feature detects a machine earth fault if the following two criteria
are fulfilled:
− displacement voltage greater than 8_!_setting value,
− ∆ IE earth current difference greater than _,_!_setting value,
Figure 6-48 Earth current differential protection with busbar connection
Annex A.3 (figure A-6) illustrates a connection example with a low-resistance starpoint
(earth current limiting to about 100 A). In this example as well, 3I0> and U0> are the
tripping criteria.
Determination of
the faulty phase
In addition to this, a supplementary function serves to determine the faulty phase. As
the phase-earth-voltage in the faulty phase is less than in the two remaining phases
and as the voltage even increases in the latter ones, the faulty phase can be deter-
G
IEE 7UM61 UE
&
∆ IE
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-95
C53000-G1176-C127-1
mined by determining the smallest phase-earth voltage in order to generate a corresponding
result as fault message.
Figure 6-49 Logic diagram of the 90%–stator earth fault protection
General The 90% stator earth fault protection is only effective and accessible if it was previously
set at address ____ 6_(_)_3527__= GLUHFWLRQDO__QRQ²GLU__8_ or QRQ²
GLU__8_ ,_ within the framework of project configuration. If QRQ²GLU__8_ was selected,
the parameters concerning the earth current are ineffective. If one of the options
GLUHFWLRQDO or QRQ²GLU__8_ ,_ was selected, the parameters concerning
the earth current are accessible. For machines in busbar connection, one of the latter
options must set as a differentiation between the power system earth fault and the machine
earth fault is only possible by way of the earth current. If the 90% stator earth
fault protection is used as “earth differential protection“, address 0150 = QRQ²GLU__
8_ ,_ is selected, whereas 'LVDEOHG is selected if the function is not needed. The
function can be switched 21 or 2)) at address 50__ 6_(_)_3527_ As an alternative,
the user can only block the trip signal (%ORFN_UHOD\) at this address.
Displacement
voltage
The criterion for the inception of an earth fault in the stator circuit is the occurrence of
a neutral displacement voltage. Exceeding the setting value Uearth (____
8_!) therefore represents the pick-up for this protection.
The setting must be chosen such that the protection does not pick-up during operational
asymmetries. This is particularly important for machines in bus-bar connection
since all voltage asymmetries of the network affect the voltage system of the machine.
The pick-up value should be at least twice the value of the operational asymmetry. A
value of 5% to 10% of the full displacement value is normal.
____ _,_!
____ 8_!
OR
&
____ 7_6_(_)
70LQ
75,3_&0'
Tripping
matrix
&
&&
____ 7_6_(_)
____ ',5__$1*/(
&
&
>S/E/F BLOCK
FNo. 5173
>S/E/F Iee off
FNo. 5176
OR
OR
&
FNo. 5182
S/E/F BLOCKED
FNo. 5186
U0> picked up
FNo. 5188
3I0> picked up
FNo. 5193
S/E/F TRIP
FNo. 5187
U0> TRIP
non–dir. U0
directional
____ 6_(_)_3527_
“1” non–dir. U0&I0
Functions
6-96 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
For machines in block connection, the pick-up value has to be chosen such that displacements
during network earth faults which are transferred via the coupling capacitances
of the block transformer to the stator circuit, do not lead to pick-up. The damping
effect of the load resistor must also be considered in this case. Hints for dimensioning
the load resistor are contained in the pamphlet "Planning Machine Protection
Systems", Order No. E50400- U0089-U412-A1-7600. The setting value is twice the
displacement value which is coupled in at full network displacement. Final determination
of the setting value occurs during commissioning with primary values according
to section 8.3.5.1.
The stator earth fault trip is delayed by the time set under address _____7_6_(_).
When setting the delay time, the overload capability of the loading equipment must be
considered. All set times are additional delay times and do not include operating times
(measurement times, reset times) of the protection function itself.
Earth current Addresses 5003 and 5004 are only of importance for machines in bus–bar
connection,
when ____ 6_(_)_3527__= GLUHFWLRQDO or QRQ²GLU__8_ ,_ has been set. The
following considerations are not applicable for machines in block connection.
Since the residual earth current in a compensated network is very small, an earthing
transformer with an ohmic loading resistor is normally provided to increase the residual
wattmetric current in the event of an earth fault. This arrangement also makes the
protection independent of network conditions. Instructions for the dimensioning of the
earth current transformer and the loading resistor are contained in the pamphlet Planning
Machine Protection Systems", Order No. E50400-U0089-U412-A1-7600.
Since the magnitude of earth fault current in this case is determined mainly by the
loading resistor, a small angle is set for ',5_$1*/( (address ____), e.g. __.. If the
network capacitances in an isolated network are also to be considered, then a larger
angle (approx. __.) can be set which corresponds to the superimposition of the capacitance
network current onto the loading current.
The directional angle ',5_$1*/( (address ____) indicates the phase displacement
between the neutral displacement voltage and the perpendicular to the directional
characteristic (Figure 6-47), i.e. it is equal to the inclination of the directional characteristic
to the reactive axis.
If, in an isolated network, the capacitances to earth of the network are mainly decisive
for the earth fault protection, it is also possible to work without earthing transformer. In
this case, the angle is set to approximately 90° (corresponding to sin ϕ switching).
The pick-up value ______,_! is set such that for an earth fault in the protected zone,
the earth current safely exceeds the setting.
Example busbar connection::
Loading resistor 10 Ω
10 A continous
50 A for 20 s
6.3 kV
3
---------------- 500 V
3
Earthing transformer ⁄ ---------------
27 kVA
(limb transformation)
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-97
C53000-G1176-C127-1
With full neutral displacement voltage, the load resitor supplies:
Referred to the 6.3 kV side, this results in:
The secondary current of the toroidal transformer supplies to the input of the device:
For a protected zone of 90 %, the protection should already operate at 1/10 of the full
displacement voltage, whereby only 1/10 of the earth fault current is generated
In this example _,_! is set to 11 mA. For the displacement voltage setting, 1/10 of the
full displacement voltage is used (because of the 90 % protected zone). Considering
a voltage divider of 500 V/100 V, this results in:
Setting 8_! = 10 V
The time delay must lie below the 50 A capability time of the loading resistor, i.e. below
20 s. The overload capability of the earthing transformer must also be considered if it
lies below that of the loading resistor.
Voltage divider 500 V / 100 V
Toroidal c.t. 60 A / 1 A
Protected zone 90 %
500 V
10 Ω
--------------- = 50 A
IEE prim 50 A
500 ⁄ 3
6300 V ⁄( 3)
= ⋅ -----------------------------------⋅ 3=6.87 A
IEE sek
IEE prim
60 A ⁄ 1 A
------------------------- 6.87 A
60
= =----------------- = 115 mA
Setting 3I0> 115 mA
10
=--------------------=11.5 mA
Functions
6-98 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6.14.2.1 Parameter list of the 90% stator earth fault protection
6.14.2.2 Information list of the 90% stator earth fault protection
5001 S/E/F PROT. ON
OFF
OFF Stator Earth Fault Protection
5002 U0> 5.0..125.0 V 10.0 V U0> Pickup
5003 3I0> 2..1000 mA 5 mA 3I0> Pickup
5004 DIR. ANGLE 0..360 ° 15 ° Angle for Direction Determinaltion
5005 T S/E/F 0.00..60.00 sec 0.30 sec T S/E/F Time Delay
FNo Alarm Comments
5173 >S/E/F BLOCK >BLOCK stator earth fault protection
5176 >S/E/F Iee off >Switch off earth current detec.(S/E/F)
5181 S/E/F OFF Stator earth fault prot. is switch OFF
5182 S/E/F BLOCKED Stator earth fault protection is BLOCK.
5183 S/E/F ACTIVE Stator earth fault protection is ACTIVE
5189 Uearth L1 Earth fault in phase L1
5186 U0> picked up Stator earth fault: U0 picked up
5188 3I0> picked up Stator earth fault: I0 picked up
5187 U0> TRIP Stator earth fault: U0 stage TRIP
5193 S/E/F TRIP Stator earth fault protection TRIP
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-99
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6.15 Sensitive earth current protection (ANSI 50/51GN, 64R)
General The highly sensitive earth current protection has the task to detect earth fault in systems
with isolated or high-impedance earthed star-point. The pick-up criterion is the
magnitude of the (residual) earth current. The magnitude of the residual current allows
earth fault detection, for example, on electrical machines which are directly connected
to the bus-bar of an isolated power system, when in case of a network earth fault the
machine supplies only a negligible earth fault current across the measurement location,
which must be situated between the machine terminals and the network, whereas
in case of a machine earth fault the higher earth fault current produced by the total network
is available.
The measured current may be derived from special window-type summation current
transformers.
This protection is not suited for detection of high earth current which may arise in case
of earthed system star-points (higher than approx. 1 A at the relay terminals for highly
sensitive earth current protection). If this protection feature nevertheless shall be used
as short-circuit to earth protection, an additional, external current transformer is required
as intermediate transformer.
Note: The measured current input IEE is common for the sensitive earth current protection
as well as for the directional or non–directional stator earth fault protection for
bus–bar connected machines That means both protection functions use identical input
currents if address _____6_(_)_3527_ is set to GLUHFWLRQDO or QRQ²GLU__
8_ ,_.
Application as rotor
earth fault protection
Alternatively, this protection can be used as rotor earth fault protection when a system
frequency bias voltage is applied to the rotor circuit (refer to figure 6-50). In this case,
the measured current is determined by the magnitude of the bias voltage UV and the
capacitance of the coupling capacitors of the rotor circuit.
A measured value supervision is provided for the application as rotor earth fault protection:
The measurement circuit is assumed to be closed as long as a small earth current
(____ ,((_) is flowing which is determined by the rotor-earth capacitance. If not,
an alarm is issued after a short delay time of 2 s.
Measuring
procedures
Initially, the residual current is numerically filtered so that only the fundamental wave
of the current is used for the measurement. This makes the measurement insensitive
to transient conditions at the inception of a short-circuit and to harmonic content in the
current.
The protection consists of two stages. A pickup is detected as soon as the first parameterized
threshold value ,((! is exceeded. The trip command is transmitted subsequent
to 7_,((! time delay. A pickup is detected as soon as the second parameterized
threshold value ,((! is exceeded. The trip command is transmitted subsequent
to 7_,((! time delay.
Both stages can be blocked via a binary input.
Functions
6-100 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 6-50 Application example as rotor short circuit to earth protection
(7XR61 – series device for the rotor short circuit to earth protection)
Figure 6-51 Logic diagram of the sensitive earth current protection
7UM61
7XR61
CE RE
IEE
UV
____ ,((!
>BLOCK Sens. E
FNo. 1231
____ ,((!!
____ ,((_
&
FNo. 1224
IEE> Pickup
FNo. 1221
IEE>> Pickup
FNo. 1226
IEE> TRIP
FNo. 1223
IEE>> TRIP
____ 7_,((!
____ 7_,((!!
FNo. 1233
IEE BLOCKED
FNo. 5396
Fail. REF Iee<
&
Iee
& 2s
70LQ
75,3_&0'
Tripping
matrix
>BLOCK IEE>>
FNo. 1202
>BLOCK IEE>
FNo. 1203
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-101
C53000-G1176-C127-1
General The sensitive earth fault detection is only effective and accessible if it was previously
set at address ____ 2_&_3527__,HH! = (QDEOHG within the framework of system
configuration. If one of the options with current evaluation was selected during the
configuration of the 90–%–stator earth fault protection (_____6_(_)_3527_, see
section 5.1), the sensitive current measuring input of the 7UM61 is assigned with this
feature. The user must be aware that the sensitive earth fault detection uses the same
measuring input and thus also the same measuring quantity. If the sensitive earth fault
detection is not required, this parameter is set to 'LVDEOHG. At address 51__ 2_&_
3527__,HH!, the function can be switched 21 or 2)). As an alternative, it is also possible
to block only the trip command (%ORFN_UHOD\).
Use as rotor earth
fault protection
The highly sensitive earth current protection can be used to detects earth fault either
in the stator or in the rotor winding of the machine. A precondition is that the magnitude
of the measured current is a sufficient criterion. When the protected winding is isolated
or high-resistance earthed, sufficient magnitude of the earth current must be produced.
When, for example, used as rotor earth fault protection, a system frequency
bias voltage must be applied to the rotor circuit (UV ≈ 42 V by means of the 7XR61
series device in figure 6-50). In this case, the measured current is determined by the
magnitude of the bias voltage and the capacitance of the coupling capacitors of the
rotor circuit, which can be measured in order to ensure a closed measuring circuit (address
_____,((_).
Approximately 2 mA is a typical pickup value. The monitoring stage is ineffective is this
value is set to 0. This can become necessary if the earth capacitances are too small.
The earth current pick-up value _____,((! is chosen such that an earth resistance
RE lower than approximately 3 kΩ to 5 kΩ is covered:
On the other hand, the setting value shall correspond to at least twice the interference
current caused by the earth capacitances of the rotor circuit.
The _____,((!! trip stage should be dimensioned for a fault resistance of about
1 kΩ .
with ZK- impedance amount of the series device with nominal frequency
The _____7_,((! und _____7_,((!! tripping time delays do not include the operating
times.
Use as stator earth
fault protection
Please also refer to section 6.14. For use as stator earth fault protection, a sufficient
current must be produced by an earthing transformer, if necessary. Further information
about dimensioning of the earthing transformer and load resistor is contained in
the pamphlet "Planning Machine Protection Systems" Order No. E50400-U0089-
U412-A1-7600.
IEE>
UV
RE
------- 42 V
4 kΩ
Warning stage setting value e.g.: ≈ ≈ ------------≈ 10 mA
IEE>>
UV
R E + ZK
-------------------- 42 V
1 kΩ + 0.8 kΩ
Tripping stage setting value e.g.: ≈ ≈ ------------------------------------- ≈ 23 mA
Functions
6-102 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Use as earth shortcircuit
protection
For low-voltage machines with neutral conductor incorporated in cables or machines
with low-impedance earthed starpoint, the time-overcurrent protection of the phase
branches already is a short-circuit to earth protection, as the short-circuit to earth current
also flows through the faulty phase. If the sensitive earth current detection nevertheless
shall be used as short-circuit to earth protection, an external intermediate
transformer must be used to ensure that the short-circuit current does not exceed the
thermal limit values (see section 10.1.1) of this measuring input.
6.15.2.1 Parameter list of the sensitive earth current detection
6.15.2.2 Information list of the sensitive earth current detection
5101 O/C PROT. Iee> OFF
ON
OFF Sensitive O/C Protection Iee>
5102 IEE> 2..1000 mA 10 mA Iee> Pickup
5103 T IEE> 0.00..60.00 sec 5.00 sec T Iee> Time delay
5104 IEE>> 2..1000 mA 23 mA Iee>> Pickup
5105 T IEE>> 0.00..60.00 sec 1.00 sec T Iee>> Time Delay
5106 IEE< 1.5..50.0 mA 0.0 mA Iee< Pickup (Interrupted Circuit)
FNo Alarm Comments
1231 >BLOCK Sens. E >BLOCK sensitiv earth current prot.
1203 >BLOCK IEE> >BLOCK IEE>
1202 >BLOCK IEE>> >BLOCK IEE>>
1232 IEE OFF Earth current prot. is swiched OFF
1233 IEE BLOCKED Earth current prot. is BLOCKED
1234 IEE ACTIVE Earth current prot. is ACTIVE
1224 IEE> Pickup IEE> Pickup
1221 IEE>> Pickup IEE>> Pickup
1226 IEE> TRIP IEE> TRIP
1223 IEE>> TRIP IEE>> TRIP
5396 Fail. REF Iee< Failure R/E/F protection Iee<
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-103
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6.16 100–%–stator earth fault protection with 3rd harm.
(ANSI 59TN/ 27TN (3.H.))
General As described in section 6.14, the measuring procedure based on the fundamental
wave of the displacement voltage serves to protect maximally 90 % to 95 % of the stator
winding. A non-line-frequent voltage must be used to implement a 100 % protection
range. With the 7UM61 device, the 3rd harmonic is used for this purpose.
The 3rd harmonic is created in each machine in a more or less significant way. It is
provoked by the shape of the poles. If an earth fault occurs in the generator stator
winding, the division ratio of the parasitic capacitances changes, as one of the capacitances
was short-circuited by the earth fault. During this procedure, the 3rd harmonic
measured in the starpoint decreases, whereas the 3rd harmonic measured at the generator
terminals increases (see figure 6-52). The 3rd harmonic forms a zero phasesequence
system and can thus also be determined by means of the voltage transformer
switched in star/delta or by calculating the zero phase-sequence system from the
phase-earth-voltages.
Figure 6-52 Profile of the 3rd harmonic along the stator winding
Moreover, the level of the 3rd harmonic depends on the working point of the generator,
i.e. a function of the P active power and the Q reactive power. For this reason, the
working area of the stator earth fault protection is restricted in order to enhance security.
In case of a busbar connection, all machines contribute to the 3rd harmonic, which impedes
the separation of the individual machines.
Measuring
principle
The level of the 3rd harmonic in the measuring quantity is the pickup criterion. The 3rd
harmonic is determined from the displacement voltage measured during two cycles by
means of digital filtering.
Different measuring procedures are applied, depending on whether the displacement
voltage is detected or not (project configuration parameter _____8(_&211(&7,21):
Normal operation
3rd Harmonics Earth fault near to starpoint
Terminals
Starpoint
L1
L2
L3
Functions
6-104 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
1. QHXWUDO_WUDQVIRUPHU_ Connection of the UE input to the voltage transformer in
the machine starpoint
2. EURNHQ_GHOWD_ZLQGLQJ_ connection of the UE input to the open delta winding
3. 1RW_FRQQHFWHG_ calculation of the displacement voltage by means of the three
phase-earth-voltages, if the UE input is not connected
4. FRQQHFWHG_WR_DQ\_97: measuring of any other voltage; the function 100–%–
stator earth fault protection is blocked.
Starpoint As an earth fault in the starpoint causes a reduction of the measured 3rd harmonic
compared with the faulty case, the protective function is implemented as undervoltage
stage (_____8____+$50_). This arrangement is the preferred application.
Open delta winding If no starpoint transformer exists, the protective function is based on the
zero component
of the 3rd harmonic of the terminal voltages. This voltage increases in case of a
fault. In this case, the protective function is an overvoltage stage (_____8__
__+$50_!).
Not connected;
calculation of U0
Like for the connection to the open delta winding, an increase of the 3rd harmonic in
case of a fault also results for the calculated voltage. The _____8____+$50_! parameter
is also relevant for this application.
Connected to any
VT
The option 8(_FRQQHFWHG_WR_DQ\_97 is selected if the 7UM61 voltage input shall
be used for measuring any other voltage instead of using it for earth fault protection.
In this case the function 100–%–stator earth fault protection is blocked.
Figure 6-53 illustrates the logic diagram of the 100– %–stator earth fault protection.
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-105
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 6-53 Logic diagram of the 100–%–stator earth fault protection
General The 100 %–stator earth fault protection is only effective and accessible if it was set at
address ____ 6()__UG_+$50_= (QDEOHG within the framework of project configuration.
The parameter is set to 'LVDEOHG if the function is not needed. At address
_____6()__UG_+$50___the function can be switched 21 or 2)). As an alternative,
it is also possible to block only the trip command (%ORFN_UHOD\).
Connection type Depending on the system conditions, the user specified at address
_____8(_&21_
1(&7,21 within the framework of project configuration if the displacement voltage
Uen is tapped via a starpoint transformer (QHXWUDO_WUDQVIRUPHU) or via the open
delta winding of an earthing transformer (EURNHQ_GHOWD_ZLQGLQJ) and fed to the
protective relay. If it is possible to make the displacement voltage available to the protective
relay as a measured quantity, calculated quantities are used and the parameter
must be set to QRW_FRQQHFWHG. The option 8(_FRQQHFWHG_WR_DQ\_97 is
selected
if the 7UM61 voltage input shall be used for measuring any other voltage instead of
using it for earth fault protection.
Pick-up value for
3rd harmonic
Depending on the selection of the connection type, only one of the two setting parameters
5202 or 5203 is accessible. The setting values can only be determined within the
framework of a primary test. The following principle is generally valid:
− The _____8____+$50_ undervoltage stage is relevant for a connection to a transformer
in the starpoint. The pick-up value should be chosen as low as possible.
− The overvoltage stage _____8____+$50! is relevant for a connection via the open
delta winding of an earthing transformer and for a not connected, but internally calculated
displacement voltage.
delta winding
or
not connected
connected to any VT
FNo. 5567
SEF 3H pick. up
70LQ
75,3_&0'
Tripping
maxtrix
____ 8____+$50!
____ 3_PLQ_!
____ 8__PLQ_!
____ 7_6()___+$50
FNo. 5568
SEF 3H TRIP
&
U3
neutral transformer
>SEF 3H BLOCK
FNr. 5553 FNr. 5562
SEF 3H BLOCK
broken delta winding
neutral transformer
____ 8(_&211(&7,21
not connected “1”
&
____ 8____+$50_
Functions
6-106 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Working area Due to the strong dependency of the measurable 3rd harmonic from the
corresponding
working point of the generator, the working area of the 100–%–stator earth fault
protection is only tripped above the active-power threshold set via _____3_PLQ_!
and on exceeding a minimum positive phase-sequence voltage _____8__PLQ_!.
Setting recommendation: Pmin > 40 % P/SN
U1 min > 80 % UN
Time delay The tripping in case of an earth fault is delayed by the time set at address _____7_
6()___+$50. The set time is an additional time delay not including the operating time
of the protective function.
6.16.2.1 Parameter list of the 100–%–stator earth fault protection with 3rd harmonic
6.16.2.2 Information list of the 100–%–stator earth fault protection with 3rd harmonic
5201 SEF 3rd HARM. ON
OFF
OFF Stator Earth Fault Protection 3rdHarm.
5202 U0 3.HARM< 0.2..40.0 V 1.0 V U0 3rd Harmonic< Pickup
5203 U0 3.HARM> 0.2..40.0 V 2.0 V U0 3rd Harmonic> Pickup
5204 T SEF 3. HARM. 0.00..60.00 sec 0.50 sec T SEF 3rd Harmonic Time Delay
5205 P min > 10..100 % 40 % Release Threshold Pmin>
5206 U1 min > 50.0..125.0 V 80.0 V Release Threshold U1min>
FNo Alarm Comments
5553 >SEF 3H BLOCK >BLOCK SEF with 3.Harmonic
5561 SEF 3H OFF SEF with 3.Harm. is switched OFF
5562 SEF 3H BLOCK SEF with 3.Harm. is BLOCKED
5563 SEF 3H ACTIVE SEF with 3.Harm. is ACTIVE
5567 SEF 3H pick.up SEF with 3.Harm.: picked up
5568 SEF 3H TRIP SEF with 3.Harm.: TRIP
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-107
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6.17 Breaker failure protection (ANSI 50BF)
6.17.1 Description of breaker failure protection
General The breaker failure protection function monitors the reaction of a circuit breaker to a
trip signal. Within the framework of the machine protection, it relates to the mains
breaker. To determine if the circuit breaker has properly opened in response to a trip
signal, one of the following methods is used to ascertain the status of the circuit breaker:
• The current flow through the circuit breaker.
• The position of a circuit breaker auxiliary contact for protective functions, with which
the current criterion is perhaps not expressive, e.g. frequency protection, voltage
protection, rotor earth fault protection.
If the circuit breaker has not opened after a programmable time delay, a breaker failure
trip signal is issued (see figure 6-54).
Figure 6-54 Functional principle of the breaker failure protection function
Initiation The breaker failure protection function can be initiated by two different sources:
• Internal protective function of the 7UM61, e.g. trip commands of protective functions
or via CFC (internal logic functions),
• External trip signals via binary input.
For each of the two sources, a unique pickup message is generated, a unique time
delay is initiated, and a unique tripping signal is generated. The setting values for
breaker failure pickup and delay apply to both sources.
Criteria The two pickup criteria (current criterion, circuit breaker auxiliary contact) are OR logics.
In case of a tripping without short circuit current, e.g. by the voltage protection in
case of light load, the current is no safe criterion of the circuit breaker response. For
this reason, the pickup is also possible by means of the auxiliary contact criterion.
&,5&_%5_,!
Function Trip
&
75,3_7LPHU
Å75,3
%)´
G
Breaker Failure Protection
Protective
______
Functions
6-108 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
The current criterion is fulfilled if at least one of the three phase currents exceeds a
parameterized threshold value (&,5&_%5_,!). The dropout is performed if all three
phase currents fall below 95 % of the pickup threshold value.
If the binary input of the circuit breaker auxiliary contact is inactive, only the current
criterion is effective and the breaker failure protection cannot become active with a
tripping signal if the current is below the &,5&_%5_,! threshold.
Two-channel
feature
To protect against nuisance tripping due to excessive contact bounce, a stabilization
of the binary inputs for external trip signals takes place. This external signal must be
present during the entire period of the delay time. Otherwise, the timer is reset and no
tripping signal is issued. A redundant binary input „!H[W_VWDUW__%_)“ is linked to
further enhance the security against unwanted operation. The two-channel feature is
also effective for an „internal“ initiation.
Logic If the breaker failure protection has picked up, a corresponding message is transmitted
and a parameterized time delay starts. If the pickup criteria are still fulfilled on expiration
of this time, a redundant source evaluation before fault clearing is initiated via
a further AND link by means of a superior circuit breaker.
A pickup drops out and no trip command is produced by the breaker failure protection
if
− the „protection OFF“ or „H[W_VWDUW__%_)“ causing the pickup drop out
− a tripping signal of the protective functions still exists, whereas the current criterion
and the auxiliary contact criterion drop out.
Figure 6-55 illustrates the logic diagram of the breaker failure protection. The overall
breaker failure protection can be switched on or off via parameters and also blocked
dynamically via binary inputs.
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-109
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 6-55 Logic diagram for the breaker failure protection
General The breaker failure protection function is only effective and available if address _____
%5($.(5_)$,/85( is set to (QDEOHG. If the breaker failure function is not required,
then address ____ should be set to 'LVDEOHG. At address ____ %5($.(5_)$,/_
85(, the function can be switched 21 or 2)). As an alternative, the user can only block
the trip command (%ORFN_UHOD\).
Criteria The parameter______75,3_,17(51 serves to select the OFF criterion of the internal
pickup. It can be implemented by reading the switching statuses of the corresponding
output relays BO3 (_____75,3_,17(51= %2_) or by a logic link (annunciation _____
!LQW__VWDUW_%_)) created in CFC (= &)&). The internal source can be completely
deactivated (_____75,3_,17(51 = 2))). In this case the breaker failure protection
can only be initiated by external sources via binary input.
Note: Be aware that only the potential-free binary output BO3 (Relay R3) can be used
for the breaker failure protection. This means that trippings for the mains breaker must
be configured to this binary output.
The pickup threshold _____&,5&_%5_,! setting of the current criterion refers to all
three phases. The user must select a value ensuring that the function still picks up
____ 75,3²7LPHU
&
>ext.start1 B/F
FNo. 1423
>Break. Contact
FNo. 1422
>BLOCK BkrFail
FNo. 1403
>ext.start2 B/F
FNo. 1441
70LQ
75,3_&0'
Tripping
matrix
____ 696_,!
CFC
____ 75,3_,17(51
TR.
OR
OR
&
FNo. 1452
BrkFail BLOCK
FNo. 1471
B/F TRIP
FNo. 1444
B/F I>
OR
FNo. 1455
B/F picked up
FNo. 1443
int.start B/F
BO 3 binary output (relay R3), potential-free
I>TRIP
U>>TRIP
f<TRIP
Masking
HW model
of relays
OUTPUT
RELAY
Device-internal prot. function
>int.start B/F
FNo. 1442 (logic link in CFC)
“0”
Functions
6-110 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
even for the lowest operating current to be expected. For this reason, the value should
be set at least 10% below the minimum operating current.
However, the pick-up value should not be selected lower than necessary, as a too sensitive
setting risks prolongations of the drop-out time due to balancing procedures in
the current transformer secondary circuit during the switchoff of too high currents.
Time delay The breaker failure time delay setting is entered at address _____75,3_7LPHU.
This
setting should be based on the circuit breaker interrupting time plus the dropout time
of the current flow monitoring element plus a safety margin. Figure 6-56 illustrates the
timing of a typical breaker failure scenario.
Figure 6-56 Time chart for typical breaker failure operation
6.17.2.1 Settings for breaker failure protection
In the list below, the setting ranges and default setting values are for a device with a
nominal current rating IN = 1 A. For a nominal current rating IN = 5 A, multiply the setting
option values and default setting value by 5. Consider the current transformer ratios
when setting the device with primary values
Normal Fault Clearing Time
Trip.
Time
Fault Occurs
Breaker Interrupting Time
Current Flow
Monitoring
Drop Out Time
Safety
Time
Breaker Failure
Pickup
Breaker Failure Time Delay
75,3²7LPHU (address ____)
Backup Breaker
Interruption Time
(approx.)
Total Fault Clearing Time for Breaker Failure Condition
7001 BREAKER FAILURE OFF
ON
OFF Breaker Failure Protection
7002 TRIP INTERN OFF
Start Breaker Failure with
Bin.Outp.3
Start Breaker Failure with
CFC
OFF Start with Internal TRIP Command
7003 CIRC. BR. I> 0.04..1.00 A 0.20 A Supervision Current Pickup
7004 TRIP-Timer 0.06..60.00 sec 0.25 sec TRIP-Timer
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-111
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6.17.2.2 Information list for breaker failure protection
FNo Alarm Comments
1403 >BLOCK BkrFail >BLOCK breaker failure
1439 >Break. Contact >Breaker contacts
1440 >ext.start1 B/F >ext. start 1 breaker failure prot.
1441 >ext.start2 B/F >ext. start 2 breaker failure prot.
1442 >int. start B/F >int. start breaker failure prot.
1451 BkrFail OFF Breaker failure is switched OFF
1452 BkrFail BLOCK Breaker failure is BLOCKED
1453 BkrFail ACTIVE Breaker failure is ACTIVE
1443 int. start B/F Breaker fail. started intern
1444 B/F I> Breaker failure I>
1445 B/F picked up Breaker failure protection: picked up
1471 BrkFailure TRIP Breaker failure TRIP
Functions
6-112 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6.18 Inadvertent energization (ANSI 50, 27)
General The inadvertent energizing protection serves to limit damages by accidental connection
of the standing or already started, but not yet synchronized generator by a fast
actuation of the mains breaker. A connection to a standing machine corresponds to
the connection to an inductivity. Due to the nominal voltage impressed by the power
system, the generator starts with a high slip as asynchronous machine. In this context,
unpermissibly high currents are induced inside the rotor which may finally destroy it.
Criteria The inadvertent energizing protection only intervenes if measured quantities do not
yet exist in the valid frequency working area (operational condition 0, refer Section
10.20) / in case of the standing machine) or if an undervoltage below the nominal frequency
is present (machine already started, but not yet synchronized). The inadvertent
energizing protection is blocked by a voltage criterion on exceeding a minimum
voltage, in order to avoid that it picks up during normal operation. This blocking is delayed
to avoid that the protection is blocked immediately by the time of an unwanted
connection. Another pick-up delay is necessary to avoid an unwanted operation in
case of high-current faults with a heavy voltage dip. A drop-out time delay allows for a
measuring limited in time.
As the inadvertent energizing protection must intervene very quickly, the instantaneous
current values are monitored over a large frequency range already in operational
condition 0. If valid measured quantities exist (operational condition 1, refer Section
10.20), the positive phase-sequence voltage, the frequency for blocking the inadvertent
energizing protection as well as the instantaneous current values are evaluated as
tripping criterion.
Figure 6-57 illustrates the logic diagram of the inadvertent energizing protection. This
function can be blocked via a binary input. For example, the existence of an excitation
voltage can be used as addition criterion. As the voltage is a necessary criterion for
tripping the inadvertent energizing protection, the voltage transformers must be monitored
by the Fuse Failure Monitor (FFM). If it detects a voltage transformer fault, the
voltage criterion of the inadvertent energizing protection is deactivated.
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-113
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 6-57 Logic diagram of the inadvertent energizing protection (dead machine protection)
General The inadvertent energizing protection is only effective and accessible it is was previously
set at address ____ ,1$'9(57__(1_ = (QDEOHG_ within the framework of
project configuration. If the function is not needed, this parameter is set to 'LVDEOHG.
The function can be switched 21 or 2)) at address _____,1$'9(57__(1. Alternatively,
it is also possible to block only the trip command (%ORFN_UHOD\).
Criteria The _____,_67$*( parameter serves to specify the current pickup threshold of the
inadvertent energizing protection. As a rule, this threshold value is set more sensitively
than the threshold value of the time-overcurrent protection. In this case, the inadvertent
energizing protection may only be effective if the device is either in operational
condition 0 or if no nominal conditions have been reached yet. The parameter _____
5(/($6(_8__ serves to define these nominal conditions. The typical setting is about
50 % to 70 % of the nominal voltage. A 0 V setting deactivates the voltage tripping.
However, this should only be used if the _____,_67$*( shall be used as 3rd timeovercurrent
protection stage, at a very high setting.
The _____3,&._83_7_8__ parameter represents the time delay for the release of
the tripping condition in case of an undervoltage. The user should select a higher value
for this time delay than the for the tripping time delay of the time-overcurrent protection.
The time delay for blocking the tripping conditions in case of an overrange of the undervoltage
threshold is set at _____'523_287_7_8__. The inadvertent energizing
protection is blocked only after this time in order to enable a tripping subsequent to
connection.
OR
&
____ 3,&._83_7_8__
____ 5(/($6(_8__
____ ,_67$*(
____ ,_67$*(
____ ,_67$*(
no meas. quant.
Fuse Failure
>BLOCK I.En.
FNo. 5533
OR
____ '523_287_7_8___
&
70LQ
75,3_&0'
Tripping
matrix
FNo. 5547
I.En. picked up
FNo. 5548
I.En. TRIP
FNo. 5542
I.En. BLOCKED
FNo. 5546
I.En. release
U1
IL1
IL2
IL3
(operational condition 0)
Functions
6-114 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 6-58 illustrates the course of events during an unwanted connection in case of
a machine standstill and, contrary to this, during a voltage collapse in case of a short
circuit close to generator terminals.
Figure 6-58 Course of events of the inadvertent energizing protection
6.18.2.1 Parameter list of the inadvertent energizing protection
The following list indicates the setting ranges and the default settings of a IN = 1 A secondary
nominal current. For a secondary nominal current of IN = 5 A, these values
must be multiplied by 5. Information list of the inadvertent energizing protection
Trip
IL>
ZSS release
U1 <
Machine
„stands“
unwanted
connection
DROP OUT PICK UP
a) Trip subsequent to unwanted connection b) Short circuit
Machine
„runs“
Short circ.
close to gen.
Tripping
short-circuit
protection
PICK UP T U1<
T U1< T U1<
terminals
7101 INADVERT. EN. OFF
ON
OFF Inadvertent Energisation
7102 I STAGE 0.1..20.0 A 0.3 A I Stage Pickup
7103 RELEASE U1< 10.0..125.0 V 50.0 V Release Threshold U1<
7104 PICK UP T U1< 0.00..60.00 sec 5.00 sec Pickup Time Delay T U1<
7105 DROP OUT T U1< 0.00..60.00 sec 1.00 sec Drop Out Time Delay T U1<
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-115
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6.18.2.2 Information list of the inadvertent energizing function
FNo Alarm Comments
5533 >BLOCK I.En. >BLOCK inadvertent energ. prot.
5541 I.En. OFF Inadvert. Energ. prot. is swiched OFF
5542 I.En. BLOCKED Inadvert. Energ. prot. is BLOCKED
5543 I.En. ACTIVE Inadvert. Energ. prot. is ACTIVE
5546 I.En. release Release of the current stage
5547 I.En. picked up Inadvert. Energ. prot.: picked up
5548 I.En. TRIP Inadvert. Energ. prot.: TRIP
Functions
6-116 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6.19 Monitoring functions
The device is equipped with extensive monitoring capabilities - both for hardware and
software. In addition, the measured values are also constantly monitored for plausibility,
therefore, the current transformer and voltage transformer circuits are largely integrated
into the monitoring. It is also possible to implement trip and closing circuit monitoring,
using appropriate binary inputs as available.
6.19.1 Description of Fuse-Failure-Monitor
Fuse failure
monitoring
In case of a measuring voltage failure caused by a short circuit or a phase failure in
the voltage transformer secondary system, a zero voltage can be simulated to individual
measuring loops. The measuring results of the undervoltage protection, the impedance
protection and other voltage-dependent protective functions may be falsified in
this way, which may cause an unwanted operation.
If fuses are used instead of a secondary miniature circuit breaker with connected auxiliary
contacts, then the fuse failure monitoring can detect problems in the voltage
transformer secondary circuit. Of course, supervision of the miniature circuit breaker
and the fuse failure monitor can be used at the same time.
Measuring
principle for
1–pole and
2–pole fuse failures
The measuring voltage failure detection is based on the fact a significant negativephase
sequence system is formed with regard to the voltage during a 1- or 2-pole voltage
failure, without influencing the current. This enables a clear distinction from asymmetries
impressed by the power system. If the negative-phase sequence system is related
to the current positive-phase sequence system, the following rules apply for the
fault-free case:
If a fault of the voltage transformers occurs, the following rules apply for a single-pole
failure:
If a fault of the voltage transformers occurs, the following rules apply for a two-pole
failure:
In case of an outage of one or two phases, the current also shows a negative-phase
sequence system of 0.5 or 1. Consequently, the voltage monitoring does not respond
as no the voltage transformer fault can be present.
In order to avoid - in case of a too small positive-sequence system - an unwanted operation
by inaccuracies of the measuring voltages failure detection, the function is
blocked below a minimum threshold of the positive-sequence systems of voltage (U1
< 10 V) and current (I1 < 0.1 IN).
U2
U1
------ = 0
I2
I1
und ---- = 0
U2
U1
------ 0.33
0.66
=-----------=0.5 und
I2
I1
---- = 0
U2
U1
-------
I2
I1
 > ----
 
U2
U1
------ 0.33
0.33
=-----------=1 und
I2
I1
---- = 0
U2
U1
-------
I2
I1
 > ----
 
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-117
C53000-G1176-C127-1
A 3-pole voltage transformer failure cannot be detected via the positive- and negativephase
sequence system, but requires a monitoring of the current and voltage time
course. A voltage dip to approximately zero (or if the voltage is zero) although the current
remains unchanged by the same time, this is probably due to a 3-pole voltage
transformer failure. The deviation of the actual current value from the nominal current
value is evaluated for this purpose. The measuring voltage failure monitoring is
blocked if the deviation amount is greater than a threshold value. Moreover, this function
is blocked if a pickup of an (overcurrent) protective function is already present.
Additional criteria In addition to this, the function can either be blocked via a binary input or
deactivated
by an undervoltage protection at a separate voltage transformer set. If an undervoltage
is also detected at a separate transformer set, this is most probably not due to a
transformer error and the monitoring switching can be blocked. The separate undervoltage
protection must be set non-delayed and should also evaluate the positivephase
sequence system of the voltages (e.g. 7RW600).
Figure 6-59 illustrates the logic diagram of the measuring voltage failure detection feature.
Figure 6-59 Logic diagram of the measuring voltages – fuse failure monitor)
>FFM U< extern
FNo. 5011
OR
&
U2/U1 > 0.4
UL1 < 10 V
&
UL2 < 10 V
&
UL3 < 10 V
Gen. trip
>FFM BLOCK
FNo. 5010
&
&
FNo. 6575
OR VT Fuse Failure
OR
Undervolt. U <
Imp. Z <
O/C f(U)
O/C I> + U<
1- and 2-pole
fuse failure
3-pole
fuse failure
Blocked if generator
without load
refer figure 6-38
in 6.10.1
refer figure 6-36
in 6.9.1.3
refer figure 6-20
and 6-21 in 6.3.1
refer figure 6-13
in 6.2.1.1
Imp. I> & U<
refer figure 6-34
in 6.9.1.2
I2/I1 < 0.2
|I1 - IN| > 0.5 IN
I1 < 0.1
U1 < 0.1
Functions
6-118 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6.19.2 Programming settings for Fuse-Failure-Monitor
General The measuring voltage failure detection is only effective and accessible if it was
previously
set at address ____ )86(_)$,/_021_= (QDEOHG_within the framework of
project configuration. If the function is not required, it is set to 'LVDEOHG. At address
____ )86(_)$,/_021_, the function can be switched 21 or 2)).
The threshold values U2/U1 = 40 % und I2/I1 = 20 % for detecting single- and two-pole
voltage failures are predefined, just like the threshold values for detecting a three-pole
voltage failure (undervoltage limit = 10 V, if the value falls below this limit, the failure
detection becomes effective, provided that the current does not significantly change
and that the difference current monitoring = 0.5 IN). Consequently, they don’t need to
be entered.
6.19.2.1 Settings for Fuse-Failure-Monitor
6.19.2.2 Information
6.19.3 Description of measured-value monitoring
6.19.3.1 Hardware monitoring
The device is monitored from the measurement inputs to the binary outputs. Monitoring
checks the hardware for malFunctions and disallowed conditions (see table 6-9 in
section 6.19.7).
Auxiliary and
reference voltages
The processor voltage of 5 V DC is monitored, and if the voltage decreases below the
minimum value, the device is removed from operation. When the cross-polarized voltage
returns, the processor system is restarted.
Removal of or switching off the supply voltage removes the device from operation and
a message is immediately generated by a dead contact. Brief voltage interruptions of
less than 50 ms do not disturb the readiness of the device (for nominal auxiliary voltage
≥ 110 V DC).
The processor monitors the offset and reference voltage of the AD (analog-digital)
converter. The protection is suspended if the voltages deviate outside an allowable
range, and lengthy deviations are reported.
8001 FUSE FAIL MON. ON
OFF
OFF Fuse Failure Monitor
FNo Alarm Comments
5010 >FFM BLOCK >BLOCK fuse failure monitor
5011 >FFM U< extern >FFM extern undervoltage
6575 VT Fuse Failure Voltage Transformer Fuse Failure
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-119
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Buffer battery The buffer battery, which ensures the operation of the internal clock and the
storage
of counters and messages if the auxiliary voltage fails, is periodically checked for
charge status. If it is less than an allowed minimum voltage, then the “EDWWHU\_HPS_
W\” message is issued.
Memory
components
The working memory (RAM) is tested when the system is started up. If a malfunction
occurs then, the starting sequence is interrupted and an LED blinks. During operation,
the memory is checked using its checksum.
For the program memory, the cross sum is formed periodically and compared to the
stored program cross sum.
For the settings memory, the cross sum is formed periodically and compared to the
cross sum that is freshly generated each time the setting process takes place.
If a malfunction occurs, the processor system is restarted.
Probing Probing and the synchronization between the internal buffer components are constantly
monitored. If any deviations cannot be removed by renewed synchronization,
then the processor system is restarted.
Measurement value
collection –
currents
In the current path, there are three input converters; the digitized sum of the outputs
of these must be almost zero for generators with isolated starpoint and earth-fault-free
operation. When the star–point of the machine is high–ohmic earthed (address _____
67$5²32,17 = KLJK_UHVLVWDQFH) faults in the current circuit are recognized if
IF = |iL1+iL2+iL3| > Σ ,_7+5(6+2/'⋅ IN + Σ ,_)$&725 ⋅ Imax
Σ ,_7+5(6+2/' and Σ ,_)$&725 are programmable settings. The component Σ ,_
)$&725 ⋅ Imax takes into account the allowable error of the input transformer, which
can be especially large when high fault current levels are present (Figure 6-60). The
dropout ratio is about 95%.
This malfunction is reported as “)DLOXUH Σ ,”.
The current sum monitoring is not executed if the starpoint was set as ORZ_UHVLV_
WDQFH at power system data 1 (address ____).
.
Figure 6-60 Current sum monitoring
IF
IN
Imax
IN
Σ ,_7+5(6+2/'
Increase:
Σ ,_)$&725
Functions
6-120 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Measured-value
detection
voltages
In the voltage path, there are four input converters: three connected to each phaseearth
voltage, one further can be connected to the displacement voltage UEN. A fault
in the voltage circuits will be recognized when
I |UL1 + UL2 + UL3 + kU · UE| > 680_WKUHV_8 + 680_)DFW_8 x Umax
680_WKUHV_8 and 680_)DFW_8 are setting parameters. Factor kU (= parameter
8SK_8GHOWD address ____) can be set to correct different ratios of phase and open
delta voltage transformer windings. The component 680_)DFW_8 x Umax takes into
account permissible voltage proportional transformation errors in the input converters
(Figure 6-61).
Figure 6-61 Voltage sum monitoring
6.19.3.2 Software monitoring
Watchdog For continuous monitoring of the program sequences, a time monitor is provided in
the
hardware (hardware watchdog) that runs upon failure of the processor or an internal
program, and causes a complete restart of the processor system.
An additional software watchdog ensures that malfunctions during the processing of
programs are discovered. This also initiates a restart of the processor system.
To the extent such a malfunction is not cleared by the restart, an additional restart attempt
is begun. After three unsuccessful restarts within a 30 second window of time,
the device automatically removes itself from service and the red “Error” LED lights up.
The readiness relay opens and indicates “device malfunction” with its normal contact.
Note:
Voltage sum (phase-earth) monitoring can operate properly only if an externally
formed open delta voltage UEN is connected to the residual voltage input of the relay
and if this was communicated to the device via the parameter _____8(_&211(&_
7,21.
UF
UN
Umax
UN
680_WKUHV_8
Increase:
680_)DFW_8
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-121
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6.19.3.3 Monitoring of external current transformer circuits
Interruptions or short circuits in the secondary circuits of the current transformers or
voltage transformers, as well as faults in the connections (important for start-up!), are
detected and reported by the device. The measured quantities are periodically
checked in the background for this purpose, as long as no system fault is present.
Current symmetry During normal system operation (i.e. the absence of a short-circuit fault),
symmetry
among the input currents is expected. This symmetry is checked by the device, using
a quantity monitor. The smallest phase current is compared to the largest phase current,
and asymmetry is recognized if:
|Imin|/|Imax| < %$/__)$&725_,, as long as Imax /IN > %$/$1&(_,_/,0,7 / IN
where Imax is the largest of the three phase currents and Imin is the smallest. The symmetry
factor %$/__)$&725_, represents the allowable asymmetry of the phase currents
while the limit value %$/$1&(_,_/,0,7 is the lower limit of the operating range
of this monitoring (see Figure 6-62). Both settings are adjustable, and the dropout ratio
is about 95 %.
This malfunction is reported as “0DOIXQFWLRQ_,V\PP”.
Figure 6-62 current symmetry monitoring
Voltage symmetry During normal system operation (i.e. the absence of a short-circuit fault),
symmetry
among the input voltages is expected. Because the phase-to-phase voltages are insensitive
to ground connections, the phase-to-phase voltages are used for the symmetry
monitoring. If the device is connected to the phase-to-ground voltages, then the
phase-to-phase voltages are calculated accordingly, whereas if the device is connected
to phase-to-phase voltages and the displacement voltage, then the third phase-tophase
voltage is calculated accordingly. From the phase-to-phase voltages, the smallest
and largest phase-to-ground voltages are calculated and compared to check for
symmetry. Asymmetry is recognized if:
|Vmin|/|Vmax| < %$/_)$&725_8, as long as |Vmax| > %$/$1&(_8²/,0,7
where Vmax is the largest of the three phase-to-ground voltages and Vmin is the smallest.
The symmetry factor %$/_)$&725_8 is the measure for the asymmetry of the
conductor voltages; the limit value %$/$1&(_8²/,0,7 is the lower limit of the operating
range of this monitoring (see Figure 6-63). Both settings are adjustable. The
dropout ratio is about 95 %.
This malfunction is reported as “0DOIXQFWLRQ_8V\PP”.
Imin
IN
%$/$1&(_,_/,0,7
Increase:
%$/_)$&725_,
Imax
IN
Functions
6-122 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 6-63 Voltage symmetry monitoring
Current and voltage
rotation
To detect swapped phase connections in the voltage and current input circuits, the
phase sequence of the phase-to-phase measured voltages and the phase currents
are checked by the monitoring.
Direction measurement with cross-polarized voltages, path selection for impedance
protection, and unbalance load detection all assume a clockwise phase sequence.
The phase sequence of the phase-to-ground voltages is verified by ensuring the following
UL1 leads UL2 leads UL3
Likewise, the phase sequence of the phase currents is verified by ensuring the following
IL1 leads IL2 leads IL3
Verification of the voltage rotation occurs when each measured voltage is at least
|UL1|, |UL2|, |UL3| > 40V / √3.
Verification of the current rotation occurs when each measured current is at least
|IL1|, |IL2|, |IL3| > 0.5 IN.
For abnormal phase sequences, the messages “)DLO_3K__6HT__8” or “)DLO_3K__
6HT__,” are issued, along with the switching of this message “)DLO_3K__6HT_”.
For applications in which an opposite phase sequence is expected, the protective relay
should be adjusted via a binary input or a programmable setting. If the phase sequence
is changed in the relay, phases ‘L2’ and ‘L3’ internal to the relay are reversed,
and the positive and negative sequence currents are thereby exchanged (see also
Section 6.21). The phaserelated messages, malfunction values, and measured values
are not affected by this.
6.19.4 Programming settings for measured-value monitoring
Measured value monitoring can be turned 21 or 2)) at address _____0($685(__
683(59. In addition, the sensitivity of measured value monitor can be modified. Default
values are set at the factory, which are sufficient in most cases. If especially high
operating asymmetry in the currents and/or voltages is to be expected for the application,
or if it becomes apparent during operation that certain monitoring Functions activate
sporadically, then the setting should be less sensitive.
Umin
U
%$/$1&(_8²/,0,7
Increase:
%$/_)$&725_8
Umax
U
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-123
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Address ____ %$/$1&(_8²/,0,7 determines the limit voltage (Phase-to-Phase),
above which the voltage symmetry monitor is effective (see also Figure 6-63). Address
____ %$/__)$&725_8 is the associated symmetry factor; that is, the slope of the
symmetry characteristic curve (Figure 6-63).
Address ____ %$/$1&(_,_/,0,7 determines the limit current, above which the current
symmetry monitor is effective (see also Figure 6-62). Address ____ %$/__)$&_
725_, is the associated symmetry factor; that is, the slope of the symmetry characteristic
curve (Figure 6-62).
Address ____ Σ _,_7+5(6+2/' determines the limit current, above which the current
sum monitor (see Figure 6-60) is activated (absolute portion, only relative to IN). The
relative portion (relative to the maximum conductor current) for activating the current
sum monitor (Figure 6-60) is set at address ____ Σ _,_)$&725.
Address _____680_WKUHV_8 determines the limit voltage, above which the voltage
sum monitor (see Figure 6-61) is activated (absolute portion, only relative to UN). The
relative portion for activating the voltage sum monitor (Figure 6-61) is set at address
_____680_)DFW_8.
6.19.4.1 Settings for measured-value monitoring
In the list below, the setting ranges and default setting values for current-based settings
are for a device with a nominal current rating IN = 1 A. For a nominal current rating
IN = 5 A, multiply the setting options values and default setting values by 5. Consider
the current transformer ratios when setting the device with primary values.
Note:
Information about the connection of the voltage-earth path as well as about its 8SK_
8GHOWD_adaptation factor were entered at power system data1 whose correct setting
is a prerequisite for the correct functioning of the measured quantity monitorings.
8101 MEASURE. SUPERV OFF
ON
OFF Measurement Supervision
8102 BALANCE U-LIMIT 10..100 V 50 V Voltage Threshold for Balance Monitoring
8103 BAL. FACTOR U 0.58..0.90 0.75 Balance Factor for Voltage Monitor
8104 BALANCE I LIMIT 0.10..1.00 A 0.50 A Current Balance Monitor
8105 BAL. FACTOR I 0.10..0.90 0.50 Balance Factor for Current Monitor
8106 Σ I THRESHOLD 0.05..2.00 A 0.10 A Summated Current Monitoring Threshold
8107 Σ I FACTOR 0.00..0.95 0.10 Summated Current Monitoring Factor
8108 SUM.thres. U 10..200 V 10 V Summation Thres. for Volt. Monitoring
8109 SUM.Fact. U 0.60..0.95 0.75 Factor for Volt. Sum. Monitoring
Functions
6-124 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6.19.4.2 Information lists of the monitoring functions
FNo Alarm Comments
140 Alarm Sum Event Error: A/D converter (FNo. 181)
Error:1A/5Ajumper different from setting (FNo. 192)
Error: Neutral CT different from MLFB (FNo. 194)
Error Board 0 (FNo. 190)
147 Error PwrSupply Error Power Supply
160 Alarm Sum Event Failure: General Current Supervision (FNo. 161)
Failure: general Voltage Supervision (FNo. 164
Error Power Supply (FNo. 147)
Error: Offset (FNo. 191)
VT Fuse Failure (FNo. 6575)
Failure: Phase Sequence (FNo. 171)
Alarm: NO calibration data available(FNo. 193)
Failure: Battery empty (FNo. 177)
161 Fail I Superv. Failure: general Current Supervision
162 Failure Σ I Failure: Current Summation
163 Fail I balance Failure: Current Balance
164 Fail U Superv. Failure: general Voltage Supervision
165 Fail Σ U Ph-E Failure: Voltage Summation Phase-Earth
167 Fail U balance Failure: Voltage Balance
171 Fail Ph. Seq. Failure: Phase Sequence
175 Fail Ph. Seq. I Failure: Phase Sequence Current
176 Fail Ph. Seq. U Failure: Phase Sequence Voltage
197 MeasSup OFF Measurement Supervision is switched OFF
177 Fail Battery Failure: Battery empty
181 Error A/D-conv. Error: A/D converter
185 Error Board 3 Error: Board 3 (= Input/Output printed circuit board I/O–2)
187 Error Board 5 Error: Board 5 (= Input/Output printed circuit board I/O–1)
190 Error Board 0 Error: Board 0 (= Processor printed circuit board CPU)
192 Error1A/5Awrong Error:1A/5Ajumper different from setting
193 Alarm NO calibr Alarm: NO calibration data available
194 Error neutralCT Error: Neutral CT different from MLFB
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-125
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6.19.5 Description of Trip Circuit Monitor (ANSI 74TC)
The 7UM61 is equipped with an integrated trip circuit monitor. Depending on the number
of available binary inputs, monitoring with one or two binary inputs can be selected.
If the configuration of the binary inputs needed for this does not match the selected
monitoring type, then a message to this effect is sent. When using two binary inputs,
malFunctions in the trip circuit can be detected under all circuit breaker conditions.
When only one binary input is used, malfunctions in the circuit breaker itself cannot be
detected.
Monitoring with two
binary inputs (not
conn. to com. pot.)
When using two binary inputs, these are connected according to Figure 6-64, parallel
to the associated trip contact on one side, and parallel to the circuit breaker auxiliary
contacts on the other.
A condition for the use of trip circuit monitoring is that the control voltage for the circuit
breaker is greater than the sum of the minimum voltage drops of both binary inputs
(VSt > 2 ⋅ VBImin). Since at least 19 V are needed for each binary input, the monitor can
only be used with a system control voltage of over 38 V.
Figure 6-64 Principle of trip circuit monitor with two binary inputs (not connected to common
potential)
Monitoring with binary inputs not only detects interruptions in the trip circuit and loss
of control voltage, it also monitors the response of the circuit breaker using the position
of the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts.
Depending on the conditions of the trip contact and the circuit breaker, the binary inputs
are activated (logical condition “H” in Table 6-7), or not activated (logical condition
“L”).
Even for healthy trip circuits the condition that both binary inputs are not actuated (“L”)
is possible during a short transition period (trip contact is closed, but the circuit breaker
has not yet opened.) A continuous state of this condition is only possible when the trip
circuit has been interrupted, a short-circuit exists in the trip circuit, a loss of battery
voltage occurs, or malfunctions occur with the circuit breaker mechanism.
L–
L+
RTC
closed open
UBI1
UBI2
>TripC trip rel.
>TripC brk rel.
USt 7UM61
7UM61
CB TC
Legend:
RTC — Relay Trip Contact
CB — Circuit Breaker
TC — Circuit Breaker Trip Coil
USt — Control Voltage
UBI1 — Input Voltage for 1st Binary Input
UBI2 — Input Voltage for 2nd Binary Input
Note: The above diagram refers to a closed circuit breaker
position
)1R ____
)1R ____
Functions
6-126 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
1) Trip circuit is faulty
The conditions of the two binary inputs are checked periodically. A check takes place
about every 600 ms. If three consecutive conditional checks detect an abnormality (after
1.8 s), an annunciation is reported (see Figure 6-65). This is used to avoid the annunciation
for brief transition periods. When the fault in the trip circuit has been
cleared, the annunciation is automatically reset.
Figure 6-65 Logic diagram for trip circuit monitoring with two binary inputs
Monitoring with two
binary inputs (connected
to common
potential)
If two binary inputs connected to common potential are used, they are connected according
to figure 6-64, i.e. to L+ or once in parallel to the corresponding protection
command relay contact and to the CB auxiliary contact 1.
Figure 6-66 Principle of trip circuit monitor with two binary inputs (connected to common potential)
Table 6-7 Condition table for binary inputs, depending on RTC and CB position
No. Relay Trip
Contact
Circuit
Breaker
CB aux. contact
(52a)
CB aux. contact
(52b)
BI 1 BI2
1 Open Closed Closed Open H L
2 Open Open Open Closed H H
3 1) Closed Closed Closed Open L L
4 Closed Open Open Closed L H
>TripC trip rel. &
>TripC brk rel.
>n
n . .....Number of Condition Checks (= 3)
FAIL: Trip cir.
(Measurement Repetition Occurs every 600 ms)
)_ ____
)_ ____
)_ ____
L–
L+
RTC
closed open
UBI1
UBI2
>TripC trip rel.
>TripC brk rel.
USt 7UM61
7UM61
CB TC
Legend:
Note: The above diagram refers to a closed circuit breaker
position
)1U_ ____
)1U_ ____
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-127
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Depending on the switching status of the command relay and of the circuit breaker,
the binary inputs are activated (logical status „H“ in table 6-8) or not activated (logical
status „L“).
With this solution, it is impossible to distinguish between status 2 („normal operation
with open CB LS“ and „KR triggered with success”. However, these two statuses are
normal statues and thus not critical. Status 4 is only theoretical and indicates a hardware
error. With intact tripping circuits, the status of two not excitated binary inputs
(„L“) is only possible during a short transition phase (command relay contact closed,
but circuit breaker not yet open). This status can only persist in case of an interruption
or a short circuit of the tripping circuit as well as in case of a battery voltage failure or
in case of mechanical breaker failures. For this reason, this status is used as monitoring
criterion.
The conditions of the two binary inputs are checked periodically. A check takes place
about every 600 ms. If three consecutive conditional checks detect an abnormality (after
1.8 s), an annunciation is reported (see Figure 6-65). This is used to avoid the annunciation
for brief transition periods. When the fault in the trip circuit has been
cleared, the annunciation is automatically reset.
Monitoring with
one binary input
The binary input is connected according to figure 6-67 in parallel with the associated
trip contact. The circuit breaker auxiliary contact 52b is connected in series with a
high-ohm resistor R.
The control voltage for the circuit breaker should be about two times the value of the
minimum voltage drop at the binary input (USt > 2 ⋅ VBImin). Since the minimum voltage
to activate a binary input is 19 V, a DC voltage supply of 38 V or higher is required.
Table 6-8 Condition table for binary inputs, depending on RTC and CB position
No. Relay Trip
Contact
Circuit
Breaker
CB aux.
contact
(52a)
CB aux.
contact
(52b)
BI 1 BI2 dyn. status stat. status
1 Open Closed Closed Open H L normal operation with closed CB
2 Open or
closed
Open Open Closed L H normal operation with open CB or
KR has activated with success
3 Closed Closed Closed Open L L Transition/fault Fault
4 Open Closed or
Open
Closed Closed H H Theoretical status: Aux. contact defective,
BI defective, wrong connection
Functions
6-128 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
.
Figure 6-67 Principle of trip circuit monitoring with one binary input
During normal operation, the binary input is activated (logical condition “H”) when the
trip contact is open and the trip circuit is intact, because the monitoring circuit is closed
by either the 52a circuit breaker auxiliary contact (if the circuit breaker is closed) or
through the replacement resistor R by the 52b circuit breaker auxiliary contact. Only
as long as the trip contact is closed, the binary input is short circuited and thereby deactivated
(logical condition “L”).
If the binary input is continuously de-activated during operation, this leads to the conclusion,
there is an interruption in the trip circuit or loss of control voltage.
The trip circuit monitor does not operate during system faults. A momentary closed
tripping contact does not lead to a failure message. If, however, tripping contacts from
other devices operate in parallel with the trip circuit, then the failure annunciation must
be delayed (see also Figure 6-68). The conditions of the binary input are, therefore,
checked 500 times before an annunciation is sent. A condition check takes place
about every 600 ms, so trip circuit monitoring is only activated during an actual malfunction
of the trip circuit (after 300 s). After the malfunction in the trip circuit is cleared,
the failure annunciation is reset automatically.
Figure 6-68 Logic diagram for Trip Circuit Monitoring with one binary input
Figure 6-69 shows the logic diagram for the message that can be generated by the trip
circuit monitor, depending on the control settings and binary inputs.
L–
L+
RTC
closed open
UBI >AKU Kdo.Rel.
USt 7UM61
7UM61
CB TC
Legend:
R — Replacement resistor
Note: The above diagram refers to a closed circuit breaker position
R
)1R ____
(52a) (52b)
Note:
If the lock-out function is used, the trip circuit monitoring with only one binary input
must not be used as the relay remains permanently picked up after a trip command
(more than 300 s).
>TripC trip rel. &
52a Contact
n FAIL: Trip cir.
n . .....Number of Condition Checks (= 500)
>
(Measurement Repetition Occurs every 600 ms)
)_ ____
)_ ____
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-129
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 6-69 Message Logic for the Trip Circuit Monitor
6.19.6 Programming settings for Trip Circuit Monitor
Trip circuit monitoring is only in effect and accessible if address ____ was set to either
__ELQDU\_LQSXWV or to __ELQDU\_LQSXW, and the appropriate number of binary
inputs have been masked for this purpose. Trip circuit monitoring can be turned 21
and 2)) at address _____75,3_&LU__683_ If the masking of the required binary
inputs does not match the selected monitoring type, then a message to this effect is
generated. If the trip circuit monitor is not to be used at all, then address ____ should
be set to 'LVDEOHG. Further settings are not needed. The message of a trip circuit
interruption is delayed by a fixed amount of time. For two binary inputs, the delay is
about 2 seconds, and for one binary input, the delay is about 300 ms. This ensures
that, for the longest possible duration of a trip signal, a false malfunction message will
not be generated.
Monitoring with
one binary input
NOTE: When using only one binary input (BI) for the trip circuit monitor, some mal-
Functions, such as interruption of the trip circuit or loss of battery voltage, can indeed
be detected, but malFunctions with closed trip contacts cannot. Therefore, the measurement
must take place over a period of time that bridges the longest possible duration
of a closed trip contact. This is ensured by the fixed number of measurement
repetitions and the time between the condition checks.
When using only one binary input, a resistor R is inserted into the circuit on the system
side, instead of the missing second binary input. Through appropriate sizing of the resistor
and depending on the system relationship, a lower control voltage can often be
sufficient. The resistor R is inserted into the circuit of the circuit breaker auxiliary contact
(52b), to facilitate the detection of a malfunction when the circuit breaker auxiliary
contact (52a) open and the trip contact has dropped out (see Figure 6-67). This resis-
_____7ULS_&LU__6XS_
TripC ProgFail
TripC OFF
TripC BLOCKED
“1“
_____75,3_&LU_683_
„1“
OR
>Trip C trip rel
&
&
&
SQ&
R
>BLOCK TripC
>TripC brk rel.
FAIL: Trip cir.
TripC ACTIVE
Function
Configured
Configured
)_ ____
)_ ____
)_ ____
)_ ____
)_ ____ )_ ____
)_ ____
)_ ____
2))
21
'LVDEOHG
ZLWK___%LQDU\_,QSXWV
ZLWK___%LQDU\_,QSXW
Functions
6-130 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
tor must be sized such that the circuit breaker trip coil is no longer energized when the
circuit breaker is open (which means 52a is open and 52b is closed). The binary input
should still be picked up when the trip contact is simultaneously opened.
This results in an upper limit for the resistance dimension, Rmax, and a lower limit Rmin,
from which the optimal value of the arithmetic mean should be selected:
In order that the minimum voltage for controlling the binary input is ensured, Rmax is
derived as:
So the circuit breaker trip coil does not remain energized in the above case, Rmin is
derived as:
If the calculation results that Rmax < Rmin, then the calculation must be repeated, with
the next lowest pickup threshold UBI min, and this threshold must be implemented in
the device using plug-in bridges (see Subsection 8.1.3).
For the power consumption of the resistance:
Example:
IBI (HIGH) Constant Current with BI on
UBI min Minimum Control Voltage for BI (=19 V for delivery setting for nominal voltage of 24/
48/60 V;
=88 V for delivery setting for nominal voltage of 110/125/220/250 V)
UST Control Voltage for Trip Circuit
RCBTC DC Resistance of Circuit Breaker Trip Coil
UCBTC (LOW) Maximum Voltage on the Circuit Breaker Trip Coil that does not lead to Tripping
IBI (HIGH) 1.8 mA (from SIPROTEC® 7UM61)
UBI min 19 V for delivery setting for nominal voltage 24/48/60 V (from SIPROTEC®7UM61)
88 V or delivery setting for nominal voltage 110/125/220/250 V) (from SIPROTEC®
7UM61)
UST 110 V (from system / release circuit)
RCBTC 500 Ω (from system / release circuit)
UCBTC (LOW) 2 V (from system / release circuit)
R
Rmax + Rmin
2
= ---------------------------------
Rmax
USt – UBI min
IBI (High)
 ---------------------------------
=  – RCBTC
Rmin RCBTC
USt – UCBTC (LOW)
UCBTC (LOW)
 -------------------------------------------------
=⋅ 
P R I2 ⋅ R
USt
R+RCBTC
 ----------------------------
  2
==⋅ R
Rmax
110 V – 19 V
1.8 mA
 ---------------------------------
=  – 500 Ω =50.1 kΩ
Rmin 500 Ω 110 V – 2 V
2V
 ------------------------------
= ⋅   =27 kΩ
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-131
C53000-G1176-C127-1
The closest standard value of 39 kΩ is selected; the power is:
6.19.6.1 Setting for Trip Circuit Monitor
6.19.6.2 Information
6.19.7 Malfunction responses of the monitoring functions
Depending on the type of malfunction discovered, an annunciation is sent, a restart of
the processor system is initiated, or the device is taken out of service. after three unsuccessful
restart attempts. The live status contact operates to indicate the device is
malfunctioning. Also, the red LED “ERROR” lights up on the front cover, if the internal
auxiliary voltage is present, and the green “RUN” LED goes out. If the internal power
supply fails, then all LEDs are dark. Table 6-9 shows a summary of the monitoring
Functions and the malfunction responses of the relay.
R
Rmax + Rmin
2
=--------------------------------=38.6 kΩ
PR
110 V
39 kΩ + 0.5 kΩ
 ----------------------------------------
  2
= ⋅ 39 kΩ
PR ≥ 0.3 W
8201 TRIP Cir. SUP. ON
OFF
OFF TRIP Circuit Supervision
F# Alarm Comments
6851 >BLOCK TripC >BLOCK Trip circuit supervision
6853 >TripC brk rel. >Trip circuit supervision: breaker relay
6852 >TripC trip rel >Trip circuit supervision: trip relay
6861 TripC OFF Trip circuit supervision OFF
6862 TripC BLOCKED Trip circuit supervision is BLOCKED
6863 TripC ACTIVE Trip circuit supervision is ACTIVE
6864 TripC ProgFail Trip Circuit blk. Bin. input is not set
6865 FAIL: Trip cir. Failure Trip Circuit
Functions
6-132 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Table 6-9 Summary of the device malfunction responses
Monitoring Possible Cause Malfunction Response
Message Output
AC/DC Supply
Voltage Loss
External (aux. Voltage)
Internal (power supply)
Device shutdown All LEDs dark Live status contact
de-energized
Internal Supply
Voltages
Internal (power supply)
Ribbon cable
disconnected
Device shutdown LED “ERROR”
Å(UURU_$_'_FRQY_´
(FNo. 181)
Live status contact
de-energized2)
Battery Internal battery
discharged
Annunciation “)DLO_%DWWHU\”
(FNo. 177)
Hardware
Watchdog
Internal (processor failure) Restart attempt 1) LED “ERROR” Live status contact
de-energized2)
Software
Watchdog
Internal
(program sequence)
Restart attempt 1) LED “ERROR” Live status contact
de-energized2)
ROM Internal (Hardware) Restart attempt 1) LED “ERROR” Live status contact
de-energized2)
RAM Internal (Hardware) Detection during
boot sequence
LED blinks
Live status contact
Detection during de-energized2)
operation:
Restart attempt 1)
LED “ERROR
Parameter
memory
Internal (Hardware) Restart attempt 1) LED „ERROR“ Live status contact
de-energized2)
Sampling frequency
Internal (Hardware) Device shutdown LED „ERROR“ Live status contact
de-energized2)
1 A/5 A
changeover
Wrong plugging of jumper for
1 A/5 A
Device shutdown
Annunciation
LED „ERROR“
ÅError1A/5Awrong´
(FNo. 0192)
Live status contact
de-energized2)
Current
Summation
CT Error) Message „)DLOXUH_Σ ,“
(FNo. 162)
as masked
Current
Symmetry
CT Error Message „)DLO_,_EDODQFH“
(FNo. 163)
as masked
Voltage
Summation
Internal (measured-value
detection)
Message „Fail Σ U Ph-E“
(FNo 165)
as masked
Voltage
Symmetry
VT Error Message „)DLO_9_EDODQFH“
(FNo. 167)
as masked
Voltage Phase
Sequence
External (connections or
power system)
Message „)DLO_3K__6HT__9“
(FNo. 176)
as masked
Current Phase
Sequence
External (connections or
power system)
Message „)DLO_3K__6HT__,“
(FNo. 175)
as masked
Fuse–Failure–
Monitor
External (VTs, fuses, or control
cable)
Message „VT )XVH_)DLOXUH“
(FNo. 6575)
as masked
Trip Circuit
Monitoring
External (open trip coil or
blown fuses)
Message „)DLO__7ULS_FLU_“
(FNo. 6865)
as masked
1) After three unsuccessful restart attempts, the device will go out of service.
2) Protection and control function are blocked, HMI might be still accessible.
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-133
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6.20 External trip commands via binary inputs
6.20.1 Description
Up to four desired signal from external protection or supervision units can be incorporated
into the processing of 7UM61. The signals are coupled as “External signal” via
binary inputs. Like the internal protection and supervision signals, they can be annunciated,
time delayed, transmitted to the trip matrix, and blocked. By means of these
signals it is possible to include external protection commands, e.g. from Buchholz protection
or shaft current supervision, into the processing of annunciations and trip commands
of 7UM61. Furthermore, an interaction of protection Functions of different numerical
machine protection relays of the series 7UM6 can be performed.
The status of the assigned inputs is checked in cyclic intervals. Alteration of the input
status is considered only after two subsequent status checks with equal result. An additional
time delay _____7_'(/$< is available for each of the external trip command
channels.
The logic diagram of one external trip command channel is illustrated in Figure 6-70.
In total, the relay incorporates four such channels, i.e. four times this logic. The illustrated
function numbers are valid for the first external trip command channel.
Figure 6-70 Logic diagram of one external trip command channel
General Up to four desired signals from external protection or supervision units can be included
into the processing of 7UM61. The signals are coupled as “External signals” via binary
inputs. Like the internal protection and supervision signals, they can be annunciated
as “External trip”, time delayed and transmitted to the trip matrix. Like for the protective
functions, the dropout of the direct input trippings is extended by the 70LQ_75,3_&0'
parameterized minimum duration.
The direct inputs are only effective and accessible if they were specified at the addresses
____ (;7__75,3__ to _____(;7__75,3__ = (QDEOHG within the framework
of project configuration. If the functions are not required, the parameter is set to
'LVDEOHG. The addresses ____ (;7(51_75,3__ to _____(;7(51_75,3__ serve
to switch the individual functions 21 or 2)) or to block only the trip command (%ORFN_
UHOD\).
>Ext trip _
FNo. 4526 etc.
FNo. 4532 etc.
Ext 1 BLOCKED
FNo. 4536 etc.
Ext __pick. up.
____ 7_'(/$<
&
>BLOCK Ext 1
FNo. 4523 etc.
70LQ
75,3_&0'
Tripping
matrix
FNo. 4537 etc.
Ext 1 Gen.TRP
Functions
6-134 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6.20.2.1 Parameter list
6.20.2.2 Information list
8601 EXTERN TRIP 1 ON
OFF
OFF External Trip Function 1
8602 T DELAY 0.00..60.00 sec 1.00 sec Ext. Trip 1 Time Delay
OFF
OFF
OFF
FNo Alarm Comments
4523 >BLOCK Ext 1 >Block external trip 1
4526 >Ext trip 1 >Trigger external trip 1
4531 Ext 1 OFF External trip 1 is switched OFF
4532 Ext 1 BLOCKED External trip 1 is BLOCKED
4533 Ext 1 ACTIVE External trip 1 is ACTIVE
4536 Ext 1 pick. up External trip 1: General picked up
4537 Ext 1 Gen.TRP External trip 1: General TRIP
4543 >BLOCK Ext 2 >BLOCK external trip 2
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-135
C53000-G1176-C127-1
FNo Alarm Comments
Functions
6-136 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6.21 Phase rotation reversal
6.21.1 Description of phase rotation reversal
General A phase rotation reversal feature is implemented in the 7UM61 device using binary
inputs
and settings, thus ensuring that all protective and monitoring functions operate
correctly when the phase rotation is reversed.
If an anti-clockwise rotating phase sequence permanently exists, the appropriate setting
should be entered at address ____. (see subsection 6.1.3).
If the phase rotation reverses during operation (e.g. in a pumping power station, the
transition from the generator operation to the pumping operation is realized by changing
the sense of rotation), then a reversal signal at the input masked for this purpose
is sufficient to inform the protective relay of the phase-sequence reversal.
Logic As stated before, the phase rotation is always established at address _____3+$6(_
6(4_. The binary input (FNo. ____) sets the phase rotation for the opposite of the setting
at ____, via the exclusive-OR function (see figure 6-71).
Figure 6-71 Message logic of the phase-sequence reversal
For safety reasons, the device accepts the phase rotation reversal only by a time when
no usable measured quantities exist. The binary input is only inquired if operational
condition 1 is not present. If a reverse command is present for a period of at least
200 ms, the measured quantities of phases L2 and L3 exchanged.
If operational condition 1 is reached before the minimum control time of 200 ms has
expired, the phase rotation reversal does not become effective.
As no phase rotation reversal is possible in operational condition 1, the control signal
could be cancelled in operational condition 1 without a phase rotation. For safety reasons,
the control signal should be permanently present in order to avoid malfunctions
also in case of a device reset (e.g. due to configuration change).
Influence on protective
functions
The swapping of phases directly impacts the calculation of positive and negative sequence
quantities, as well as phase-to-phase voltages via the subtraction of one
phase-to-ground voltage from another. Therefore, this function is vital so that phase
>Reverse Rotation
/__/__/_
/__/__/_
_____3+$6(_6(4_
Rotation L1L2L3
Rotati on L1L3L2
„1“
FNo. 5147
FNo. 5148
FNo. 5145
OR
>
>
OR
Operat. Cond.
FNo. 5002
200 ms
&
&
&
&
OR
&
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-137
C53000-G1176-C127-1
detection messages, fault values, and operating measurement values are not falsified.
As stated before, this function influences the unbalance load protection function, directional
overcurrent protection function, and some of the monitoring Functions (see
Subsection 6.19.3.3) that issue messages if the required and calculated phase rotations
do not match.
The normal phase sequence is set at _____3+$6(_6(4_ (see Subsection 6.1.3). If,
on the system side, phase rotation reversal is performed temporarily, then this is communicated
to the protective device via the binary input ____.
Functions
6-138 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6.22 Protection function logic
The function logic is the heart of the device. It coordinates the sequence of both the
protective and auxiliary functions, processes functional decisions, and processes data
received from the system. In particular, the function logic is responsible for the following:
• Processing Measurement and Detection Logic
• Processing Tripping Logic
6.22.1 Description
6.22.1.1 Pickup logic for the device
General device
pickup
The pickup signals for all protective functions in the device are connected via an “OR”
function, and lead to the general device pickup. General device pickup is initiated by
the first function to pickup, and general device drop out occurs when the last function
drops out. A corresponding message indicating that general device pickup has occured
is reported.
General device pickup is a precondition for a series of internal and external functions
that occur subsequently. The following are among the internal functions controlled by
general device pickup:
• Start of Trip Log: From general device pickup to general device drop out, all fault
messages are entered in the trip log.
• Initialization of Oscillographic Records: The storage and maintenance of oscillographic
values can also be made dependent on the general device pickup.
• Generation of Spontaneous Messages: Certain fault messages are displayed in the
device display as so-called spontaneous messages (see below). These display
messages can also be made dependent on the general device trip.
Spontaneous
messages
Spontaneous messages are fault messages that appear in the display automatically
when general device pickup has occurred. For the 7UM61 relay, these messages include:
• A message indicating the protective function that last picked up.
• A message indicating the protection function that last initiated a trip signal.
• The running time from general device pickup to general device dropout, with time
indicated in ms.
• The running time from general device pickup to initiation of the first trip signal by the
device, with time indicated in ms.
Please note, the overload protection does not have a pickup comparable to the other
protective functions. The general relay pickup time is first started with the trip signal,
and an abnormal occurrence is opened. The dropout of the thermal image of the overload
protection ends the fault message and, thereby, the running time from general relay
pickup to general device dropout.
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-139
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6.22.2 Tripping logic of the device
6.22.2.1 Description
General trip The tripping signals for all protective functions are connected by “OR” and generate
a
message indicating that the device has initiated a trip signal.
This message can be configured to an LED or binary output, just as the individual tripping
messages can.
Terminating the
tripping signal
• If a protective function is set to %ORFN_UHOD\, it is blocked for the activation of the
output relay. However, the remaining protective functions are not concerned.
• A trip command once transmitted is stored. The minimum trip command duration is
started by the same time (set at address _____7PLQ_75,3_&0', see Figure 6-72).
This trip signal duration timer ensures the trip signal is transmitted to the circuit
breaker for a sufficient amount of time, even if the function which issued the trip signal
drops out quickly. The trip signal is only terminated after all protection Functions
drop out AND the minimum trip signal duration expires.
• Finally, it is possible to latch the trip signal until it is manually reset (lockout function).
The reset takes place either by pressing the LED reset key or by activating an
appropriately masked binary input. A precondition, of course, is that the circuit
breaker trip coil – as usual – remains energized at the circuit breaker as long as the
trip signal is present, and that the trip coil current is interrupted by the auxiliary contacts
of the circuit breaker.
Figure 6-72 Terminating the trip signal, example of a protective function
T
S
R
Q
&
Tripping, e.g. I>
S
R
Q
Lockout function
(Output Relay Stored)
Lockout reset
(Using LED–Reset)
%ORFN_UHOD\, e.g. I>
&
Relay triggering
_____70LQ_75,3_&0'
Functions
6-140 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6.22.2.2 Programming settings for tripping logic
Trip signal duration The setting of the minimum trip signal duration at address ____
7PLQ_75,3_&0' was
already discussed in Subsection 6.1.3. This time is valid for all protective Functions
that can initiate trip signals, as well as for trip signals that are initiated using the device
function controller.
6.22.3 Fault display on the LEDs/LCD
6.22.3.1 Description of “No Trip – No Flag” Option
The storage of messages masked to local LEDs, and the maintenance of spontaneous
messages, can be made dependent on whether the device has issued a trip signal. In
this situation, these messages are not issued, if one or more protective functions have
only picked up on a fault, but a trip signal has not been issued yet by the device because
the fault was cleared by another device (for instance, outside of the own protection
range). These messages are then limited to faults in the own protection range.
Figure 6-73 illustrates the creation of the reset command for stored messages. By the
moment of the device dropout, the stationary conditions (fault indication with excitation/
with trip signal; tripping/no tripping) decide whether the new fault remains stored
or is reset.
Figure 6-73 Creation of the reset command for the memory of the LED and LCD messages
6.22.3.2 Programming Settings
Pickup of a new protective function generally turns off any previously set light displays,
so that only the latest fault is displayed at any time. It can be selected whether the
stored LED displays and the spontaneous messages on the display appear upon renewed
pickup, or only after a renewed trip signal is issued. In order to enter the desired
type of display, select the sub-menu 'HYLFH in the 6(77,1*6 menu. The two alternatives
are selected at address _____)OW'LVS_/('_/&'.
210 TMin TRIP CMD 0.01 .. 32.00 sec 0.15 sec Minimum Trip Command Duration
&
_____)OW'LVS_/('_/&'
Relay TRIP
“1“
Trip Signal drop out
Reset LED and LCD messages
7DUJHWV_RQ_HYHU\_38
7DUJHWV_RQ_7ULS_RQO\
7110 FltDisp.LED/LCD Display Targets on every Pickup
Display Targets on TRIP only
Display Targets on
every Pickup
Fault Display on LED / LCD
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-141
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6.22.4 Statistical counters
6.22.4.1 Description
Number of trips The number of trips initiated by the 7UM61 is counted, as long as the position of
the
circuit breaker is monitored via breaker auxiliary contacts and binary inputs.
Switch-off
values
Additionally, the following switch-off values are indicated in the fault messages for
each trip signal:
− the primary currents in all three phases in kA
− the three phase-earth-voltages in kV
− the displacement voltage UE in V secondary
− primary active power P in kW, MW or GW (precisely averaged power)
− primary reactive power Q in kVA, MVA or GVA (precisely averaged power)
− frequency in Hz
Operating hours The operating hours under load are also stored (the current value in at least
one phase
is larger than the limit value set under address ____ %NU&ORVHG_,_0,1). The
counter and memory levels are secured against loss of auxiliary voltage.
6.22.4.2 Setting/Resetting
Setting or resetting of the statistical counters listed above takes place under the menu
item $1181&,$7,21 → 67$7,67,& by overwriting the counter values shown.
Functions
6-142 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6.22.4.3 Information list for the device
1) after the auxiliary voltage is switched on
2) after initialization of the processorsystem via DIGSI® 4
3) after processor reset or renewed downloading of a parameter set
FNo Alarm Comments
3 >Time Synch >Synchronize Internal Real Time Clock
5 >Reset LED >Reset LED
--- >Light on >Back Light on
51 Device OK Device is Operational and Protecting
52 ProtActive At Least 1 Protection Funct. is Active
55 Reset Device Reset Device1)
56 Initial Start Initial Start of Device2)
60 Reset LED Reset LED
67 Resume Resume3)
68 Clock SyncError Clock Synchronization Error
69 DayLightSavTime Daylight Saving Time
110 Event Lost Event lost
113 Flag Lost Flag Lost
125 Chatter ON Chatter ON
140 Error Sum Alarm Error with a summary alarm
160 Alarm Sum Event Alarm Summary Event
181 Error A/D-conv. Error: A/D converter
192 Error1A/5Awrong Error:1A/5Ajumper different from setting
194 Error neutralCT Error: Neutral CT different from MLFB
193 Alarm NO calibr Alarm: NO calibration data available
191 Error Offset Error: Offset
147 Error PwrSupply Error Power Supply
177 Fail Battery Failure: Battery empty
70 Settings Calc. Setting calculation is running
71 Settings Check Settings Check
72 Level-2 change Level-2 change (= via DIGSI® 4 transmitted settings have been changed)
58 UnlockDT Unlock data transmission via BI
25 DataStop Stop data transmission
16 >DataStop >Stop data transmission
--- Test mode Test mode
15 >Test mode >Test mode
--- HWTestMod Hardware Test Mode
--- SynchClock Clock Synchronization
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-143
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6.23 Auxiliary functions
The auxiliary functions of the 7UM61 relay include:
• processing of messages,
• processing of operational measured values,
• storage of fault record data.
6.23.1 Message processing
After the occurrence of a system fault, data regarding the response of the protective
relay and the measured quantities should be saved for future analysis. For this reason
message processing is done in three ways:
• LED Display and Binary Outputs (Output Relays)
• Information via Display Field or Personal Computer
• Information to a Control Center
LED Display and binary
outputs (output
relays)
Important events and conditions are displayed, using LEDs on the front panel of the
relay. The relay also contains output relays for remote signaling. All LEDs and binary
outputs indicating specific messages can be freely configured . The relay is delivered
with a default setting. The default settings and configuration possibilities are described
in detail in Section 5.2.
The output relays and the LEDs can be operated in a latched or unlatched mode (individually
settable for each one).
The latched conditions are protected against loss of the auxiliary voltage. They are reestablished
after restart of the device. However they can be reset as follows:
− On site by pressing the LED key on the relay.
− Remotely using a binary input.
− Using one of the serial interfaces.
− Automatically at the beginning of a new pickup.
Condition messages should not be stored. Also, they cannot be reset until the criterion
to be reported is cleared. This applies to messages from monitoring functions, or similar.
A green LED displays operational readiness of the relay, and cannot be reset. It goes
out if the self-check feature of the microprocessor recognizes an abnormal occurrence,
or if the auxiliary voltage is lost.
When auxiliary voltage is present, but the relay has an internal malfunction, then the
red LED (ERROR) lights up and the processor blocks the relay.
Fault information
display or personal
computer
Events and conditions can be read out on the display on the front cover of the relay.
Using the front PC interface or the rear service interface, for instance, a personal computer
can be connected, to which the information can be sent.
Functions
6-144 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
In the idle condition, as long as no system fault is present, the display field can display
selected operating information (overview of operating measurement values).
In the case of a system fault, information about the system fault appears instead
(spontaneous display messages). After the fault related annunciations have been acknowledged,
the initial display is shown again. Acknowledgement can be performed
by pressing the LED button on the front panel.
The relay is also equipped with several event buffers, for operational messages, circuit
breaker statistics, etc., which are protected against loss of the auxiliary voltage by a
buffer battery. These messages can be retrieved, at any time, using the operating keypad
in the display field, or transferred to a personal computer, using the serial operating
interface. Readout of messages during operation is described in detail in Subsection
7.1.1.
After a short-circuit fault on the system, for example, important information about the
progression of the fault can be retrieved, such as the pickup of a protective element or
the initiation of a trip signal. The time the initial occurrence of the short-circuit fault occurred
is accurately provided via the system clock. Time progression of the short-circuit
fault is reported based on the moment of pickup, so that the duration, until the trip
signal is issued and interrupted, is available. The time resolution used for reporting is
1 ms.
With a personal computer and the protection data processing program DIGSI® 4,
event information can also be retrieved, with the comfort of visualization on the screen
and menu-driven processing. The data can be documented on a connected printer, or
stored and evaluated at another location, if desired.
The protective relay stores the messages from the last eight system faults. Upon the
occurrence of a ninth system fault, the oldest event is erased from the abnormal occurrence
memory.
A system fault begins with the recognition of the fault by pickup of the protective function,
and ends with the dropout of the last fault. So several unsuccessful interruption
cycles are also stored in combination. Therefore, a system fault may include several
abnormal occurrences.
Information to a
control center
Stored information can also be transferred to a central control system (SCADA), using
the system interface. The transfer can take place using various transfer protocols.
6.23.2 Measurements
Display of
measured values
A series of measured values and the values derived from them are constantly available
for call up on site, or for data transfer (See table 6-10, as well as the following list).
A precondition for correctly displaying the primary and percentage values is complete
and correct entry of the nominal values for the voltage transformers, current transformers,
and protected equipment, in accordance with Subsections 6.1.3 and 6.1.6.
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-145
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Table 6-10 Formulas of conversion between secondary, primary and per cent measured values
Measured
Values
Secondary
Primary %
IL1, IL2, IL3,
3I0, I1, I2
Isec.
IEE IEE sec.
UL1, UL2, UL3,
U0
U1, U2
UL-E sec.
UL1-L2, UL2-L3,
UL3-L1
UPh-Ph sec.
UE UE sec.
P, Q, S Psec
Qsec
Ssec
Angle PHI ϕ in °el ϕ in °el ϕ in °el
Power Factor
cos ϕ cos ϕ cos ϕ · 100 in %
Frequency f in Hz f in Hz
U/f
R, X Rsec
Xsec
no display of the per cent measured values
UE3.H UE3.H,sec
in V
CT PRIMARY
CT SECONDARY
= ---------------------------------------------------- ⋅ Isec
Iprim.
I PRIMARY OP.
------------------------------------------ ⋅ 100
FACTOR IEE ⋅ IEE sek
IEE prim.
I PRIMARY OP.
------------------------------------------ ⋅ 100
Unom PRIMARY
UnomSECONDARY
----------------------------------------------------------- ⋅ UL-E sec
Uprim.
U PRIMARY OP. ⁄( 3)
------------------------------------------------------------- ⋅ 100
Unom PRIMARY
UnomSECONDARY
= ----------------------------------------------------------- ⋅ UPh-Ph sec
Uprim.
U PRIMARY OP.
= -------------------------------------------- ⋅ 100
FACTOR UE ⋅ UE sec
UE prim.
------------------------------------------------------------- ⋅ 100
Unom PRIMARY
UnomSECONDARY
----------------------------------------------------- CT PRIMARY
CT PRIMARY
⋅ ------------------------------------⋅ Psec
Powerprim. ⋅ 100
3⋅ U PRIMARY OP.⋅ I PRIMARY OP.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
f in Hz
fNenn
---------------- ⋅ 100
U
f
----
UN
fN
-------
------- Unom PRIMARY
U PRIMARY OP.
⋅ -----------------------------------
U
f
----
UN
fN
-------
------- Unom PRIMARY
U PRIMARY OP.
⋅ ------------------------------------⋅ 100
Unom PRIMARY
UnomSECONDARY
------------------------------------------
CT PRIMARY
CT PRIMARY
-----------------------------
------------------------------------------- ⋅ Rsek
FACTOR UE ⋅ UE3.H,sec
UE3.H,prim
------------------------------------------------------------- ⋅ 100
Functions
6-146 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
The displacement voltage is either measured directly or calculated from the phase-toground
voltages:
In addition, the following may be available:
Minimum and maximum
values1)
− Minimum and maximum values for the positive-sequence components I1 and U1;
the active power P, reactive power Q, in primary values, and of the 3rd harmonic
content in the displacement voltage, in secondary values. Included are the date and
time they were last updated.
Energy count
values1)
− Wp, Wq, count values of the active and reactive energy in Kilo-, Mega- or Gigawatt
hours primary or in kVARh, MVARh or GVARh primary, separately according to the
input (+) and output (–), or capacitive and inductive.
Thermal measured
values
− Θ /Θ off overload protection measured values of the stator winding depending on the
phase, in % of the tripping overtemperature,
− Igeg th., rotor overtemperature due to the negative phase-sequence component of
the current, % of the tripping overtemperature,
− U/f th., overtemperature caused by an overexcitation, in % of the tripping overtemperature,
− coolant temperature
The calculation of the operational measured values is also executed in case of an existing
fault. The values are updated in a time grid ≥ 0,3 s and ≤ 1 s.
The minimum/maximum values are indicated with the time (date and time of the last
update). The minimum/maximum values can be reset via binary inputs or, in the delivery
status of the device, also via the F4 function key.
Transfer of
measured values
Measured values can be retrieved by SCADA, or through DIGSI® 4.
Setting Title Address Setting Title Address
8QRP_35,0$5< 202 Uph / Udelta 206
8QRP6(&21'$5< 203 FACTOR IEE 208
&7_35,0$5< 204 FACTOR UE 218
&7_6(&21'$5< 205 U PRIMARY OP. 1101
I PRIMARY OP. 1102
UE
3⋅ U0
3
= -------------- with 3U0 = (UL1 + UL2 + UL3)
1.) only in version 7UM61**–*****–3***
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-147
C53000-G1176-C127-1
The 7UM61Multifunction Machine Protection is equipped with a fault memory scanning
either the instantaneous values or the r.m.s. values of various measured quantities
to store them in a circulating buffer. The instantaneous values of the measured
quantities
iL1, iL2, iL3, iEE and uL1, uL2, uL3, uE or 3 ·u0
are scanned at intervals of 1.25 ms for 50 Hz (1.04 ms for 60 Hz) and stored in a revolving
buffer (16 samples per cycle). For a fault, the data are stored for an adjustable
period of time, but not more than 5 seconds.
The r.m.s. values of the measured quantities
I1, I2, IEE, U1, Uen, P, Q, ϕ , f–fN can be stored in a circulating buffer, in a grid of 1
measured value per period. In case of a fault, the data is stored for a selectable time
span of maximally more than 80 seconds.
Up to 8 fault records can be recorded in this buffer. The memory is automatically updated
with every new fault, so no acknowledgment for previously recorded faults is required.
Waveform capture can also be started with protection pickup, via binary input,
via PC- interface, or SCADA.
The data can be retrieved via the serial interfaces by means of a personal computer
and evaluated with the protection data processing program DIGSI® 4 and the graphic
analysis software DIGRA® 4. The latter graphically represents the data recorded during
the system fault and calculates additional information such as the impedance or
RMS values from the measured values. A selection may be made as to whether the
currents and voltages are represented as primary or secondary values. Binary signal
traces (marks) of particular events e.g. “fault detection”, “tripping” are also represented.
If the device has a serial system interface, the disturbance recording data can be
passed on to a central device via this interface. The evaluation of the data is done by
applicable programs in the central device. Currents and voltages are referred to their
maximum values, scaled to their rated values and prepared for graphic representation.
In addition, internal events are recorded as binary traces (marks), e.g. “fault detection”,
“tripping”.
In the event of transfer to a central device, the request for data transfer can be executed
automatically and can be selected to take place after each fault detection by the
protection, or only after a trip.
If configured in SCADA, data are transferred automatically to the SCADA computer.
6.23.4 Programming Settings
Waveform Capture Waveform capture of faults is executed only when Address 0104_26&__)
$8/7_5(&_
is set for 0HDQ_YDOXHV or 506_9DOXHV. Other settings pertaining to waveform capture
are found under the 26&_)$8/7_5(&_ sub-menu of the 6(77,1*6 menu.
The trigger for an oscillographic record and the criterion to save the record are determined
with the setting of Address ____ :$9()25075,**(5. With the setting 6DYH_
Z__3LFNXS, the trigger and the criterion for saving are the same – the pickup of a
protective element. Another option for Address ____ is 6WDUW_Z__75,3. A trip command
issued by the device is both the trigger and the criterion to save the record with
Functions
6-148 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
this setting. The final — and more commonly used — option for Address ____ is 6DYH_
Z__75,3. The trigger under this setting is the pickup of a protective element (first element
to pick up) and saving of the waveforms occurs only if the device issues a trip
command. Each setting for Address ____ has specific advantages. The choice depends
primarily on the expected duration of faults, the time period of a complete fault
duration that is of most interest (e.g. inception or clearing), and the frequency of waveform
capturing that is to be expected.
There are two options available for the coverage of oscillographic recording. The selection
is made under Address ____ :$9()250_'$7$ and is based on the user’s
preference for recording events that occur while automatic reclosing is performed by
the device. With the setting )DXOW_HYHQW_ waveform capturing occurs each time the
recording trigger and save criterion are established. If automatic reclosing in the device
is employed, the second option 3RZ_6\V_)OW_ can be selected if desired. With
this setting, the entire course of a fault - from inception, through reclosing, to clearing
- is captured. This option provides detailed data for analysis of the entire fault history;
however, the option also requires considerable memory for recording during dead
times.
An oscillographic record includes data recorded prior to the time of trigger, and data
after the dropout of the recording criterion. The user determines the length of pre-trigger
time and post-dropout time to be included in the fault record with the settings in
Address ____ 35(__75,*__7,0( and Address ____ 3267_5(&__7,0(. The settings
depend on Address ____ and the information desired. For example, consider the
trigger being a pickup of a protective element and the save criterion being a trip. The
pre-trigger time is set based on the amount of pre-fault information that is desired. The
post-dropout time is set based on the amount of information desired after clearing (e.g.
checking for restrikes).
The maximum length of time of a record is entered in Address ____ 0$;__/(1*7+.
The largest value here is 5 seconds for fault recording of instantaneous values,
80 seconds for recording of r.m.s. values (cf. address 0104). A total of 8 records can
be saved. However the total length of time of all fault records in the buffer may not exceed
5 seconds (80 seconds). Once the capacity of the buffer is exceeded the oldest
fault is deleted, whereas the new fault is saved in the buffer.
An oscillographic record can be triggered and saved by a change in status of a binary
input or via the operating interface connected to a PC. The trigger is dynamic. The
length of a record for these special triggers is set in Address ____ %LQ,Q_&$37__
7,0( (upper bound is Address ____). Pre-trigger and post-dropout settings in Addresses
____ and ____ do not apply. If Address ____ is set for “∞,” then the length
of the record equals the time that the binary input is activated (static), or the 0$;__
/(1*7+_ setting in Address ____, whichever is shorter.
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-149
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6.23.4.1 Settings for oscillographic fault recording
6.23.4.2 Fault recording information list
401 WAVEFORMTRIGGER Save with Pickup
Save with TRIP
Start with TRIP
Save with Pickup Waveform Capture
402 WAVEFORM DATA Fault event
Power System fault
Fault event Scope of Waveform Data
403 MAX. LENGTH 0.30..5.00 sec 1.00 sec Max. length of a Waveform Capture
Record
404 PRE. TRIG. TIME 0.05..1.30 sec 0.10 sec Captured Waveform Prior to Trigger
405 POST REC. TIME 0.05..0.50 sec 0.10 sec Captured Waveform after Event
406 BinIn CAPT.TIME 0.10..5.00 sec 0.50 sec Capture Time via Binary Input
FNo Alarm Comments
4 >Trig.Wave.Cap. >Trigger Waveform Capture
203 Wave. deleted Waveform data deleted
--- FltRecSta Fault Recording Start
Functions
6-150 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6.24 Breaker control
General In addition to the protective functions described thus far, a control command process
is integrated in the SIPROTEC® 7UM61 to coordinate the operation of circuit breakers
and other equipment in the power system. Control commands can originate from four
command sources:
− Local operation using the keypad on the local user interface of the device
− Local or remote operation using DIGSI® 4
− Remote operation using the SCADA Interface (via IEC, Profibus)
− Automatic functions (e.g., using a binary input)
The device supports the operation of circuit breakers/switchgear. The number of
switchgear devices to be controlled is, basically, limited by the number of binary inputs
and outputs present. High security against inadvertent device operations can be ensured
if interlocking checks are enabled. A standard set of optional interlocking checks
is provided for each command issued to circuit breakers/switchgear.
Operation using the
keypad on the local
user interface
Control commands can be initiated using the keypad on the local user interface of the
relay (see also Section 7.3 - System Control). Using the navigation keys , , ,
, the &21752/ menu can be accessed and the circuit breaker/switchgear to be operated
can be selected. After entering a password, a new window is displayed in which
multiple control actions (close, open, cancel) are available and can be selected using
the and keys. Next a security check takes place. After the security check is
completed, the key must be pressed again to carry out the command. If the
key is not pressed within one minute, the selection is cancelled. Cancellation via the
key is possible at any time before the control command is issued.
If the attempted command fails, because an interlocking condition is not met, then an
error message appears in the display. The message indicates why the control command
was not accepted (see also Subsection 7.3.7). This message must be acknowledged
with before any further control commands can be issued.
Operation using
DIGSI® 4
The procedure for issuing control commands using the DIGSI® 4 program is described
in Section 7.3 (Control of Switchgear).
Operation using the
SCADA Interface
Commands can be issued remotely via the SCADA interface as well. Please check
MLFB order number to ensure that your individual relay has a SCADA interface module
that supports this. Please refer to specific protocol documents for a complete list
of supported commands (see Section 5.6)
6.24.1 Types of commands
Two (2) types of commands can be processed within the device:
− Control commands
− Internal / pseudo commands
ENTER ENTER
ESC
ENTER
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-151
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Control commands Control commands operate (OPEN/CLOSE) binary outputs. Examples are:
− Commands (e.g. operation of circuit breakers, etc.)
− Step Commands (e.g. raising and lowering transformer LTCs)
− Set-point Commands with configurable time settings (Petersen coils)
Internal / pseudo
commands
These commands do not directly operate binary outputs. They serve to initiate internal
functions, simulate changes of state, or to acknowledge changes of state.
− Marking/Tagging commands are used to manually overwrite or set status functions
normally controlled by binary inputs.
− Additionally, Tagging commands are issued to establish internal settings, such as
switching authority (remote vs. local), parameter set changeover, data transmission
block to the SCADA interface, and measured value set-points.
− Acknowledgment and resetting commands for setting and resetting internal buffers.
− Status Information commands:
− Controlling activation of binary input status
− Binary Output Blocking
6.24.2 Steps in the command sequence
Safety mechanisms in the command sequence ensure that a command can only be
released after a thorough check of preset criteria has been successfully concluded.
Standard Interlocking checks are provided for each individual control command. Additionally,
user-defined interlocking conditions can be programmed separately for
each command. The actual execution of the command is also monitored afterwards.
The entire sequence of a command is described briefly in the following:
Check sequence • Command Entry (e.g. using the keypad on the local user interface of the
device)
− Check Password → Access Rights
− Check Switching Mode (interlocking activated/deactivated) → Selection of Deactivated
Interlocking Recognition
• User configurable Interlocking checks that can be selected for each command
− Switching Authority (local, remote)
− Device Position (scheduled vs. actual comparison)
− Zone Controlled/Field Interlocking/ (logic using CFC)
− System Interlocking (centrally, using SCADA system or substation controller)
− Double Operation (interlocking against parallel switching operation)
− Protection Blocking (blocking of switching operations by protective functions)
• Fixed Command Checks
− Internal process time (software watch dog which checks the time for processing
the control action between initiation of the control and final close of the relay contact.
After 1 second the control action will be aborted).
Functions
6-152 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
− Setting Modification in Process (if setting modification is in process, commands
are denied or delayed)
− Equipment not Present at Output (If a circuit breaker or other operable equipment
is not configured to a binary output, then the command is denied)
− Output Block (if an output block has been programmed for the circuit breaker,
and is active at the moment the command is processed, then the command is
denied)
− Component Hardware Malfunction
− Command in Progress (only one command can be processed at a time for one
circuit breaker or switch)
− 1-of-n-check (for schemes with multiple assignments, such as common ground,
whether a command has already been initiated for the affected output relay is
checked).
Monitoring the
command execution
− Interruption of a Command because of a Cancel Command
− Running Time Monitor (feedback message monitoring time)
6.24.3 Interlocking
Figure 6-74 DIGSI® 4 Dialogue Box for Object Properties – for Setting the Interlocking
Conditions.
The interlocking checks are divided into:
• System Interlocking (checked by a central control system such as SCADA or substation
controller)
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-153
C53000-G1176-C127-1
• Zone Controlled/Bay Interlocking (checked in the device)
System interlocking relies on the system data base in the substation or central control
system. Circuit breakers (or other equipment) that require system interlocking in a
central control system (Substation Controller) must be configured in their specific commands
object properties box for the specific control device. Interlocking conditions can
be selected.
Zone Controlled/Bay Interlocking relies on the status of the circuit breaker and other
switches that are connected to the relay. The extent of the interlocking checks is determined
by the configuration of the relay.
For all commands, operation with interlocking (normal mode) or without interlocking
(test mode) can be selected:
− for Local commands, by reprogramming the settings (using the local user interface)
with password check,
− for automatic commands, via command processing by CFC,
− for local / remote commands, using an additional interlocking disable command, via
Profibus. (Other Protocols may support these feature in the future).
6.24.3.1 Interlocked/non-interlocked switching
The command checks that can be selected for the 7UM61 relay are also referred to
as “standard interlocking”. These checks can be activated (interlocked) or deactivated
(non interlocked).
Deactivated interlock switching means the configured interlocking conditions are not
checked in the relay.
Interlocked switching means that all configured interlocking conditions are checked
within the command processing.
Interlocking conditions (e.g. device Position Check, Blocked by Protection etc.) for
each control device are individually selectable in the Command Output-object properties
box.
Internal control actions are always executed regardless of any interlocking.
Standard interlocking
defaults
The following is a list of Standard Interlocking Conditions that can be selected for each
controllable device. All of these are enabled as a default.
• System Interlocking: Substation: checked by a central control system such as SCADA
or substation controller
• Zone Controlled/Bay Interlocking: All devices controlled by this relay can be interlocked
by the CFC logic.
• Blocked by protection: A CLOSE-command is rejected as soon as one of the protective
elements in the relay picks up. The OPEN-command, in contrast, can always
be executed. Please be aware, activation of thermal overload protection elements
can create and maintain a fault condition status, and can therefore block CLOSE
commands.Double Operation Block: parallel switching operations are interlocked
against one another; while one command is processed, a second cannot be carried
out.
• Device Status Check (scheduled = actual): the switching command is rejected, and
an error message is displayed, if the circuit breaker is already in the scheduled (desired)
position. (If this check is enabled, then it works whether interlocking, e.g.
Functions
6-154 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
zone controlled, is activated or deactivated.) This condition is checked in both interlocked
and non-interlocked status modes.
• Switch Authority LOCAL: When this interlocking check is enabled in the Object
Properties dialog box, the status of Switching authority is checked prior to issuing a
control command. If this particular setting is selected, a control command from the
user interface of the device is only allowed if switching authority is set to LOCAL.
• Switch Authority DIGSI: Switching commands can be issued locally or remotely via
DIGSI. As part of the safety features, the device will check the DIGSI configuration
file in regard to the virtual device number to ensure that the correct configuration file
is used. DIGSI must have the same virtual device number. It is important that one
file can not be reused with multiple relays. But it is possible to copy the file and use
the new file with another relay.
• Switch Authority REMOTE: When this interlocking check is enabled in the Object
Properties dialog box, the status of Switching authority is checked prior to issuing a
control command. If this particular setting is selected a control command from a remote
DIGSI connection or via the SCADA interface is only allowed if switching authority
is set to REMOTE.
An overview for processing the interlocking conditions in the relay is shown by Figure
6-75.
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-155
C53000-G1176-C127-1
.
Figure 6-75 Standard Interlocking Arrangements

Control Logic using
CFC
For Zone Controlled (field interlocking), control logic can be developed, using the
CFC.
Switching
Authority
Switching authority configures the relay to perform Local/Remote Supervisory functions.
Note, that only one source can have authority at a time. The following switching
authority ranges are defined in the following priority sequence:
− LOCAL (commands are issued from the relay keyboard)
− DIGSI® 4
− REMOTE (commands are issued from SCADA)
&
OR
OR
&
Remote
&
DIGSI
&
&
&
&
OR
Device with Source
Switching Authority
Protection Blocking
Non-Interlocked
Interlocked
Command
SCHEDULED=ACT.y/n
System Interlock. y/n
Field Interlocking y/n
Protection Blocking y/n
Double Oper. Block y/n
SW. Auth. LOCA> y/n
Sw. Auth. REMOTEy/n
LOCAL
DIGSI
AUTO
Switching Authority
Switching Mode
Switching Mode
52 Close
52 Open
feedback Indication
On/Off
Switching Authority Switching Mode
Event
Condition
of Command =
SCHEDULED=ACT .y/n
&
1) Source REMOTE also includes SAS. Command using substation controller.
REMOTE Command using remote source such as SCADA through controller to device.
(Local/Remote)
DIGSI
Local
OR
SAS REMOTE1),
DIGSI
Local
Remote
Output
to Relay
Local
Remote
On/Off
Functions
6-156 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
The switching authority condition /2&$/ allows commands from the user interface of
the relay, but not remote or DIGSI commands.
The selection between local and remote is made using the local user interface. A password
is required, to make this selection.
The switching authority condition ',*6, allows commands to be initiated using
DIGSI® 4. Commands are allowed for both a remote and a local DIGSI® 4 connection.
Configuration Programming:
1. Specific Device (e.g., switching device): Switching authority LOCAL (check for
commands initiated Locally via keypad):
y/n
2. Specific Device (e.g., switching device): Switching authority REMOTE (check for
SAS, REMOTE, or DIGSI commands:
y/n
In detail, the following interlocking logic is derived when using default configuration
settings:
*1) By-passes Interlock if Configuration for: “switching authority LOCAL (check for Local status): is not
marked.
*2) By-passes Interlock if Configuration for: “switch authority REMOTE (check for CLOSE, REMOTE, or
DIGSI status): is not marked
SC = source of command
SC = AUTO: Commands that are initiated internally (command processing in the CFC)
are not subject to switching authority and are therefore always allowed.
Switching mode There are three modes:
− Local
− Remote
− Auto
The switching mode determines whether selected interlocking conditions will be activated
or deactivated at the time of the switching operation.
The following switching modes are defined:
− Local commands (SC = LOCAL)
− interlocked, or
− non-interlocked switching.
Current Switching
Authority
Status
Switching
Authority
DIGSI
Command issued
Locally
Command issued from
SAS or SCADA
Command issued from
DIGSI
LOCAL Not
checked
Allowed Interlocked - switching
authority LOCAL*2
Interlocked - DIGSI not
checked
LOCAL checked Allowed Interlocked - switching
authority LOCAL*2
Interlocked - switching
authority LOCAL*2
REMOTE Not
checked
Interlocked - switching
authority REMOTE*1
Allowed Interlocked - DIGSI not
checked
REMOTE checked Interlocked - switching
authority DIGSI*1
Interlocked -switching
authority DIGSI*2
Allowed
Functions
7UM61 Manual 6-157
C53000-G1176-C127-1
For devices without key-switches, the switching mode can be changed between “interlocked”
and “non-interlocked” using the front PC port, after password entry.
− Remote or DIGSI® 4 commands (SC = SAS, REMOTE, or DIGSI)
− interlocked, or
− non-interlocked switching. Here, deactivation of interlocking is accomplished via
a separate command. The position of the key-switch is irrelevant.
− Auto: For commands from CFC (SC = AUTO), the notes in the CFC handbook
should be referred to (e.g. component: BOOL to command)
Zone Controlled/
Field Interlocking
Zone Controlled (field interlocking) includes the verification that predetermined switchgear
position conditions are satisfied to prevent switching errors as well as verification
of the state of other mechanical interlocking such as High Voltage compartment doors
etc.
Interlocking conditions can be programmed separately, for each switching device, for
device control CLOSE and/or OPEN. Processing of the status of the release condition
for an operation switching device can be based on information acquired:
− directly, using a single point or double point indication (binary inputs), key-switch,
or internal indication (marking), or
− with logic using CFC.
When a switching command is initiated, the actual status of all relevant switching devices
is scanned cyclically.
Substation Controller
(System Interlocking)
Substation Controller (System interlocking) involves switchgear conditions of other
bays evaluated by a central control system. This functionality will be available with the
release of SW version 4.2.
Double Operation Parallel switching operations are interlocked. When this function is enabled
only one
control can be issued at a time. All control objects are checked prior to issuing a command.
Blocked by Protection
When configured, the pickup of Protective elements blocks switching operations, configurable
separately for both closing and tripping commands. Operations in progress
will also be aborted by the pickup of a protective element.
Device Position
(Scheduled = Actual)
For switching commands, a check takes place whether the selected switching device
is already in the scheduled/desired position (Open/Closed; scheduled/actual comparison).
This means, if a circuit breaker is already in the CLOSED position and an attempt
is made to issue a closing command, the command will be refused, with the operating
message “scheduled condition equals actual condition”. If the circuit breaker/
switchgear device is in the intermediate position, then this check is not performed.
In
Functions
6-158 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
7UM61 Manual 7-1
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Control During Operation 7

This chapter describes interaction possibilities with the SIPROTEC® 7UM61 device
during operation. The information that can be obtained and the procedure for retrieving
the data are discussed. Methods of influencing the device functions during operation
and controlling the system using the device are covered.
Detailed knowledge about the device functions is not required at this point. However,
the configuration of the device covered in Chapter 5 — especially configuration of the
input and output functions — is assumed to have already taken place.
Please note that the examples shown are general and may differ in wording or details
from the device at hand. Also, depending on the model variant, some of the functions
discussed below may not be available.
7.1 Read-out of Information 7-2
7.2 Control of Device Functions 7-24
7.3 Control of Switchgear 7-34
Control During Operation
7-2 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
7.1 Read-out of Information
General The device provides a great deal of information that can be obtained on-site or from
data transfer:
• Messages,
• Operating measurement and metered values,
• Waveform data in oscillographic fault records.
This information is individually discussed below. Methods for viewing, retrieving, acknowledging,
and storing this information on a PC are also explained.
7.1.1 Messages
7.1.1.1 Output of Messages
Messages provide operating information about the power system, the device, and the
measurements. Other messages give an overview of important events such a network
fault and the operation of device functions. The information provided is useful in
checking overall operation of the device during testing and commissioning.
Password entry is not required to read messages.
The messages generated in the device can be presented in various ways:
• Display using light-emitting diodes (LEDs) on the front of the device,
• Operation of output relays connected to external signalling equipment,
• Display in the LCD on the front of the device,
• Display on the screen of a PC running the DIGSI® 4 program, connected to the operating
or service interface of the device,
• Transfer to a master station using one of the serial system interfaces (if available).
Light-Emitting
Diodes
The green light-emitting diode with the label “RUN” lights continuously during normal
operation.
The red LED with the label “ERROR” indicates that the processor system has recognized
an internal problem. If this LED lights up, then the device is not operational.
Chapter 9 discusses steps to take if a failure occurs in the device.
The other LEDs on the front of the device display the messages in accordance with
the configuration, as discussed in Chapter 5. The description of each LED illumination
should then be indicated on the label strips.
If the messages for the LEDs are latched, then the memory can be reset with the LED
key . This key simultaneously serves as a functional check for all of the LEDs except
the “RUN” and “ERROR” LEDs. While the key is pressed, all of these LEDs must
light.
LED
7UM61 Manual 7-3
C53000-G1176-C127-1
LEDs that display a condition should light for as long as the condition is maintained.
The LED action is therefore generally not latched. Of course, these LEDs are also included
in the function check with the LED key .
Output Relays Indications can be configured to output relays for external indication (e.g.
annunciator,
sequence-of-events recorder, RTU, etc), and operate like LEDs. See also Chapter 5
for details.
Front Panel To retrieve messages using the front panel:
First press the 0(18 key . The 0$,1_0(18 appears. The first menu item _$QQXQ_
FLDWLRQ) is marked.
All menus and message lists begin with a title. The number in the upper right corner
of the display indicates presently selected menu entry or message, and, behind the
slash, the total number of menu entries or messages (see Figure 7-1, each first line).
Press the key to go to the $1181&,$7,21 sub-menu, as shown in Figure 7-1. In
this menu the messages can be reached by entering the associated selection number,
or by selecting the desired entry using the and keys and moving further with the
key. This procedure is described in more detail below.
Figure 7-1 Selection of messages on the operator control panel
PC–Interfaces A personal computer running the DIGSI® 4 program can be connected to the
operating
interface on the front of the device to retrieve the messages. A PC can also be connected
to the service interface on the back of the device. This connection typically applies
when the PC is hard-wired with several devices, using a data bus (station computer)
or modem.
Details about the operation of DIGSI® 4 are contained in the “DIGSI® 4 Device Operation”
handbook, order no. E50417-H1176-C097.
LED
MENU
0$,1_0(18____________
_____________________
_0HDVXUHPHQW____²!___ $1181&,$7,21___________
_____________________
!(YHQW_/RJ_______²!___
_7ULS_/RJ________²!___
7-4 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 7-2 Function selection screen in DIGSI® 4
If the DIGSI® 4 2QOLQH directory is opened with a double-click, the operating functions
for the device appear in the navigation window (Figure 7-2). By double clicking
on $QQXQFLDWLRQ, the tree structure expands and shows the individual message
groups. The groups are described in detail below.
System Interface The system interface (if available) is generally hardwired and transfers all
device information
to a master station via data cable, optical fibre cable, or modem.
Division of
Messages
The messages are categorized as follows:
• Operating messages; these are message that can occur during the operation of the
device. They include information about the status of device functions, measurement
data, system data, and similar information.
• Fault messages; these are message from the last eight network faults that were
processed by the device.
• Switching statistics; these values include a counter for the trip commands initiated
by the device, accumulated currents interrupted by the individual poles of the circuit
breaker.
• Erasing and setting the messages named above.
A complete list of all message and output functions that can be generated by the device,
with the associated information number (FNo), can be found in Section A.5 of the
Appendix. The lists also indicate where each message can be sent. The lists are
based on a SIPROTEC® 4 device with the maximum complement of functions. If functions
are not present in the specific version of the device, or if they are set as “'LVD_
EOHG” in device configuration, then the associated messages cannot appear.
7UM61 Manual 7-5
C53000-G1176-C127-1
7.1.1.2 Operating Messages (Event Log)
Operating messages contain information that the device generates during operation
and about the operation. Up to 200 operating messages are stored in chronological
order in the device. New messages are added at the end of the list. If the memory has
been exceeded, then the oldest message is overwritten for each new message.
Faults in the power system are indicated with “1HWZRUN_)DXOW” and the present fault
number. The fault messages (7ULS_/RJ) contain details about the history of faults.
This topic is discussed in Sub-section 7.1.1.3.
All predefined operating messages are listed and explained in a table in the Appendix.
In a specific case, of course, only the appropriate messages appear in the display. The
appendix also shows whether the message is only issued as “ON” (to indicate an
event), or as “ON” and “OFF” (to designate the beginning and end of a condition).
From the
Device Front
With the device ready for operation, first press the key. The 0$,1_0(18 appears.
The first menu item ($QQXQFLDWLRQ) is marked.
Press the key to enter the $1181&,$7,21 menu (see Figure 7-1).
Here, select the menu item (YHQW_/RJ (already marked). The (9(17_/2* table appears.
If no messages are present, then the text “OLVW_LV_HPSW\” appears. Otherwise important
events and changes in conditions are listed in chronological order (see Figure
7-3 as an example). Upon entering the menu, the newest (last) message is displayed
at first. The applicable date and time are noted in the display line directly above the
message. If the memory for the operating messages is not full, then the end of the entries
is indicated by “(1'”.
Figure 7-3 Example of an operating message in the operating field of the device
The [ and keys can be used to move up and down in the Event Log.
Press the key to return to the 0$,1_0(18.
From PC with
DIGSI® 4
Click on $QQXQFLDWLRQ. The options appear in the data window (Figure 7-4).
Double click on the desired message group in the data window, in this case (YHQW_
/RJ. A date and time appear in the data window as shown in Figure 7-4.
Double click on the date and time and the contents of the message group are displayed
in another window.
MENU
_(_9_(_1_7___/_2_*________________________
_____________________
5HVHW_/('__________21_
MENU
:
7-6 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 7-4 Selection of operational messages in DIGSI® 4
Figure 7-5 Example of operational messages in DIGSI® 4
7.1.1.3 Fault Messages (Trip Log)
Spontaneous Display
Messages
The spontaneous display messages appear automatically in the display, after a general
pick-up of the device. The most important data about a fault can be viewed on the
device front in the sequence shown in Figure 7-6.
Figure 7-6 Display of spontaneous messages in the display – example
The spontaneous display messages can be acknowledged by pressing the key.
After acknowledgment, the default display is shown.
Protective Function that picked up first;
Protective Function that dropped out last;
Running time from general pickup to dropout;
Running time from general pickup to the first trip command
8_!_SLFNHG_XS
6_(_)_75,3
38_7LPH______PV___
75,3_7LPH____PV
LED
7UM61 Manual 7-7
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Retrieved
messages
The messages for the last eight network faults can be retrieved. The definition of a network
fault is such that the time period from fault detection up to final clearing of the
system fault is considered to be one network fault.
Altogether up to 600 indications can be stored. Oldest data are erased for newest data
when the buffer is full.
All available indications are displayed and explained in the Appendix. In a specific
case, of course, only the applicable messages appear on the display.
From the
Device Front
With a device ready for operation, first press the key. The 0$,1_0(18 appears.
The first menu item ($QQXQFLDWLRQ) is marked.
Press the key to enter the $1181&,$7,21 sub-menu (see Figure 7-1).
Using the key, select the sub-menu item 7ULS_/RJ and move to the Trip Log submenu
using the key. The 75,3_/2* selection appears.
In this sub-menu, the indications for the last 8 network faults can be selected, again
using the and keys. See the example in Figure 7-7.
If no messages are present for a fault, then entrance is denied and “/LVW_(PSW\” is
displayed.
The messages within a fault record are listed in chronological order and numbered,
from the oldest to the newest.
The inception of a fault is identified with the date and time in hours, minutes, and seconds
(resolution to ms). See the example in Figure 7-7.
The individual messages that are associated with the fault are tagged with a relative
time. At least one complete individual message always appears in the display.
Figure 7-7 Example of fault messages in the front display
Use the and keys to move up and down in the fault messages.
Use the key to move back into the 75,3_/2* level; or press the key to go back
to the 0$,1_0(18.
From PC with
DIGSI® 4
Click on $QQXQFLDWLRQ. The options appear in the data window (see Figure 7-2).
Double click on the desired message group in the data window, in this case the 7ULS_
/RJ. A list appears in the data window, as shown in Figure 7-8.
By double clicking on an entry in the list view, the associated contents of the network
fault is displayed in another window. The entries are chronologically listed with the
newest message appearing first.
MENU
___7_5_,_3___/_2_*________________________
!/DVW_)DXOW_____²!___
etc
_/_$_6_7___)_$_8_/_7______________________
___________________
1HWZRUN_)DXOW______21
MENU
:
7-8 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 7-8 Selection of fault messages in DIGSI® 4
Figure 7-9 Example of fault messages in DIGSI® 4
7.1.1.4 Saving and Erasing the Messages
Normally, erasing the messages is not necessary because the oldest messages are
automatically erased when new events are entered, if the memory is full at the time.
However, erasure of the stored messages may be useful, for instance, after revision
of the plant, so that in the future the memory only contains information about actual
events. Erasing the memory takes place separately for each of the message groups.
Note:
When the fault messages are erased, then the fault records are erased, too, and all
corresponding counters are set to zero. If, however, a fault record is erased (cf. Sub-section
7.1.4), the fault messages are unaffected.
7UM61 Manual 7-9
C53000-G1176-C127-1
From the
Device Front
If erasure is desired, first press the key. The 0$,1_0(18 appears. The first menu
item $QQXQFLDWLRQ is marked.
Press the key to enter the $1181&,$7,21 menu (see Figure 7-1).
Using the key, select the item 6HW_5HVHW, and switch to the sub-menu using the
key.
Here, select the message group to be erased using the key, and then press the
key. See Figure 7-10 as an example.
Password No. 5 (for setting changes) is required at this point. After entering the password
and confirming with the key, the safety question “$UH_\RX_VXUH?” appears.
The response “<(6” is the default (Figure 7-10). Confirm with the key, if
the message group should really be erased. If the message group should not be
erased, press the key so that the response “12” is highlighted, and confirm this answer
with the key. Before confirming with the key, the responses can be toggled
between “<(6” and “12” using the and keys. Alternatively, the key can
be pressed to cancel the erasure procedure.
Figure 7-10 Erasing messages from the front panel
From PC with
DIGSI® 4
When operating with DIGSI® 4, the device messages can be saved on the hard drive
of a personal computer before they are erased from the device. To do this, follow exactly
the same steps taken to retrieve the messages. Instead of double clicking on the
message group in the message list to open the group, select the option )LOH → 6DYH
in the DIGSI® 4 window menu bar. DIGSI® 4 then automatically creates a directory for
the messages — if one does not exist — and saves the message group in this directory.
For details, see the “DIGSI® 4 Device Operation” Handbook, order no. E50417–
H1176–C097, Section 9.4.
When all of the desired message groups have been saved on the PC, they can be
erased from the device as described above.
Of course, you can erase the saved data from the hard drive of your PC as every file.
MENU
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER ENTER
ESC
_6_(_7___5_(_6_(_7________________________
!(YHQW_/RJ___________
!7ULS_/RJ____________
Etc
Select the associated message group or
press the associated number key to select
the messages to be erased.
$UH_\RX_VXUH"
!<HV______1R
Confirm “<HV” with the key and complete
the erasing of the selected messages,
or switch to “1R” with the key and
cancel the erasure with the key.
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
3:_6HWWLQJV"
______ _______
Enter Password No. 5 (for setting change)
and confirm with ENTER
:
7-10 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
7.1.1.5 General Interrogation
From PC with
DIGSI® 4
The present condition of a SIPROTEC® device can examined by using DIGSI® 4 to
view the contents of the “General Interrogation” annunciation.
The messages are found by double-clicking on $QQXQFLDWLRQ_(see Figure 7-2),
double-clicking on *HQHUDO_,QWHUURJDWLRQ, and double-clicking on the date and
time that appear in the right window. All of the messages that are needed for a general
interrogation are shown along with the actual values and states.
7.1.1.6 Spontaneous Messages
From PC with
DIGSI® 4
The spontaneous messages that can be retrieved using DIGSI® 4 represent the simultaneous
recording of presently occurring messages.
Find the message groups by clicking on $QQXQFLDWLRQ (Figure 7-2).
Double click 6SRQWDQHRXV_$QQXQFLDWLRQ in the data window. The date and time
appear in the data window. By double clicking on them, the Spontaneous Annunciation
window opens, as shown in the following figure. Each entering message appears immediately,
without requiring that an update be initiated.
Bild 7-11 Spontaneous annunciation window — example
7.1.2 Switching Statistics
The messages in switching statistics are, for example, counters for the accumulation
of interrupted currents by each of the breaker poles, the number of trips issued by the
device to the breaker. The interrupted currents are in primary terms.
Switching statistics can be viewed on the LCD of the device, or on a PC running
DIGSI® 4 and connected to the operating or service interface.
A password is not required to read switching statistics; however, a password is required
to change or delete the statistics.
:
:
7UM61 Manual 7-11
C53000-G1176-C127-1
7.1.2.1 Viewing the Switching Statistics
For each trip command initiated by a protective element of the device, the magnitude
of interrupted current for each circuit breaker pole is determined and stored. The current
magnitudes are added to previously interrupted currents, and the accumulated
values are stored. The number of circuit breaker operations is counted in the device
based on the feedback information from the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts. A precondition
is that binary inputs are masked for counting.
In addition, the operating hours for the protected equipment are counted. The protected
equipment is considered to be in operation whenever the current threshold, set under
Address 0212 (%NU&ORVHG_,_0,1), is exceeded by at least one phase current.
The counter are retained during a loss of power supply voltage.
From the
Device Front
The first menu item $QQXQFLDWLRQ is marked.
Press the key to enter the $1181&,$7,21 sub-menu (see Figure 7-1).
Use the key to select the item 6WDWLVWLF, and switch to the list of statistics values
using the key. The 67$7,67,& list appears. See Figure 7-12.
Figure 7-12 Switching statistics viewed from the front display
From PC with
DIGSI® 4
Under $QQXQFLDWLRQ (Figure 7-2), the switching statistics can be found by double
clicking. Double click on 6WDWLVWLF. The contents of the statistic counters is displayed
in another window. See Figure 7-13.
Figure 7-13 List of statistic values in DIGSI® 4 — example
MENU
_6_7_$_7_,_6_7_,_&_6______________________
_Σ ,/_ ____________N$
_Σ ,/_ ____________N$
Etc.
:
7-12 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
7.1.2.2 Resetting and Setting the Switching Statistics
The memories and counters for switching statistics are secured against a loss of power
supply voltage. The values can, however, be set to zero, or to any desired value
within certain setting limits.
From the
Device Front
In the 67$7,67,& (see previous sub-section) sub-menu (see previous sub-section),
select the value to be set by using the key, and then press the key. See Figure
7-14 for an example of changing the trip counter. After a password is entered, the cursor
blinks and the number value is highlighted in a box. The number can be overwritten
using the number keys. If the new value is outside of the allowable range, either above
or below, then the maximum or minimum limit value appears at the bottom edge of the
screen. Confirm the change with the key.
Figure 7-14 Setting statistics values from the device front — example
From PC with
DIGSI® 4
In the 6WDWLVWLF window (see previous sub-section), mark the value that is to be set.
With the right mouse button, open a context menu and select 6HW. See Figure 7-15.
After the password for individual settings is entered, the previous value in the window
can be overwritten.
Figure 7-15 Setting statistic values in DIGSI® 4 — example
7.1.2.3 Setting Limit Values for the Statistics Counters
From the
Device Front
In the $1181&,$7,21 sub-menu, use the key to select the sub-item 6HW_5HVHW,
and enter this sub-menu. Use the key to select the item 6HW3RLQW_6WDW_ and
move with the key to set the Operating Hours Counter. See Figure 7-16. Then
press the key. After the password for individual settings is entered, the cursor
blinks and the counter value is highlighted with a box. The value can be overwritten
using the number keys. Confirm the change using the key.
ENTER
ENTER
2SHU__+UV_ ________
_0D[ 2147483648
ENTER 7ULS_&RXQW___
_
_6_7_$_7_,_6_7_,_&_6______________________
_∑,/_ _____________N$
_7ULS_&RXQW ______!__
:
ENTER
ENTER
7UM61 Manual 7-13
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 7-16 Setting the Limit Value, Example on the Front Display
The message “$UH_\RX_VXUH"” appears in the display, with the response “<HV” as
the default. Confirm with the key if a change to the limit value is really desired. If
a change to the limit value is not wanted, press the key so that the response “1R”
is higlighted, and confirm with the key. Before confirming with the key, the
and keys can be used to toggle between “<HV” and “1R.”
From PC with
DIGSI® 4
Move to the item 6HW_3RLQWV__6WDWLVWLF_ under 6WDWLVWLF in the
$QQXQFL_
DWLRQ. By double clicking, the associated contents are displayed in another window,
as shown in Figure 7-17. Overwriting the default value sets a new limit value. Entry of
password No. 5 for individual settings is required to do this.
Figure 7-17 Digsi® 4 Setting Statistics Values — Example
7.1.3 Measured and Metered Values
Operating measured values and metered values are determined in the background by
the processor system. They can be called up at the front of the device, read out via
the operating interface using a PC with DIGSI® 4, or transferred to a central master
station via the system interface (if available).
No password entry is required to view the measured or metered values. The values
are updated every few seconds.
Most measured values can be displayed in primary quantities, secondary quantities,
and percentages based on nominal values. A precondition for correct display is that
the nominal values be correctly set in the power system data.
ENTER 2S+UV_!______K
_6_(_7_3_2_,_1_7___6_7_$_7_________
2S+UV_!_!_____K
ENTER
ENTER ENTER
:
7-14 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
7.1.3.1 Measured Values
Read-out of
Measured Values
In the 7UM61 with maximum functionality the following measured values are available:
• IL1, IL2, IL3, 3I0: phase currents and ground current, primary in A and kA, secondary
in A and in % of the device nominal current.
• IEE: ground current, primary in A and kA, secondary in A and in % of the device nominal
current.
• I1, I2: positive and negative sequence components of the currents, primary in A and
kA, secondary in A and in % of the device nominal current.
• UL1–E, UL2–E, UL3–E, U0: voltages, primary in kV, secondary in V sekundär and in %
of UN/√3.
• UL1–L2, UL2–L3, UL3–L1: voltages, primary in kV, secondary in V sekundär and in %
of UN.
• UE: displacement voltage, either directly measured or calculated as 3U0 = (UL1-E +
UL2-E + UL3-E), primary in kV, secondary in V and in % von UN/√3, provided that
phase–to–ground voltages are connected.
• U1, U2: positive and negative sequence components of the voltages, primary in kV,
secondary in V sekundär and in % of UN/√3.
• S, P, Q:Apparent, Real, and Reactive power; primary in in kVA or MVA or GVA, primary
in kW or MW or GW, primary in kVAR or MVAR or GVAR and in % of
SN = √3·UN·IN.
The active power is positive if address _____$&7,9(_32:(5 is set to = *HQHUD_
WRU for generator operation or = 0RWRU for motor operation, see Section 6.1).
• Power factor cosϕ:
The sign matches that of the real power.
• Power angle PHI between voltages and currents.
• f: frequency in Hz and in % of rated frequency.
• U/f: Over-excitation referred to the nominal excitation at UN and fN.
• U/f th.: Overtemperature calculated from the overexcitation, in % of the tripping temperature
rise.
• R, X: Resistance and reactance in Ω, primary and secondary.
• UE3h: Content of 3rd harmonic in the displacement voltage in V sekundär.
• Θ /Θ TRIP: Measured values of the overload protection for the stator winding per conductor,
in % of the tripping temperature rise.
• Igeg th.: Rotor overtemperature based on the negative-sequence component of the
currents in % of the tripping temperature rise.
• cooling medium temperature.
• Minimum and maximum values of the positive-sequence components I1 and U1, of
the active power P and the reactive power Q, of the frequency f, and of the content
of 3rd harmonic in the displacement voltage UE3h.
From the
Device Front
Use the key to select the menu item 0HDVXUHPHQW, and switch to the list of measured
values using the key. The 0($685(0(17 selection appears. See figure 7-18.
MENU
7UM61 Manual 7-15
C53000-G1176-C127-1
.
Figure 7-18 Selection of measured values on the front — example

The measured values are divided into the following groups:
1 2SHUDWLRQ__SUL Operating measured values, primary. The measured values
are converted from secondary to primary according to the
settings enterde for the current and voltage transformers,
and the nominal device values.
2 2SHUDWLRQ__VHF Operating measured values, secondary.
3 3HUFHQW Operating measured values, in percent of nominal quantities.
4 09__0LQ_0D[ Minimum and maximum of the positive sequence components
of the voltages and currents, of the real and reactive
power, with the date and time that they occured, in primary
quantities. The measured values are converted from secondary
to primary according to the settings enterde for the
current and voltage transformers, and the nominal device
values.
The minimum and maximum values of the frequency and of
the content of 3rd harmonic in the displacement voltage
UE3h are listed as well.
5 7KHUPDO_0HWHU Thermal values from protective functions that calculate
them, such as overload protection, unbalanced load protection
and overflux protection, provided such functions are
present.
The percentages given are relative to the tripping temperature
rise.
6 8VHU_'HILQHG Measured values that are defined by the user during initial
setting of the device (see Section 5.3).
7 (QHUJ\ see section 7.1.3.2.
8 6HW_SRLQWV__09_ see section 7.1.3.3.
9 Reset see section 7.1.3.4.
If a measured value is not available, then instead of the measured value, 3 dots appear.
If the value is undefined (e.g., cos ϕ , when no current is flowing), then “–––” appears
(3 horizontal bars). If a measured value overruns, then “” (3 asterisks) is
displayed.
Use the key to select the measured value group that has the values desired, and
switch to the display of this group with the key. Figure 7-19 shows an example for
the display of operating measured values.
Etc.
_0_$_,_1___0_(_1_8________________________
_$QQXQFLDWLRQ___²!___
!0HDVXUHPHQW____²!___ _0_(_$_6_8_5_(_0_(_1_7___________________
!2SHUDWLRQ__SUL______
!2SHUDWLRQ__VHF______
7-16 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 7-19 Viewing operating measured values on the front display
Move up and down in the table of measured value groups using the and keys.
Use the key to return to the 0($685(0(17 sub-menu. Use the key to return to
the 0$,1_0(18.
From PC with
DIGSI® 4
The measured value groups are found under Measurement (Figure 7-2) with a double
click, as shown in Figure 7-20, left.
Figure 7-20 Measurement window in DIGSI® 4
The measured values are divided into the following groups:
• 3ULPDU\ with
2SHUDWLRQDO_PHDVXUHG_YDOXHV__SULPDU\,
• 6HFRQGDU\ with
2SHUDWLRQDO_PHDVXUHG_YDOXHV__VHFRQGDU\,
• 3HUFHQWDJH with
2SHUDWLRQDO_PHDVXUHG_YDOXHV__SHUFHQWDJH,
referred to the rated operational values;
• Min/Max with
Minimum and maximum of the positive sequence components of the voltages and
currents, of the real and reactive power, with the date and time that they occured,
in primary quantities. The measured values are converted from secondary to primary
according to the settings enterde for the current and voltage transformers, and
the nominal device values.
• 2WKHUV with
Thermal values from protective functions that calculate them, such as overload
protection, unbalanced load protection and overflux protection, provided such functions
are present.
The percentages given are relative to the tripping temperature rise.
_0_(_$_6_8_5_(_0_(_1_7_________________
!2SHUDWLRQ__SUL______
!2SHUDWLRQ__VHF______
_2_3_(_5_$_7_,_2_1_____3_5_,______________
!,/__ ___________$
Etc. !,/__ ___________$
Etc.
MENU
:
7UM61 Manual 7-17
C53000-G1176-C127-1
8VHU_'HILQHG, i.e. measured values that have been defined by the user during
initial setting of the device (see section5.2),
(QHUJ\: see section 7.1.3.2
6HW_SRLQWV__0HDVXUHG_9DOXHV_: see section 7.1.3.3.
If a measured value is not available, then instead of the measured value, 3 dots appear.
If the value is undefined (e.g., cos ϕ , when no current is flowing), then “–––” appears
(3 horizontal bars). If the measured value overruns, then “” (3 asterisks)
are displayed.
Double click on the desired measure value group; e.g. 3ULPDU\_9DOXHV. The next
sub-group is displayed.
Double click on the desired sub-group; e.g. 2SHUDWLRQDO_YDOXHV__SULPDU\.
By double clicking on an entry in the list on the right side of the window, the associated
contents of the measured value group are displayed in another window, as shown in
Figure 7-21.
Figure 7-21 Example of measured values shown in DIGSI® 4
7.1.3.2 Energy, Metered Values
Retrieving of
Metered Values
In a 7UM61 device with the maximum configuration, counters are available that sum
the real and reactive energy (:S, :T) separately, according to reporting and recording
of the real energy and capacitive and inductive reactive energy, in the direction of the
protected object. This assumes that this direction is set as “forwards” (Address ____,
see Sub-section 6.1).
From the
Device Front
values using the key. The 0($685(0(17 selection appears. Select the item
MENU
7-18 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
(QHUJ\ with the key and switch to the table of energy measurements using the
key.
Moving up and down in the table of energy measurements is done using the and
keys. The key can be used to return to the 0($685(0(17 level. Press the
key to return to the 0$,1_0(18.
From PC with
DIGSI® 4
The metered value groups can be found under 0HDVXUHPHQW (Figure 7-2) with a
double click.
Double click on 2WKHUV, then (QHUJ\.
By double clicking on an entry in the list view in the right side of the window, the associated
contents of the metered group are displayed in another window.
7.1.3.3 Setting and Retrieval of User Defined Set-points
In the 7UM61 measured value set-points can be configured with the user definable
logic CFC (see Section 5.3). If during normal operation a measured value reaches or
is above viz below one of these set-points, the device generates an alarm which is indicated
as an operational event. As is the case for all operational messages, it is also
possible in this case to output the information to LED and/or output relay and via the
interfaces.
When the 7UM61 is delivered from the factory, a low current monitor (,/_) for the
three phase currents is implemented only; further set-points can be defined, if their
measured and metered values have been configured accordingly with CFC (see section
5.3).
If such set-points were defined during the configuration of the device, they can be
viewed and — with password No. 5 — they can be changed:
From the
Device Front
values using the key. The 0($685(0(17 selection appears.
There, select the menu item 6HW_3RLQWV__09_ with the key, and switch to the
list of limit values using the key (see Figure 7-22).
MENU
:
MENU
7UM61 Manual 7-19
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 7-22 Setting Limit Values at the Front Panel — Example
To change a limit value, mark the specific value using the and keys, and then
press the key.
A request for Password No. 5 (for settings parameters) is given. After password entry
and confirmation with the key, the previous value appears in a box with a flashing
cursor. Overwrite the previous value with the desired new value using the number
keys. If the entered value is outside the allowable value range, then the maximum or
minimum limit value appears at the bottom of the display.
Press the key. The new value appears in the list of limit values.
Other limit values can be changed in the same manner.
Upon leaving this level using the or keys, the safety inquiry “$UH_\RX_VXUH"”
appears, with the default answer “<HV” (Figure 7-22). Confirm with the key if the
value should become effective. If a change to the value is not desired, press the
key so that the answer “1R” is marked, and confirm this with the key. To correct
the value, mark “(VFDSH”, confirm this with the key, and enter the value again.
From PC with
DIGSI® 4
Double click on 0HDVXUHPHQW (Figure 7-2). Select 2WKHU and then 6HW_3RLQWV_
_0HDVXUHG_9DOXHV_.
By double clicking on an entry in the list view in the right side of the window, the limit
values are loaded. Mark the number of the value that is to be changed. With the right
mouse button, open the context menu and click on 6HW, as shown in Figure 7-23. A
password inquiry (password for individual settings) occurs. Next, the dialogue field
6HW_0HWHUHG_9DOXH is opened. Enter the desired value in the entry field. Then click
on 2..
The entered value is transferred to the device and the display within the window in Figure
7-23 is updated.
_0_(_$_6_8_5_(_0_(_1_7___________________
!6HW_3RLQWV_09_______
!5HVHW_______________
Etc.
ENTER
_6_(_7___3_2_,_1_7_6_____0_9______________
,/_______!!_____
_FRVϕ __________
ENTER 3:_6HWWLQJV"
___ _______
Enter Password No. 5 (individual settings)
and confirm with ENTER
,/__________________
ENTER
$UH_<RX_6XUH"
!<(6_12_(VFDSH_
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
MENU
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
:
7-20 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 7-23 Setting of set-points in DIGSI® 4 — example
7.1.3.4 Resetting Metered Values and Min/Max Values
Metered values and minimum/maximum values can be reset.
From the
Device Front
values using the key. The 0($685(0(17 selection appears.
Using the key, select the menu item 5HVHW and switch to the reset possibilities using
the key. See Figure 7-24.
Figure 7-24 Resetting Metered Values and Min/Max Values Using the Front Panel.
Moving up and down in the table is done with the and keys.
To reset a values, mark the values using the and keys, and then press the
key. The reset command is offered as “21”.
Press the key. The display confirms with “&KDQJH_2._&RQWLQXH”.
Confirm once again with the key. The reset is complete.
Other counters are reset in the same manner.
Use the key to return to the 0($685(0(17 sub-menu; press the key to return
to the 0$,1_0(18.
When the 7UM61 is delivered from the factory, function key 4 allows quick and simple
jumpingto the reset menu of the min/max values (see Figure 7-24).
MENU
_5_(_6_(_7______________________________
!5HV0LQ0D[______!_21
!0HWHU_UHV________21
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
MENU
7UM61 Manual 7-21
C53000-G1176-C127-1
From PC with
DIGSI® 4
Resetting of limit values, metered values, min/max values, or statistics values always
takes place in a group.
To set values to zero, right click on the group in the navigation to open a context menu.
Click on 5HVHW.
7.1.4 Fault Records
Waveform or rms data is stored in the device and can be graphically represented on
a personal computer using DIGSI® 4, together with the graphic program DIGRA® 4.
The settings associated with fault recording — such as duration and pre- and post-trigger
times — had been are set according to Chapter 6.
7.1.4.1 Viewing Fault Records
From PC with
DIGSI® 4
To view the fault recording data on a screen, one of the programs DIGRA® 4 or Comtrade
Viewer (included with SIMATIC Manager) is needed. Do the following:
Double click on 2VFLOORJUDSKLF_5HFRUGV (Figure 7-25). The folders listed in the
right window show an overview of oscillographic records. The records are identified
with a network fault number, a fault record number, and the date and time.
By double clicking on an fault record in the list view in the right side of the window, one
of the above programs is opened, and the selected waveform data are loaded. (See
also DIGSI® 4, Operating Handbook, order no. E50417–H1176–C097, Sub-section
8.3.3).
Figure 7-25 Retrieval of fault records in DIGSI® 4
:
Note:
By selecting the 5HVHW command, all values are reset to zero without further inquiry.
This procedure cannot be undone.
:
7-22 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
DIGRA® 4 provides support in the analysis of faults on the power system. The program
graphically prepares the data recorded during a fault, and calculates additional
measurement quantities, such as impedances or rms values.
The quantities can be represented in these views:
• Time signals
• Phasor diagrams
• Locus diagrams
• Harmonics
Selection takes place using the menu bar (9LHZ), or clicking in the symbol bar above
the represented switching fields. Figure 7-26 shows all four views simultaneously.
The recorded data read into the PC memory are first shown in full on the screen. Current,
and possibly voltage, for each phase and the ground are represented separately.
The fault number, data and time, network, and feeder are also displayed.
Representation of primary or secondary quantities can be selected. The base values
for currents and voltages are the nominal values of the transformers (CTs or VTs). An
identical scale is used for all currents, relative to the largest occurring current value,
and for all voltages, relative to the largest occurring voltage value.
Figure 7-26 DIGRA 4, Diagrams in the Four Possible Views
During configuration any signal can be selected in its properties to be displayed in the
fault record. (See chapter 5.2.3.)
Further details about the many possibilities that DIGRA® 4 offers can be found in the
DIGRA handbook (Order No. E50417–H1176–C070).
7UM61 Manual 7-23
C53000-G1176-C127-1
7.1.4.2 Saving the Fault Records
Storage of Fault
Recording Data
Oscillographic records that are received from the device are not automatically saved
in the PC. The data can, however, be saved in files.
For more details, see the DIGSI® 4 Operating Handbook, Order No. E50417–H1176–
C097, Section 9.4.
The oscillographic records stored in the device do not need to be erased, since the
data are stored in a revolving buffer. The oldest data are automatically overwritten by
the newest data.
7-24 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
7.2 Control of Device Functions
You may change individual functions and messages in a 7UM61 while the device is inservice.
Some examples are given above, including erasing stored information (Subsection
7.1.1.4) and setting/resetting counters and set-points (Sub-sections 7.1.2.2
and 7.1.3.4). In this section, three other control capabilities are discussed. They are
correcting the date and time, changing the settings group, and affecting information at
the system interface during test operations.
7.2.1 Read and Set Date and Time
The 7UM61 device can be connected to an external clock source, binary input or use
the internal RTC for time and date stamping.
Time Status Besides the display of date and time, the status of these readings is also provided.
The
text of the status display can have the appearances given in Table 7-1, under regular
conditions of time control.
The text symbols, or “status bits”, for the time status have the following meanings:
Representation of
the Time
Various representations of the date and time stamp may be given in the '$7(_7,0(
sub-menu and in all messages stamped with the date and time. The year number
stored in the device and the values of the status bits “Not synchronized” and “Time er-
Table 7-1 Time Status
Status Bits No.
___________ 1
synchronized
_________67 2
______(5___ 3
______(5_67 4 not synchronized
___16_(5___ 5
___16______ 6
16 Not synchronized Time was neither set manually nor synchronized after
power-up.
(5 Time error At the moment, there is no cyclical synchronization
within the tolerance times (time can jump)
67 Daylight savings
time
The latest synchronization signal received supplied a
daylight savings time bit
7UM61 Manual 7-25
C53000-G1176-C127-1
ror” determine the representations. The possible representations and the associated
causes are listed in Table 7-2.
? appearing in the date and time field indicate that the clock synchronisation has been lost.
Item 1 appears if the internal clock RTC did not have a valid time upon start-up. The
messages in the memory buffers are dated 01/01/1990.
Corrective action: Set the date and time manually (see margin header “Changing the
Time” below).
Item 2 appears if the time was actually set, but not synchronized. This can happen:
− briefly upon device power-up,
− if synchronization is lost; that is, if the cyclical synchronization is interrupted for a
time longer than the set tolerance time.
Corrective action: If an external synchronizing source is being used, check the source
and the connection.
Item 3 is displayed if the RTC had a valid value upon device start-up but the time was
neither manually set nor synchronized since.
Corrective action: Set the date and time manually, or wait until the cyclical synchronization
takes effect.
Item 4 displays the normal condition; that is, the time is synchronized cyclically according
to the type of operation.
Item 5 is displayed if synchronization via the system interface is marked as “invalid”.
Changing the Time The time can be changed
− By setting the time manually, using the integrated control panel or DIGSI® 4;
− By adjusting the settings for time control.
The date and time can be manually set during operation, provided the device allows
this. A precondition is that the appropriate type of operation for time control must be
selected (see Section 5.7).
When the source of time synchronisation is “internal” or “pulse via binary input” the
date and time can be manually set during operation at any instant. The annunciations
“time error ON” and “time error OFF” appear in the annunciation log to indicate time
synchronization and loss of time synchronization, respectively.
In the other operating modes, manual adjustments are only accepted if the synchronization
is momentarily lost. The messages “time error ON” and “time error OFF” are given
when manually changing the year in the IRIG B mode.
Table 7-2 Representations of Date and Time:
Item Display (Example) Year Time Error Time Invalid
Date Time
1 HH_HH_HHHH __"_____ Year = 1990 irrelevant
2 __________ __"_____
1990<Year<2090
Yes No
3 __"_______ __"_____ Yes Yes
4 __________ ________ No No
5 HH"HH_HHHH __"_____ No Yes
7-26 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Without healthy or external time synchronisation the free running date and time can
also be relatively adjusted (+/– 23:59:59) using the entry field 'LII_²WLPH.
This input possibility is not to be confused with the parameter 2IIVHW (see Section
5.7), which affects the specific general offset to the received synchronization time of
the radio clock receiver (e.g. local time vs. GMT time).
From the
Device Front
Select 6HWWLQJV, and in the sub-menu 6(783_(;75$6. To set the date and time
manually, choose the selection 'DWH_7LPH and move to the '$7(_7,0( display using
the key. See Figure 7-27.
Figure 7-27 Manual date and time adjustment from the front panel
To change one of the previous settings (date, time, differential time), mark the item using
the and keys, and then press the key.
The actual setting appears in a frame with a blinking cursor. Overwrite this setting with
the desired new one using the number keys. Be careful to enter the format properly.
Confirm the change with the key.
To change the time offset or the tolerance time for a clock error signal, select &ORFN_
6HWXS under 6(783_(;75$6, as shown in Figure 7-28. Under 2IIVHW, the time offset
can be changed. Under (UURU_7LPH, the time delay for the alarm can be adjusted.
These adjustments are done in the same manner as setting the time, by overwriting
the displayed values and confirming with the key.
To return to the S(783_(;75$6 level, press the key, several times if necessary. To
return to the 0$,1_0(18, press the key.
Figure 7-28 Date and time settings from the front panel
From PC with
DIGSI® 4
To manually change the date and time of the device:
Click on 'HYLFH in the menu bar as shown in Figure 7-29. Select the command 6HW_
&ORFN.
MENU
_6_(_7_8_3___(_;_7_5_$_6________________
!'DWH_7LPH_____²!___
!&ORFN_6HWXS___²!___
'$7(_7,0(
6WDWXV______________
!___________________
'LII_²WLPH__________
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
MENU
_6_(_7_8_3___(_;_7_5_$_6________________
!'DWH_7LPH_____²!___
!&ORFN_6HWXS___²!___ &/2&._6(783_________
____________________
_2IIVHW________!_PLQ
_(UURU_7LPH______PLQ
_6RXUFH_____,QWHUQDO
:
7UM61 Manual 7-27
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 7-29 Selecting the command 6HW_&ORFN in DIGSI® 4
A dialog field, 6HW_FORFN_ _GDWH_LQ_GHYLFH, is opened. The displayed values
are the present date and time. The day of the week is automatically derived from the
date — and cannot be edited.
• Edit the input fields 'DWH and 7LPH. The format depends on your regional settings
of the PC. See Figure 7-30.
Date: mm/dd/yyyy or dd.mm.yyyy
Time: hh.mm.ss
Click on 2. to transfer the entered values into the device. The previous values are
changed and the dialog field is closed.
Figure 7-30 Dialog Field: 6HW_FORFN_ _GDWH_LQ_GHYLFH
• To change the time offset or tolerance time for clock signal error, double click on
6HWWLQJV in the navigation window. See Figure 7-31.
7-28 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 7-31 Setting window in DIGSI® 4
Double click on 7LPH_6\QFKURQL]DWLRQ in the data window. This give access to
change (Figure 7-32):
− Source of time synchronisation,
− Monitoring (Time delay for alarm),
− Time format for display,
− Time correction (offset to the time signal).
Figure 7-32 Time synchronization and time format settings in DIGSI® 4
7UM61 Manual 7-29
C53000-G1176-C127-1
7.2.2 Switching Setting Groups
Two different setting groups for the protective functions may be available. The active
group can be changed onsite while the 7UM61 is in-service by using the integrated
operating field on the device or the operating interface on a PC running DIGSI® 4. Alternatively,
you may decide that the active setting group be remotely controlled via binary
inputs or the system interface.
Password No. 5 (password for individual settings) is required to change setting
groups.
The first setting group is called group A, the other is group B. If setting group changing
is to be used, then settings for the groups to be employed must have been entered
(see Section 6) and the switching process must be (QDEOHG under Address ____
*US_&KJH_237,21.
From the
Device Front
When the device is ready for operation, first press the key. The 0$,1_0(18 appears.
Using the key, select the menu item 6HWWLQJV and switch to the settings with the
key. The selection 6(77,1*6 appears.
Using the key, select the item &KDQJH_*URXS and move to the selection of groups
with the key. The sub-menu &+$1*(_*5283 appears, as shown in Figure 7-33.
The first Address ____ is marked. The address displays the setting group presently
in effect (in Figure 7-33, the active group is *URXS_$).
Using the key, select Address ____ and confirm with the key.
Enter the password for individual settings, and confirm.
Using the key, select one of the two groups A or B give control to another source.
If %LQDU\_,QSXW (activation using binary inputs) is selected, setting group switching
is controlled by binary inputs, provided appropriate configuration has been done and
the necessary physical connections are present (see Section 5.2).
If YLD_3URWRFRO is chosen, setting group changes can be controlled via the system
serial interface.
MENU
ENTER
7-30 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 7-33 Switching setting groups from the front panel
Control of the setting groups can always be regained by switching to one of the groups
A or B.
The key can be used to return to the 6(77,1*6 sub-menu; the key can be
pressed to returns to the 0$,1_0(18.
From PC with
DIGSI® 4
By opening the 2QOLQH directory with a double click in DIGSI® 4, the operating functions
for the device appear in the left part of the window. See Figure 7-34.
Figure 7-34 Function selection window in DIGSI® 4
Double click on 6HWWLQJV to find &KDQJH_*URXS in the data window (Figure 7-34
right).
_&_+_$_1_*_(___*_5_2_8_3________________
_____$&7,9(_*5283___
_____*URXS_$
The currently-active setting group is displayed
under Address ____.
The setting group can be changed under Address
____: by pressing the key, after
entering the password, two possible alternatives
are displayed in a new window each
time:
Using the keys, select one of the alternatives
and confirm with the key;
The next question (“$UH_\RX_VXUH"”) is answered
with <HV and the selected alternative
is confirmed, or is answered with 1R using the
key and the change is cancelled with the
key.
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
$UH_\RX_VXUH"
ENTER <HV________1R__
_____&+$1*(_WR_
____!*URXS_$
!*URXS_$
_*URXS_%
_YLD_%LQDU\_,QSXW
_YLD_3URWRFRO
MENU
:
7UM61 Manual 7-31
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Double click on &KDQJH_*URXS. The &KDQJH_*URXS window is opened, as shown
in Figure 7-35.
Figure 7-35 Setting group switching in DIGSI® 4
The active setting group is displayed. To switch to another setting group, click on the
field 9DOXH and select the desired option from the drop-down list. Before closing the
window, transfer the change to the device. This is done by clicking on the button
'LJVL_→_'HYLFH. A request for Password No. 7 (password for setting groups) is
given. Enter the correct password, and then click on 2..
7.2.3 Controlling Information to the System Interface during Test Operation
You may influence the information transferred via the system interface from the device
to a central master control station.
Depending on the type of protocol, all messages and measured values transferred via
the system interface can be marked with an added “test mode”–bit while the device is
being tested onsite (test mode). This identification prevents the messages from being
incorrectly interpreted as resulting from an actual power system fault or event. As another
option, all messages and measured values normally transferred via the system
interface can be blocked during the testing (“data transmission block”).
These facilities can be accomplished by controlling binary inputs, by using the operating
panel on the device, or via DIGSI® 4.
If binary inputs are used, then the appropriate inputs must be configured.
The password for test and diagnostics is required to switch to “test mode” or “data
transmission block” from the device front or PC.
7-32 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
From the
Device Front
With the device ready for operation, first press the key. The 0$,1_0(18 appears.
Using the key, highlight the menu item 7HVW_'LDJQRVH, and then press the
key to enter sub-menu. 7(67_',$*126( will appear at the top of the menu.
At this point, highlight the menu item 7HVW_(QDEOH using the key, and then press
the key to enter sub-menu. 7(67_(1$%/( will appear at the top of the menu. See
Figure 7-36.
Figure 7-36 Applying test mode from the front panel
To switch to test mode, press the key, enter the password for test and diagnostics,
and confirm with the key. A new window appears with the options 21 and
2)). Use the and keys to select the desired mode, and press the key. The
question “$UH_\RX_VXUH"” is displayed. Highlight the desired response and press
the key. If the mode is changed, the device responds with the message “&RQ_
WURO_([HFXWHG”.
Use the key to return to the 7(67_',$*126( level; press the key to return to
the 0$,1_0(18.
The procedure for changing the Block Data Transmission mode is the same. See Figure
7-37 (simplified).
Figure 7-37 Applying data transmission block from the front panel (simplified)
The settings for the test mode and the data transmission block are normally 2)). Definitions:
− 7HVW_PRGH – With the 21 setting, the “test mode“-bit is transferred for messages
compatible with IEC 60870–5–103.
− 'DWD6WRS – With the 21 setting, no messages or measured values are transferred
(“data tranmission block”).
From PC with
DIGSI® 4
Click on 'HYLFH in the menu bar to reach the commands %ORFN_'DWD_7UDQVPLV_
VLRQ or 7HVW_0RGH. See Figure 7-38.
MENU
_7_(_6_7___(_1_$_%_/_(_________
!7HVW_PRGH_______2))
_
_7_(_6_7___'_,_$_*_1_2_6_(______________
_'HYLFH_5HVHW__²!___
!7HVW_(QDEOH___²!___
_%ON_'DWD_7UDQV²!___
_+DUGZDUH_7HVW_²!___
_6HW_5HVHW_____²!___
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
MENU
_7_(_6_7___'_,_$_*_1_2_6_(______________
!%ON_'DWD_7UDQV²!___
_+DUGZDUH_7HVW_²!___ _%_/_.___'_$_7_$___7_5_$_1_6______
!'DWD6WRS_______2))
_
:
7UM61 Manual 7-33
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 7-38 Applying “Test Mode” or “Block Data Transmission” in DIGSI® 4
Click on %ORFN_'DWD_7UDQVPLVVLRQ to activate or deactivate the transfer block.
After entry of Password No. 4 for test and diagnostics, and confirmation with 2., the
setting change is complete.
Activation is indicated with a check mark in front of the command.
Follow the same procedure for the command 7HVW_0RGH, if this option is desired.
Note:
Remember to change the settings for Test Mode or Block Data Transmission back
to the desired, in-service settings (both typically 2))) when the tests are complete.
7-34 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
7.3 Control of Switchgear
A SIPROTEC® 4 device 7UM61 contains control functions that allow for opening and
closing of power system switching devices (i.e. circuit breakers). Local control is possible
utilizing different elements of the 7UM61. Breaker control from a remote location
is also possible using the SCADA interface or DIGSI® 4. (Performing control functions
with a PC running DIGSI® 4, connected to the front serial port, is considered a “remote”
operation for breaker control purposes.) Some control actions from a 7UM61 include
unsynchronized commands for circuit breakers, circuit switchers, ground switches,
etc., and stepping commands for increasing or decreasing transformer LTC steps.
Safety mechanisms in the command path ensure a command can only take place if
the check of previously defined safety criteria is concluded positively.
If a power system switching device has auxiliary contacts that indicate the position of
the device and these contacts are connected to the 7UM61 and configured as doublepoint
indications then the switching device provides feedback indication that are monitored
for plausibility of control actions. If a switching device does not indicate either
the closed or open position, the display for the switching device indicates an unvalid
position in the 7UM61. All subsequent control operations to the equipment are interlocked.
Control from a 7UM61 to a power system equipment can originate from four sources:
− Local operation using the operator control panel,
− Binary inputs,
− Remote operation using the SCADA interface,
− Operation with a PC, via the operating interface and DIGSI® 4.
Switching priority for the four command sources is set using the Switching Authority.
For Interlocked Switching, all programmed interlocking conditions are checked before
a control operation is performed. If one of the conditions is not met, then the command
is rejected and an error message is recorded and displayed. Fixed, predefined, standard
interlocking features are implemented in the 7UM61 and can be configured (activated)
for the specific application. The following tests can be activated (on) or deactivated
(off) for a switching device:
• Device Position (check SCHEDULED = ACTUAL comparison).
• Substation controller,
• Zone controlled (Field interlocking e.g., logic in CFC),
• Blocking by protection (control operations blocked by protective functions),
• Double operation (blocking of multiple control operations),
• Switching authority (Local/Remote),
7UM61 Manual 7-35
C53000-G1176-C127-1
7.3.1 Display Equipment Position and Control
From the
Device Front
Using the key, select the menu item &RQWURO, and go to editing the control functions
with the key. The selection &21752/ appears (See Figure 7-39).
Figure 7-39 Control Selections from the Front Panel
Select, by means of the key, the item %UHDNHU_6ZLWFK, and continue with the
item by pressing the key. The selection %5($.(5_6:,7&+ appears. See Figure
7-40.
Select_'LVSOD\ (default) and press the key. The selection ',63/$< appears, in
which the positions of all planned switching devices can be read out.
Figure 7-40 Display of Switch Positions in the HMI (example)
The key can be used to return to %5($.(5_6:,7&+.
To control a switching device, select the option &RQWURO in the %5($.(5_6:,7&+
sub-menu and press the key to go to the table of operating resources that can be
controlled. See Figure 7-41. All planned switching devices appear. The actual position
of each switch is displayed first. Use the and keys to move to the desired
switch.
Figure 7-41 Control of Switching Devices from the Operator Control Panel
Select the switch to be controlled using the and keys and press the key.
MENU
_&_2_1_7_5_2_/__________________________
!%UHDNHU_6ZLWFK_²!__
_7DJJLQJ________²!__
_0_$_,_1___0_(_1_8______________________
_0HVVXUHPHQW____²!__
!&RQWURO________²!__
_'_,_6_3_/_$_<__________________________
!__%UHDNHU______23(1
!'LVF_6ZLW______&/26
_%_5_(_$_._(_5___6_:_,_7_&_+____________
!'LVSOD\_______²!___
!&RQWURO_______²!___
_%_5_(_$_._(_5___6_:_,_7_&_+_____________
!'LVSOD\________²!__
!&RQWURO________²!__ _&_2_1_7_5_2_/__________________________
___%UHDNHU_____!&/26
_'LVF_6ZLW______&/26
_*QG6ZLW________2))
ENTER
7-36 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Enter Password No. 1 (for interlocked switching) and acknowledge with the key.
Note: if the switching mode is 121²,17(5/2&.('__7HVW_ (Sub-section 7.3.7), all
switching operations are only possible with Password No. 2 (for non-interlocked
switching).
A new window appears. Depending on the operating and command type of the selected
switching device, various options are offered. Move between them using the and
keys.
Figure 7-42 Selection Window for Control Operations on the Front Panel (example)
To perform control, confirm with the key. A safety inquiry appears, “$UH_\RX_
VXUH"”. If the response is “<(6”, the switching operation is initiated (provided the Local
command is allowed). A message is displayed and recorded indicating the results
of the control action. Acknowledge this by pressing the key once again.
The command is not executed if the switching operation is restricted. The operation
may be restricted for reasons pertaining to, for example, switching authority (see Subsection
7.3.6) or interlocking (see Sub-section 7.3.7). A message is displayed and recorded
indicating the results of the control action. Acknowledge the message by
pressing the key. Parameters to set control properties can be examined in the
display. Refer to Sub-section 7.3.4.
The key can be used to return to %5($.(5_6:,7&+. Press the key to return
to the 0$,1_0(18.
From PC with
DIGSI® 4
When the 2QOLQH window in DIGSI® 4 is opened with a double click, the operating
functions for the device appear in the left part of the window (Figure 7-34). Clicking on
&RQWURO displays the associated function selection in the data window. See Figure 7-
43.
Figure 7-43 Window for Control of Operating Resources in DIGSI® 4
By double clicking on %UHDNHU_6ZLWFKHV, a dialog field is opened in which the
present status of each switch is visible. See Figure 7-44. Control can be performed
from this dialog box provided the switching authority is set to 5(027(.
ENTER
&_2_1_7_5___!_2_3_(_1___________________
___%U__&/26(______21
_'LVF__(VFDSH_____21
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
MENU
:
7UM61 Manual 7-37
C53000-G1176-C127-1
The switching authority is first transferred to DIGSI® 4 at the moment the control window
shown in Figure 7-44 is opened. The configuration matrix discussed in Section
5.2 determines the control devices that have information displayed in this field.
Figure 7-44 Dialog Box for Performing Control in DIGSI® 4
A description of the switching device is displayed in the left column of the dialog field.
This represents the contents of the /RQJ_7H[W column within the configuration matrix.
The actual position of the switch is displayed in the 6WDWXV column (23(1,_&/26(,
,QWHUPHGLDW). The switching possibilities are displayed in the 6FKHGXOHG column.
Four control fields are shown in the right part of the dialog field. If a check mark is displayed
in one of these fields, ,% (Block Input Acquisition), 7% (Transmission Block =
Serial Interface Blocked), 68 (Manual Overwriting), and '% (Chatter Block), the associated
block function is set or the feedback indications of the device have been simulated.
Normally, operating devices are switched in the LQWHUORFNHG__1RUPDO_ mode.
The configured interlocking conditions are checked before a control command is carried
out. As soon as a control command is entered in the 6FKHGXOHG column, Password
No. 1 for interlocked switching is requested for safety reasons. Further control
possibilities remain possible until the control dialog field is closed, or the switching
mode is changed.
If a control command is successfully executed, then the display of the actual condition
of the affected switch is updated in the window.
Operating resources can be switched without interlocking condition checks; however,
the correct Password No. 2 for non-interlocked switching must be entered. Mark the
option 8QORFN by clicking on the field.
DANGER!
Only highly qualified personnel who have an exact knowledge of the power system
conditions shall perform non-interlocked switching. Inappropriate switching
operations can lead to death, serious personnel injury and property damage.
7-38 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
7.3.2 Manual Overwriting
When using the Control with Feedback feature, the device checks the feedback indications
(i.e. 52-a and 52-b) before and after a control command is issued. If for some
reason, the physical connection from a circuit breaker auxiliary contact to the binary
inputs of the device is broken, inadvertently shorted, or disconnected, commands may
be blocked. If this situation occurs, and the affected switching device is to be operated,
the desired device position indication can be simulated through “manual overwriting”
(Input Tagging). The entered device position indication in the 7UM61 can be used to
simulate and check interlocking conditions.
To accomplish manual overwriting in the 7UM61 the binary inputs of the affected device
must be decoupled first. ,% (Block Input Acquisition) This decoupling of the system
is accomplished by setting the respective status. The decoupling is discussed in
Sub-section 7.3.3.
From the
Device Front
To enter the desired position indication for a switching device:
With a 7UM61 ready for operation, first press the key. The 0$,1_0(18 appears.
Using the key, select the menu item &RQWURO and go to the control functions with
the key. The selection &21752/ appears.
By pressing the key, the %5($.(5_6:,7&+ sub-menu is entered (see Figure 7-
45).
Select the item 0DQ__2YHUZULWH using the key, and move to the next selection
using the key. 0$1__29(5:5,7( appears, as shown in Figure 7-45.
The actual position of each switching device is displayed. Move to the desired switch
using the and keys.
Figure 7-45 Manual Overwriting for Switching Devices from the Front Panel
By pressing the key, a selection window is opened for the marked switch, in
which manual overwriting can be done with the options 23(1_&/26(. See Figure 7-
46.
Make the selection using the and keys, and confirm with the key.
Enter Password No. 2 (for non-interlocked switching) and acknowledge with the
key.
MENU
_%_5_(_$_._(_5___6_:_,_7_&_+_____________
_'LVSOD\________³!__
_&RQWURO________²!__
!0DQ__2YHUZULWH_²!__
_6HW_VWDWXV_____³!___
_0_$_1_____2_9_(_5_:_5_,_7_(____________
___%UHDNHU_____!23(1
_'LVF_6ZLW______&/26
_*QG6ZLW________23(1
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
7UM61 Manual 7-39
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 7-46 Selection Window for Manual Overwriting of a Switch Position, Front Panel
A safety inquiry appears: “$UH_\RX_VXUH"” Provided manual overwriting is allowed,
a response of “<(6” results in an appropriate message on the display. Acknowledge
the message by pressing the key again.
Manual overwriting is cancelled if the process is restricted because, for example, “LQ_
SXW_LJQRUHG” is not set (see Sub-section 7.3.3). Manual overwriting is also canceled
if the user aborts the procedure. The display provides an appropriate message if manual
overwriting is canceled. Acknowledge the message by pressing the key.
Return to the %5($.(5_6:,7&+ sub-menu using the key, or the 0$,1_0(18 by
pressing the key.
From PC with
DIGSI® 4
For safety reasons, manual overwriting is only possible locally using the keypad on the
front panel of the device. The feature is not available in DIGSI® 4.
7.3.3 Set Status
A feature of the 7UM61 that is especially useful during testing and commissioning of
the device is the capability of temporarily removing the coupling between a switching
device and the 7UM61, or between the SCADA and the 7UM61, without physically disconnecting
the equipment. This type of separation is also necessary, for instance, if a
switch position feedback message is not functioning properly (refer to Sub-section
7.3.2). The menu item 6(7_67$786 is used to perform the decoupling.
The menu displays a list of all planned switching devices and associated status information
identified by a letter. The letters have the following meanings:
• T Device is tagged (manually overwritten).
• I Input ignored, which means the acquisition of an input status is de-coupled from
the process (from the switch-gear).
• B Blocked, which means data transmissions to the central device (or SCADASCADA)
are blocked.
• C Chatter block active, which means, because of frequent message changes, the
chatter block was set.
• O Output block active, which means the command output is de-coupled from the
process (from the system).
• – None of the listed limitations is in effect.
_0_$_1_____2__!_2_3_(_1__________________
!__%UH__&/26___!23(1
!'LVF___________&/26
ENTER
ENTER
MENU
:
7-40 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
From the
Device Front
Using the key, select the menu item &RQWURO and go to editing the control functions
with the key. The selection &21752/ appears.
Enter the %5($.(5_6:,7&+ menu by pressing the key.
Select the item 6HW_6WDWXV with the key and switch to the next option using the
key. 6(7_67$786 appears, as shown in Figure 7-47.
Figure 7-47 Set Status at the Front Panel
Move the cursor, using the and keys, to each of the second (Input Ignore) and
fifth (Control Block) columns of the switching device for which a status change is desired.
Entries in this table can only be made in these two columns.
Press the key. A selection window is opened that displays the meaning of the
field and the change options that are available.
The second column is reserved for setting Input Ignore (I); the fifth for setting the output
block (O). The first, third, and fourth columns can only be read in this menu.
The example in Figure 7-47 shows the position for the circuit breaker (52) was tagged
(T) after the input ignore (I) was set, which means the message input was de-coupled
from the system. The output block is active (O), so the command output is also decoupled
from the system. For the disconnect switch and the ground switch, no limitations
are set.
Select the desired changes using the and keys, and confirm with the key.
Enter Password No. 2 (for non-interlocked switching) and acknowledge with the
key.
A safety inquiry appears: “$UH_\RX_VXUH"” If the response is “<(6”, and provided
the return routing is allowed, then the display gives an appropriate message.
To return to the %5($.(5_6:,7&+ level, press the key as necessary. Press the
key to return to the 0$,1_0(18.
Note:
Input ignored only works for physical inputs! Do not set the block for indications created
by CFC.
MENU
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Column
_%_5_(_$_._(_5___6_:_,_7_&_+_____________
_'LVSOD\________³!__
_&RQWURO________²!__
!0DQ__2YHUZULWH_²!__
!6HW_VWDWXV_____³!___ _6_(_7___6_7_$_7_8_6_________________
___%UHDNHU_7_,_____2
_'LVF_6ZLW__!_______
_*QG6ZLW____________
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
MENU
7UM61 Manual 7-41
C53000-G1176-C127-1
From PC Using
DIGSI® 4
For safety reasons, Status changes are only possible locally using the keypad on the
front panel of the device. Status changes are not possible in DIGSI® 4.
7.3.4 Interlocking
Operating equipment such as circuit breakers, circuit switchers and ground switches
can be subject to interlocking conditions. These conditions can be viewed at the device
under the menu item ,17(5/2&.; however, the conditions cannot be changed.
The Interlock display has an object table similar to the one described for Set Status.
The table provides the set interlocking conditions, which prevent, or could prevent, a
local control operation. Letters identify the interlocking conditions. The meanings of
the letters are:
• L Local/Remote (Switching Authority),
• S Equipment is subject to System Interlocking (in Substation Controller). Commands
entered locally are sent to the central computer or controller,
• Z Zone controlled (Field- or Bay-Interlocking),
• P Check switch position (test actual vs. scheduled),
• B Blocking by picked-up protection elements,
• – Non-Interlocked.
From PC with
DIGSI® 4
Using the key, select the menu item &RQWURO and move to editing the control functions
Select the item ,QWHUORFN with the key and switch to the next selection using the
key. The selection ,17(5/2&. appears. See Figure 7-48.
Figure 7-48 Example of Interlocking Conditions for Switching Equipment, Front Panel
From PC with
DIGSI® 4
Interlocking is set for each switching device during project planning (see Sub-section
5.2.4) using the matrix and the dialog box “Object Properties”. Readout of the actively
set interlocking is always possible, across the entire path, without a password.
If the 2QOLQH window in DIGSI® 4 is opened with a double click, the operating functions
for the device appear in the left part of the window (Figure 7-34). Double clicking
:
: MENU
_,_1_7_(_5_/_2_&_.______________________
!__%UHDNHU_/_²_=_3_%_
!'LVF6ZLW__/_²_=_3_%
_&_2_1_7_5_2_/__________________________
!7DJJLQJ_______²!____!
!,QWHUORFN_____²!___
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Column
_*QG6ZLW___/_²_=_3_%
:
7-42 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
on 6HWWLQJV brings up the function selection in the right side of the window. By double
clicking on 0DVNLQJ_,_2, the matrix is opened. Mark the switching device (in the
line for the operating message of the switching device). Using the right mouse key, the
properties of the switching device can now be called up. The conditions for ,QWHU_
ORFN_6ZLWFKLQJ, among other items, are recognizable in the dialog box that opens.
Active test conditions are identified with a check mark.
7.3.5 Tagging
To identify unusual operating conditions in the power system, tagging can be done.
The tagging can, for example, be entered as additional operating conditions in interlocking
checks, which are set up with CFC. Tagging is configured in the same way as
for operating devices.
From PC with
DIGSI® 4
Select the item 7DJJLQJ with the key and switch to the next selection using the
key. The selection 7$**,1* appears. See Figure 7-49.
• The status of the tagging is displayed 7DJJLQJ → 'LVSOD\,
or changed using
• 7DJJLQJ → 6HW.
Figure 7-49 Tagging Equipment from the HMI
: MENU
_7_$_*_*_,_1_*____________________________
'LVSOD\_________²!___
6HW_____________²!___
_&_2_1_7_5_2_/______________________________
%UHDNHU_6ZLWFK__²!____
7DJJLQJ_________²!___
,QWHUORFN_______²!___
_0_$_,_1___0_(_1_8______________________
$QQXQFLDWLRQ___²!___
0HDVXUHPHQW____²!___
&RQWURO________²!___
Note:
The Manual Overwrite function is always done using the HMI on the SIPROTEC® 4
devices.
7UM61 Manual 7-43
C53000-G1176-C127-1
7.3.6 Switching Authority
Switching authority determines the command sources that are permitted for control.
From the
Device Front
With a device ready for operation, first press the key. The_0$,1_0(18 appears.
with the key. The selection_&21752/ appears.
Here, select the menu item &RQWURO_$XWK_ with the key and switch to the next
selection using the key. The selection &21752/_$87+_ appears (see Figure 7-50).
Figure 7-50 Setting Switching Authority with the Operator Control Panel
Pressing the key opens a selection window in which the options /2&$/_5(027(
are offered.
Choose the desired option using the and keys, and confirm with the key.
Acknowledge the subsequent message pressing the key.
Use the key to return to the 6:,7&+_$87+ level; the key to return to the 0$,1_
0(18.
From PC with
DIGSI® 4
For safety reasons, switching authority can only be changed locally using the keypad
on the front panel of the device. Switching authority cannot be changed with DIGSI® 4.
To perform control with DIGSI® 4, switching authority at the device must be set to 5(_
027(, or the test conditions for remote control of switching authority must not be set
to active. Switching authority is first transferred to DIGSI® 4 when the control window
(see Figure 7-44) is opened.
7.3.7 Switching Mode
The switching mode can be changed during operation; so, for example, non-interlocked
switching can be enabled during the commissioning of the installed equipment.
MENU
_&_2_1_7_5_2_/__________________________
!,QWHUORFN_____–> 3
>&RQWURO_$XWK__–> 4 _&_2_1_7_5_2_/___$_8_7_+__________________
_6ZLWFK_$XWK_!_/RFDO
ENTER
3:_8QORFN_&RQWURO"
_____ _______
Enter password No. 2 (for non-interlocked
switching) and acknowledge with ENTER
ENTER
_&_2_1_7_5_2__!_5_H_P_R_W_H__________
_6ZLWF__/RFDO__/RFDO
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
MENU
:
7-44 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
From the
Device Front
Here, select the menu item 6ZLWFK_0RGH with the key and switch to the next selection
using the key. The selection 6:,7&+_02'( appears (see Figure 7-51).
Figure 7-51 Operating Menu for Switching Mode Using Front Panel
Pressing the key opens a selection window in which the options ,17(5/2&.('_
121_,17(5/2&.(' are offered.
Make the choice using the and keys, and confirm with the key.
Acknowledge the safety inquiry that follows by again pressing the key. Use the
key to return to the &21752/ level. Press the key to return to the 0$,1_0(18.
From PC with
DIGSI® 4
When the 2Q_OLQH window in DIGSI® 4 is opened with a double click, the operating
functions for the device appear in the left part of the window (Figure 7-34). Clicking on
&RQWUROV brings up the function selection in the right side of the window (Figure 7-
43). By double clicking on %UHDNHU_6ZLWFKHV, a dialog field is opened in which,
among other options, the option for interlocked and non-interlocked (Unlock) switching
is offered.
To switch operating resources without a check of the associated interlocking conditions,
mark the option 8QORFN by clicking in that field, see section 7.3.1.
To set the switching mode for interlocked switching, the aforementioned option field
must not be marked. The marking is removed by clicking in the field again.
DANGER!
Only highly qualified personnel who have an exact knowledge of the power system
conditions shall perform non-interlocked switching. Inappropriate switching
operations can lead to death, serious personnel injury and property damage.
MENU
_&_2_1_7_5_2_/__________________________
!&RQWURO_$XWK__²!___
!&RQWURO_0RGH__²!___ _&_2_1_7_5_2_/___0_2_'_(_________
_0RGH/2&$/____!/2&.
ENTER 3:_8QORFN_&RQWURO"
_____ _______
Enter Password No. 2 (for non-interlocked
switching) and confirm with ENTER
_&_2_1_7__!_/RFNHG_______
_0RG___8QORFNHG_!/2&.__
________________
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
MENU
:
7UM61 Manual 7-45
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Further switching operations are possible until the dialog field %UHDNHU_6ZLWFKHV
is closed, or the switching mode is changed.
7.3.8 Control Messages
In the course of system control, the device generates several messages that document
the process. For example, messages may be given to report the end of a command
or provide the reason for a command denial. These messages and the associated
causes are listed in Table 7-3, together with other messages for the control of device
functions.
Table 7-3 Possible Control Messages
Message Text Message Cause
6\VWHP_(UURU Interruption by system error
0DQ_2YHUZULWH_2. Return routing carried out
0DQ_2YHUZULWH_)DLO Return routing cannot be carried out
&RQWURO_$ERUW_2. Command interruption carried out correctly
&RQWURO_$ERUW_)DLO Process cannot be interrupted because no command is issued,
command runs in different switching direction, or interruption is not
planned or set up.
&RQWURO_([HFXWHG Command was correctly executed and ended
&RQWURO_)DLOHG Refusal because the command number or the origination source is
not permitted
,QWHUORFNHG Refusal because the communication interface was blocked or the
command object is blocked by a protective function.
6ZLWFKJU_,QWORFNHG Refusal because the command object is subject to field interlocking
6ZLWFK_LQ_3RVLWLRQ Refusal because the present switch position = command direction
6HWWLQJ_(UURU Refusal because of a parameter fault, such as unknown command
type
1RW_$XWKRUL]HG Command from ON-SITE refused because command object is
subject to switching authority, which is set to REMOTE
&RQWURO_([SLUHG Refusal because command is too old (expiry monitor)
1R_&RQWURO_'HYLFH Information address is not planned as command output
&RQILJ__(UURU Refusal because no relay is assigned to this object, or the relay
jumpered in the device does not exist
&RQWURO_%ORFNHG Refusal because an output block is set
6\VWHP_2YHUORDG" Refusal because a relay to be controlled is already active (e.g., by
another command)
6:____WR_Q_HUURU" Refusal because another relay is already controlled
6\VWHP_2YHUORDG No more free timers available
8SSHU6HWW__/LPLW For transformer LTC step commands, highest level already
reached
/RZHU_6HWW__/LPLW For transformer LTC step commands, lowest level already reached
([HFXWLQJ_&RQWURO New command refused because a command is already in processing
7-46 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
7.3.9 Other Commands
The device is equipped with a serial interface for connection to SCADA. From there,
the device can receive standardized commands (according to the supported protocol)
and transmit them to the respective switching devices, or activate internal functions,
e.g. block inputs/outputs or set tags (manual overwrite), or release processing of functions
in the CFC. This command processing is determined during project planning and
configuration of the matrix.
n
&RPPDQG_7LPHRXW Feedback indication missing
%LQDU\,QS__,JQRUHG Recording block set
&KDWWHU_$FWLYH Flutter block is active
6HWW_&KDQJH_$FWLYH Refusal because parameter loading process is running
6WDWXV_&KDQJH_2. Status FRPPDQG_H[HFXWHG
6WDWXV_&KDQJH_)DLO Status command cannot be executed
&KDQJH_2. Marking executed
&KDQJH_)DLOHG Marking cannot be executed
&KHFNLQJ_,QWHUORFN Command is sent to the central unit to check system interlocking
6HWWLQJV__DUH_2. Parameter change was correctly accepted
7LPH_/LPLW_([SLUHG Parameter change was interrupted because time expired
7HUPLQDWHG_3LFNXS Parameter change interrupted because a fault became active during
parameterization
5HVWRUH_3DUDPHWHUV As a reaction to a fault recognized during parameterization, the last
active parameter set is activated again
3OHDVH_:DLW« Initiated process running and requires some time
&KHFNLQJ_6HWWLQJV The changed parameters are tested before acceptance
6ZJU__)HHGEDFN_2. Return message: destination reached
6ZJU__)HHGEDFN_)DLO Return message: destination not reached
&KDQJH_5HMHFWHG Parameter change was rejected (e.g., because time expired, or abnormal
occurrence during parameterization)
&RQWURO_2. Positive conclusion message for commands
9DOXH_,QFRUUHFW Plausibility error in command
Table 7-3 Possible Control Messages
Message Text Message Cause
7UM61 Manual 8-1
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Installation and Commissioning 8

This section is primarily for personnel who are experienced in installing, testing, and
commissioning protective and control systems, and are familiar with applicable safety
rules, safety regulations, and the operation of a power system.
Installation of the 7UM61 is described in this section. Connections for the device are
discussed. Hardware modifications that might be needed in certain cases are explained.
Connection verifications required before the device is put in service are also
given. Commissioning tests are provided. For primary testing, the protected object
(generator, motor, etc.) must be started up and in put into service.
8.1 Installation and Connections 8-2
8.2 Checking Connections 8-19
8.3 Commissioning Tests Performed with the Machine 8-31
8.4 Final Preparation of the Device 8-50
Installation and Commissioning
8-2 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
8.1 Installation and Connections
Requirements Verification of the 7UM61 according to Sub-section 3.2.1 and the connected
external
equipment must have been carried out.
8.1.1 Installation
Panel Flush
Mounting
The device housing can be 1/3 or 1/2 Full size depending on the version.
q Remove the four covers on the corners of the front cover. Four elongated holes in
the mounting angle strips become accessible.
Figure 8-1 Panel Mounting of a 7UM611 with 1/3 Size Housing
Warning!
Trouble free and safe use of this SIPROTEC® 4 device depends on proper transport,
storage, installation, and application of the device according to the warnings in this instruction
manual.
Of particular importance are the general installation and safety regulations for work in
a high-voltage environment (for example, ANSI, IEC, EN, DIN, or other national and
international regulations.) These regulations must be observed. Failure to observe
these precautions can result in death, personal injury, or severe damage of property.
SIEMENS SIPROTEC
12
6
3
0 +/-
45
789
TRIP
PICKUP
PICKUP L1
PICKUP L3
PICKUP GND
PICKUP L2
RUN ERROR 7UM611
MENU
LED ESC ENTER
F4
F1
F2
F3
Event Log
Operation Pri
0$,1_0(18________________
Annunciation 1
Measurement 2
Elongated
Trip Log
Holes
Device faulty
Reset
Min/Max

7UM61 Manual 8-3
C53000-G1176-C127-1
q Insert the device intothe panel cutout and fasten with four screws. Refer to Figure
10-8 or 10-9 in Section 10.21 for dimensions.
q Replace the four covers.
q Connect the ground on the rear plate of the device to the protective ground of the
panel. Use at least one M4 screw for the device ground. The cross-sectional area
of the ground wire must be greater than or equal to the cross-sectional area of any
other control conductor connected to the device. Furthermore, the cross-sectional
area of the ground wire must be at least AWG 13.
q Connect the plug terminals and/or the threaded terminals on the rear side of the device
according to the elementary diagram for the panel.
When using spade lugs or directly connecting wires to threaded terminals, the
screws must be tightened so that the heads are even with the terminal block before
the lugs or wires are inserted.
A ring lug must be centered in the connection chamber so that the screw thread fits
in the hole of the lug.
Section 2.1 has pertinent information regarding wire size, lugs, bending radii (optical
cables), etc.
Rack Mounting Two mounting brackets are necessary to install the 7UM61 in a rack. The order
number
for the brackets is given in the Appendix, Sub-section A.1.1.
Figure 8-2 Installing a 7UM611 (1/3 Size Housing) in a Rack or Cubicle
SIEMENS SIPROTEC
12
6
3
0 +/-
45
789
TRIP
PICKUP
PICKUP L1
PICKUP L3
PICKUP GND
PICKUP L2
RUN ERROR 7UM611
MENU
LED ESC ENTER
F4
F1
F2
F3
Event Log
Operation. Pr
MAIN MENU 01/05
Annunciation 1
Measurement 2
Mounting
Mounting
Trip Log
Bracket
Bracket
Device faulty
Reset
Min/Max

8-4 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 8-3 Installing a 7UM612 (1/2 Size Housing) in a Rack or Cubicle
q Loosely screw the two mounting brackets in the rack or cubicle with four screws.
q Remove the four covers on the corners of the front cover of the device. Four elongated
holes in the mounting angle strips become accessible.
q Fasten the device to the mounting brackets with four screws.
q Replace the four covers.
q Tighten the mounting brackets to the rack using 8 screws.
q Connect the ground on the rear plate of the device to the protective ground of the
rack. Use at least one M4 screw for the device ground. The cross-sectional area of
the ground wire must be greater than or equal to the cross-sectional area of any other
control conductor connected to the device. Furthermore, the cross-sectional area
of the ground wire must be at least AWG 13.
q Connect the plug terminals and/or the threaded terminals on the rear side of the device
according to the elementary diagram for the rack.
When using spade lugs or directly connecting wires to threaded terminals, the
screws must be tightened so that the heads are even with the terminal block before
the lugs or wires are inserted.
A ring lug must be centered in the connection chamber so that the screw thread fits
in the hole of the lug.
SIEMENS SIPROTEC
12
6
3
0 +/-
45
789
RUN ERROR 7UM612
MENU
LED ESC ENTER
F4
F1
F2
F3
0$,1_0(18_________________
Mounting Bracket
Mounting Bracket
TRIP
PICKUP L3
Device faulty
PICKUP GND
PICKUP L1
PICKUP L2
PICKUP
Event Log
Operation. Pr
Trip Log
Reset
Min/Max
7UM61 Manual 8-5
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Section 2.1 has pertinent information regarding wire size, lugs, bending radius (fiber
cables), etc.
Panel Surface
Mounting
q Secure the device to the panel with four screws. Refer to Figure 10-10 and 10-11
in Section 10.21 for dimensions.
q Connect the ground of the device to the protective ground of the panel. The crosssectional
area of the ground wire must be greater than or equal to the cross-sectional
area of any other control conductor connected to the device. Furthermore, the
cross-sectional area of the ground wire must be at least AWG 13.
q Solid, low impedance operational grounding (cross-sectional area ≥ AWG 13) must
be connected to the grounding surface on the side. Use at least one M4 screw for
the device ground.
q Connect the threaded terminals on the top and bottom of the device according to
the elementary diagram for the panel. Section 2.2 has pertinent information regarding
wire size, lugs, bending radius (fiber cable), etc.
8.1.2 Connections
Currents/Voltages CT and VT connections for a 7UM61 are shown in the Appendix, Section A.3.
Figures
A-5 to A-7 show examples of current transformer circuit connections with busbar connection
(address _____6&+(0( = %XVEDU), Figures A-8 and A-9 with block connection
(address ____ = 8QLW_WUDQVI_). In all examples the CT starpoints point towards
the machine; therefore, address ____ must be set to &7_6WDUSRLQW = WR_
ZDUGV_PDFKLQH.
In Figures A-5 to A-7, the UE input of the device is connected to the open delta winding
of a voltage transformer set. Consequently, address _____PXVW_EH_VHW_WR_8(_
&211(&7,21 = GHOWD_ZLQGLQJ.
In Figure A-7, the sensitive earth fault current input of the device is used to measure
the difference between the starpoint current and the total current measured by the cable-
type CT.
In Figure A-8, the UE input of the device is connected via a voltage divider to the open
delta winding of an earthing transformer (address _____8(_&211(&7,21 = GHOWD_
ZLQGLQJ). Factor ____ 8SK_8GHOWD is determined by the transformation ratio of the
secondary-side voltages:
The resulting factor between the secondary windings is 3/√3 = 1.73. For situations
where displacement voltage is measured by the device and other types of voltage
transformer connections are utilized, the setting at address ____ should be modified
accordingly.
Factor _____)$&725_8( considers all of the transformation ratios between the primary
voltage and the voltage fed to the device terminals, i.e. it includes the voltage
divider that is connected upstream. For a primary nominal transformer voltage of
UN prim.
3
-------------------
UN sec.
3
⁄ -----------------
UN sec.
3
⁄ -----------------
8-6 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6.3 kV, a secondary voltage of 500 V in case of full displacement and a voltage divider
ratio of 1:5, this factor would be:
For additional hints, please refer to section 6.1.3 under „UE transformation ratio“.
Factor ____ )$&725_,(( considers the transformation ratio between the primary and
the secondary side of the summation current transformer in Figure A-7.
Example:
Summation current transformer 60 A/1 A
Matching value for the sensitive earth fault detection: )$&725_,(( = ____
The IEE input in Figure A-8 evaluates the earth fault current flowing between the rotor
and the ground as a result of injecting a voltage into the rotor circuit by means of the
additional source device 7XR61. The matching factor )$&725_,(( is set to = ___.
In Figure A-9 the displacement voltage is picked up at the neutral transformer (address
_____8__&211(&7,21 = QHXWU__WUDQVI_).
Figure A-10 shows an example of a generator with neutral conductor.
Figure A-11 shows how a connection is made with only two plant-side voltage transformers
in V connection. Figure A-12 shows the connection with only two plant-side
current transformers.
Binary Inputs and
Outputs
The masking options for the binary inputs and outputs, i.e. the procedure for matching
the 7UM61 to the individual plant, are described in section 5.2. The tables of section
A.6 in the Appendix show the allocation of all binary inputs and outputs and of the
LEDs to physical outputs when the device is delivered from the factory. Please check
also the conformity of the front panel labeling strips with the actually configured signaling
functions.
Changing Setting
Groups with Binary
Inputs
If binary inputs are used to switch setting groups:
• One binary input must be dedicated for the purpose of changing setting groups
when two groups are to be switched. This input is named “!6HW_*URXS_%LW__”.
• The logical binary input must be allocated to a physical input module in order to allow
control. An input is treated as not energized when it is not assigned to any physical
input.
• If the binary input is configured as a make circuit, i.e. as active when voltage is applied
(H active), the setting groups are assigned as follows:
– not energized: Setting group A
– energized: Setting group B
• The status of the signal controlling the binary input to activate a particular setting
group must remain constant as long as that particular group is to remain active.
Trip Circuit
Monitoring
One or two binary inputs can be used for monitoring a circuit breaker trip coil. An alarm
can be given if the coil is interrupted when the breaker circuit position is closed or open
(2 inputs used).
6.3 kV ⁄( 3)
500 V
--------------------------------- 5
1
 ⋅ ---
)$&725_8(_  = 36.4
7UM61 Manual 8-7
C53000-G1176-C127-1
When two binary inputs are used, please note that floating inputs, i.e. inputs without
common potential, must be connected according to circuit diagram 6-64 in section
6.19.5, whereas binary inputs with common potential must be connected according to
circuit diagram 6-66.
When one binary input is used for trip circuit monitoring, the calculation for the necessary
resistance R must be done according to Sub-section 6.19.5. A resistor with the
necessary value must be included in the circuit branch with 52/b as shown in Figure
6-67, Sub-section 6.19.5.
In the first and in the last case, it should be noted that the components are connected
in series – the two binary inputs or the binary input and the resistor R. The pickup
threshold of the binary inputs must be less than half of the nominal value of the DC
control voltage.
8.1.3 Hardware Modifications
Hardware adjustments might be necessary or desired. For example, a change of the
pickup threshold for some of the binary inputs might be advantageous in certain applications.
Terminating resistors might be required for the communication bus. In either
case, hardware modifications are needed. The modifications are done with jumpers
on the printed circuit boards inside the 7UM61. Follow the procedure below, “Jumpers
on the Printed Circuit Boards”, whenever hardware modifications are done.
Power Supply
Voltage
There are different ranges for the input voltage of the various power supplies. Refer to
the data for the 7UM61 ordering numbers in Section A.1 of the Appendix. The power
supplies with the ratings [60/110/125 VDC] and [110/125/220/250 VDC 115 VAC] are
interchangeable. Four jumper settings determine the rating. The settings necessary to
convert one range to the other are provided below, “Jumpers on the Printed Circuit
Boards”. When the device is delivered, these jumpers are set according to the nameplate
sticker. Typically, these settings are not changed.
Live Status Contact The contacts of the live status (alarm) relay connected to terminals F3 and
F4 of the
device can be either normally closed or normally open. The choice is made with the
setting of jumper X40. The appropriate setting of the jumper for the contact type desired,
and the location of the jumper on the printed circuit board, are described below
in “Jumpers on the Printed Circuit Boards.“
Changeover Contact
for BO 4 and
BO 17
The variant 7UM6121) features, in addition to the live status contact, two other binary
outputs (BO 4 and BO17) that are equipped with changeover contacts. The device terminals
can be connected to either the NC or the NO contact; the choice is made by
jumpers. The allocation of the jumpers to the contact types and the location of the
jumpers on the printed circuit board, are described below in “Jumpers on the Printed
Circuit Boards“.
Nominal Currents The rating of the current input transformers of the device can be changed to 1
A or 5 A
with jumper settings that determine the secondary loading of the transformers. The
physical arrangements of these jumpers that correspond to the different current ratings
are described below, “Jumpers on the Printed Circuit Boards”.
All these jumpers (X61 to X63 and X60) must be in the same position: 1 A or 5 A.
1.from version ...-4 of the I/O2 board
8-8 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
For the sensitive earth fault current input (input transformer T8) jumper X64 is dispensed
with.
If nominal current ratings are changed, then the new ratings must be altered under Address
_____&7_6(&21'$5< in the 3_6\VWHP_'DWD_ (see Sub-section 6.1.3).
Control Voltages
for Binary Inputs
When the device is delivered from the factory, the binary inputs are set to operate with
a DC control voltage that corresponds to the rated DC voltage of the power supply. In
general, to optimize the operation of the inputs, the pickup voltage of the inputs should
be set to most closely match the actual control voltage being used. In some cases
such as the one described in the note below, lowering the pickup voltage might be necessary.
Each binary input has a pickup voltage that can be independently adjusted;
therefore, each input can be set according to the function performed.
A jumper position is changed to adjust the pickup voltage of a binary input. The physical
arrangement of the binary input jumpers in relation to the pickup voltages is explained
below, “Jumpers on the Printed Circuit Boards”.
Serial Interfaces When the device is delivered from the factory, the serial interfaces are matched
to the
ordered version according to the 11th and 12th figure of the ordering code (or, where
applicable, to the additional information specified in the order). The configuration as
an RS232 or RS485 interface is determined by jumpers on the interface module. The
physical arrangement is described below, “Jumpers on the Printed Circuit Boards”.
For reliable data transmission, an RS 485 bus should be terminated with resistors at
the last device on the bus. Terminating resistors are provided in a 7UM61. As delivered
from the factory, the resistors are switched out. Two jumper positions must be
changed to switch-in the resistors. The jumper positions and the corresponding states
of the resistors are covered below, “Jumpers on the Printed Circuit Boards”. Both
jumpers must always be set in the same position.
As delivered from the factory, the resistors are switched out.
Jumpers on the
Printed Circuit
Boards
If changes to jumper settings are required to modify the rating of the power supply, the
nominal rating of the current input transformers, the pickup voltage of binary inputs, or
the state of the terminating resistors, proceed as follows:
o The following equipment is needed:
Note:
If the 7UM61 performs trip circuit monitoring, two binary inputs, or one binary input and
a resistor, are connected in series. The pickup voltage of these inputs must be less
than half of the nominal DC voltage of the trip circuit.
Caution!
Jumper-setting changes that affect nominal values of the device render the ordering
number and the corresponding nominal values on the nameplate sticker invalid. If
such changes are necessary, the changes should be clearly and fully noted on the device.
Self adhesive stickers are available that can be used as replacement nameplates.
7UM61 Manual 8-9
C53000-G1176-C127-1
− Grounded mat for protecting components subject to damage from electrostatic discharges
(ESD).
− Screwdriver with a 6 mm wide tip,
− #1 Phillips screwdriver,
− 4.5 mm socket or nut driver.
o Unfasten the screw-posts of the D-subminiature connector on the back panel at location
“A”. This activity does not apply if the device is for surface mounting.
o If the device has more communication interfaces at locations “B” and/or “C” on the
rear, the screws located diagonally to the interfaces must be removed. This activity is
not necessary if the device is for surface-mounting.
o Remove the four corner caps on the front cover and loosen the screws that become
accessible.
o Carefully pull off the front cover. The front cover is connected to the CPU board with
a short ribbon-cable.
o At one end, disconnect the ribbon-cable between the front cover and the CPU board
(å). To disconnect the cable, push up the top latch of the plug connector and push
down the bottom latch of the plug connector. Carefully set aside the front cover.
The locations of the printed circuit boards are shown in Figures 8-4 and 8-6.
o Disconnect the ribbon-cables between the CPU board (å) and the I/O board (ﾁ) or
I/O boards I/O (ﾁ and ê).
o Remove the boards and set them on the grounded mat to protect them from ESD damage.
A greater effort is required to withdraw the CPU board, especially in versions of
the device for surface-mounting, because of the communication connectors.
o Check the jumpers according to Figures 8-6 to 8-10, and Tables 8-1 to 8-5. Change
or remove the jumpers as necessary.
Caution!
Electrostatic discharges through the connections of the components, wiring, plugs,
and jumpers must be avoided. Wearing a grounded wrist strap is preferred. Otherwise,
first touch a grounded metal part. Do not insert or remove the port plugs under live
conditions!
8-10 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 8-4 7UM611: Front view after removing the front cover (simplified and reduced)
Figure 8-5 7UM612: Front view (1/2 Size Housing) after removing the front cover (simplified
and reduced)
Slot 5 Slot 19
BI1 to Binary Inputs (BI)
12
BI7
1
2 Input/OutputPrinted Circuit Board I/O
Processor Printed Circuit Board CPU
1
2
3
Slot 5 Slot 19 Slot 33
BI1 to BI8 to Binary Inputs (BI)
Input/Output Printed Circuit Board I/O-1
Input/Output Printed Circuit Board I/O-2
Processor Printed Circuit Board CPU
132
BI7 BI15
7UM61 Manual 8-11
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Auxiliary Voltage/
Live StatusContact/
Control Voltage of
Binary Inputs BI 1
through BI 7
On the CPU board, check the provided nominal voltage of the integrated power supply
according to Table 8-1, the non-energized position of the live status contact (jumper
X40 according to Table 8-2) and the selected pickup voltages of the binary inputs BI1
through BI7 according to Table 8-3.
Figure 8-6 Jumpers On The CPU Board For The Power Supply And Binary Inputs BI1 To
BI7 (Simplified)
G1
+–
F1
X21
LH
X53
3
1
2
X52
4321
X22
LH
X23
LH
X40
3
1
2
X24
LH
X25
L H X26
LH
X27
LH
X51
3
1
2
8-12 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
1) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 24 VDC to 125 VDC.
2) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 110 VDC to 220 VDC and
115 VAC.
Table 8-1 Jumper Settings for the Nominal Voltage of the Integrated Power Supply on the
CPU Board
Jumper Nominal Voltage
60/110/125 VDC 110/125/220/250 VDC
115 VAC
24/48 VDC
X51 1-2 2-3 Jumpers X51
through X53 are
not used
X52 1-2 and 3-4 2-3
X53 1-2 2-3
Can be interchanged Not changeable
Table 8-2 Jumper Settings for the Non-Energized Position of the Live Status contact on
the CPU Board
Jumper Non-Energized Position
Open
Non-Energized Position
Closed
Factory Setting
X40 1-2 2-3 2-3
Table 8-3 Jumper Settings for the Pickup Voltages of the Binary Inputs BI1 through BI7
on the CPU Board
Binary Input Jumper 17 VDC
Pickup1)
73 VDC Pickup2)
BI1 X21 L H
BI2 X22 L H
BI3 X23 L H
BI4 X24 L H
BI5 X25 L H
BI6 X26 L H
BI7 X27 L H
7UM61 Manual 8-13
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Control Voltage of
Binary Inputs BI 8
through BI 15;
NO/NC Contact R4
(only 7UM612)
On the I/O-1 board of 7UM612, check the selected pickup voltages of the binary inputs
BI8 through BI15, according to Table 8-5.
The assignment of the binary inputs to the printed circuit board is shown in Figure 8-
7, along with the locations on the board.
Figure 8-7 Jumpers on the I/O–1 Board for the Binary Inputs BI8 to BI15 (simplified)
For one specific relay (R4)1 the contact type can be changed from normally open to
normally closed (see overview diagrams in section A.2 of the Appendix).
1.Choice of contact type from version ...-4 of the I/O–1 board
Table 8-4 Jumper Settings for the Contact of Relay R4 (Binary Output BO 4)
Jumper Non-Energized Position Open
(NO Contact)
Non-Energized Position Closed
(NC Contact)
Factory Setting
X40 1–2 2–3 1–2
LMH
X22
X21
LMH
X24
X23
LMH
X26
X25
LMH
X28
X27
LMH
X30
X29
LMH
X32
X31
LMH
X34
X33
LMH
X36
X35
X40
3
1
2
X71 (AD0)
HL
8-14 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
1) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 24 VDC to 125 VDC.
2) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 110 VDC to 220 VDC and 115 VAC.
Bus Address Jumper X71 is used to set the bus address. Its position in the 7UM612 is “H“ and
must
not be changed.
Table 8-5 Factory jumper settings for the Pickup Voltages of the binary inputs
BI 8 through BI 15 on the I/O-1 board
Binary Input Jumper 17 VDC Pickup1) 73 VDC Pickup2) 154 VDC Pickup
BI 8 X21/X22 L M H
BI 9 X23/X24 L M H
BI 10 X25/X26 L M H
BI 11 X27/X28 L M H
BI 12 X29/X30 L M H
BI 13 X31/X32 L M H
BI 14 X33/X34 L M H
BI 15 X35/X36 L M H
7UM61 Manual 8-15
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Nominal Currents;
Changeover Contact
for BO 171
Check the setting of the nominal currents for the current input transformers T5 through
T8 and the selected contact type1 of binary output BO 17 (NO or NC contact, jumper
X31 according to Table 8-6) on the I/O-2 board.
Figure 8-8 I/O–2 board Showing the Jumpers Settings to be Checked
1.Choice of contact type from version ...–4
Table 8-6 Jumper Settings for Choosing the Contact Type of Binary Output BO 17 on the
I/O–2 Board (from Version ...–4)
Jumper NO Contact NC Contact Factory Setting
X31 1-2 2-3 1-2
ID of board version
X64
5A
1A 123
X61
5A
1A 123
X63
5A
1A 123
X62
5A
1A 123
X60
5A
1A 123
T8
T6
T7
T5
T3 T2
T1
T4
X71
123
H[
L[
X72
123
X73
]H
]L
X31
1
2
3
6,(0(16 3 4 5
(AD2)
(AD1)
(AD0)

8-16 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Bus Address Jumpers X71, X72 and X73 on the I/O-2 board are used to set the bus address
and
must not be changed. Table 8-7 shows the factory setting of the jumpers.
o Only for devices with a serial port having bus capability:
The system and the service port are each located on a card that is mounted on the
CPU board and screwed inside the device on the rear (slot “B“ and slot “C“).
There is one variant for the RS232/RS485 interface (see Figure 8-9) and one for the
Profibus/Modbus interface (see Figure 8-10).
RS232/RS485 RS232 can be changed to RS485and vice versa by setting the jumpers on the
interface
cards. Figure 8-9 shows the physical location of the jumpers. Table 8-8 shows
which jumper settings are associated to RS232 and RS485 respectively. When the device
is delivered from the factory, the jumper setting corresponds to the configuration
ordered and need not be changed.
Jumpers X5 through X10 must be set on the same position!
Terminating resistors
The X3 and X4 jumpers for configuring the terminating resistors of a serial interface
are shown in Figure 8-9 for the RS485 interface and in Figure 8-10 for the Profibus
interface. The jumpers are set at the factory so that the terminating resistors are
switched out (position 1–2). Jumpers X3 and X4 must always have the same setting.
Table 8-7 Factory Jumper Setting on the I/O-2 Board
Jumper 1/3 Size and 1/2 Size Housing
X71 (AD0) 1–2 (H)
X72 (AD1) 1–2 (H)
X73 (AD2) 2–3 (L)
Table 8-8 Configuration of Jumpers for RS 232 or RS 485 on the Interface Card
Jumper X5 X6 X7 X8 X10 X11 X12 X13
RS 232 1–2 1–2 1–2 1–2 1–2 2–3 1–2 1–2
RS 485 2–3 2–3 2–3 2–3 2–3 2–3 1–2 1–2
7UM61 Manual 8-17
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 8-9 Location of the Jumpers for Configuring the Terminating Resistors of the Interface
Profibus (FMS / DP)
Modbus
For the Profibus (FMS and DP) and the Modbus interface there is a different version
of the interface card with a variety of component combinations (see Figure 8-10).
Jumpers X3 and X4 are set at the factory so that the terminating resistors are
switched-out.
Both jumpers must always be set for the same position.
Figure 8-10 Location of the Jumpers for Configuring the Profibus–Interface Terminating Resistors
Terminating resistors can also be implemented outside the device (e.g. in the plug
connectors). In that case the terminating resistors provided on the interface card must
be switched out.
Figure 8-11 Terminating resistors (external)
X3
123
X10
123
8X
1
32
X12
123
C53207-
A324-B180
1
32
X11
X6
X7
X4
X5
123
1
32
X13
Jumper
Terminating Resistors
Connected Disconnected
X3 2-3 1-2*)
X4 2-3 1-2*)
*) Factory Set
Jumper
Terminating Resistors
Connected Disconnected
X3 1-2 2-3*)
X4 1-2 2-3*)
*) Factory Set
X3
321
X4
321
C53207-A322- 2 3 4
B100
B101
392 Ω
221 Ω
392 Ω
+5 V
A/A´
B/B´
8-18 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
To reassemble
the device:
o Carefully insert the boards into the case. The installation locations of the boards are
shown in Figures 8-4 and 8-5. For the model of the device designed for surface-mounting,
use the metal lever to insert the CPU board. The installation is easier with the lever.
o By first attaching to the I/O board(s), connect the ribbon cable between the I/O
board(s) and the CPU board. Be especially careful not to bend any of the connector
pins! Do not use any force! Be sure that the plug connectors latch.
o Connect the ribbon cable between the CPU board and the front cover. Be especially
careful not to bend any of the connector pins! Do not use any force! Be sure that the
plug connectors latch.
o Close the locking clips of the plug connectors.
o Carefully replace the front cover being mindful of the ribbon-cable. Fasten the cover
to the case with the screws.
o Insert and tighten the screw-posts for the D-subminiature connector at location "A" on
the rear of the device. This task does not apply if the device is for surface mounting.
o Insert and tighten the screws for the communication interfaces at locations "B" and "C"
on the back panel of the device. This task is not necessary if the device is for surfacemounting.
o Replace the four corner covers.
7UM61 Manual 8-19
C53000-G1176-C127-1
8.2 Checking Connections
8.2.1 Data Connections
8.2.1.1 Serial Interfaces
The following tables shows the pin-assignments for the various serial interfaces and
for the time synchronization interface of the device.
PC Interface at
Front
When the recommended communication cable is used, correct connection between
the SIPROTEC® device and the PC is automatically ensured. See the Appendix, Subsection
A.1.1 for an ordering description of the cable.
System Interface When a serial interface of the device is connected to a a central control system
(SCADA),
the data connection must be checked. A visual check of the transmit channel and
the receive channel is important. In the RS232 and the FO interface, each connection
is dedicated to one transmission direction. The data output of one device must be connected
to the data input of the other device, and vice versa.
The data cable connections must conform to DIN 66020 and ISO 2110 (see also Table
8-9):
− TxD data transmit
− RxD data receive
− RTS request to send
− CTS clear to send
− GND signal/chassis ground
The cable screen is to be grounded at both ends. In environments with extremely
high electromagnetic interference, the EMC immunity can be improved by running the
GND conductor as a separate, individually screened wire pair..
*) Pin 7 also can carry the RS 232 RTS signal to an RS 485 interface. Pin 7 must therefore
not be connected!
Table 8-9 Installation of the D-Subminiature Ports
Pin No. PC Interface at
Front
RS 232 RS 485 Profibus FMS Slave, RS 485 DNP3.0, Modbus, RS485
1 Screen (with screen ends electrically connected)
2 RxD RxD – – –
3 TxD TxD A/A’ (RxD/TxD–N) B/B’ (RxD/TxD–P) A
4 – – – CNTR–A (TTL) RTS (TTL)
5 GND GND C/C’ (GND) C/C’ (GND) GND1
6 – – – + 5V voltage supply
(max. load < 100 mA)
VCC1
7 – RTS –*) –*) –
8 – CTS B/B’ (RxD/TxD–P) A/A’ (RxD/TxD–N) B
9–––––
8-20 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
RS 485
Termination
The RS 485 interface is capable of half-duplex mode with the signals A/A’ and B/B’
with a common relative potential C/C’ (GND). Verify that only the last device on the
bus has the terminating resistors connected, and that the other devices on the bus do
not. The jumpers for the terminating resistors are on the interface card mounted on the
CPU board. Refer to Figure 8-9 (RS485) and to Figure 8-10 (Profibus). Terminating
resistors can also be implemented outside the device (e.g. in the plug connectors). In
that case the terminating resistors provided on the interface card must be switched
out.
If the bus is extended, make sure again that only the last device on the bus has the
terminating resistors switched-in, and that all other devices on the bus do not.
Time
Synchronization
Interface
Either 5 VDC, 12 VDC or 24 VDC time synchronization signals can be processed if the
connections are made as indicated in Table 8-10.
Optical Fibers Signals transmitted via optical fibers are unaffected by interference. The fibers
guarantee
electrical isolation between the connections. Transmit and receive connections
are shown with the symbols for transmit and for receive.
The normal setting for the optical fiber interface is ”Light off.” If this setting is to be
changed, use the operating program DIGSI® 4, as described in Section 5.5.
8.2.1.2 Test Mode and Blocking Data Transmission
If the SIPROTEC®4 device is connected to a central or main computer system via the
SCADA interface, then the information that is transmitted can be influenced. This is
only possible with some of the protocols availabel (see Table “Protocol-dependent
functions” in the Appendix).
If 7HVW_PRGH is set 21, then a message sent by the device to the main system has
an additional test bit. This bit allows the message to be recognized as resulting from
testing and not an actual fault or power system event.
If 'DWD6WRS is set 21, transmission to the SCADA is blocked.
Both of these features should be checked. The procedures for setting 7HVW_PRGH and
'DWD6WRS are described in Sub-section 7.2.3. Note that when DIGSI® 4 is being
Table 8-10 Pin-assignments for the D-subminiature port of the Time Synchronization
Interface
Pin-No. Designation Signal Meaning
1 P24_TSIG Input 24 V
2 P5_TSIG Input 5 V
3 M_TSIG Return Line
4––
5 Screen Screen Potential
6––
7 P12_TSIG Input 12 V
8––
9 Screen Screen Potential
7UM61 Manual 8-21
C53000-G1176-C127-1
used, the program must be in the 2QOLQH operating mode for the test features to be
used.
8.2.1.3 Generate indications
Preliminary Notes If the device provides a system interface, and if this interface is used to
communicate
with a central or master computer system, the DIGSI® 4 software can be used to test
whether the messages are being transmitted correctly. This test option should however
definitely not be used while the device is in service on a live system.
Note: After termination of the test mode, the device will reboot. Thereby, all annunciation
buffers are erased. If required, the events in these buffers should be extracted
with DIGSI® 4 prior to the test.
The interface test can be done using DIGSI® 4 in the online operating mode:
q Open the 2QOLQH directory by double-clicking; the operating functions for the device
appear.
q Click on 7HVW; the function selection appears in the right half of the screen.
q In the view of the list, double click on the dialogue box 7HVW²0HOGXQJHQ_IﾁU_
6\VWHPVFKQLWWVWHOOH. The dialogue box *HQHUDWH_,QGLFDWLRQV is
opened
(refer to Figure 8-12).
Structure of the
Test Dialogue Box
In the column ,QGLFDWLRQ, the display text of all messages are shown, which were
assigned to the system interface in the matrix during configuration. In the column
6(732,17_VWDWXV the state of the message that has to be tested can be defined.
Depending on the message type, different prompts are provided for this purpose (e.g.
HYHQW_FRPLQJ_HYHQW_JRLQJ_. By clicking in a field, it becomes possible to select
the desired state in a pull-down list.
DANGER!
The initiation or extraction of messages via the system interface using the test
function constitutes an actual exchange of information between the device and
the control system. Connected plant such as e.g. circuit breakers or isolators
may be switched as a result of this!
8-22 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 8-12 Dialog Box: Generate indications
Changing the Operating
State
Following the first operation of one of the keys in the column $FWLRQ a prompt for the
entry of password Nr. 6 (for hardware test menus) appears. After correct entry of the
password, individual messages can be initiated. To do this, click on the button 6HQG
in the corresponding line. The corresponding message is initiated and can now be retrieved
as part of the operational alarms in the SIPROTEC® device, as well as from
the central or master station of the plant.
Further tests remain possible while the dialog box is open.
Test in the Transmission
Direction
For all information that has to be transmitted to the control system, open the dropdown
list in the column 6(732,17_VWDWXV and test the alternatives listed there:
q Ensure that any switching operations that may result from these tests can be executed
without danger (see above under DANGER!).
q With the function to be tested, click on send, and check that the corresponding information
is received at the central or master station, and, if required, the expected
response results.
Test in the Control
Direction
The information elements starting with a „>“–character are transmitted to the device.
Such information must be initiated by the control centre. The correct response in the
device must be checked.
Exiting the
Procedure
To end the interface test, click on &ORVH. The dialog box closes. The device becomes
unavailable for a brief start-up period immediately after this.
7UM61 Manual 8-23
C53000-G1176-C127-1
8.2.2 Checking the Device Connections
General The device connections must be checked to ensure the correct integration of the device
e.g. in the cubicle. The check includes, among others, the wiring and the functionality
as specified in the set of drawings, the visual inspection of the protection system
and a simplified functional test of the protective device.
Auxiliary Voltage
Supply
Before applying power supply voltage or measuring quantities for the first time, be
sure the device has been in the operating area for at least two hours. This time period
allows the device to attain temperature equilibrium, and prevents dampness and condensation
from occurring.
o Close the protective switches to apply voltage to the power supply. Check the polarity
and magnitude of the voltage at the device terminals or at the connector modules.
Visual Inspection Check the cubicle and the devices for damage, condition of the connections
etc, and
device earthing.
Secondary Testing This test does not undertake to check the individual protection functions for
the accuracy
of their pick-up values and characteristic curves. Unlike analog electronic or electromechanical
protective devices, no protection function test is required within the
framework of the device test, since this is ensured by the factory tests. Protection functions
are only used to check the device connections.
A plausibility check of the analog-digital converter with the operational measured values
is sufficient since the subsequent processing of the measured values is numerical
and thus internal failures of protection functions can be ruled out.
Where secondary tests are to be performed, a three-phase test equipment providing
test currents and voltages is recommended (e.g. Omicron CMC 56 for manual and automatic
testing). The phase angle between currents and voltages should be continuously
controllable.
The accuracy which can be achieved during testing depends on the accuracy of the
testing equipment. The accuracy values specified in the Technical data can only be
reproduced under the reference conditions set down in IEC 60255 resp. VDE 0435/
part 303 and with the use of precision measuring instruments.
Tests can be performed using the currently set values or the default values.
If unsymmetrical currents and voltages occur during the tests it is likely that the asymmetry
monitoring will frequently operate. This is of no concern because the condition
of steady-state measured values is monitored and, under normal operating conditions,
these are symmetrical; under short circuit conditions these monitoring systems are not
effective.
Note:
If a redundant supply is used, there must be a permanent, i.e. uninterruptible shunt
between the minus polarity connectors of system 1 and system of the d.c. voltage supply
(no switching device, no fuse), because otherwise there is a risk of voltage doubling
in case of a double earth fault.
8-24 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Note: During dynamic testing, at least one a.c. measured quantity should be present
at one of the analog inputs, with a sufficient amplitude.
The measured quantities of the earth paths (IEE, UE) cannot be used for the integrated
follow–up circuit. During tests concerning IEE or UE, at least one a.c. measured quantity
must be applied to one of the phase inputs.
Wiring It is particularly important to check the correct wiring and allocation of all device
interfaces.
The test function described in section 8.2.3.1 for checking the binary inputs and
outputs is a useful instrument for this. For analog inputs a plausibility check can be
performed as described above under the side titel “Secondary testing”.
Functional Test The only functional test required for protective relays is a plausibility check of
the operational
measured values by means of some secondary test equipment; this is to ensure
that no damage has occurred during transit (see also side title “Secondary testing”).
Note: In devices where the undervoltage protection function is configured and activated,
please note the following: special measures have been taken to ensure that the
device does not pick up immediately after applying the auxiliary power supply, as a
result of the mesuring voltage that is not yet present at the moment of power-up. However,
the device does pick up as soon as operating state 1 (measuring quantities exist)
has been attained.
Test Switches Check the functions of all test switches that are installed for the purposes of
secondary
testing and isolation of the device. Of particular importance are test switches in current
transformer circuits. Be sure these switches short-circuit the current transformers
when they are in the test mode.
8.2.3 Checking the Integration in the Plant
8.2.3.1 General Hints
This test is performed to ensure that the protective device is correctly integrated into
the plant to be protected.
One important step in the test is the check of the protection configuration (masking and
setting values) for conformity with the plant requirements.
An integration test across all interfaces allows to check on one hand the cubicle wiring
and the functionality in accordance with the set of drawings, and on the other hand the
correct wiring between the sensor or transformer and the protective device.
Warning!
The following procedures are carried out with dangerous voltages present. Therefore,
only qualified people who are familiar with and adhere to the safety procedures and
precautionary measures shall perform the procedures.
7UM61 Manual 8-25
C53000-G1176-C127-1
This test does not undertake to check the individual protection functions for the accuracy
of their pick-up values and characteristic curves, since this is ensured by the factory
tests.
Auxiliary Voltage
Supply
Check the voltage magnitude and polarity at the input terminals.
Visual Inspection − Check the cubicle and the devices for damage;
− Check the earthing of the cubicle and of the protective device;
− Check the external cabling for condition and completeness.
Inventory of the
Technical Plant
Data
In order to check the protection configuration (masking and setting values) for conformity
with the plant requirements, it is necessary to make an inventory of the technical
data for the individual components of the primary plant. These components include,
among others, the generator, the block transformer and the measuring transformers.
Where deviations from the planning data are found, the settings of the protection must
be modified accordingly.
Analog Inputs The check of the current and voltage transformer circuits includes:
• Inventory of the technical data
• Visual inspection of the transformers, e.g. for damage, mounting position and connections
• Check of the transformer earthing, especially the earthing of the open delta winding
in only one phase
• Check of the cabling for conformity with the circuit diagram
Other checks that may be necessary for a specific job include:
• Measuring the cable insulation
• Measuring the transformation ratio and the polarity
• Measuring the burden
Note:
If a redundant supply is used, there must be a permanent, i.e. uninterruptible shunt
between the minus connectors of system 1 and system of the d.c. voltage supply (no
switching device, no fuse), because otherwise there is a risk of voltage doubling in
case of a double earth fault.
Caution!
Operating the device on a battery charger without a connected battery can lead to unusually
high voltages and consequently, the destruction of the device. For limit values
see Sub-section 10.1.2 under Technical Data.
8-26 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Binary Inputs and
Outputs
See also section 8.2.3.2.
q Setting the binary inputs:
− Check the jumper settings for the pick-up thresholds and modify, if necessary (see
section 8.1.3, Figures 8-6 and 8-7, as well as Tables 8-3 and 8-5)
− Check the pick-up threshold – if possible – with a variable d.c. voltage source
q Check the tripping circuits from the command relays and the tripping lines down to
the various components (circuit breakers, excitation circuit, stop valves, switchover
devices etc.)
q Check the signal processing from the signal relays and the signal lines down to the
station control and protection system; to do so, energize the signal contacts of the
protective device and check the texts in the station control and protection system
q Check the control circuits from the output relays and the control lines down to the
circuit breakers and disconnectors etc.
q Check the binary input signals from the signal lines down to the protective device
by activating the external contacts
Auxiliary Contact of
VT Protective
Switches
Since it is very important for the undervoltage protection, the impedance protection
and the voltage-dependent inverse time overcurrent protection that these functions
are blocked automatically if the circuit breaker for the voltage transformers has
tripped, the blocking should be checked along with the voltage circuits. Open for this
the VT protective switches.
When the voltage on the binary input connected to this auxiliary contact is removed,
the message “!)$,/_)(('(5_97_21” should appear in the Event Log. When the
voltage is restored, the message “!)$,/_)(('(5_97 OFF” should occur. If one of
these messages does not appear, then the connections and the configuration settings
should be checked. If the ON and OFF messages are exchanged, then the breaker
auxiliary contact type should be checked and corrected if necessary (refer to Sub-section
5.2).
8.2.3.2 Checking the Binary Inputs and Outputs
Preliminary Notes The binary inputs, outputs, and LEDs of a SIPROTEC®4 device can be
individually
and precisely controlled in DIGSI® 4. This feature can be used, for example, to verify
control wiring from the device to substation equipment (operational checks), during
start-up. The test feature should not be used for routine maintenance when the device
and protected equipment are in service (“hot” conditions).
Note: After the Hardware Test is complete, the device enters a start-up phase. All
message buffers are erased.
The Hardware Test can be done using DIGSI® 4 in the online operating mode:
DANGER!
Changing the status of a binary input or output using the test feature of DIGSI® 4
results in an actual and immediate, corresponding change in the SIPROTEC®
device. Connected equipment such as circuit breakers will be operated by these
actions!
7UM61 Manual 8-27
C53000-G1176-C127-1
q Open the 2QOLQH directory by double-clicking; the operating functions for the device
appear.
q Click on 7HVW; the function selection appears in the right half of the window.
q Double-click in the list view on +DUGZDUH_7HVW. The dialog box of the same name
opens (see Figure 8-13).
Hardware Test
Dialog Box
The dialog box is horizontally divided into three groups: %, for binary inputs, 5(/ for
output relays, and /(' for light-emitting diodes. Each of these groups is associated
with an appropriately marked switching area. By clicking in an area, components within
the associated group can be turned on or off.
In the 6WDWXV column, the present conditions of the hardware components are symbolically
shown. The present physical conditions of the binary inputs and output relays
are shown as symbols for open and closed contacts. The present condition of a lightemitting
diode is shown as the symbol for an LED, turned on or off.
The possible intended condition of a hardware component is indicated with clear text
under the 6FKHGXOH column, which is next to the 6WDWXV_column. The intended
condition
offered for a component is always the opposite of the present state.
The right-most column indicates the operating equipment, commands, or messages
that are configured (masked) to the hardware components.
Changing
Hardware
Conditions
The displays of the intended conditions are shown as switching fields. To change the
condition of a hardware component, click on the associated switching field in the
6FKHGXOH column.
If the password was activated for +DUGZDUH_7HVW, then Password No. 6 will be requested
before the first hardware modification is allowed. Only after entry of the correct
password a condition change will be executed. Further condition changes remain
possible while the dialog box is open.
Figure 8-13 Dialog Box for Hardware Test — Example
8-28 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Testing the Output
Relays
You can make each output relay pick up individually, and in this way test the wiring
between the output relays of the 7UM61 and the plant, without having to generate the
indications allocated to them. As soon as the first condition change is initiated for any
output relay, all output relays are separated from the device functionality and can now
only be operated by the Hardware Test function. This means, for example, that a
switching command that is caused by a protection function or by a control command
from the operator panel will not be executed.
q Make sure that there is no risk involved in carrying out the switching operations triggered
by the output relays (see above under DANGER!).
q Test each output relay using the associated 6FKHGXOHG_field in the dialog box.
q Close the test procedure (see side title below “Ending the procedure”) to avoid unintentional
switching operations in the course of further testing.
Testing the Binary
Inputs
To test the wiring between the plant and the binary inputs of the 7UM61, you must initiate
in the plant the condition that activates the respective input and read out the effect
at the device.
To do so, open once again the dialog box +DUGZDUH_7HVW to view the physical position
of the binary input. No password is required yet.
q Trigger in the plant each of the functions that activates the binary input.
q Check the reaction in the 6WDWXV column of the dialog box. To do so, the dialog
box must be updated. This is described below under the side title “Updating the display”.
If you want to check the effects of a binary input signal without actually performing
switching operations in the plant, you can do so by activating individual binary inputs
by means of the Hardware Test function. As soon as you have initiated the first condition
change of a binary input, and entered password no. 6, all binary inputs are separated
from the device side functionality and can only be operated by the Hardware
Test function. This means, for example, that external signals to binary inputs would be
ignored by the device if their status conditions change and the test procedure had not
been closed.
q Close the test procedure (see side title below “Ending the procedure”).
LED Test The LEDs can be tested in a similar way as other I/O components. As soon as you
have initiated the first condition change of any LED, all LEDs are separated from the
device side functionality and can only be operated by the Hardware Test function.
This means, for example, that no LED will light up on receiving a signal from a protection
function, or in case of an LED reset from the device front panel.
Updating the
Display
When the dialog box +DUGZDUH_7HVW is opened, the present conditions of the hardware
components at that moment are read in and displayed. An update occurs:
Note:
As soon as the first condition change of a hardware component is initiated under the
Hardware Test, then all components in that group (BI, REL or LED) are separated
from substation, or device-side, functionality.
Local control is re-established when the dialog box is closed.
7UM61 Manual 8-29
C53000-G1176-C127-1
− for each component, if a command to change the condition is successfully performed,
− for all hardware components if the 8SGDWH_field is clicked,
− for all hardware components with cyclical updating if the $XWRPDWLF_8SGDWH_
___VHF_ field is marked.
Ending the
Procedure
To end the hardware test, click on &ORVH. The device becomes unavailable for a brief
start-up period immediately after this. The dialog box closes. Then all hardware components
are returned to the operating conditions.
External trip signals
If the coupling of external functions for the alarm and/or trip processing is used in the
7UM61, then one or more of these functions must be configured as (QDEOHG in the
addresses ____ to ____. The used function is, additionally, switched in address
____, ____, ____, and/or ____: (;7(51_75,3_ = %ORFN_UHOD\.
The function of the coupling is to be checked for one after another. For this, the source
object of the coupled signal is operated and the effect checked.
Finally the used functions are parameterized to 21 in the associated addresses ____,
____, ____, and/or ____.
8.2.3.3 Testing the Breaker Failure Scheme
It is particularly important for tests withing the plant that the trip command in case of a
breaker failure should be correctly retransmitted to the adjacent circuit breakers.
Adjacent circuit breakers are those breakers that must trip in case of a breaker failure
to cut off the short-circuit current. This means that they are those circuit breakers that
feed the faulted line.
It is not possible to define a generally applicable, detailed test specification since the
definition of adjacent circuit breakers depends to a large extent of the plant layout.
8.2.3.4 Testing User-Defined Functions (CFC)
A 7UM61 has a vast capability for allowing functions to be defined by the user, especially
with the CFC logic. Any special function or logic added to the device must be
checked.
Naturally, general test procedures cannot be given. Rather, the configuration of these
user-defined functions and the necessary associated conditions must be known and
verified. Of particular importance are the possible interlocking conditions of the circuit
breakers and other primary switching devices. They must be considered and tested.
8.2.3.5 Trip/Close Tests for Primary Equipment
Control by Local
Command
At the end of commissioning, actual 7UM61 tripping and closing should be verified for
all the relevant circuit breakers and primary switching devices, unless this has been
done already in connection with the Hardware Test described in Section 8.2.3.2. The
feedback of the status of the primary equipment, through the equipment’s auxiliary
8-30 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
contacts to the binary inputs of the 7UM61, should be checked during the testing. Be
sure the 7UM61 always indicates the true position of the equipment in the device messages.
The procedure for the control is described in Sub-section 7.3.1. Make sure that the
switching authority is set according to the source of commands that is used. The
switching mode can be chosen as interlocked or non-interlocked. Note that non-interlocked
switching presents safety risks.
7UM61 Manual 8-31
C53000-G1176-C127-1
8.3 Commissioning Tests Performed with the Machine
8.3.1 General advices
It is necessary to perform switching operations during commissioning. The tests described
below assume that no risk is involved in such operations. They are therefore
not suitable for checks during operation.
Safety Instructions All relevant safety rules and regulations (e.g. VDE 105, VBG4 or comparable
national
regulations) must be complied with.
Before undertaking any work, observe the following “5 safety rules”:
1. Isolate from supply
2. Secure against accidental reclosing
3. Verify the safe isolation from supply
4. Perform earthing and short-circuiting
5. Cover or fence in live parts in the vicinity
The main points to observe are:
• The device is to be grounded to the substation ground before any other connections
are made.
• Hazardous voltages can exist in the power supply and at the connections to current
transformers, voltage transformers, and test circuits.
• Hazardous voltages can be present in the device even after the power supply voltage
has been removed, i.e. capacitors can still be charged.
• After removing voltage from the power supply, wait a minimum of 10 seconds before
re-energizing the power supply. This wait allows the initial conditions to be firmly
established before the device is re-energized.
• The limit values given in Technical Data (Chapter 10) must not be exceeded, neither
during testing nor during commissioning.
Warning!
When operating an electrical device, certain parts of the device inevitably have dangerous
voltages. Severe personal injury or property damage can result if the device is
not handled properly.
Only qualified people shall work on and around this device after becoming thoroughly
familiar with all warnings and safety notices in this instruction manual as well as with
the applicable safety steps, safety regulations, and precautionary measures.
Warning!
Primary tests may only be carried out by qualified personnel, who are familiar with the
commissioning of protection systems, the operation of the plant and the safety rules
and regulations (switching, earthing, etc.).
8-32 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
All secondary test equipment must be removed. Connect measurement values. All installation
preparations according to sections 8.1 and 8.2 must have been completed.
Primary tests are performed with the machine.
Order of the Test
Procedure
Primary testing is usually performed in the following order:
− short–circuit tests,
− voltage tests,
− earth fault tests,
− synchronization,
− tests with the machine connected to the network
The following hints are arranged in this order. All protection functions should be initially
switched 2)) (condition as delivered from factory) so that they do not influence one
another. During primary testing the functions are progressively switched to being operative.
If a particular protection function is not required at all, it should be “de–configured”
(refer to Section 5.1). It is then treated as ',6$%/('.
Switching on of a particular function can be performed in two different ways. The setting
addresses concerned are shown in the respective sections.
− %ORFN_UHOD\: The protection function is operative and outputs annunciations
and measured values. However, the trip command is blocked and it is not transmitted
to the trip matrix.
− Protection function 21: The protection function is operative and outputs annunciations
and measured values. The trip command activates the trip relays which
have been marshalled to the protection function according to Section 5.2.4. If the
protection command is not marshalled to any trip relay, tripping does not occur.
Preparation − Install an EMERGENCY OFF button for directly initiating a pick-up
− Block all prection functions
− Set the undelayed overcurrent protection function roughly to the nominal generator
current, and to trip on pick-up
− Set the undelayed overvoltage protection function roughly to 30 % of the nominal
generator voltage for the short-circuit test, and to roughly 110 % of the nominal voltage
for the voltage tests, as well as to trip on pick-up
DANGER!
Current transformer secondary circuits must be short-circuited before the current
leads to the device are disconnected!
If test switches are installed that automatically short-circuit the current transformer circuits,
opening these test switches (placing them in the "Test" position) is sufficient provided
the short-circuit function has been previously tested.
7UM61 Manual 8-33
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Frequency Follow-
Up Circuit
Note:
The unit contains an integrated frequency follow-up circuit; this ensures that the protection
functions are always processed with algorithms matched to the actual frequency.
This explains the wide frequency range and the small frequency influence. (refer
Section 10.20). However, it requires that measurement values be present before a dynamic
test can take place, so that the frequency follow-up can operate. If a measurement
value is switched from 0 to the unit without a different measurement value having
been present beforehand, an additional time delay of approximately 120 ms is incurred
since the unit must firstly calculate the frequency from the measurement value.
In addition, no output signal is possible if no measurement value is connected. A trip
signal, once issued, of course, is maintained for at least the duration of the parameterized
reset time (70LQ_75,3_&0') (refer also to Section 6.1.3)
Factory Setting Note:
When the unit is delivered from the factory, all protective functions have been switched
off. This has the advantage that each function can be separately tested without being
influenced by other functions. The required functions must be activated for testing and
commissioning.
Operating Range of
the Protection
Functions
For commissioning tests with the machine, care should be taken that the operating
range of the protection functions as specified in section 10.20 is not exceeded and that
the measuring quantities applied are high enough. Where tests are performed with reduced
pick-up values, the pick-up value may appear to deviate considerably from the
setting value (e.g. in the unbalance stage or the earth fault protection) if the measuring
quantities are too small to block the protection function, i.e. if operating state 1 (= protection
function active) is not yet attained.
However, this effect will not interfere with commissioning since no checks of the pickup
values are performed that involve the machine.
8.3.2 Triggering Oscillographic Recordings
At the end of commissioning, an investigation of switching operations of the circuit
breaker(s) or primary switching device(s), under load conditions, should be done to
assure the stability of the protection during the dynamic processes. Oscillographic recordings
obtain the maximum information about the behaviour of the 7UM61.
Requirements To obtain oscillographic records, Address 0104 26&__)$8/7_5(&_ under the
'(_
9,&(_&21),*_ menu must be set to (QDEOHG.
Along with the capability of recording waveform data during system faults, the 7UM61
also has the capability of capturing the same data when commands are given to the
device via the service program DIGSI® 4, the serial interfaces, or a binary input. For
the latter, the binary input must be assigned to the function “!7ULJJHU_:DYHIRUP_
&DSWXUH” (FNo 4). Triggering for the oscillographic recording then occurs when the
input is energized. For example, an auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker or primary
switch may be used to control the binary input for triggering.
An oscillographic recording that is externally triggered (that is, without a protective element
pick-up or device trip) is processed by the device as a normal fault recording
with the exception that data are not given in the fault messages. The externally triggered
record has a number for establishing a sequence.
8-34 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Triggering with
DIGSI® 4
To trigger oscillographic recording with DIGSI® 4, click on 7HVW in the left part of the
window. Double click the entry 7HVW_:DYH_)RUP in the list in the right part of the window
to trigger the recording. See Figure 8-14.
A report is given in the bottom left region of the screen. In addition, message segments
concerning the progress of the procedure are displayed.
The DIGRA® program or the Comtrade Viewer program is required to view and analyse
the oscillographic data. Refer to Sub-section 7.1.4.
Figure 8-14 Triggering oscillographic recording with DIGSI® 4
8.3.3 Checking the current circuits
General The checks of the current circuits are performed with the machine to ensure the correct
cabling, polarity, phase sequence, CT ratio etc., not in order to verify individual
protection functions in the device.
Preparation Switch unbalanced load protection (address ____) and overload protection (address
____) to %ORFN_UHOD\.
With the primary plant voltage-free and earthed, install a three-pole short-circuit bridge
which is capable of carrying rated current (e.g. earthing isolator) to the machine lineside
terminals.
After the preparatory measures described in section 8.3, all current transformer circuits
(protection, measuring, metering) can be checked with the remanent excitation.
DANGER!
Primary measurements must only be carried out with the machine at stand–still
on disconnected and grounded equipment of the power system.
7UM61 Manual 8-35
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Note on Testing The checks of the current transformer circuits are carried out with max. 20 % of
the
rated transformer current. Tests with generator currents of more than 20 % are not
normally required for the digital protective device. Operation of the generator at rated
current during commissioning may only be necessary when the short-circuit characteristic
is measured for the first time.
Absolute Current
Values
The currents are stated among the operational measured values. They are read out
from the device front panel or from the PC via the PC port and compared with the actual
measured values. If significant deviations are found, the CT connections are not
correct.
Phase Rotation The phase rotation must conform with the configured phase sequence (address
_____
3+$6(_6(4_ under 3RZHU_6\VWHP_'DWD__); if it does not, an indication “)DLO_
3K__6HT_“ will be output. In such a case, the allocation of phases to the measuring
quantities must be checked and corrected, if necessary. The unbalanced load can be
read out under the operational measured values. It must be practically zero. If this is
not the case, check for crossed current transformer leads:
If the unbalanced load amounts to about 1/3 of the phase currents then current is flowing
in only one or in only two of the phases.
If the unbalanced load amounts to about 2/3 of the phase currents, then one current
transformer has wrong polarity.
If the unbalanced load is about the same as the phase currents, then two phases have
been crossed.
After correcting the wrong connection, the test must be repeated.
Remove short–circuit bridges.
Calibrating the Impedance
Protection
Set the impedance protection (address ____) to ,03('$1&(_3527_ = %ORFN_UH_
OD\.
With the primary plant voltage-free and earthed, install a three-pole short-circuit bridge
which is capable of carrying rated current (e.g. earthing isolator) on the high-voltage
side of the block transformer.
Start-up machine and slowly excite to 20 % of rated machine current.
Note on Testing A test with about 20 % of the rated generator current is sufficient for checking
the
transformer connections and the operational measured values. If the relative short-circuit
voltage of the transformer is small, the voltage values measured are very low, so
that it may be necessary to increase the generator current somewhat. A test with the
full rated generator current is only required for the quantitative calibration of the impedance
protection (e.g. for calibrating the transformer uK).
DANGER!
8-36 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
The relay calculates from the currents and voltages the impedance between the point
of installation (voltage transformers) and the short-circuit bridge, i.e. normally the
short-circuit impedance of the unit transformer. Read out the reactance and resistance
values in the measured values. Note that the secondary values depend on the rated
relay current, 1 A or 5 A. In the case of the transformer impedance, the following results:
Primary transformer impedance:
with usc - percent impedance voltage of transformer
UN - rated voltage of transformer
SN - rated apparent power of transformer
In secondary values:
with NCT - current transformer ratio
NVT - voltage transformer ratio
If substantial deviations or wrong sign occur, then the voltage transformer connections
are incorrect.
After shutdown and de-excitation of the generator, and removal of the short-circuit
bride, the short-circuit tests are completed. No further tests are required for unbalanced
load protection, overcurrent time protection, thermal overload protection
and impedance protection.
Switch the overcurrent time protection and the impedance protection operative (address
____: 2_&_,! = 21_resp. address _____2_&_,S =_21, address ____: ,0_
3('$1&(_3527_ = 21). They serves from now on as short-circuit protection. If used,
the I>> stage (address _____2_&_,!! = 21), the thermal overload protection (address
____: 7KHU__29(5/2$' = 21) and the unbalanced load protection (address
____: 81%$/$1&(_/2$' = 21) can be switched to be operative. Otherwise, they are
set to 2)).
8.3.4 Checking the voltage circuits
General The voltage circuits of the machine are checked to ensure the correct cabling, polarity,
phase sequence, transformer ratio etc. of the voltage transformers - not to check individual
protection functions of the device.
Earthing of the Voltage
Transformers
When checking the voltage transformers, particular attention should be paid to the
open delta windings because these windings may only be earthed in one phase.
Preparation Set the undelayed overvoltage protection function to about 110 % of the rated
generator
voltage and to trip on pick-up.
Switch frequency protection (address ____) and overflux protection (address ____)
to %ORFN_UHOD\.
ZT prim usc
UN
2
SN
= ⋅ ----------
ZT sec ZT prim
NCT
NVT
⋅ ----------- usc
UN
2
SN
----------
NCT
NVT
= = ⋅ ⋅ -----------
7UM61 Manual 8-37
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Check in the unexcited condition of the machine with the help of remanent voltages,
that all short-circuit bridges are removed.
Note on Testing The checks of all voltage transformer circuits (protection, measuring, metering
etc.)
are carried out with about 30 % of the rated transformer voltage. Tests with generator
voltages of more than 30 % are only required when the idle characteristic is measured
for the first time.
The measuring circuit supervision of the rotor earth fault protection (see below) can be
checked when testing the voltage circuits, or after the synchronization.
Amplitudes Read out voltages in all three phases in the operational measured values. They can
be compared with the actual voltages. The voltage of the positive sequence system
U1 must be approximately the same as the indicated phase voltages. If this is not, the
voltage transformer connections are incorrect (crossovers).
Phase Rotation The phase rotation must conform with the configured phase sequence (address
____
under 32:(5_6<67(0_'$7$__); if it does not, the indication “)DLO_3K__6HT_” will
be output. The allocation of measuring quantities to phases must be checked and corrected,
if necessary. If signification deviations are found, check, and if necessary correct,
the voltage transformer circuits and repeat the test.
It is also possible to use for this check the operational measured value of positive-sequence
component U1 of the voltages: U1 ≠ UL-E indicates a wiring error.
Measuring Circuit
Supervision of the
Rotor Earth Fault
Protection
If the sensitive earth fault detection is used for rotor earth fault protection, the measuring
circuit supervision of that protection function can be checked with the machine under
voltage:
− Start up the machine and excite it to rated voltage. Apply measurement brushes
if necessary. Inject a test voltage between the rotor circuit and the earth by interposing
the additional source device 7XR61. The earth current IEE that is flowing
now can be read out on the device among the operational measured values. The
value obtained is the capacitive spill current flowing in fault-free operation.
− ,((_ (address ____) should be set to about 50 % of this capacitive spill current.
It should also be checked that the set value ,((! (address ____) is at least twice
this measured spill current. Correct the set value if necessary.
Frequency Protection
The frequency protection function is verified by a plausibility check of the instantaneous
machine speed and the associated operational measured value that is indicated.
Overexcitation The overexcitation protection function is verified by a plausibility check of the
instantaneous
overexcitation and the associated operational measured value that is indicated:
Instant. overexcitation
U
f
----
fN
UN
= ⋅ -------
U Instantaneous machine voltage
UN Rated prim. transformer voltage
f Instantaneous frequency, in
accordance with the machine
frequency in Hz
fN Rated frequency
8-38 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
The voltage tests are completed after the generator has been shut-down. The required
voltage and frequency protection functions are switched to be operative (address
4001: 81'(592/7$*( = 21 or 2))), (address 4101: 29(592/7$*( = 21 or 2))), (address
______2_8_)5(48(1&< = 21 or 2))) and (address 4301: 29(5)/8;_3527_
= 21 or 2))) . Partial functions can be switched to be inoperative by appropriate limit
value settings (e.g. f* set to rated frequency).
8.3.5 Checking the earth fault protection
The procedure for checking the stator earth fault protection depends mainly on whether
the machine is connected to the network in block connection or in bus-bar connection.
In both cases correct functioning and protected zone must be checked.
In order to check interference suppression of the loading resistor, and in order to verify
the protected zone of the earth fault protection, primary tests are suggested, once with
an earth fault at the machine terminals (e.g. with 20 % of the rated transformer voltage)
and once with a network earth fault.
8.3.5.1 Block connection
General In the event of an external (high-voltage side) short-circuit, an interference voltage is
transmitted via the coupling capacitance CC (Figure 8-15) which induces a neutral displacement
voltage on the machine side. To ensure that this voltage is not interpreted
by the protection as an earth fault within the machine, it is reduced by a suitable loading
resistor to a value which corresponds to approximately one half the pick-up voltage
8HDUWK_! (address ____). On the other hand, the earth fault current resulting from
the loading resistor in the event of an earth fault at the machine terminals should not
exceed 10 A.
Figure 8-15 Block connection with earthing transformer
UE
RB
7UM61
RT
CC
CG CL CTr
RB – Loading resistor
UE – Neutral displacement voltage at 7UM61
CL – Line–earth capacitance
CTr – Winding–earth capacitance of block transformer
CC – Coupling capacitance of block transformer
7UM61 Manual 8-39
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Calculation of protected
zone
Coupling capacitance CC and loading resistor RB represent a voltage divider (equivalent
circuit diagram Figure 8-16); whereby RB’ is the resistance RB referred to the machine
terminal circuit.
Figure 8-16 Equivalent diagram and Vector diagram
Since the reactance of the coupling capacitance is much larger than the referred resistance
of the loading resistor RB’, UC can be assumed to be UC ≈ UNU/√3 (compare
also vector diagram Figure 8-16), whereby UNU/√3 is the neutral displacement voltage
with a full displacement of the network (upper-voltage) neutral. The following applies:
Inserting the voltage transformation ratio TR of the earthing transformer:
we obtain:
Together with the voltage divider 500 V/100 V this corresponds to a displacement voltage
of:
The pick-up value for the neutral displacement voltage 8_! should amount to at least
twice the value of this interference voltage.
Example:
Network: UNU = 110 kV
fN = 50 Hz
CC = 0.01 µ F
UR’ RB’
UC
ω CC
UNU
√3
~
UNU/√3
U R’
U
C
UNU Rated voltage on upper–voltage side of block transformer
UC Voltage at coupling capacitance CK
CC Total coupling capacitance between upper–voltage and lower–voltage windings
UR’ Voltage across loading resistor
RB’ Loading resistor of earthing transformer, referred to machine circuit.
RB
,
1 ⁄( ω CC)
------------------------
UR
,
UNU ⁄( 3)
= ---------------------------
UR
, RB
, = ⋅ ω CC⋅ UNU ⁄( 3)
UR
, TR
3
= -------- ⋅ UR RB
, TR
3
--------  
  2
und = ⋅ RB
UR
TR
3
= --------⋅ RB⋅ ω CC⋅ UNU ⁄( 3)
UE
1
5
--- TR
3
= ⋅ --------⋅ RB⋅ ω CC⋅ UNU ⁄( 3)
8-40 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Voltage transformer 10 kV/0,1 kV
Earthing transformer TR = 36
Loading resistor RB = 10 Ω
10 V has been chosen as the setting value for 8_! in address 5002 which corresponds
to a protective zone of 90 % (Figure 8-17).
Note: When using a neutral earthing transformer, TR must be inserted as the voltage
transformation ratio instead of TR/3. The result is the same since the neutral earthing
transformer has only one winding.
Figure 8-17 Neutral displacement voltage during earth faults
Checking for machine
earth fault
Switch stator earth fault protection 6_(_)_3527_ (address 5001) to %ORFN_UHOD\.
If the sensitive earth fault detection is used for stator earth fault protection, it must be
set to %ORFN_UHOD\ as well under address 5101.
With the primary plant voltage-free and earthed, install a single-pole earth fault in the
proximity of the machine terminals.
Start up machine and slowly excite (however, not above UN/√3) until the stator earth
fault protection picks-up.
Read out UE from the operational measured values and check for plausibility. If the
connections are correct, this value corresponds with the machine terminal voltage in
percent, referred to rated machine voltage (if applicable, deviating rated primary voltage
of earthing transformer or neutral earthing transformer must be taken into account).
This value also corresponds with the setting value 8_! under address ____
If the plant comprises more voltage transformers with open delta windings, the voltage
UE must be measured on them as well.
UE
1
5
--- 36
3
------ 10 Ω 314 s–1 0.01 10 –6F
110
3
--------- 103=⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ V=4.8 V
Pick–up value
0,5
1,0
10 % 40 % 100 %
corresponds to 90 % protected zone
Earth fault on machine side
Earth fault on
upper voltage side
Value extrapolated to
100 % UNmach
UE
U ERD>
U
UN Masch
DANGER!
7UM61 Manual 8-41
C53000-G1176-C127-1
For protection zone S the following applies:
Example:
Machine voltage at pick-up 0,1 x Usec N
Measured value UE = 10 V
Setting value U0> = 10 V
Protected zone S = 90 %
Read out the indication “Uearth Lx” in the fault annunciations. The “Lx” indicates the
faulted phase provided voltages are connected to the voltage protection inputs of
7UM61.
Shut down machine. Remove earth fault bridge.
Check using network
earth fault
With the primary plant voltage-free and earthed, install a single-pole earth fault bridge
on the high-voltage side of the block transformer.
Start up machine and slowly excite to 30 % of rated machine voltage.
Read out UE in the 23(5$7,21$/_0($685('_9$/8(6. This value is extrapolated to
rated machine voltage (Figure 8-17). The fault value thus calculated should correspond,
at the most, to half the pick-up value U0> (address 5002), in order to achieve
the desired safety margin.
Shut down machine. Remove earth fault bridge.
If the starpoint of the high-voltage side of the block transformer is to be earthed
during normal operation, re-establish starpoint earthing.
Switch stator earth fault protection to be operative: address _____6_(_)_3527_ =
21. If the sensitive earth fault detection is used for stator earth fault protection, switch
it to be operative as well: address _____2_&_3527_,HH! = 21.
8.3.5.2 Bus–bar connection
Firstly, the correct functioning of the loading equipment must be checked: sequencing,
time limit, etc., as well as the plant data, the earthing transformer and the value of the
load resistor (tapping).
S
Usec N – U0>
Usec N
= --------------------------------- ⋅ 100 %
DANGER!
Caution!
The star–points of the transformer must not be connected to earth during this test!
8-42 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Switch stator earth fault protection (address ____) to %ORFN_UHOD\. f the sensitive
earth fault detection is used for stator earth fault protection, switch it to %ORFN_UHOD\
as well under address_____.
With the primary plant earthed and voltage-free, install earth fault bridge between machine
terminals and toroidal current transformer (Fig. 8-18).
Figure 8-18 Earth fault with bus-bar connection
Start up machine and slowly excite until the stator earth fault protection picks up: alarm
U0> Fault" (not allocated when delivered from factory). At the same time the alarm Ie>
Fault" should appear, if marshalled.
Read out UE and IEE under 23(5$7,21$/_0($685('_9$/8(6. If the connections
are correct, this measured value is equal to the machine terminal voltage in percent,
referred to rated machine voltage (if applicable, deviating rated primary voltage of
earthing transformer or voltage transformer must be taken into account). This value
also corresponds to the setting value U0> in address 5002.
The measured value IEE should be approximately equal to or slightly higher than the
setting value _,_! under address _____This is to ensure that the protection zone that
is determined by the setting value U0> is not reduced by a too slow pick-up.
DANGER!
G
7UM61
IEE UE
UN
3
-------
500
3
--------- V
RT
Σ
100
3
--------- V
7UM61 Manual 8-43
C53000-G1176-C127-1
For protection zone S the following applies:
Example:
Machine voltage at pick-up 0,1 x Usec N
Measured value UE = 10 V
Setting value U0> = 10 V
Protected zone S = 90 %
With Directional
Determination
The earth fault directional determination requires a check of the current and voltage
connections for correctness and correct polarity. The machine continues to be excited
to a voltage that corresponds to a displacement voltage above the pick-up value. If the
polarity is correct, the trip indication “6_(_)_75,3“ is output (LED 6 when delivered
from factory).
A cross check is then performed. After the machine has been de-excited and shut
down, the earth fault bridge is installed on the other side of the current transformers
(as viewed from the machine).
After restarting and exciting the machine above the pick-up value of the displacement
voltage, "8_!_SLFNHG_XS" picks up (LED 2 for global indication of a device pick-up
when delivered from factory), however "_,__SLFNHG_XS" does not pick up and tripping
does not occur. The measured value IEE should be negligible and on no account
should it be larger then half the setting value _,_!.
Shut down and de-excite machine. Remove earth fault bridge.
Directional Check
with Cable-type
CTs without load
resistor
If loading equipment is not available and if an earth fault test with the network is not
possible, then the following test can be performed with secondary measures, however
with the symmetrical primary load current:
With current supplied from a toroidal residual current transformer, a voltage transformer
(e.g. L1) is by-passed which simulates the formation of a neutral displacement voltage
(Figure 8-19). From the same phase, a test current is fed via a current-limiting resistor
Z through the toroidal transformer. The connection and direction of the current
conductor through the toroidal transformer is to be closely checked. If the current is
too small for the relay to pick-up, then its effect can be increased by feeding the conductor
several times through the toroidal transformer.
For Z either a resistor (30 to 500 Ω ) or a capacitor (10 to 100 μF) in series with an inrush-
current-limiting resistor (approximately 50 to 100 Ω ) is used. With correct connections,
the described circuit results in the alarms: "U0 > picked up", "3I0> picked up"
and finally "S/E/F Trip" (LED 6).
S
Usec N – U0>
Usec N
= --------------------------------- ⋅ 100 %
DANGER!
8-44 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 8-19 Directional check with toroidal residual current transformers
Directional check
with c.t.’s in
Holmgreen connection
If the current is supplied from a set of c.t.’s in Holmgreen connection (Figure 8-20), the
displacement voltage is obtained in the same manner as in the above circuit. Only the
current of that current transformer which is in the same phase as the by-passed voltage
transformer in the delta connection is fed into the current path. In case of active
power in machine direction, the same conditions apply for the relay - in principle - as
with an earth fault in machine direction in a compensated network and vice versa.
Figure 8-20 Directional check with current transformers in Holmgreen connection
G
7UM61
IEE UE
ne
Z
G
7UM61
IEE UE
RT
ne
7UM61 Manual 8-45
C53000-G1176-C127-1
If, in an isolated network, the voltage connections for the reactive current measurement
should be maintained for testing, then it should be noted that with a power flow
with inductive component in forwards direction results in a backwards direction for the
earth fault relay (contrary to an earth fault in this direction).
Shut down machine after completion of the directional tests. Correct connections
must be re-established and re-checked.
Spill Current For calibration to the spill current, a three-pole short-circuit bridge that is able to
withstand
rated current is installed at the circuit breaker. Start up machine and slowly excite
until the rated machine current is reached.
Read out the operational measured value IEE. This measured values determines the
setting value of address ______,_!. Parameter _,_! should be about twice that
measured value to ensure a sufficient security distance between the earth fault current
used for directional determination and the spill current. Next, check whether the protection
zone determined by the setting value 8_! must be reduced.
Switch the stator earth fault protection to be operative: address _____6_(_)_3527_
= 21.
8.3.6 Checking the Sensitive Earth Fault Detection when Used for Rotor
Earth Fault
Protection
If the sensitive earth fault detection is used for rotor earth fault protection, it must first
be set to %ORFN_UHOD\ under address ____.
An earth fault is simulated via a resistor which is roughly equivalent to the desired trip
resistance. In machines with rotating rectifier excitation, the resistor is placed between
the measurement slip rings; in machines with excitation via slip rings between one slip
ring and earth.
Start up machine and excite to rated voltage. If applicable place measurement brushes
into operation. It is irrelevant in this context whether the sensitive earth fault protection
picks up or not. The earth fault current IEE that is flowing now can be read out on
the device among the operational measured values.
Check that this measured earth fault current is roughly equal to the pick-up value ,((!
for sensitive earth fault detection that has been set in address 5102. However, it must
not be set to less that the double value of the spill current that has been determined
in section 8.3.4 for healthy insulation.
For machines with excitation via slip rings, the test is repeated for the other slip ring.
Shut down machine. Remove earth fault resistor.
The sensitive earth fault detection used for rotor earth fault protection is then set to be
operative: 2_&_3527_,HH! = 21 in address ____.
Caution!
Make sure that the checked rotor circuit is completed isolated from the earth, to
avoid that the earthing resistor that is interposed for test purposes causes a
double earth fault!
8-46 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
8.3.7 Tests with the machine connected to the network
8.3.7.1 Checking the correct connection polarity
The following test instructions apply to a synchronous generator.
Run up generator and synchronize with network. Slowly increase driving power input
(up to approximately 5 %).
The active power is read out under the operational measured values (percent values)
as a positive active power Pa in percent of the rated apparent power SN.
IIf a negative active power value should be read out, then the actual polarity relationship
between current transformers and voltage transformers does not accord with the
polarity parameterized under address ____ (&7_67$532,17: WRZDUGV_PDFKLQe/
WRZDUGV_VWDUSRLQW) or a wrong setting has been selected for address ____ ($&_
7,9(_32:(5: *HQHUDWRU/0RWRU). Re-parameterize address ____. If the power
reading is still incorrect, the fault must be in the instrument transformer connections
(e.g. cyclic exchange of phases):
− Fix faults of the transformer lines (current and/or voltage transformers); observe for
this the safety rules!
− Repeat test.
8.3.7.2 Measurement of motoring power and angle error correction
For a generator, leave the reverse power protection and the forward active power supervision
switched to 2)) for the moment. This function and the following measurements
are not required for motors.
The motoring power is – as an active power – almost constant and independent of the
reactive power, i.e. independent of the excitation current. However, the protection relay
may calculate different active power values dependent of the excitation because
of possible angle errors of the current and voltage transformers. The motoring power
curve then would not be a straight line in parallel to the real axis of the power diagram
of the machine. Therefore, the angle deviations should be measured at three measuring
points of the power diagram and the correction parameter W0 should be established.
The angle errors caused by the device’s internal input transformers have already
been compensated in the factory.
Reduce driving power to zero by closing the regulating valves. The generator now
takes motoring energy from the network.
1. Adjust excitation until the reactive power amount to approximately Q = 0. To check
this, read out the active power with sign (negative) in the operational measured values
and note it down as P0 (see table below). Read out the reactive power with sign
in the operational measured values and note it down as Q0 (see table below).
2. If possible slowly increase excitation to 0.3 times rated apparent power of generator
(overexcited).
Caution
For a turbine set, the intake of reverse power is only permissible for a short time, since
operation of the turbine without a certain throughput of steam (cooling effect) can lead
to overheating of the turbine blades!
7UM61 Manual 8-47
C53000-G1176-C127-1
− Read out the motoring power with polarity (negative sign) in the operational measured
values and note it down as P1 (see table below).
− Read out the reactive power with polarity (positive sign) in the operational measured
values and note it down as Q1 (see table below).
3. If possible reduce excitation to approximately 0.3 times rated apparent power of
generator (underexcited)..
− Read out the motoring power with polarity (negative sign) in the operational measured
values under and note it down as P2 (see table below).
− Read out the reactive power with polarity (negative sign) in the operational measured
values and note it down as Q2 (see table below).
4.)Adjust generator to no-load excitation and shut down or select the desired operational
state.
Figure 8-21 Determination of the Correction Angle W0
The read-out measured values P1, and P2 are now used to carry out angle error correction.
calculate according to the following formula:
The power values must be inserted with their correct polarity as read out! Otherwise
faulty result!
This angle ϕ corr is entered with reversed sign as the new correction angle under address
_____&7_$1*/(_:_:
New setting &7_$1*/(_:_ = – ϕ korr
A quarter of the sum of the measured values P1 + P2 is set as pick-up value of the
reverse power protection 3!_5(9(56( under address ____.
Caution!
Underexcitation may cause the generator fall out of step!
Item active power reactive power
1 P0 Q0
2 P1 Q1
3 P2 Q2
underexcited P/PN overexcited
Q/QN
Q2 Q1
P1
P2
P0
ϕ korr
P1 – P2
Q1 – Q2
= atan --------------------
8-48 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
8.3.7.3 Calibrating the Reverse Power Protection
If the generator is connected with the network, reverse power can be caused by
− closing of the regulating valves,
− closing of the trip valve
Because of possible leakages in the valves, the reverse power test should – if possible
– be performed for both cases.
In order to confirm the correct settings, repeat reverse power test again. For this, the
reverse power protection (address 3101) is set to %/2&._UHOD\ in order to check its
effectiveness (using the annunciations).
Start up generator and synchronize with network. Close regulating valves.
From the operational measured value for the active power, the motoring power measured
with the device can be derived. 50 % of that value should be taken as the setting
for the reverse power protection.
Increase driving power.
Stop Valve The last test with the stop valve can be performed with a live trip. It is assumed that
the binary input "!69_WULSSHG" is marshalled correctly and is controlled by the stop
valve status (by a pressure switch or a limit switch at the stop valve).
Close stop valve.
From the operational measured value for the active power, the motoring power measured
with the device can be derived.
If that value should be found to be less than the reverse power with the stop valves
closed, 50 % of that value should be taken as the setting for the reverse power protection.
Shut down the machine by activating the reverse power protection on:
Switch 21 the reverse power protection (address 3101) and - if used - the forward
power supervision (address 3201).
8.3.7.4 Checking the underecxitation protection
Underexcitation The angle error correction value &7_$1*/(_:_, which has been determined in
section
8.3.7.2 and configured under address ____ for use with the angle error correction, applies
also to the underexcitation protection.
In section 8.3.7.2, the measured values of the reactive power have been read out, and
thus a plausibility check of that measured value with directional check has been carried
out. No further checks are required.
If you choose nevertheless to perform an additional load level measurement and by
this a directional check, proceed as follows:
7UM61 Manual 8-49
C53000-G1176-C127-1
If you choose nevertheless to perform an additional load level measurement and by
this a directional check, proceed as follows:.
Check with Load Set the underexcitation protection to %ORFN_UHOD\ (address ____).
The proper functioning is checked by approaching freely selected load levels under
overexcited and then underexcited conditions. The plausibility check is carried out by
reading out the relevant operational measured values and comparing them to the
measured values obtained from the station control and protection system.
Switch the underexcitation protection 21 (address ____).
Note If operation with capacitive load is not possible, then load points can also be checked
in the inductive (overexcited) range. In this case, the polarity of the instrument transformer
connections must be re-parameterized (address ____). Thus, the characteristics
of the underexcitation protection are mirrored around the origin. It must be noted
that the reverse power protection must be switched 2)) (address ____) as its characteristic
is also mirrored from the motor into the generator range.
Stability Limit Since the protective device shows each load level through the operational
measured
values, it is not necessary to approach the underexcitation limit line.
8.3.7.5 Checking the Directional Function of the Overcurrent Time Protection
When the polarity of the connections is checked as described in subsection 8.3.7.1,
the direction of the protection function I>> (section 6.2.2) is unambiguously determined
by the definition of the reference arrow (generator reference-arrow system).
When the generator produces an active power (operational measured value P is positive),
and address _____$&7,9(_32:(5 is set to *HQHUDWRU, the power system is
located in forward direction and the generator in reverse direction.
In order to exclude accidental misconnections, it is recommended to carry out a check
with a low load current. Proceed as follows:
− Set the directional high current stage ____ 2_&_,!! to %ORFN_UHOD\ and the
pick-up value ,!! (address ____) to the most sensitive value
(= 0.10 A with a rated current of 1 A and 0.50 A with a rated current of 5 A).
− Increase the load current (ohmic, or ohmic inductive) until it exceeds the pick-up
value, and, as soon as the pick-up indications (FNo. ____ through ____) have appeared,
read out the indications _____“,!!_IRUZDUG”_and _____“,!!_EDFN_
ZDUG”.
− Compare the indicated direction with the setpoint (setting value and address _____
3KDVH_'LUHFWLRQ).
In the standard application with terminal-side current transformers (Figure 6-14),
address _____3KDVH_'LUHFWLRQ must be set to 5(9(56(, and the indication
“,!!_IRUZDUGµ (FNo. ____) must appear.
− Re-set the pick-up value in address 1302 back to the original value and the protection
function in address ____ to 21.
Caution!
Underexcitation may cause the generator to fall out of step, in particular with increased
active power!
8-50 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
8.4 Final Preparation of the Device
Verify all terminal screws are tight and secure. Do not overtighten. Ensure that all pin
connectors are properly inserted. Verify the wires to the terminals are tightly connected.
Make sure the communication cables are firmly connected; however, do not overtighten
the screws.
Verify that all service settings are correct. This is a crucial step because some setting
changes might have been made during commissioning. The protective settings under
device configuration, input/output masking are especially important (Section 5.1) as
well as the power system data, and activated Groups A through D. All desired elements
and functions must be set 21. See Chapter 6. Keep a copy of all of the in-service
settings on a PC.
Check the internal clock of the device. If necessary, set the clock or synchronize the
clock if the element is not automatically synchronized. For assistance, refer to Subsection
7.2.1.
The Annunciation memory buffers should be cleared, particularly the Event Log and
Trip Log. Future information will then only apply for actual system events and faults.
To clear the buffers, press 0$,1_0(18 → $QQXQFLDWLRQ → 6HW_5HVHW. Refer to
Sub-section 7.1.1 if further assistance is needed. The numbers in the switching statistics
should be reset to the values that were existing prior to the testing, or to values in
accordance with the user’s practices. Set the statistics by pressing 0$,1_0(18 → $Q_
QXQFLDWLRQ → 6WDWLVWLF. Refer to Sub-section 7.1.2 if more information is needed.
Press the key, several times if necessary, to return to the default display.
Clear the LEDs on the front panel by pressing the key. Any binary outputs that
were picked up prior to clearing the LEDs are reset when the clearing action is performed.
Future illuminations of the LEDs will then apply only for actual events or faults.
Pressing the key also serves as a test for the LEDs because they should all light
when the button is pushed. Any LEDs that are lit after the clearing attempt are displaying
actual conditions.
The green “581” LED must be on. The red “(5525” LED must not be lit.
Close the protective switches. If test switches are available, then these must be in the
operating position.
The device is now ready for operation.
n
Caution!
Do not use force! The stud torque according to Chapter 2 must not be exceeded,
since the threads and terminal screws may be damaged!
ESC
LED
LED
7UM61 Manual 9-1
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Routine Checks and Maintenance 9

General comments about the routine checks and maintenance activities to ensure the
high reliability of the 7UM61 are given in this chapter. A procedure for replacing components
such as the buffer battery is discussed. Troubleshooting advice is provided.
A procedure for replacing the power supply fuse is described. Some comments concerning
the return of a device to the factory are given.
9.1 General 9-2
9.2 Routine Checks 9-3
9.3 Maintenance 9-4
9.4 Troubleshooting 9-7
9.5 Repairs 9-9
9.6 Return 9-13
Routine Checks and Maintenance
9-2 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
9.1 General
Siemens numerical protective and control SIPROTEC® 4 devices are designed to require
no special maintenance. All measurement and signal processing circuits are fully
solid state. All input modules are also fully solid state. The output relays are hermetically
sealed or provided with protective covers.
Since the device is almost completely self-monitored, from the measuring inputs to the
output relays, hardware and software problems are automatically reported. The selfmonitoring
ensures the high availability of the device and generally allows for a corrective
rather than preventive maintenance strategy. Therefore, maintenance checks
in short intervals are not required.
Operation of the device is automatically blocked when a hardware failure is detected.
The “live status” relay drops out to provide an alarm by its breaking contact. If a problem
is detected in the external measuring circuits, the device normally only provides
messages.
Recognized software failures result in the resetting and restarting of the processor
system. If such a failure is not resolved by the restart, further restart attempts are initiated.
If a problem is still present after three restart attempts, the device is automatically
taken out of service. Then the “live status” contact drops out to provide an alarm
and the red “ERROR” LED on the front panel illuminates.
The reaction of the device to failures and problems can be viewed in chronological sequence
in the Operational messages. See Sub-section 7.1.1. The messages can be
used to diagnose the problem.
When the device communicates with a master control system of the substation or other
central control systems, the event and alarm messages are also sent over the serial
interface.
7UM61 Manual 9-3
C53000-G1176-C127-1
9.2 Routine Checks
Routine checks of the characteristic curves or pick-up values of the protective elements
are not necessary because they form part of the continuously supervised
firmware programs. The normally scheduled interval for plant maintenance can be
used for carrying out operational testing of the protective and control equipment. The
maintenance serves mainly to check the serial or hardwired interfaces of the device,
i.e. the coupling with the plant.
The steps listed below are recommended for routine checks. If a problem is detected
during these checks, refer to Section 9.4.
o Verify that the green “RUN” LED is lit on the front panel and the red “ERROR” LED is
not.
o Check that the states of the LEDs on the front panel give an accurate image of the
conditions of the device and the plant. Investigate any problems or uncertainties.
o Press the key. All of the LEDs should temporarily light except for the “ERROR”
LED. Only the LEDs indicating specific present conditions should remain lit.
o Read the measurement values and compare them to an independent source to check
the measuring circuits of the 7UM61. Refer to Sub-section 7.1.3 for assistance in reading
the measurement values.
o Review the messages given under the $QQXQFLDWLRQ sub-menu. Be sure there are
no reports of unknown problems or abnormal occurrences related to the device, the
measuring circuits, or the power system. All information should be plausible. See Subsection
7.1.1.2 for help in reading the messages.
o Perform a reset (reboot) of the device. A complete check of the hardware is done. The
device is effectively out of service during the reset, which lasts for about 10 to 15 seconds.
To perform the reset from the operator control panel, press the key and use
the and keys to select the 'HYLFH_5HVHW under the 7(67_',$*126( submenu.
Press the key, enter Password No. 4 for test and diagnostics, and answer
with <HV. During the reset, the “ERROR” and “RUN” LEDs are lit, the other LEDs flash,
and the display becomes blank. After a successful reset, the default display reappears
and the LEDs return to indicate normal operation. The device is then back in-service.
To perform the reset with DIGSI® 4, establish the 2QOLQH mode, select 'HYLFH in the
menu bar, and then 5HVHW_ Enter the password for test and diagnostics; then 2..
o The trip and close circuits for circuit breakers and other primary equipment can be verified
with operator control actions. See Sub-section 7.3 for details.
Warning!
Alterations of the states of the binary inputs, outputs, and LEDs must not be done with
test features during normal operation. Any such change immediately affects the inputs
and outputs of the device, and therefore the connected switching devices! This includes,
for instance, non-interlocked primary switching!
LED
MENU
ENTER
9-4 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
9.3 Maintenance
9.3.1 Replacing the Buffer Battery
The battery is used to retain the annunciation memories and fault recording data in the
event of an interruption of the power supply. The battery also maintains the internal
system clock with calendar after a loss of the power supply.
The battery is checked by the processor at regular intervals. If the capacity of the battery
is found to be declining, an alarm is generated.
The battery should be changed when an alarm is given, or at the latest, after 10 years
of service.
Recommended Battery:
Lithium Battery 3 V/1 Ah, Type CR 1/2 AA. For example:
− VARTA Order Number 6127 501 501
− SONNENSCHEIN Order Number 1110 150 301
The battery is located near the front edge of the CPU printed circuit board. The front
panel of the device must be removed to change the battery.
To replace the battery:
o Save the annunciations and fault records. These are the data under the Annunciation
sub-menu (all items in this sub-menu). The records and data are lost when the battery
is removed. The simplest and fastest method is to use the save feature in DIGSI® 4
when the program is on-line.
Note: All of the protective and control settings, including the input/output configuration
and the CFC logic, are not affected by a power supply interruption. The settings are
stored independently of the battery. The settings are not lost when the battery is removed,
nor are the settings affected if the device operates without a battery.
o Have the replacement battery ready.
o Isolate the power supply by opening the protective switches for both terminals.
Caution!
Do not short the battery! Do not reverse the polarity of the battery! Do not lay the battery
on the ground mat used to protect components from electrostatic discharges! Do
not recharge the battery!
Caution!
Electrostatic discharges through the connections of the components, wiring, and connectors
must be avoided. Wearing a grounded wrist strap is preferred; otherwise, first
touch a grounded metal part before handling the internal components. Do not insert or
remove interface connectors under live conditions!
7UM61 Manual 9-5
C53000-G1176-C127-1
o Remove the covers on the front panel and loosen the screws that are securing the
front panel.
o Carefully pull off the front panel and bend it aside. The front panel is connected to the
internal CPU printed circuit board with a short ribbon-cable.
o Disconnect the ribbon-cable that links the front panel and the CPU board (å), at the
side of the front panel. To disconnect the cable, push up on the top latch of the plug
connector and push down on the bottom latch of the plug connector. Carefully set
aside the front panel.
o The battery is located on the bottom-front side of the CPU (¯) board. See Figure 9-1.
Figure 9-1 Front view without front panel – position of buffer battery (simplified and reduced)
o Remove the old battery from the snap-on connector using the plastic battery grip
shown in Figure 9-1.
o Remove the battery grip from the old battery, and place the grip on the new battery.
o Observing the polarity and firmly insert the new battery into the snap-on connector
shown in Figure 9-1.
Warning!
Hazardous voltages may exist in the device, even after the power supply is disconnected
and the boards are withdrawn from the case! Capacitors can still be charged!
¯ Processor board CPU
¯ ° Input/output board I/O
Slot 5 Slot 19
G1
–+
°
Battery
Battery grip
9-6 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
o Connect the ribbon-cable between the CPU (¯) board and the front panel. Be especially
careful not to bend any of the connector pins! Do not use any force! Be sure that
the plug connectors latch.
o Carefully replace the front panel being mindful of the ribbon-cable. Fasten the panel
to the case with the screws.
o Replace the covers.
o Close the protective switches to apply voltage to the power supply.
o After the device is operating, data saved in DIGSI® 4 can be loaded back into the device.
If the internal system clock is not automatically synchronized via a serial interface,
then the clock should be set at this point. Refer to Sub-section 7.2.1 if assistance is
needed to set the clock.
Warning!
The used battery contains Lithium. Do not throw the battery into the trash! It must be
disposed off in line with the applicable regulations!
Do not reverse the polarity! Do not completely discharge! Do not throw the battery
into a fire! Explosion hazard!
7UM61 Manual 9-7
C53000-G1176-C127-1
9.4 Troubleshooting
If a device reports a problem or failure, the procedure below is recommended.
If none of the LEDs on the front panel are lit, then verify:
o Are the printed circuit boards fully inserted, in the correct slots, and properly connected
to the front panel.
o Are the voltage magnitude and polarity correct for the power supply. Connection drawings
are shown in Section A.2 of the Appendix.
o Has the fuse in the power supply not blown. The location of the fuse is shown in Figure
9-5. If the fuse needs to be replaced, see Sub-section 9.5.2.
o If the red “ERROR” LED is on and the green “RUN” LED is off, then the device has
recognized an internal fault. Re-initializing the device can be attempted, see Section
9.2.
o If you see the following display, the device has arrived “monitor”-mode. In this case
you may initialize the device via DIGSI® 4:
q Connect the SIPROTEC® 4 device to the PC and open the DIGSI® 4 application in
the PC.
q Select ,QLWLDOL]H_GHYLFH in the menu 'HYLFH (Figure 9-2).
Figure 9-2 Initializing device via DIGSI® 4
q Enter password No. 7. The display becomes blank. After a successful initialization,
the LEDs return to indicate normal operation and the default display reappears. The
device settings are downloaded to the device provided they had been saved in the
PC after commissioning (refer to Section 8.4). The device is then in-service.
Further Assistance If these steps do not resolve the problem, please call your local Siemens
representative
or customer hot-line.
Our customer hot-line needs the following information to assist you:
_0_2_1_,_7_2_5____________________________
(TXLSPHQW_GDWD_²!____
8VHU_LQWHUIDFH_²!____
6\VWHP_,_IDFH__²!____
5HVHW__________²!____
6LHPHQV_LQVWHQ_²!____
9-8 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
− the complete order number of the device,
− the serial number of the device (BF...),
− the firmware version,
− the boot system version.
This information is found in the device file of DIGSI® 4 as shown in Figure 9-4.
q Open the DIGSI® 4 application in the PC and select the device.
q Double click on this item. The 2SHQ_'HYLFH dialogue box opens, as shown in Figure
9-3.
Figure 9-3 DIGSI® 4, dialogue field Open Device
q Select the 2IIOLQH mode and click 2.; the initial DIGSI® 4 window opens.
q Select )LOH → 3URSHUWLHV from the menu bar. The desired information is shown.
Figure 9-4 Retrieving the device data in the device properties
The ordering number and the serial number can also be read from the name-plate on
the top of the device.
7UM61 Manual 9-9
C53000-G1176-C127-1
9.5 Repairs
9.5.1 Software Procedures
A restart of the processor system, as described in Section 9.2, can be done as an attempt
to solve a problem. Setting changes can be made to solve simple problems,
such as sporadic alarms from elements of the measured value supervision. These attempts
of solving problems can be done while the device is in service.
If a processor restart or setting change does not remedy the problem, then no further
action should be done while the device is in service. Instead, replace the device with
a tested spare.
9.5.2 Hardware Procedures
Hardware modifications or repair should be limited in scope to changes that are absolutely
necessary. Some examples of hardware repair are changing the mini-fuse in the
power supply and replacing a printed circuit board or module.
Hardware modifications or repair should only be done by experienced personnel. Do
not insert or extract a printed circuit board unless the device is completely isolated.
Soldering work must not be done on the printed circuit boards.
Disassembling the
Device
The device must be disassembled if work is to be done on the printed circuit boards.
The procedure below should be used.
o Prepare area of work. Provide a grounded mat for protecting components subject to
damage from electrostatic discharges (ESD). The following equipment is needed:
− Screwdriver with a 5 to 6 mm or 1/4 inch tip.
− #1 Phillips screwdriver.
− 4.5 mm socket or nut driver.
o Isolate the power supply by opening the protective switches (test switches, fuses, or
miniature circuit breakers) for both terminals.
Caution!
Electrostatic discharges through the connections of the components, wiring, and connectors
must be avoided! Wearing a grounded wrist strap is preferred; otherwise, first
touch a grounded metal part. Do not insert or remove interface connectors under live
conditions!
Warning!
Hazardous voltages may exist in the device, even after the power supply is disconnected
and the boards are withdrawn from the case! Capacitors can still be charged!
9-10 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
o Disconnect all communication cables from the device. Carefully remove optical fibres
S
from the device. Apply protective caps to the fibber ends and the communication ports
on the device.
These activities do not apply if the device is for surface mounting.
o Unfasten the screw-posts of the D-subminiature connector on the back panel at location
“A.”
This activity does not apply if the device is for surface mounting.
o If the device has more communication interfaces at locations “B” and/or “C” on the
rear, the screws located diagonally to the interfaces must be removed.
These activities are not necessary if the device is for surface mounting.
o Remove the corner covers on the front panel and loosen the screws that are holding
the front panel to the device case.
o Carefully pull off the front panel. The front panel is connected to the CPU board with
a short ribbon-cable.
On devices with detached operator panel, the front panel can be pulled off directly
(without a ribbon cable).
o Disconnect the ribbon-cable that links the front panel and the CPU board (å), at the
side of the front panel. To disconnect the cable, push up on the top latch of the plug
connector and push down on the bottom latch of the plug connector. Carefully set
aside the front panel.
For the surface mounted device, the 7-pin connector X16 must be disconnected from
the CPU board behind the D-subminiature port, and the ribbon-cable that runs to the
68-pin connector on the back must be detached.
o Disconnect the ribbon-cable between the CPU board and the I/O board.
o The boards can be removed and laid on the grounded mat to protect them from ESD
damage.
A greater effort is required to remove the CPU board from the device designed for surface
mounting, because of the type of connectors.
Replacing the
Power Supply Fuse
o Keep ready replacement fuse 5 x 20 mm. Verify the correct rating, correct characteristic
(T) as well as the correct coding.
This data is printed on the module next to the fuse (see Figure 9-5). The type of fuse
depends on the auxiliary supply voltage, e.g. for 24 to 48 VDC the fuse type
“T4H250V” according to IEC 60127–2 is required (refer to Table 9-1).
o Remove the CPU board. Place the board on the grounded mat for protection against
ESD damage.
A greater effort is required to remove the CPU board in a device designed for surfacemounting.
Place the board on the grounded mat.
o Remove the defective fuse. Figure 9-5 illustrates the fuse.
7UM61 Manual 9-11
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 9-5 Power supply mini-fuse on the CPU board
o Install the new fuse into the holder.
o Carefully install the CPU board in the case. The position for the board is shown in Figure
9-1.
For the version of the device designed for surface-mounting, use the metal lever to insert
the CPU board. The installation is then easier.
Reassembling the
Device
To reassemble the device:
o Connect the ribbon-cable between the I/O board and the CPU board. Be especially
careful not to bend any of the connector pins! Do not use force! Be sure the connectors
latch.
o Connect the ribbon-cable between the CPU board and the front panel. Be especially
careful not to bend any of the connector pins! Do not use force! Be sure the plug connectors
latch.
Carefully replace the front panel being mindful of the ribbon-cables. Fasten the front
panel to the case with the screws.
o Replace the covers.
Table 9-1 Assigning of the mini-fuse rating to the device auxiliary voltage rating
7UM61∗ Version Rated Auxiliary Voltages Fuse Type
–2∗∗∗∗–∗∗∗∗ 24 V to 48 V— T4H250V
–4∗∗∗∗–∗∗∗∗ 60 V to 125 V— T2H250V
–5∗∗∗∗–∗∗∗∗ 110 V to 250 V—, 115 V∼ T2H250V
F1
24 /48VDC T 4.0 / 250 G
60V-250VDC/230VAC
T 2.0/250 G

9-12 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
The following steps are not applicable for the surface mount version:
o Align and fix the rear interfaces again.
o Attach all D-subminiature plugs to the matching D-subminiature sockets.
o Screw in all the fibre optical connectors where applicable.
Close the protective switches to apply voltage to the power supply. If the green “RUN”
LED does not light, there is a fault in the power supply. The device should be sent to
the factory. See Section 9.6.
Warning!
Don’t look into the fibre optic elements!
7UM61 Manual 9-13
C53000-G1176-C127-1
9.6 Return
Siemens strongly recommends that no further repairs on defective devices, boards,
or components be done. Special electronic components are used for which procedures
for preventing electrostatic discharges must be followed. Most importantly, special
production techniques are necessary to avoid damaging the wave-soldered multilayer
boards, the sensitive components, and the protective varnish.
If a problem cannot be solved by the procedures described in Section 9.5, then the
complete device (including front cover and detached operator panel, if applicable)
should be returned to the factory.
The original transport packaging material should be used for returning a device. If alternative
packaging material is used, then the device and other contents must be provided
with protection against shock and vibration according to IEC 60255–21–1
Class 2 and IEC 60255–21–2 Class 1.
Before returning a device, retrieve and save all of the configuration, function and control
settings, and any important information. Note any changes that were made to the
jumpers on the internal printed circuit boards after the device was first delivered.
n
Note:
Repaired devices are returned from the factory with all jumpers on the printed circuit
boards set in the original positions according to the ordering number. All configuration,
function and control parameters have the default setting.
9-14 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
7UM61 Manual 10-1
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Technical Data 10
This chapter provides the technical data of the SIPROTEC® 4 7UM61 device and the
individual functions of the device, including the limiting values that under no circumstances
may be exceeded. The electrical and functional data for devices equipped
with all options are followed by the mechanical data with dimensional drawings.
10.1 General Device Data 10-2
10.2 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 50, 67) 10-12
10.3 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51) 10-13
10.4 Thermal Overload Protection (ANSI 49) 10-18
10.5 Unbalanced load protection (ANSI 46) 10-20
10.6 Underexcitation protection (ANSI 40) 10-22
10.7 Reverse power protection (ANSI 32R) 10-23
10.8 Forward active power supervision (ANSI 32F) 10-24
10.9 Impedance protection (ANSI 21) 10-25
10.10 Undervoltage protection (ANSI 27) 10-26
10.11 Overvoltage protection (ANSI 59) 10-27
10.12 Frequency Protection (ANSI 81) 10-28
10.13 Overexcitation protection U/f> (ANSI 24) 10-29
10.14 90–%–Stator earth fault protection (ANSI 59N, 64G, 67G) 10-31
10.15 Sensitive earth current detection (ANSI 51GN, 64F) 10-32
10.16 100–%–Stator earth fault protection with 3rd harm. (ANSI 27/59TN) 10-33
10.17 Breaker Failure Protection (ANSI 50BF) 10-34
10.18 Inadvertent energization (ANSI 50/27) 10-35
10.19 Additional Functions 10-36
10.20 Operating ranges of the protection functions 10-40
10.21 Dimensions 10-41
Technical Data
10-2 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
10.1 General Device Data
10.1.1 Analog Inputs
Nominal Frequency fN 50 Hz or 60 Hz (adjustable)
Current Inputs Nominal Current IN 1 A or 5 A
Ground Current, SensitiveIEE ≤ 1.6 A
Burden per Phase and Ground Path
– At IN = 1 A approx. 0.05 VA
– At IN = 5 A approx. 0.3 VA
– Sensitive Ground Fault Detection 1 A approx. 0.05 VA
AC Current Overload Capability
– Thermal (rms) 100 · IN < 1 s
30 · IN < 10 s
4 · IN continuous
– Dynamic (current pulse) 250 · IN for 0.5 cycle
AC Current Overload Capability for Sensitive Ground Fault Detection
– Thermal (rms) 300 A < 1 s
100 A < 10 s
15 A continuous
– dynamic (impulse) 750 A for 0.5 cycle
Voltage Inputs Secondary Nominal Voltage 100 V to 125 V AC
Measuring Range 0 V to 170 V AC
Burden at 100 V approx. 0.3 VA
AC Voltage Input Overload Capacity
– Thermal (rms) 230 V continuous
10.1.2 Power Supply
Direct Voltage Voltage Supply Via Integrated Converter
Permissible AC Ripple Voltage,
peak to peak ≤ 15 % of the power supply voltage
Power Consumption
7UM611 quiescent approx. 4 W
7UM612 approx. 4.5 W
Nominal Power Supply Direct Voltage VPS nom 24/48 VDC 60/110/125 VDC
Permissible Voltage Ranges 19 to 58 VDC 48 to 150 V DC
Nominal Power Supply Direct Voltage VPSnom 110/125/220/250 VDC
Permissible Voltage Ranges 88 to 300 V DC
Technical Data
7UM61 Manual 10-3
C53000-G1176-C127-1
7UM611 energized approx. 9.5 W
7UM612 approx. 12.5 W
Bridging Time for Failure/Short Circuit ≥ 50 ms at V ≥ 110 VDC
≥ 20 ms at V ≥ 24 VDC
Alternative Voltage Voltage Supply via Integrated Converter
Bridging Time for Failure/Short Circuit ≥ 200 ms
10.1.3 Binary Inputs and Outputs
Binary Inputs Number
7UM611*– 7 (configurable)
Nominal Voltage Range 24 VDC to 250 VDC, bipolar
Current Consumption, Energized approx. 1.8 mA, independent of the
control voltage
Switching Thresholds adjustable voltage range with jumpers
Binary inputs BI 1 to BI 7: 2 ranges
– For Nominal Voltages 24/48/60/ UPU ≥ 19 VDC
110/125 VDC UDO ≤ 14 VDC
– For Nominal Voltages 110/125/ UPU ≥ 88 VDC
220/250 VDC UDO ≤ 66 VDC
Binary inputs BI 8 to BI 15: 3 ranges–
– For Nominal Voltages 24/48/60/ UPU ≥ 19 VDC
110/125 VDC UDO ≤ 14 VDC
– For Nominal Voltages 110/125/ UPU ≥ 88 VDC
220/250 VDC UDO ≤ 66 VDC
– For Nominal Voltages 220/250 VDC UPU ≥ 176 VDC
UDO ≤ 117 VDC
Maximum Permissible Voltage 300 V DC
Impulse Filter on Input 220 nF Coupling Capacitor at 220 V with
recovery time > 60 ms
Output Relays Output Relays for Commands/Annunciations
Number 7UM611*– 11 (configurable)
Contacts per Relay 1 NO/form A
Nominal Power Supply Alternating Voltage
VPS AC
115 VAC
(50/60 Hz)
Permissible Voltage Ranges 92 to 132 VAC
Power Consumption, Quiescent approx. 4 VA
Power Consumption, Energized approx. 12 VA
Technical Data
10-4 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
1 Live Status Alarm Relay
Contacts 1 changeover contact/form C
Switching Capability MAKE 1000W/VA
BREAK 30 W/VA
40 W resistive
25 W at L/R ≤ 50 ms
Switching Voltage 250 V
Permissible Current per Contact 5 A continuous
and Total Current on common path 30 A for 0.5 s
10.1.4 Communications Interfaces
PC Front Interface – Connection front panel, non-isolated, RS 232,
9-pin DSUB port for connecting a personal
computer
– Operation with DIGSI® 4
– Transmission Speed min. 4800 Baud; max. 38400 Baud
Factory Setting: 38400 Baud; Parity: 8E1
– Maximum Distance of Transmission 15 meters / 49 feet
Rear Service–/Modem–
Interface
– Connection isolated interface for data transfer
– Operation with DIGSI® 4
– Transmission Speed min. 4800 Bd, max. 38400 Bd
Factory Setting: 38400 Bd
RS232/RS485 RS232/RS485 depends on order code
– Connection for flush mounted case rear panel, mounting location “C“
9 pin DSUB port
for panel-surface at the terminal on the case bottom
mounted case
– Test Voltage 500 V AC
RS232
RS485
– Maximum Distance of Transmission 1 km / 3280 feet / 0.62 mile
Fibre Optical Link
– Connector Type ST–Connector
with flush-mounted case rear panel, mounting location “C“
with panel surfacemounted
case on the case bottom
– Optical Wavelength λ = 820 nm
– Laser Class 1 Under EN 60825–1/ –2 using glass fiber 50/125 µ m or
using glass fiber 62.5/125 µ m
Technical Data
7UM61 Manual 10-5
C53000-G1176-C127-1
– Optical Link Signal Attenuation max. 8 dB, with glass fiber 62.5/125 µ m
– Channel Distance max. 1.5 km (0.95 miles)
– Character Idle State selectable: factory setting “Light off”
SCADA Interface IEC 60870–5–103
RS232/RS485 floating interface for data transfer
depends on order code to a master terminal
RS232
– Connection for flush mounted case rear panel, mounting location “B“
9 pin DSUB port
for panel surface- at the terminal on the case bottom
mounted case
RS485
– Connection for Flush Mounted Case rear panel, installation location “B“
9 pin DSUB Port RS 485
mounted case Profibus cable
– Maximum Distance of Transmission 1 km / 3280 feet / 0.62 mile
Fibre Optical Link
– Connector Type ST–Connector
with flush-mounted case rear panel, mounting location “B“
– Laser Class 1 Under EN 60825–1/ –2 using glass fiber 50/125 µ m or
– Character Idle State selectable: factory setting “Light off”
Profibus RS485 (FMS1) and DP)
– Connection for Flush Mounted Case rear panel, installation location “B“
mounted case
1) on request
Technical Data
10-6 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Transmission Speed up to 1.5 M Baud
– Maximum Distance of Transmission 1 km / 3280 feet / 0.62 mile at≤ 93.75 kBd
500 m /1640 feet /0.31 mile at≤ 187.5 kBd
200 m / 660 feet at ≤ 1.5 MBd
Profibus RS485
– Connection for Flush-Mounted Case rear panel, mounting location “B“
For Panel Surface-
Mounted Case on the case bottom
– Transmission Speed up to 12 M Baud
– Maximum Distance of Transmission 1 km / 3280 feet / 0.62 mile at≤ 93.75 kBd
500 m /1640 feet /0.31 mile at≤ 187.5 kBd
200 m / 660 feet at ≤ 1.5 MBd
100 m /330 feet at ≤ 12 MBd
Profibus Fibre Optical Link
(FMS1) and DP)
– Connection ST–Connector,
for FMS single ring or twin ring, depending
on order; for DP only double ring
– Transmission Speed up to 1.5 M Baud
recommended: > 500 k Baud
– Laser class 1 Under EN 60825–1/ –2 using glass fiber 50/125 µ m or
– Character Idle State selectable: factory setting “Light Off”
DNP3.0 RS4851)
For Panel Surface-
– Transmission Speed up to 19200 Baud
– Maximum Distance of Transmission 1 km
DNP3.0 Fibre Optical Link1)
1) on request
Technical Data
7UM61 Manual 10-7
C53000-G1176-C127-1
MODBUS RS4851)
For Panel Surface-
– Maximum Distance of Transmission 1 km
MODBUS Fibre Optical Link1)
1) on request
Clock – Time Synchronization DCF77/IRIG B–Signal
– Connection For Flush-mounted Case rear panel, mounting location “A“
9 - pin DSUB port
For Panel Surface- at the terminal on the case bottom
Mounted Case
– Signal Rated Voltage selectable 5 V, 12 V or 24 V
– Signal Levels and Burdens:
Rated Signal Voltage
5 V 12 V 24 V
VIHigh 6.0 V 15.8 V 31 V
VILow 1.0 V at IILow = 0.25 mA 1.4 V at IILow = 0.25 mA 1.9 V at IILow = 0.25 mA
IIHigh 4.5 mA to 9.4 mA 4.5 mA to 9.3 mA 4.5 mA to 8.7 mA
RI 890 Ω at VI = 4 V
640 Ω at VI = 6 V
1930 Ω at VI = 8.7 V
1700 Ω at VI = 15.8 V
3780 Ω at VI = 17 V
3560 Ω at VI = 31 V
Technical Data
10-8 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
10.1.5 Electrical Tests
Specifications Standards: IEC 60255 (Product Standards)
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.0,.C37.90.0.1 and
C37.90.0.2
DIN 57 435 Part 303
See also standards for individual functions
Insulation Tests Standards: IEC 60255–5, IEC 60870–2–1
– High Voltage Test (routine test) 2.5 kV (rms) AC
All circuits except power supply,
Binary Inputs, and
Communications Interface
– High Voltage Test (routine test) 3.5 kVDC
only power supply and binary inputs
– High Voltage Test (routine test) 500 V (rms) AC
Only Isolated Communications
and Time Synchronization Interfaces
– Impulse Voltage Test (type test) 5 kV (peak): 1.2/50 µ s: 0.5 Ws: 3 positive
All Circuits Except Communications and 3 negative surges in intervals of 5 s
and Time Synchronization Interfaces,
Class III
EMC Tests for Immunity
(Type Tests)
Standards: IEC 60255–6 and –22, (Product standards)
EN 50082–2 (Generic standard)
DIN 57 435 Part 303 ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1
and C37.90.2
– High Frequency Test 2.5 kV (Peak): 1 MHz: τ = 15 ms;
IEC 60255–22–1, Class III 400 Surges per s: Test Duration 2 s
and VDE 0435 Part 303, Class III Ri=200 Ω
– Electrostatic Discharge 8 kV contact discharge: 15 kV air-
IEC 60255–22–2 Class IV discharge, both polarities:150 pF:Ri=330 Ω
and IEC 61000–4–2, Class IV
– Irradiation with HF Field, 10 V/m: 27 MHz to 500 MHz
non-modulated
IEC 60255–22–3 (Report) Class III
– Irradiation with HF Field, 10 V/m: 80 MHz to1000 MHz: 80 % AM:
amplitude modulated 1 kHz
IEC 61000–4–3, Class III
– Irradiation with HF Field, 10 V/m: 900 MHz: repetition frequency
Pulse Modulated 200 Hz: duty cycle of 50 %
IEC 61000–4–3/ENV 50204, Class III
– Fast Transient Disturbance Variables/ 4 kV: 5/50 ns: 5 kHz: Burst length = 15 ms;
Burst IEC 60255–22–4 and repetition rate 300 ms: both polarities:
IEC 61000-4-4, Class IV Ri = 50 Ω : Test Duration 1 min
– High Energy Surge Voltages
(SURGE), IEC 61000–4–5
Installation Class 3
Power Supply common mode: 2 kV: 12 Ω : 9 µ F
Technical Data
7UM61 Manual 10-9
C53000-G1176-C127-1
diff. mode: 1 kV: 2 Ω : 18 µ F
Measuring Inputs, Binary Inputs common mode: 2 kV: 42 Ω : 0.5 µ F
and Relay Outputs diff. mode: 1 kV: 42 Ω : 0.5 µ F
– Line Conducted HF, amplitude modul. 10 V: 150 kHz to 80 MHz: 80 % AM: 1 kHz
IEC 61000–4–6, Class III
– Power System Frequency Magnetic 30 A/m continuous: 300 A/m for 3 s: 50 Hz
Field IEC 61000–4–8, Class IV 0.5 mT: 50 Hz
IEC 60255–6
– Oscillatory Surge Withstand Capability 2.5 to 3 kV (Peak Value): 1MHz to 1.5 MHz
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 damped wave: 50 surges per s:
duration 2 s: Ri = 150 Ω to 200 Ω
– Fast Transient Surge Withstand Cap. 4 kV to 5 kV: 10/150 ns: 50 Pulse per s;
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 both polarities: Duration 2 s: Ri = 80 Ω
– Radiated Electromagnetic Interference 35 V/m: 25 MHz to 1000 MHz
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2 amplitude and pulse modulated
– Damped Oscillations 2.5 kV (Peak Value), polarity alternating
similar to IEC 60694–4–12, 100 kHz, 1 MHz, 10 MHz and 50 MHz,
IEC 61000–4–12 Ri = 200 Ω
EMC Tests For
Noise Emission
(type test)
Standard: EN 50081–1 (Generic Standard)
– Radio Noise Voltage to Lines, 150 kHz to 30 MHz
Only Power Supply Voltage Limit Class B
IEC–CISPR 22
– Radio Noise Field Strength 30 MHz to 1000 MHz
IEC–CISPR 22 Limit Class B
10.1.6 Mechanical Stress Tests
Vibration and
Shock Stress During
Operation
Standards: IEC 60255–21 and IEC 60068
– Vibration Sinusoidal
IEC 60255–21–1, Class 2 10 Hz to 60 Hz: ± 0.075 mm Amplitude;
IEC 60068–2–6 60 Hz to 150 Hz: 1 g acceleration
frequency sweep rate 1 Octave/min
20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes.
– Shock Half-sine shaped
IEC 60255–21–2, Class 1 acceleration 5 g, duration 11 ms,
IEC 60068–2–27 3 shocks in each direction of
3 orthogonal axes
– Seismic Vibration Sinusoidal
IEC 60255–21–2, Class 1 1 Hz to 8 Hz ± 3.5 mm Amplitude
IEC 60068–3–3 (horizontal axis)
1 Hz to 8 Hz: ± 1.5 mm Amplitude
(Vertical axis)
8 Hz to 35 Hz: 1 g acceleration
(horizontale axis)
8 Hz to 35 Hz: 0.5 g acceleration
(Vertical axis)
Technical Data
10-10 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Frequency Sweep Rate1 Octave/min
1 cycle in 3 orthogonal axes
Vibration and
Shock Stress During
Transport
Standards: IEC 60255–21 and IEC 60068–2
– Vibration Sinusoidal
IEC 60255–21–1, Class 2 5 Hz to 8 Hz: ± 7.5 mm Amplitude;
IEC 60068–2–6 8 Hz to 150 Hz: 2 g acceleration
Frequency sweep rate1 Octave/min
20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes.
– Shock Half-sine shaped
IEC 60255–21–2, Class1 Acceleration 15 g, duration 11 ms,
3 orthogonal axes.
– Continuous Shock Half-sine shaped
IEC 60255–21–2, Class 1 Acceleration 10 g, duration 16 ms,
3 orthogonal axes.
10.1.7 Climatic Stress Tests
Ambient Temperatures
Standards: IEC 60255–6
– Recommended operating temperature +23°F to +131°F or –5 °C to +55 °C
Visibility of display may be impaired at
+131°F and above
– Limiting, stand–by mode
operating temperatures – 4°F to +158°F or –20 °C to +70 °C
– Limiting temperatures for storage –13°F to +131°F or –25 °C to +55 °C
– Limiting temperatures for transport –13°F to +158°F or –25 °C to +70 °C
STORE AND TRANSPORT THE DEVICE WITH FACTORY PACKAGING.
Humidity Permissible Humidity Mean value per year ≤ 75% relative
humidity, on 56 days of the year up to 93%
relative humidity.
CONDENSATION MUST BE AVOIDED
Siemens recommends that all devices be installed such that they are not exposed to
direct sunlight, nor subject to large fluctuations in temperature that may cause condensation
to occur.
Technical Data
7UM61 Manual 10-11
C53000-G1176-C127-1
10.1.8 Service Conditions
The protective device is designed for use in an industrial environment and an electrical
utility environment. Proper installation procedures should be followed to ensure electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC). In addition, the following are recommended:
• All contactors and relays that operate in the same cubicle, cabinet, or relay panel
as the numerical protective device should, as a rule, be equipped with suitable
surge suppression components.
• For substations with operating voltages of 100 kV and above, all external cables
should be shielded with a conductive shield grounded at both ends. The shield must
be capable of carrying the fault currents that could occur. For substations with lower
operating voltages, no special measures are normally required.
• Do not withdraw or insert individual modules while the protective device is energized.
When handling the modules or the device outside of the case, standards for
components sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD) must be observed. The modules
and device are not endangered when inserted into the case.
10.1.9 Construction
Case 7XP20
Dimensions see dimensional drawings, Section 10.21
Weight (mass)
– In case for flush mounting, 1/3 of 19” 12 pounds (5.5 kg)
– In case for flush mounting, 1/2 of 19” 15.5 pounds (7.0 kg)
– In case for surface mounting, 1/3 of 19”16.5 pounds (7.5 kg)
– In case for surface mounting, 1/2 of 19”26.5 pounds (12 kg)
International Protection Under IEC 60529
– in the surface mounted case IP 51
– in the flush mounted case and in model
with the detached operator interface
Front IP 51
Back IP 50
– For human safety IP 2x Terminals covered with protection cap
Technical Data
10-12 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
10.2 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 50, 67)
Pickup and Time
Delay Ranges/
Resolutions
Pickup Current 50–1 0.50 A to 40.00 A1) (increments 0.05 A)1)
Pickup Current 50–2 0.50 A to 40.00 A1) (increments 0.05 A)1)
Delay Times T 50–1, 50–2, 0.00 s to 60.00 s (increments 0.01 s)
or ∞ (does not expire)
Undervoltage seal–in U< 10.0 V to 125.0 V (increments 0.1 V)
Holding time of undervoltage seal–in 0.10 s to 60.00 s (increments 0.01 s)
Inclination of directional characteristic –90°el. to +90° el. (increments 1° el.)
The set times are pure delay times.
Inherent Operating
Times
Pickup times
50–1, 50–2
– Current = 2 x Pickup Value approx. 35 ms
– Current = 10x Pickup Value approx. 25 ms
Dropout Times
50–1, 50–2 approx. 50 ms
Dropout Dropout/Pickup (ratio) 50–1 approx. 0.95 for I/IN ≥ 0.3
Dropout/Pickup (ratio) 50–2 0.90 to 0.99 (increments 0.01)
Dropout/Pickup (ratio) U< approx. 1.05
Pickup value – Dropout value (∆ ϕ ) 2º electrical
Tolerances Pickup Current 50–1, 50–2 1 % of setting value or 50 mA1)
Undervoltage seal–in U< 1 % of setting value or 0.5 V
Delay Times T 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
Angle tolerance ϕ 1º electrical
Influencing Variables
for Pickup
Power supply direct voltage in range
0.8 ≤ VPS/ VPS nominal ≤ 1.15 1 %
Temperatur in range
23º F ≤ ϑ amb ≤ 131º F 0.06% /10º F
–5º C ≤ ϑ amb ≤ 55º C 0.5 %/10 K
Frequency in range
0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 < 1 %
Harmonic currents
– Up to 10 % 3. Harmonic < 1 %
1) For IN = 1 A, divide all limits and increments by 5.
Technical Data
7UM61 Manual 10-13
C53000-G1176-C127-1
10.3 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51)
Pickup and Time
Multiplier Ranges/
Resolutions
Pickup Current 51 0.50 A to 20.00 A1) (Increments 0.05 A)1)
Time Multipliers for 51 Tp 0.05 s to 3.20 s (Increments 0.01 s)
IEC–Characteristics or ∞ (delay does not expire)
Time Multiplier for 51 D 0.50 to 15.00 (Increments 0.01)
ANSI characteristics or ∞ (delay does not expire)
Undervoltage release U< 10.0 V to 125.0 V (Increments 0.1 V)
Trip Time Characteristics
As Per IEC
As per IEC 60255-3, Section 3.5.2 or BS 142 (See also Figure 10-1)
The trip times for I/Ip ≥ 20 are identical to those for I/Ip = 20.
Pickup threshold approx. 1.10 · Ip
Dropout threshold approx. 1.05 · Ip for Ip/IN ≥ 0.3
Tolerances Pickup Currents Ip 1 % of setting value, or 50 mA1)
Voltage threshold U< 1 % of setting value, or 0,5 V
Trip Time for 2 ≤ I/Ip ≤ 20 5 % of reference (calculated) value + 1 %
current tolerance, respectively 40 ms
for Pickup
0.8 ≤ VPS/ VPS nominal ≤ 1.15 1 %
Temperature in range
23º F ≤ ϑ amb ≤ 131º F 0.06% /10º F
–5º C ≤ ϑ amb ≤ 55º C 0.5 %/10 K
Frequency in range
0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 < 1 %
Harmonic currents
t 0.14
(I ⁄ Ip) 0.02 – 1
_1250$/_,19(56( (Type A) = --------------------------------- ⋅ Tp
t
13.5
(I ⁄ Ip) 1 – 1
_9(5<_,19(5(6( (Type B) = --------------------------- ⋅ Tp
t 80
(I ⁄ Ip) 2 – 1
_(;75(0(/<_,19_ (Type C) = --------------------------- ⋅ Tp
For All Characteristics
t trip time in seconds
Tp setting value of the time multiplier
I fault current
Ip setting value of the pickup current
[s]
[s]
[s]
Technical Data
10-14 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 10-1 Trip Characteristics of the Inverse-time Overcurrent Protection, as per IEC 60755–3 (phases
and ground)
Extremely Inverse:
(Type C)
t 80 [s]
(I⁄ Ip)2
–1
= ---------------------------- ⋅ Tp
0,1
0,2
0,4
1,6
3,2
0,05
Extremely inverse:
(Type C)
I/Ip
1
0,3
0,1
1 2 3 5 10 20
100
20
10
5
2
0,5
0,2
0,05
Normal inverse: Very inverse:
(Type B)
Tp
t [s] t [s]
I/Ip I/Ip
1
0,3
0,1
1 2 3 5 10 20
100
20
10
5
2
0,5
0,2
0,05
[s] [s]
1 2 3 5 10 20
0,3
0,1
100
20
10
2
0,05
5
[s]
0,2
0,5
1
t [s]
3
3
30 30
3
t
0,14
(I ⁄ Ip)0,02
–1
= -------------------------------------- ⋅ Tp
(Type A)
t
13, 5
(I ⁄ Ip)1
–1
= ---------------------------- ⋅ Tp
t 80
(I ⁄ Ip)2
–1
= ---------------------------- ⋅ Tp
0,8
0,1
0,2
0,4
1,6
3,2
0,05
0,8
7
Tp
0,1 0,2
0,4
1,6
3,2
0,8
Tp
0,05
Tp setting value of the time factor
I fault current
Technical Data
7UM61 Manual 10-15
C53000-G1176-C127-1
As Per
ANSI
As per ANSI/IEEE (see also Figures 10-2 and 10-3)
The trip times for I/Ip ≥ 20 are identical to those for I/Ip = 20.
Pickup Threshold approx. 1.10 · Ip
Dropout threshold approx. 1.05 · Ip for Ip/IN ≥ 0.3
corresponds to approx. [0.95 · pickup
threshold]
Tolerances Pickup Currents Ip 1 % of setting value, or 50 mA1)
Voltage threshold U< 1 % of setting value, or 0,5 V
Trip Time for 2 ≤ I/Ip ≤ 20 5 % of reference (calculated) value + 1 %
for Pickup
0.8 ≤ VPS/ VPS nominal ≤ 1.15 1 %
23º F ≤ ϑ amb ≤ 131º F 0.06% /10º F
–5º C ≤ ϑ amb ≤ 55º C 0.5 %/10 K
Frequency in range
0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 < 1 %
t 8.9341
(I ⁄ Ip) 2.0938 – 1
--------------------------------------- + 0.17966
 
 
 
,19(56( = ⋅ D
9(5<_,19(56(
(;75(0(/<_,19(56(
For all Characteristics
t = Trip time in seconds
D = Setting value of the time multiplier
I = Fault Current
Ip = Setting value of the pickup current
'(),1,7(_,19(56(
02'(5$7(/<_,19_ t 0.0103
(I ⁄ Ip) 0.02 – 1
--------------------------------- + 0.0228
 
 
 
=⋅ D
t 3.922
(I ⁄ Ip) 2 – 1
-------------------------- + 0.0982
 
 
 
=⋅ D
t 5.64
(I ⁄ Ip) 2 – 1
-------------------------- + 0.02434
 
 
 
=⋅ D
t 0.4797
(I ⁄ Ip) 1.5625 – 1
--------------------------------------- + 0.21359
 
 
 
=⋅ D
[s]
[s]
[s]
[s]
[s]
Technical Data
10-16 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 10-2 Trip Time Characteristics Of The Inverse-time Overcurrent Protection, As Per ANSI/IEEE
D [s]
I/Ip
1
2
5
10
15
0.5
2 3 5 10 20
0.3
0.1
500
20
10
2
0.05
5
0.2
0.5
1
t [s]
30
100
200
3
50
1
VERY INVERSE t 3, 922 [s]
(I ⁄ Ip)2
–1
---------------------------- +0,0982
 
 
 
 
=⋅ D
MODERATELY INVERSE t 0, 0103
(I ⁄ Ip)0,02
–1
-------------------------------------- + 0, 0228
 
 
 
 
=⋅ D
D [s]
I/Ip
1
2
5
10
15
0.5
2 3 5 10 20
0.3
0.1
500
20
10
2
0.05
5
0.2
0.5
1
t [s]
30
100
200
3
50
1
[s]
0.3
0.1
500
20
10
2
0.05
5
0.2
0.5
1
t [s]
30
100
200
3
50
5
2
1
0.5
10
D [s]
15
I/Ip
1 2 3 5 10 20
t 8, 9341
(I ⁄ Ip)2, 0938
–1
-------------------------------------------- + 0, 17966
 
 
 
 
INVERSE = ⋅ D [s]
D setting value of the time factor
I fault current
Technical Data
7UM61 Manual 10-17
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 10-3 Trip Time Characteristics Of The Inverse-time Overcurrent Protection, As Per ANSI/IEEE
D [s]
I/Ip
1
2
5
10
15
0.5
2 3 5 10 20
0.3
0.1
500
20
10
2
0.05
5
0.2
0.5
1
t [s]
30
100
200
3
50
1
EXTREMELY INVERSE t 5, 64
(I ⁄ Ip)2
–1
---------------------------- + 0, 02434
 
 
 
 
= ⋅ D [s]
D [s]
I/Ip
1
2
5
15
0.5
1 2 3 5 10 20
DEFINITE INVERSE t 0,4797 [s]
(I ⁄ Ip)1, 5625 – 1
-------------------------------------------- + 0, 21359
 
 
 
 
=⋅ D
0.3
0.1
500
20
10
2
0.05
5
0.2
0.5
1
t [s]
30
100
200
3
50
10
D setting value of the time factor
I fault current
Technical Data
10-18 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
10.4 Thermal Overload Protection (ANSI 49)
Setting Ranges/
Resolutions
K-Factor per IEC 60255-8 0.50 to 2.50 (Increments 0.01)
Time Constant τ 30 sec to 32000 sec (Increments 1 sec)
Extension K-Factor kt - Factor 1.0 to 10.0 relative to the time constant for
when Machine Stopped the machine running (Increments 0.1)
Thermal Alarm Θ Alarm/Θ Trip 70% to 100% of the trip temperature rise
(Θ ALARM) (Increments 1%)
Current Overload IAlarm 0.50 A to 20.00 A1) (Increments 0.05 A)1)
Alarm (I ALARM)
Rated temperature rise 40° C to 200° C (Increments 1° C)
at rated sec. current 104° F to 392° F (Increments 1° F)
Cooling medium temperature 40° C to 300° C (Increments 1° C)
for scaling 104° F to 572° F (Increments 1° F)
Current limiting IMax therm. 2.50 A to 40.00 A1) (Increments 0.05 A)1)
Emergency Time 10 s to 15000 s (Increments 1 s)
Trip Characteristic
Curve
See also Figure 10-4
Dropout Relations Θ /Θ trip Drops out with Θ Alarm
Θ /Θ Alarm approx. 0.99
I/IAlarm approx. 0.95
Tolerances Referring to k · IN 1 % or 50 mA1); 2 % class per
IEC 60 255–8
Thermal trip and alarm times 3 % or 1 s for I/(k ·IN) > 1.25;
3 % class per IEC 60 255–8
Referring to
[k · IN]
Power supply DC voltage (VDC) in range
0.8 ≤ VPS/ VPS nominal ≤ 1.15 1 %
23 °F≤ ϑ amb ≤ 131 °F 0.3% /10º F
–5º C ≤ ϑ amb ≤ 55º C 0.5 %/10 K
Frequency in range
0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 < 1 %
tτ
I
k ⋅ IN  ------------
  2 Ipre
k ⋅ IN  ------------
  2
–
I
k ⋅ IN  ------------
  2
–1
= ⋅ ln -------------------------------------------------
Trip Characteristic Curve
t trip time
τ Temperature rise time constant
I Load current
Ipre Pre-load current
k Setting factor per VDE 0435
Part 3011 and IEC 60255–8
IN Nominal current of the device
Where:
for (I/ k · IN) ≤ 8
Technical Data
7UM61 Manual 10-19
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 10-4 Trip Time Characteristic Curves For The Thermal Overload Protection (49)
Willi Anwender
1
0.3
0.1
1 2 3 5 10 12
100
20
10
5
2
0.5
0.2
0.05
t [min] t [min]
I/k · IN
1000
1
0.3
0.1
100
20
10
5
2
0.5
0.2
0.05
[min]
3
30 30
3
Parameter:
Setting Value
of Time Constant
20
200
500
100
50
10
5
12
4678
50
tτ
I
k ⋅ IN  -------------
 2
I
k ⋅ IN  -------------
  2
–1
= ⋅ ln --------------------------------
without pre-load and with IMax therm.= 8 ⋅ k ⋅ IN:
I/k · IN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 12
with 90 % pre-load and with IMax therm.= 8 ⋅ k ⋅ IN:
tτ
I
k⋅ IN  -------------
  2 Ipre
k⋅ IN -------------
 
 
  2
–
I
k⋅ IN  -------------
  2
–1
=⋅ ln ---------------------------------------------------
50
Parameter:
Setting Value
of Time Constant
1000
500
200
100
50
20
1 2 5 10
τ [min]
τ [min]
[min]
Technical Data
10-20 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
10.5 Unbalanced load protection (ANSI 46)
Setting Ranges/
Resolutions
Permissible unbalanced load I2>/IN 3.0 % to 30.0 % (Increments 0.1 %)
(warn. level too)
Tripping stage (definite time)I2>>/IN 10 % to 100 % (Increments 1 %)
Time delays T(I2>), T(I2>>) 0.00 s to 60.00 s (Increments 0.01 s)
Asymmetry factor K 2.0 s to 40.0 s (Increments 0.1 s)
Time for cool down TCool down 0 s to 50000 s (Increments 1 s)
Trip characteristic refer also to Figure 10-5
Inherent Operating
Times
Pickup times
Warning stage I2>, tripping stage I2>> approx. 60 ms
Dropout Times
Warning stage I2>, tripping stage I2>> approx. 60 ms
Dropout Warning stage I2>, tripping stage I2>> approx. 0.95
Thermal replica drop-off at I2 < I2 perm.
Tolerances Pickup values I2>, I2>> 3 % of setting value or 1 % unbal. load
Thermal replica for 2 ≤ I2/I2 perm.≤ 20 5 % of reference (calculated) value + 1 %
for Pickup
0.8 ≤ VPS/ VPS nominal ≤ 1.15 1 %
Temperatur in range
23º F ≤ ϑ amb ≤ 131º F 0.06% /10º F
–5º C ≤ ϑ amb ≤ 55º C 0.5 %/10 K
Frequency in range
0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 1 %
Harmonic currents
– Up to 10 % 3. Harmonic 1 %
t
K
(I2 ⁄ IN) 2
= ----------------------
Trip characteristic of the thermal replica
t – tripping time
K – Asymmetry factor
I2 – Negative sequence current
IN – Nominal current of the device
I2 perm. – continously permissible negative
– sequece current
Where:
for I2/I2 perm. ≤ 10
Technical Data
7UM61 Manual 10-21
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 10-5 Trip characteristics of the thermal unbalanced load protection stage
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1
2
3
4
6
10
20
30
40
100
I2/In
0.05 0.07 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.7 1
s
t
1
2
4
10
20
40
100
200
400
1000
2000
10000
Schieflast
t = f (I2/In)
tK
(I2 ⁄ IN) 2
= ---------------------- for I2/I2 Zul. ≤ 10
Parameter:
Setting value
FACTOR K
40 s
30 s
20 s
15 s
10 s
5s
2s
Unbalanced Load
Technical Data
10-22 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
10.6 Underexcitation protection (ANSI 40)
Setting Ranges/
Resolutions
Conductance sections 1/xd CHAR. 0.25 to 3.00 (Increments 0.01)
Angle of inclination α 1, α 2, α 3 50° to 120° (Increments 1°)
Time delays T 0.00 s to 60.00 s (Increments 0.01 s)
Undervoltage lock-out 10.0 V to 125.0 V (Increments 0.1 V
Inherent Operating
Times
Pickup times
– Stator criterion 1/xd CHAR., α approx. 60 ms
– Undervoltage lock-out U1< approx. 50 ms
Dropout – Stator criterion 1/xd CHAR., α approx. 0.95
– Undervoltage lock-out U1< approx. 1.1
Tolerances – Stator criterion 1/xd CHAR. 3 % of setting value
– Stator criterion α 1° electrical
– Undervoltage lock-out U1< 1 % of setting value
– Delay Times T 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
for Pickup
0.8 ≤ VPS/ VPS nominal ≤ 1.15 1 %
Temperatur in range
23º F ≤ ϑ amb ≤ 131º F 0.06% /10º F
–5º C ≤ ϑ amb ≤ 55º C 0.5 %/10 K
Frequency in range
0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 1 %
Harmonic currents
Technical Data
7UM61 Manual 10-23
C53000-G1176-C127-1
10.7 Reverse power protection (ANSI 32R)
Setting Ranges/
Resolutions
Reverse power Pr>/SN –0.50 % to 30.0 % (Increments 0.01 %)
Inherent Operating
Times
Pickup times
– Reverse power Pr> approx. 360 ms at 50 Hz
approx. 300 ms at 60 Hz
Drop-off times
– Reverse power Pr> approx. 360 ms at 50 Hz
approx. 300 ms at 60 Hz
Dropout – Reverse power Pr> approx. 0.6
Tolerances – Reverse power Pr> 0.25 % SN ± 3 % of set value
at Q < 0.5 SN
(SN....rated apparent power,
Q.......reactive power)
for Pickup
0.8 ≤ VPS/ VPS nominal ≤ 1.15 1 %
Temperatur in range
23º F ≤ ϑ amb ≤ 131º F 0.06% /10º F
–5º C ≤ ϑ amb ≤ 55º C 0.5 %/10 K
Frequency in range
0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 < 1 %
Harmonic currents
Technical Data
10-24 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
10.8 Forward active power supervision (ANSI 32F)
Setting Ranges/
Resolutions
Forward power Pf</SN 0.5 % to 120.0 % (Increments 0.1 %)
Forward power Pf>/SN 1.0 % to 120.0 % (Increments 0.1 %)
Inherent Operating
Times
Pickup times
– Forward power Pf<, Pf> approx. 360 ms at 50 Hz with high–accuapprox.
300 ms at 60 Hz racy measurement
approx. 60 ms at 50 Hz with high–speed
approx. 50 ms at 60 Hz measurement
Drop-off times
– Forward power Pf<, Pf> approx. 360 ms at 50 Hz with high–accuapprox.
300 ms at 60 Hz racy measurement
approx. 60 ms at 50 Hz with high–speed
approx. 50 ms at 60 Hz measurement
Dropout – Forward power Pf< approx. 1.10 or 0.5 % of SN
Pf> approx. 0.90 or –0.5 % of SN
Tolerances – Forward power Pf<, Pf> 0.25 % SN ± 3 % of set value
with high–accuracy measurement
0.5 % SN ± 3 % of set value
with high–speed measurement
(SN....rated apparent power)
for Pickup
0.8 ≤ VPS/ VPS nominal ≤ 1.15 1 %
Temperatur in range
23º F ≤ ϑ amb ≤ 131º F 0.06% /10º F
–5º C ≤ ϑ amb ≤ 55º C 0.5 %/10 K
Frequency in range
0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 < 1 %
Harmonic currents
Technical Data
7UM61 Manual 10-25
C53000-G1176-C127-1
10.9 Impedance protection (ANSI 21)
Overcurrent fault
detection
Pickup Current IMP I> 0.50 A to 40.00 A1)(increments 0.05 A)1)
Drop-off ratio approx. 0.95
Measuring tolerances according ± 3% of set value
VDE 0435 part 303
Undervoltage seal-in U< 10.0 V to 125.0 V (increments 0.1 V)
Drop-off ratio approx. 1.05
Measuring tolerances according ± 3% of set value
VDE 0435 part 303
Impedance measurement
Characteristic polygonal, 3 independent stages
Impedance Z1 (based on IN = 5 A2) 0.01Ω to 26.00 Ω (increments 0.01 Ω )
Impedance Z1B (based on IN = 5 A2) 0.01Ω to 13.00 Ω (increments 0.01 Ω )
Impedance Z2 (based on IN = 5 A2) 0.01Ω to 13.00 Ω (increments 0.01 Ω )
Measuring tolerances according  ∆ Z/Z ≤ 5 % for 30° ≤ ϕ K ≤ 90° or 10mΩ
VDE0435 part 303
with sinusoidal quantities
2) Secondary values for IN = 5 A; for IN = 1 A multiply all values by 5; the increment is
always 0.01 Ω .
Times Shortest tripping time 35 ms
Typical tripping time 40 ms
Dropout Time approx. 50 ms
Holding time of undervoltage seal-in 0.00 s to 32.00 s (Increments 0.01 s)
Time expiry tolerances 1 % of set value or 10 ms
for Pickup
0.8 ≤ VPS/ VPS nominal ≤ 1.15 1 %
Temperatur in range
23º F ≤ ϑ amb ≤ 131º F 0.06% /10º F
–5º C ≤ ϑ amb ≤ 55º C 0.5 %/10 K
Frequency in range
0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 < 1 %
Harmonic currents
Technical Data
10-26 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
10.10 Undervoltage protection (ANSI 27)
Setting Ranges /
Resolution
Measurement Quantities: PositiveSequence Voltages
Pickup Voltage 27-1, 27-2 10.0 V to 125.0 V (Increments 0.1 V)
Dropout Ratio for 27-1, 27-2 1.01 to 1.20 (Increments 0.01)
Time Delay 27-Delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s (Increments 0.01 s)
The set time are pure delay times.
Inherent Operating
Times
Pickup Times
27-1, 27-2 approx. 50 ms
Dropout Times
27-1, 27-2 approx. 50 ms
Tolerances – Pickup Voltages 1% of set value, or 0.5 V
– Time Delays T 1% of set value, or 10 ms
0.8 ≤ VPS/ VPS nominal ≤ 1.15 1%
23º F ≤ ϑ amb ≤ 131º F 0.3 % /10º F
–5º C ≤ ϑ amb ≤ 55º C 0.5 %/10 K
Frequency in range
0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 < 1%
Harmonics
- Up to 10% 3rd harmonic < 1%
- Up to 10% 5th harmonic < 1%
Technical Data
7UM61 Manual 10-27
C53000-G1176-C127-1
10.11 Overvoltage protection (ANSI 59)
Setting Ranges /
Resolution
Measurement Quantities: maximum of the phase–to–phase voltages,
calculated from the phase–to–earth voltages
Pickup Voltage 59-1, 59-2 30.0 V to 170.0 V (Increments 0.1 V)
Dropout Ratio for 59-1, 59-2 0.90 to 0.99 (Increments 0.01)
Time Delay 59-Delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s (Increments 0.01 s)
The set time are pure delay times.
Inherent Operating
Times
Pickup Times
59-1, 59-2 approx. 50 ms
Dropout Times
59-1, 59-2 approx. 50 ms
Tolerances – Pickup Voltages 1% of set value, or 0.5 V
– Time Delays T 1% of set value, or 10 ms
23º F ≤ ϑ amb ≤ 131º F 0.3 % /10º F
–5º C ≤ ϑ amb ≤ 55º C 0.5 %/10 K
Frequency in range
0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 < 1%
Harmonics
Technical Data
10-28 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
10.12 Frequency Protection (ANSI 81)
Setting Ranges/
Resolutions
Number of Frequency Elements 4: each can be 81/O or 81/U
Pickup Frequency 81–1 to 81–4 40.00 Hz to 65.00 Hz (Increments 0.01 Hz)
Time Delay 81–1 0.00 s to 600.00 s (Increments 0.01 s)
81–2 to 81–4 0.00 s to 100.00 s (Increments 0.01 s)
Undervoltage Blocking Umin 10.0 V to 125.0 V (Increments 0.1 V)
(U1 positive sequence voltage)
Inherent Operating
Times
Pickup Times 81/O or 81/U approx. 100 ms
Dropout Times 81/O or 81/U approx. 100 ms
Dropout Frequency ∆ f = | Pickup Value – Dropout Value | approx. 20 mHz
Dropout Voltage Dropout Ratio for
Undervoltage Blocking(U / Umin) approx. 1.05
Tolerances – Pickup Frequencies 81/O or 81U 10 mHz
– Undervoltage Blocking 1% of set value or 0.5 V
– Time Delays 81/O or 81/U 1% of set value or 10 ms
0.8 ≤ VPS/ VPS nominal ≤ 1.15 0.1%
23º F ≤ ϑ amb ≤ 131º F 0.06% /10º F
–5º C ≤ ϑ amb ≤ 55º C 0.5 %/10 K
Harmonics
Technical Data
7UM61 Manual 10-29
C53000-G1176-C127-1
10.13 Overexcitation protection U/f> (ANSI 24)
Setting Ranges/
Resolutions Overexcitation (ratio ) 1.00 to 1.20 (Increments 0.01)
(warning stage)
Overexcitation (ratio ) 1.00 to 1.40 (Increments 0.01)
(stepped characteristic)
Time delay T 0.00 s to 60.00 s (Increments 0.01 s)
(warning stage
and stepped charact. or ∞ (does not expire)
Pair of values for
characteristic of U/f 1.10 / 1.15 / 1.20 / 1.25 / 1.30 / 1.35 / 1.40
thermal replica T 0 s to 20000 s (Increments 0.01 s)
Time for cool down TCOOL DOWN 0 s to 20000 s (Increments 1 s)
Inherent Operating
Times
Warning stage and stepped characteristic
– Pickup Times at 1.1 times setting valueapprox. 60 ms
– Dropout Times approx. 60 ms
Dropout Dropout/Pickup approx. 0.95
Tripping time characteristic
thermal replica according presettings refer Figure
Tolerances Pickup on U/f 3 % of setting value )
thermal replica 5 %, related to U/f ± 600 ms
for Pickup
0.8 ≤ VPS/ VPS nominal ≤ 1.15 1 %
Temperatur in range
23º F ≤ ϑ amb ≤ 131º F 0.06% /10º F
–5º C ≤ ϑ amb ≤ 55º C 0.5 %/10 K
Frequency in range
0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 < 1 %
Harmonic currents
U / UN
f / fN
>
U / UN
f / fN
>
Technical Data
10-30 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Figure 10-6Tripping time characteristic of thermal replica and of stepped stage of the overexcitation
protection (pre–settings)
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4
1
2
3
5
10
20
30
50
100
200
300
500
1000
2000
3000
10000
t [s]
U⁄ f
UN ⁄ fN -----------------
T U/f>>
(Pickup/warning stage)
U/f> U/f>>
Technical Data
7UM61 Manual 10-31
C53000-G1176-C127-1
10.14 90–%–Stator earth fault protection (ANSI 59N, 64G, 67G)
Setting Ranges/
Resolutions
Displacement voltage U0> 5.0 V to 125.0 V (Increments 0.1 V)
Residual Current IE> 2 mA to 1000 mA (Increments 1 mA)
Inclination of directional characteristic 0° to 360° (Increments 1°)
Inherent Operating
Times
– Pickup Times UE approx. 50 ms
IE approx. 50 ms
Direction approx. 70 ms
– Dropout Times UE approx. 50 ms
IE approx. 50 ms
Direction approx. 70 ms
Dropout Displacement voltage UE approx.0.70
Residual Current IE> approx. 0.70
Hysteresis of directional characteristic approx. 10°
Tolerances Displacement voltage UE 1 % of setting value or 0.5 V
Residual Current IE> 1 % of setting value or 0.5 mA
for Pickup
0.8 ≤ VPS/ VPS nominal ≤ 1.15 1 %
Temperatur in range
23º F ≤ ϑ amb ≤ 131º F 0.06% /10º F
–5º C ≤ ϑ amb ≤ 55º C 0.5 %/10 K
Frequency in range
0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 < 1 %
Harmonic currents
Technical Data
10-32 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
10.15 Sensitive earth current detection (ANSI 51GN, 64F)
Setting Ranges/
Resolutions
Overcurrent pick-up IEE> 2 mA to 1000 mA (increments 1 mA)
Delay time TIEE> 0.00 s to 60.00 s (increments 0.01 s
Overcurrent pick-up IEE>> 2 mA to 1000 mA (increments 1 mA)
Delay time TIEE>> 0.00 s to 60.00 s (increments 0.01 s
Measured value supervision
when used as rotor earth
fault protection IEE< 1.5 mA to 50.0 mA (increments 0.1 mA)
or 0,0 mA (ineffective)
Inherent Operating
Times
– Pickup Times approx. 60 ms
– Measured value supervision approx. 2 s
Dropout Overcurrent pick-up IEE>, IEE>> approx.0.95 or 1 mA
Measured value superv. IEE< approx. 1.10
Tolerances Overcurrent pick-up 1 % of setting value or 0.5 V
for Pickup
0.8 ≤ VPS/ VPS nominal ≤ 1.15 1 %
Temperatur in range
23º F ≤ ϑ amb ≤ 131º F 0.06% /10º F
–5º C ≤ ϑ amb ≤ 55º C 0.5 %/10 K
Frequency in range
0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 < 1 %
Harmonic currents
Note: For the purpose of high sensitivity, the linear range of the measuring input for
the sensitive ground fault acquisition is from 2 mA A to 1600 mA.
Technical Data
7UM61 Manual 10-33
C53000-G1176-C127-1
10.16 100–%–Stator earth fault protection with 3rd harm.
(ANSI 27/59TN)
Setting Ranges/
Resolutions
Pick–up value for 3rd harmonic
in undervoltage stage U0 3. HARM< 0.2 V to 40.0 V (increments 0.1 V)
Pick–up value for 3rd harmonic
in overvoltage stage U0 3. HARM> 0.2 V to 40.0 V (increments 0.1 V)
iDelay time TSEF 3. HARM.) 0.00 s to 60.00 s (increments 0.01 s)
oder ∞ (unwirksam)
Release threshold P/Pmin > 10 % to 100 % (increments 1 %)
or 0 (ineffective)
U/U1 min> 50.0 V to 125.0 V (increments 0.1 V)
or 0 (ineffective)
Inherent Operating
Times
Dropout Undervoltage stage U0 3. HARM< approx. 1,40
Overvoltage stage U0 3. HARM> approx. 0,60
Release thresholds P/Pmin > approx. 0,90
U/U1 min> approx. 0,95
Toleranzen – Displacement voltage 3 % of setting value or 0.1 V
– Delay time TSEF 3. HARM. 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
for Pickup
0.8 ≤ VPS/ VPS nominal ≤ 1.15 1 %
Temperatur in range
23º F ≤ ϑ amb ≤ 131º F 0.06% /10º F
–5º C ≤ ϑ amb ≤ 55º C 0.5 %/10 K
Frequency in range
0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 < %
Harmonic currents
Technical Data
10-34 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
10.17 Breaker Failure Protection (ANSI 50BF)
Pickup and Time
Delay Ranges/
Resolutions
Pickup of 50 Element CIRC.BR.I> 0.20 A to 5.00 A 1) (Increments 0.05 A)1)
Time Delay TRIP-Timer 0.06 s to 60.00 s (Increments 0.01 s)
or ∞ ( no trip)
Initiating Time Pickup Times (protection initiates)
- For Internal Start approx. 50 ms
- Using Controls approx. 50 ms
- For External Start approx. 50 ms
Reset Time approx. 50 ms
Tolerances Pickup Current CIRC.BR.I> 1% of set value, or 50 mA1)
Time Delay TRIP-Timer 1% or 10 ms
23º F ≤ ϑ amb ≤ 131º F 0.3 % /10º F
–5º C ≤ ϑ amb ≤ 55º C 0.5 %/10 K
Frequency in range
0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 < 1%
Harmonics
1) For IN = 1A, divide all limits by 5.
Technical Data
7UM61 Manual 10-35
C53000-G1176-C127-1
10.18 Inadvertent energization (ANSI 50/27)
Setting Ranges/
Resolutions
Overcurrent pick-up ISTAGE 0.5 A to 100.0 A1) (increments 0.1 A)1)
Release U1< 10.0 V to 125,0 V (increments 0,1 V)
Time delay PICK UP T U1< 0.00 s to 60.00 s (increments 0,01 s)
Drop Out time delay DROP OUT T U1<0.00 s to 60.00 s (increments 0,01 s)
Inherent Operating
Times
Dropout I>>> approx. 0.80 or 50 mA
Release threshold U1< approx. 1,05
Toleranzen Overcurrent pick-up I>>> 5 % of setting value or 100 mA1)
Release U1< 1 % of setting value or 0,5 V
23º F ≤ ϑ amb ≤ 131º F 0.3 % /10º F
–5º C ≤ ϑ amb ≤ 55º C 0.5 %/10 K
Frequency in range
0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 1%
1) For IN = 1A, divide all limits by 5.
Technical Data
10-36 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
10.19 Additional Functions
Operational Measured
Values
Operating Measured Values IL1, IL2, IL3
for Currents in A or kA primary; in A secondary,
or in % of INom
- Range 10 % to 200 % INom
- Tolerance 0.2 % of measured value or 10 mA ± 1 Digit
IEE and 3I0
in A or kA primary; in A and in % of INom
secondary
Positive sequence current I1
in A or kA primary; in A secondary,
or in % of INom
Negative sequence current I2
in A or kA primary; in A secondary,
or in % of INom
Operating Measured Values UL1, UL2, UL3
for Voltages (phase-ground) in kV primary; in V secondary
or in % of UNom
- Range 10 % to 120 % UNom
- Tolerance 0.2 % of measured value or ± 0.2 V ± 1 Digit
Operating Measured Values UL1-L2, UL2-L3, UL3-L1
for Voltages (phase-phase) in kV primary; in V secondary
or in % of UNom
- Range 10 % to 120 % UNom
- Tolerance 0.2 % of measured value or ± 0.2 V ± 1 Digit
Uen and 3U0
in kV primary; in V secondary
or in % of UNom
Positive sequence voltage U1 and
Negative sequence voltage U2
in kV primary; in V secondary or
in % of UNom
Operating Measured Values R, X
for Resistances and Reactances in Ω primary and secondary
- Tolerance 1 %
Operating Measured Values S, Apparent Power in kVA (MVA or GVA)
for Power primary, and in % SNom
- Range 0 % to 120% SNom
- Tolerance 1 % ± 0.25 % SN
with SNom = √3 · UNom · INom
P, Real power (with sign) in kW (MW or
GW) primary, and in % SNom
- Range 0 % to 120 % SNom
Q, Reactive power (with sign) in kVAr
(MVAr or GVAr) primary and in % SNom
- Range 0 % to 120 % SNom
Technical Data
7UM61 Manual 10-37
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Operating Measured Values cos ϕ
for Power Factor
- Range –1 to +1
- Tolerance 1 % ± 1 Digit
Operating Measured Values ϕ
for Power angle
- Range –90° to +90°
- Tolerance 0.1°
Counter Values for Energy Wp, Wq (real and reactive energy)
in kWh (MWh or GWh) and in kVARh
(MVARh or GVARh)
- Range 81/2 digits (28 bit) for VDEW protocol
91/2 digits (31 bit) in T103 mode
- Tolerance 1% ± 1 Digit
Operating Measured Values f in Hz
for Frequency
- Range 40 Hz < f < 65 Hz
- Tolerance 10 mHz at U > 0.5 ⋅ UN
Operating Measured Values for Θ S/Θ S Trip
Thermal Overload Protection
- Range 0 % to 400%
- Tolerance 5 % class accuracy per IEC 60255-8
Operating Measured Values for IEE in A or kA primary and in mA
Sensitive Ground Fault Protection secondary
- Range 0 mA to 1600 A
- Tolerance 0.2 % of measured value or 10 mA ± 1 Digit
Min/Max Report Report of Measured Values with date and time
Reset – Automatic Time of day adjustable (in minutes).
Time frame and starting time
adjustable (in days, 1 to 365 days, and ∞).
Reset – Manual Using binary input
Using keypad
Using communication
Min/Max Values for Current I1 (positive sequence)
Min/Max Values for Voltage U1 (positive sequence)
Min/Max Values for 3rd harmonics UE3H
in displacement voltage
Min/Max Values for Power/ Other P, Q
Min/Max Values for Frequency f
Measured Values
Supervision
Current Asymmetry Imax/Imin > I - balance factor, for
I > I - balance limit. Factor and limit are
adjustable.
Technical Data
10-38 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Voltage Asymmetry Umax/Umin > U - balance factor, for
U > U - balance limit. Factor and limit are
adjustable.
Current Sum | iL1+iL2+iL3 | > I - sum threshold value,
adjustable.
Voltage Sum |UL1 + UL2 + UL3 + kU · UE | > SUM.thres. U,
with kU = Uph/Udelta
Current Phase Sequence Clockwise (L1, L2, L3)/
counter-clockwise (L1, L3, L2)
Voltage Phase Sequence Clockwise (L1, L2, L3)/
counter-clockwise (L1, L3, L2)
Limit Value Monitor can be configured with CFC
IL < Limit value LV (ANSI 37-1)
Trip Log Recording of indication of the last 8 power system faults
Time Stamping Resolution for Event Log 1 ms
(Operational Messages)
Resolution for Trip Log (Fault Records) 1 ms
Time Deviation (Internal Clock) Maximum 0.01%
Buffer Battery Lithium Battery, 3 V / 1 Ah, type CR 1/2 AA
Self-discharging time > 5 years
Message “Fail Battery” if
battery charge is low
Waveform Capture optionally instantaneous values or r.m.s.
values
– instantaneous values
− Recording Time Total of 5 s
Pre-event and post-event recording
and memory time adjustable
− Sampling Rate for 50 Hz 1 sample/1.25 ms (16 sam/cyc)
Sampling Rate for 60 Hz 1 sample/1.04 ms (16 sam/cyc)
– r.m.s. values
− Recording Time Total of 80 s
Pre-event and post-event recording
and memory time adjustable
− Sampling Rate for 50 Hz 1 sample/20 ms (1 sam/cyc)
Sampling Rate for 60 Hz 1 sample/16.67 ms (1 sam/cyc)
Statistics (Circuit
Breaker)
Saved Number of Trips Up to 9 digits
Accumulated Interrupted Current Up to 4 digits (kA) per pole
Operating Hours
Counter
Operating Hours Range Up to 6 digits
Criterion to Count Current exceeds an adjustable current
threshold (BkrClosed I MIN)
Trip Circuit Monitor
(74TC)
With one or two binary inputs.
Technical Data
7UM61 Manual 10-39
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Commissioning
Start-up Aids
Phase Rotation Field Check
Operating Measured Values
Circuit Breaker / Switching Device Test
Creation of a Test Measurement Report
Clock Time Synchronization IRIG-B/DCF77-signal
Binary signal
Communication
Technical Data
10-40 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
10.20 Operating ranges of the protection functions
1) thermical replica registers cooling-down
2) pick -up – when already present – is maintained
3) pick -up – when already present – is maintained, if the measured voltage is not too small
Operational condition
1
The frequency follow-up circuit can operate only , when at least one a.c. measured
quantity is present at one of the the analog inputs (uL1, uL2, uL3, iL1, iL2, iL3), with an
amplitude of at least 5 % of rated value (operational condition 1).
Operational condition
0
If no suitable a.c. measured values are present, or if the frequency is below 11 Hz or
above 70 Hz, the relay cannot operate (operational condition 0).
Table 10-1 Operating ranges of the protection functions
Operat. cond. 0 Operational condition 1 Operat. cond. 0
Protection function f ≤ 10 Hz 11 Hz ≤ f/Hz ≤ 40 40 Hz ≤ f/Hz ≤ 70 f ≥ 70 Hz
Definite-time overcurrent prot. (50, 51, 67) inactive active active inactive
Inverse-time overcurrent protection (51) inactive active active inactive
Thermal overload protection (49) inactive1) active active inactive1)
Unbalanced load protection (46) inactive1) active active inactive1)
Underexcitation protection (40) inactive active active inactive
Reverse power protection (32R) inactive active active inactive
Forward active power supervision (32F) inactive active active inactive
Impedance protection (21) inactive active active inactive
Undervoltage protection (27) inactive2) active active inactive2)
Overvoltage protection (59) inactive active active inactive
Overfrequency protection (81/O) inactive active active inactive3)
Underfrequency protection (81/U) inactive active active inactive
Overexcitation protection U/f> (24) inactive1) active active inactive1)
90–%–Stator earth fault prot. (59N, 64G, 67G) inactive active active inactive
100–%–S/E/F with 3rd harm. (27TN, 59TN) inactive active active inactive
Sensitive earth current detection (51GN, 64F) inactive active active inactive
Breaker Failure Protection (50BF) inactive active active inactive
Inadvertent energization (50/27) active active active active
External trip commands active active active active
Technical Data
7UM61 Manual 10-41
C53000-G1176-C127-1
10.21 Dimensions
Housing for Panel
Flush Mounting or
Cubicle Installation
(Size 1/3)
7UM611
Figure 10-7 Dimensions 7UM611 for panel flush mounting or cubicle installation (size 1/3)
Note: 2 mounting brackets (Order-No. C73165–A63–C200–2) are necessary to install
the 7UM61 in a rack.
244
266
2
29,5 172
34
150
145
146 +2
255,8 ± 0,3
245 + 1
5 oder M4
6
244
266
2
29,5 172 34 29 30
105 ± 0,5
131,5 ± 0,3
13,2
7,3
5,4
Mounting plate Mounting plate
Side view (with screwed terminals) Side view (with clamp terminals) Rear view
Panel cut-out
Dimensions in mm
Technical Data
10-42 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Housing for Panel
Flush Mounting or
Cubicle Installation
(Size 1/2)
7UM612
Figure 10-8 Dimensions 7UM612 for panel flush mounting or cubicle installation (size 1/2)
225
220
Rear view
221 +2
5 or M4
6
Panel cut-out
255.8 ± 0.3
245 + 1
180 ± 0.5
206.5 ± 0.3
13.2
7.3
5.4
244
266
2
29.5 172
34
Monting plate
Side view (with screwed terminals)
244
266
2
29.5 172 34
Mounting plate
29 30
Side view (with clamp terminals)
Dimensions in mm
Technical Data
7UM61 Manual 10-43
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Panel Mounting
(Housing size 1/3)
7UM611
Figure 10-9 Dimensions 7UM611 for panel mounting (size 1/3)
Panel Mounting
(Housing size 1/2)
7UM612
Figure 10-10 Dimensions 7UM612 for panel mounting (size 1/2)
n
280
165
144
150
320
344
10,5 260
29,5
71
72 52
25
266
Front view Side view
9
31 45
46 60
1 15
16 30
Dimensions in mm
280
240
219
225
320
344
10,5 260
29,5
71
72 52
25
266
Front view Side view
9 1 25
26 50
51 75
76 100
Dimensions in mm
Technical Data
10-44 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
7UM61 Manual A-1
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Appendix A
This appendix is primarily a reference for the experienced user. This Chapter provides
ordering information for the models of 7UM61. General diagrams indicating the terminal
connections of the 7UM61 models are included. Connection examples show the
proper connections of the device to primary equipment in typical power system configurations.
Tables with all settings and all information available in a 7UM61 equipped
with all options are provided.
A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories A-2
A.2 General Diagrams A-6
A.3 Connection Examples A-10
A.4 Definition of the Active Power Measurement A-17
A.5 Overview of the masking features of the user defined informations A-19
A.6 Default Settings A-23
A.7 Interoperability List A-27
A.8 Settings A-29
A.9 List of Information A-41
A.10 Protocol-Dependent Functions A-76
Appendix
A-2 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories
Housing, Number of Binary Inputs and Outputs
Housing 1/3 19”, 7 BI, 11 BA, 1 Live Status Contact 1
Housing 1/2 19”, 15 BI, 19 BA, 1 Live Status Contact 2
Nominal Current
IN = 1 A 1
IN = 5 A 5
Auxiliary Voltage (Power Supply, Pick-up Threshold of Binary Inputs)
DC 24 to 48 V, pick-up binary inputs 17 V 2
DC 60 to 125 V, pick-up binary inputs 17 V 4
DC 110 to 250 V, AC 115 V, pick-up binary inputs 73 V 5
Construction
Surface mounting housing for panel, 2 tier terminals top/bottom B
Flush mounting housing with plug-in terminals (2/3 pin connector) D
Flush mounting housing for panel/cubicle, screw-type terminals (ring lugs) E
Region-Specific Default/Language Settings and Function Versions
Region DE, 50 Hz, IEC, German language (may be changed) A
Region world, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, English language (may be changed) B
Region US, 60 Hz, ANSI, US-English language (may be changed) C
More languages upon request
System Interface (Rear Port)
no system interface 0
IEC protocol, electrical RS232 1
IEC protocol, electrical RS485 2
IEC protocol, optical 820 nm, ST-plug 3
Profibus FMS Slave, RS485 4
Profibus FMS Slave, optical, double ring, ST-plug*) 6
For more interface options see “Additional Information L” 9
Service Interface (DIGSI 4/Modem) (Rear Port)
no service interface 0
DIGSI 4, electrical RS232 1
DIGSI 4, electrical RS485 2
DIGSI 4, optical 820 nm, ST-plug 3
Mean and Min/Max Metering
without 0
mean values, min/max values 3
continued next page A-3
*) on request
7UM61 _
7 8 13 14 15 16
_
9 10 11 12
Multifunction Machine Protection
6
Appendix
7UM61 Manual A-3
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Protective Elements
Basic Elements, included in all versions A
Definite time overcurrent protection with undervoltage seal-in(ANSI 50) (I> + U<)
Definite time overcurrent protection (ANSI 67) (I>>)
Inverse time overcurrent protection (ANSI 51) (Ip)
Thermal overload protection (ANSI 49) (I2t)
Reverse power protection (ANSI 32R) (–P>)
Undervoltage protection (ANSI 27) (U<)
Overvoltage protection (ANSI 59) (U>)
Frequency protection (ANSI 81) (f<, f>)
Overflux protection (ANSI 24) (U/f)
Stator earth fault protection (ANSI 59N, 64G, 67G) (U0>, IE>)
Sensitive ground fault protection (ANSI 50/51GN, 64R) (IEE>)
Fuse Failure Monitor (FFM)
External trip signals
Trip circuit supervision2) (ANSI 74TC)
Basic Elements
+ Additional functions 1, comprising: B
Forward active power supervision (ANSI 32F) (+P>)
Underexcitation protection (ANSI 40) (–Q>)
Unbalanced load protection (ANSI 46) (I2>)
Breaker failure protection (ANSI 50BF) (BF)
Basic Elements
+ Additional functions 1
+ Additional functions 2, comprising: C
Impedance protection (ANSI 21) (Z<)
Stator earth fault 100 % protection with 3rd harmonic (ANSI 59TN, 27TN) (U0 3rd harmonic)
Dead machine protection (ANSI 50, 27)
1) only for block connection, i.e. non-directional earth fault protection
2) only in 7UM612
Additional Information L +
System Interface (Rear Port)
Profibus DP, RS485 0 A
Profibus DP, optical, double ring 0 B
Modbus RS485*) 0 D
Modbus , optical*) 0 E
More interfaces on request
Ordering example: 7UM6111–4EA91–0BA0 + L0B
here: Pos. 11 = 9 stands for L0B, i.e. version with Profibus DPsystem port on the rear optical, double ring
*) to be implemented in the next software release
L
_ 7UM61
7 8 13 14 15 16
_
9 10 11 12
Mulifunction Machine Protection
6
A0
Appendix
A-4 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
A.1.1 Accessories
Terminal Block
Covering Caps
Short Circuit Links
Pin Connectors
Mounting Rail for
19"-Racks
Battery
Interface Cable An interface cable is necessary for communication between the SIPROTEC
device
and a PC. Requirements for the computer are Windows 95 or Windows NT4 and the
operating software DIGSI® 4.
Operating Software
DIGSI® 4
Software for setting and operating SIPROTEC® 4 devices
Covering cap for terminal block type Order No.
18 terminal voltage, 12 terminal current block C73334-A1-C31-1
12 terminal voltage, 8 terminal current block C73334-A1-C32-1
Short circuit links for purpose/terminal type Order No.
Voltage connections, 18 terminal, or 12 terminal C73334-A1-C34-1
Current connections,12 terminal, or 8 terminal C73334-A1-C33-1
Connector Type Order No.
2 pin C73334-A1-C35-1
3 pin C73334-A1-C36-1
Name Order No.
Angle Strip (Mounting Rail) C73165-A63-C200-2
Lithium-Battery 3 V/1 Ah, Type CR 1/2 AA Order No
VARTA 6127 501 501
SONNENSCHEIN 1110 150 301
Interface cable between PC or SIPROTEC device Order No.
Cable with 9-pin male/female connections 7XV5100-4
Operating Software DIGSI® 4 Order No.
DIGSI® 4, basic version with license for 10 computers 7XS5400-0AA00
DIGSI® 4, complete version with all option packages 7XS5402-0AA0
Appendix
7UM61 Manual A-5
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Graphical Analysis
Program DIGRA
Software for graphical visualization, analysis, and evaluation of fault data. Option
package of the complete version of DIGSI® 4
Display Editor Software for creating basic and power system control pictures. Option package
of the complete version of DIGSI® 4
Graphic Tools Graphical Software to aid in the setting of characteristic curves and provide zone
diagrams
for overcurrent and distance protective devices. Option package of the complete
version of DIGSI® 4.
DIGSI REMOTE 4 Software for remotely operating protective devices via a modem (and possibly
a star
connector) using DIGSI® 4. (Option package of the complete version of DIGSI® 4.
SIMATIC CFC 4 Graphical software for setting interlocking (latching) control conditions and
creating
additional function is SIPROTEC 4 devices. Option package for the complete version
of DIGSI® 4.
Coupling Unit The sensitive earth fault protection can be used as rotor earth fault protection. The
system frequency bias voltage for the rotor circuit is generated and coupled to the rotor
circuit via a coupling unit.
Graphical analysis program DIGRA® Order No.
Full version with license for 10 machines 7XS5410-0AA0
Display Editor 4 Order No.
Graphic Tools 4 Order No.
DIGSI REMOTE 4 Order No.
SIMATIC CFC 4 Order No.
Coupling unit for rotor earth fault protection Order No.
Coupling unit for panel flush mounting 7XR6100-0CA00
Appendix
A-6 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
A.2 General Diagrams
FigureA-1 General diagram 7UM611*–
The connections for additional serial interfaces are taken from Figure A-2.
Power
System
interface
Time
Service
interface
B
C
A
Earthing at the
supply
rear wall
Operator
interface
Q1
Q2
IL1
Q7
Q8
IEE
Q3
Q4
IL2
Q5
Q6
IL3
R15
R17
UL1
F17
F18
BI7
UL2
F10
F11
BI1
F13
F15
F16
F14
F12
BI2
BI4
BI5
BI6
BI3
F7
F9
BO3
F6
F8
BO1
F5
BO2
F1
F2
(~ )
+
-
R7
R8
BO17
R9
R10
BO18
Life status F3
F4
contact 1
32
2
synchronization
Assignment of Pins of Interfaces,
refer to Table 8-6 and
8-7 in Subsection 8.2.1
15
30
12
27
14
29
13
28
26
25
52
39
35
49
50
51
38
37
36
Flush mounting
Surface mounting
R13
R14
UE
59
60
R18
R16
24 UL3
9
BO12
BO13
BO14
BO16
BO15
R11
R12
BO19
32
33
46
47
31
55
42
54
41
45
58
44
56
57
43
53
40
R1
R2
R3
R5
R4
R6
34
48
10
11
Earthing at Side
Wall of Housing
(16)
1
32
2
Interference suppression
capacitors at the
Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V
relay contacts,
Appendix
7UM61 Manual A-7
C53000-G1176-C127-1
FigureA-2 General diagram 7UM611*–*B (panel surface mounting)
Time
Service
interface
17
2
18
3
1
19
20
21
22
23
optical
electrical
or
Channel C
synchronization
CTS
RS232 RS485
RTS
GND
TxD
RxD
B
–
GND
A
–
IN 12 V
COMMON
IN 5 V
IN 24 V
Screen
System
interface
Channel B
4
5
6
7
8
optical
electrical
or
Profibus
B
C
CTS
RS232 RS485 Profibus
RTS
GND
TxD
RxD
B RxD/TxD-N
–
GND
A
–
P5
GND
RxD/TxD-P
CTRL-A
Appendix
A-8 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
FigureA-3 General diagram 7UM612∗−
The connections for additional serial interfaces are taken from Figure A-4.
Power
System
interface
Time
Service
interface
B
C
A
Earthing at the
supply
rear wall
Operator
interface
Q1
Q2
IL1
Q7
Q8
IEE
Q3
Q4
IL2
Q5
Q6
IL3
R15
R17
UL1
F17
F18
BI7
UL2
F10
F11
BI1
F13
F15
F16
F14
F12
BI2
BI4
BI5
BI6
BI3
K9
K10
BO8
F6
F8
BO1
F5
BO2
F1
F2
(~ )
+
-
K11
K12
BO9
K13
K14
BO10
Life status F3
F4
contact 1
32
2
synchronization
25
50
22
47
24
49
23
48
20
19
83
59
55
80
81
82
58
57
56
Flush mounting
Surface mounting
R13
R14
UE
21
46
R18
R16
44 UL3
45
BO12
BO13
BO14
BO16
BO15
K15
K16
BO11
87
63
76
77
51
86
62
85
61
74
99
73
97
98
72
84
60
R1
R2
R3
R5
R4
R6
54
79
15
16
Earthing at Side
Wall of Housing
(26)
K17
K18
43 BI8
18
J1
J2
42 BI9
17
J7
J8
38 BI13
13
J9
J10
37 BI14
12
J11
J12
36 BI15
11
J3
J4
BI10
J5
J6
BI11
BI12
41
40
14
39
R7
R8
BO17
R9
R10
BO18
R11
R12
BA19
96
71
95
70
94
69
F7
F9
BO3
K3
K4
BO4
52
53
90
66
BO5
BO7
BO6
65
89
88
64
K6
K5
K7
K8
1
32
2
1
32
2
Interference suppression
capacitors at the
Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V
relay contacts,
Assignment of Pins of Interfaces,
refer to Table 8-6 and
8-7 in Subsection 8.2.1
Appendix
7UM61 Manual A-9
C53000-G1176-C127-1
FigureA-4 General diagram 7UM612*–*B (panel surface mounting)
Time
Service
interface
27
2
28
3
1
29
30
31
32
33
optical
electrical
or
Channel C
synchronization
CTS
RS232 RS485
RTS
GND
TxD
RxD
B
–
GND
A
–
IN 12 V
COMMON
IN 5 V
IN 24 V
Screen
System
interface
Channel B
4
5
6
7
8
optical
electrical
or
Profibus
B
C
CTS
RS232 RS485 Profibus
RTS
GND
TxD
RxD
B RxD/TxD-N
–
GND
A
–
P5
GND
RxD/TxD-P
CTRL-A
9 Screen
34 Screen
Appendix
A-10 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
A.3 Connection Examples
FigureA-5 Bus–bar connection
Current and voltage connections to three transformers, core balance neutral current transformers and open
delta voltage transformers (e–n).
IEE
UE
UL1
UL2
UL3
IL1
IL2
IL3
R18
R16
R17
R15
Q8
Q7
R13
R14
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
k
l
7UM61
L1
L2
L3
RL
Appendix
7UM61 Manual A-11
C53000-G1176-C127-1
FigureA-6 Busbar System with Low-ohmic, Switchable Starpoint Resistors
Connection to three current transformers and three voltage transformers (phase-to-ground voltages) –earth
fault detection as differential current measuring by two CT sets; detection of displacement voltage at open
delta winding (e–n).
IEE
UE
UL1
UL2
UL3
IL1
IL2
IL3
R18
R16
R17
R15
Q8
Q7
R13
R14
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
7UM61
L1
L2
L3
Diff.-Schutz
Diff.-Schutz
niederohmig
falls erforderlich
(zum Schutz des Widerstandes)
hier nicht erden
RE
diff. protection
diff. protection
low resistance
if necessary
(for saving the resistor)
Appendix
A-12 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
FigureA-7 Busbar System with High-ohmic, Switchable Starpoint Resistors
Connection to three current transformers and three voltage transformers (phase-to-ground voltages) –earth
fault detection as differential current measuring between the starpoint current and the summation current
measured via cable CTs; detection of displacement voltage at open delta winding (e–n).
IEE
UE
UL1
UL2
UL3
IL1
IL2
IL3
R18
R16
R17
R15
Q8
Q7
R13
R14
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
k
l
7UM61
L1
L2
L3
k
l
ca. 10A, 10s
falls erforderlich
(zum Schutz des Widerstandes)
RE RL
oder
Nullpunktstransformator
approx. 10 A,
if necessary
(for saving the resistor)
or
10 sec. neutral transformer
Appendix
7UM61 Manual A-13
C53000-G1176-C127-1
FigureA-8 Block connection
Connection to three current transformers and three voltage transformers (phase-to-earth voltages) – with
additional source 7XR61 for injecting a test voltage between the rotor circuit and the earth and with
supervision
of the rotor ground insulation by sensitive earth fault detection; detection of displacement voltage at
open delta winding (e–n).
IEE
UE
UL1
UL2
UL3
IL1
IL2
IL3
R18
R16
R17
R15
Q8
Q7
R13
R14
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
7UM61
L1
L2
L3
7XR61
+
-
Erdungstransformator
mit Messwicklung
Yd5
4A1
4B1 2B1
1B3
1A1
1A3
1B1
RL
earthing transformer
with open delta winding
and measuring winding
Appendix
A-14 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
FigureA-9 Block connection
Connection to three current transformers and three voltage transformers (phase-to-earth voltages) – with
additional source 7XR61 for injecting a test voltage between the rotor circuit and the earth and with
supervision
of the rotor ground insulation by sensitive earth fault detection; detection of displacement voltage at
starpoint transformer.
IEE
UE
UL1
UL2
UL3
IL1
IL2
IL3
R18
R16
R17
R15
Q8
Q7
R13
R14
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
7UM61
L1
L2
L3
7XR61
+
-
Yd11
RL
max. 10A Nullpunktstransformator
4A1
4B1 2B1
1B3
1A1
1A3
1B1
RE
neutral transformer
Appendix
7UM61 Manual A-15
C53000-G1176-C127-1
FigureA-10 Generator with Neutral Conductor
IEE
UL1
UL2
UL3
IL1
IL2
IL3
R18
R16
R17
R15
Q8
Q7
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
7UM61
N L1 L2 L3
Appendix
A-16 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
FigureA-11 Voltage Transformer Connections for Two Voltage Transformers in V Connection
FigureA-12 Current Transformer Connections with only Two Plant-Side Current Transformers
UL1
UL2
UL3
R18
R16
R17
R15
7UM61
L1 L2 L3
IL1
IL2
IL3
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
7UM61
L1 L2 L3
Appendix
7UM61 Manual A-17
C53000-G1176-C127-1
A.4 Definition of the Active Power Measurement
The 7UM61 used the generator reference-arrow system. The power output is positive.
Figure A-13 Definition of Positive Direction of Reference Arrows
Table A-1 shows the operating ranges for synchronous and asynchronous machines.
Parameter _____$&7,9(_32:(5_is set to *HQHUDWRU. “Normal condition” shows
the active power under normal operating conditions: + means that a positive power is
displayed on the protective device, – that the power is negative.
Tabelle A-1 Operating ranges for synchronous and asynchronous machines
Synchronous generator Synchronous motor
Asynchronous generator Asynchronous motor
I
GU
ϕ
+P
+Q
I
Stability U
limit
underexcited overexcited
Reactive power Q is controlled by the excitation,
Normal condition: +P and +Q
+P
+Q
I
U
Stability
limit
underexcited overexcited
Reactive power Q is controlled by the excitation,
Normal condition: –P and +Q
ϕ
ϕ
+P
+Q
I
U
Reactive power is drawn from the system
to maintain the excitation;
Normal condition: +P and –Q
PBREAK P ϕ
+P
+Q
I
U
The motor draws both active and reactive
power from the system;
Normal condition: –P and –Q
PBREAK
P
Appendix
A-18 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Table A-1 shows that the operating ranges in generator and motor operation are mirrored
around the reactive power axis. The measured power values also result from the
above definition.
If, for instance, the forward power monitoring or the reverse power protection is to be
used in a synchronous motor, parameter _____$&7,9(_32:(5 must be set to 0R_
WRU. As a result, the actual active power (according to the above definition) is multiplied
with –1. This means that the power diagram is mirrored around the reactive power
axis and that the interpretation of the active power changes. This effect must be
considered when evaluating the metered energy values.
If, for instance, positive power values are to be obtained in an asynchronous motor,
the current direction (parameter _____&7_67$532,17) must be reversed. Parameter
_____$&7,9(_32:(5 remains set to *HQHUDWRU. This means that because of the
generator reference-arrow system the earthing of the CTs that must be entered in the
device is the opposite of the actual earthing. This leads to results that are comparable
to those of a load reference-arrow system.
Appendix
7UM61 Manual A-19
C53000-G1176-C127-1
A.5 Overview of the masking features of the user defined
informations
Type of Information Source Destination CFC Task level
Binary Inputs
Function Keys
CFC
Binary Outputs
LED
CFC
Measurement
PLC1
(slow)
PLC
(fast)
Interlocking
• Annunciation:
Single Point
– SP Single Point Indication ON/OFF X – X X X X – X X –
– SP Single Point Indication Open/Close X – X X X X – X X –
Double Point
– DP Double Point Indication (Breaker indication “00” = not
valid/transmitted as “3”)
X – X – – X X1) X X X2)
– DP_I Double Point Indication (Breaker indication “00” =
intermediate/transmitted as “0”)
X – X – – X X1) X X X2)
Output Slow
– OUT Output Indication ON/OFF – – X X X X X1) X X X2)
– OUT Output Indication Open/Close – – X X X X X1) X X X2)
Output Fast
– OUT Protection ON/OFF – – X X X X – X X X2)
– OUT Protection Open/Close – – X X X X – X X X2)
Tagging
– IntSP Internal Single Point Indication ON/OFF – X X X X X X1) X X X2)
– IntSP Internal Single Point Indication Open/Close – X X X X X X1) X X X2)
– IntDP Internal Double Point Indication (Breaker indication
“00” = not valid/transmitted as “3”)
– – X – – X X1) X X X2)
– IntDP_I Internal Double Point Indication (Breaker indication
“00” = intermediate/transmitted as “0”)
– – X – – X X1) X X X2)
Tap Changer
– TxTap Transformer Tap Changer X – – – – – – – – –
• Control Commands without feedback:
Single Controls
– C_S ON/OFF – – X X – X – X X X
– C_S Open/Close – – X X – X – X X X
1) Only for measurement setpoints (is processed cyclically every 600 ms); do not use for binary inputs.
2) Only for commands (is triggered by commands only).
Appendix
A-20 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Single Controls negated
– C_SN ON/OFF – – X X – X – X X X
– C_SN Open/Close – – X X – X – X X X
Double Controls 1 Trip 1 Close
– C_D2 ON/OFF – – X X – X – X X X
– C_D2 Open/Close – – X X – X – X X X
– C_D2 Transformer Tap Changer – – X X – X – X X X
Double Controls 1 Trip 1 Close 1 Common
– C_D3 ON/OFF – – X X – X – X X X
– C_D4 ON/OFF – – X X – X – X X X
– C_D12 ON/OFF – – X X – X – X X X
Double Controls negated
– C_D2N ON/OFF – – X X – X – X X X
– C_D2N Open/Close – – X X – X – X X X
– C_D2N Transformer Tap Changer – – X X – X – X X X
Binary Inputs
Function Keys
CFC
Binary Outputs
LED
CFC
Measurement
PLC1
(slow)
PLC
(fast)
Interlocking
1) Only for measurement setpoints (is processed cyclically every 600 ms); do not use for binary inputs.
2) Only for commands (is triggered by commands only).
Appendix
7UM61 Manual A-21
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Binary Inputs
Function Keys
CFC
Binary Outputs
LED
CFC
Measurement
PLC1
(slow)
PLC
(fast)
Interlocking
• Control Commands with feedback:
Single Controls
– CF_S Single Point Indication ON/OFF Control – – X X – X – X X X
– SP Feedback X – X X X X – X X X
– CF_S Single Point Indication Open/Close Control – – X X – X – X X X
– CF_S Double Point Indication (Breaker indication “00”
= not valid/transmitted as “3”)
Control – – X X – X – X X X
– DP Feedback X – X – – X – X X X
– CF_S Double Point Indication (Breaker indication
– DP_I Feedback X – X – – X – X X X
– CF_D2 Single Point Indication ON/OFF Control – – X X – X – X X X
– CF_D2 Single Point Indication Open/Close Control – – X X – X – X X X
– CF_D2 Double Point Indication (Breaker indication “00”
– CF_D2 Double Point Indication (Breaker indication
– CF_D2 Transformer Tap Changer Control – – X X – X – X X X
– TxTap Feedback – – – – – – – – – –
Double Controls 1 Trip 1 Close 1 Common
– TxTap Feedback – – – – – – – – – –
Appendix
A-22 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
– TxTap Feedback – – – – – – – – – –
– TxTap Feedback – – – – – – – – – –
Double Controls 1 Trip 1 Close negated
– CF_D2N Single Point Indication ON/OFF Control – – X X – X – X X X
– CF_D2N Single Point Indication Open/Close Control – – X X – X – X X X
– CF_D2N Double Point Indication (Breaker indication “00”
– CF_D2N Double Point Indication (Breaker indication
– CF_D2N Transformer Tap Changer Control – – X X – X – X X X
– TxTap Feedback – – – – – – – – – –
• Measured Values:
– MV Measured Value – – – – – X X – – –
– MVU Measured Value, User Defined – – X – – – X – – –
– LV Limit Value – – – – – X X – – –
– LVU Limit Value, User Defined – – – – – X X – – –
• Metered Values:
– MVMV Metered Value of Measured Values – – – – – – – – – –
– PMV Pulse Metered Values X – – – – – – – – –
Binary Inputs
Function Keys
CFC
Binary Outputs
LED
CFC
Measurement
PLC1
(slow)
PLC
(fast)
Interlocking
Appendix
7UM61 Manual A-23
C53000-G1176-C127-1
A.6 Default Settings
A.6.1 Binary Inputs
1) for busbar connection
2) 7UM612 only
A.6.2 Binary Outputs (output relays)
1) 7UM612 only
Binary input Abbreviation FNo Type of
information
Description
Binary input 1 !69_WULSSHG ____ SP O/O >Stop valve tripped
Binary input 2 !8H[F_IDLO_ ____ SP >Exc. voltage failure recognized
Binary input 3 !%/2&._I_
!%/2&._8_
!6_(_)_,HH_RII__
____
____
______
SP O/O
SP O/O__
SP
Generator circuit breaker open__
Binary input 4 !)$,/_)HHGHU_97
!8VHDO_LQ_%/.
!%/2&._8_9
____
____
____
SP O/O
SP O/O
SP
Voltage transformer protective switch tripped
Binary input 5 !([W_WULS__ ____ SP O/O External trip signal 1
Binary input 6 !([W_WULS__ ____ SP O/O External trip signal 2
Binary input 7 !7ULJ_:DYH_&DS_ ____ SP >Trigger Waveform Capture
Binary input 8....142) /LVW_(PSW\ ____ ---- No functions configured (reserve)
Binary output Abbreviation FNo Type Description
Output relay 1 (UURU_3ZU6XSSO\
)DLO_%DWWHU\
____
____
OUT O/O
OUT O/O
General indication: Internal monitoring
Output relay 2 5HOD\_75,3 ____ Relay trip
Output relay 3 /LVW_(PSW\ ____ ---- No functions configured (reserve)
Output relays 4..111) /LVW_(PSW\ ____ ---- No functions configured (reserve)
Output relay 12 ,!_75,3 ____ OUT O/O Trip by overcurrent time protection (stage I>)
Output relay 13 ,((!_75,3
8__!_75,3
6_(_)_75,3
____
____
____
OUT O/O
OUT O/O
OUT O/O
Trip by earth fault protection
Output relay 14 8__75,3
8!_75,3
8!!_75,3
____
____
____
OUT O/O
OUT O/O
OUT O/O
Trip by voltage protection
Output relay 15 I__75,3
I__75,3
____
____
OUT O/O
OUT O/O
Trip by frequency protection
Appendix
A-24 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
FigureA-14 Tripping matrix — pre–settings
Binary output Abbreviation FNo Type Description
Output relay 16 ([F___75,3
([F_8_75,3
____
____
OUT O/O
OUT O/O
Trip by underexcitation protection
I__75,3
,!_75,3
8!!_75,3
3U_75,3
3U_69_75,3
6_(_)_75,3
,__Θ 75,3
([F___75,3
([F_8_75,3
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
OUT O/O
OUT O/O
OUT O/O
OUT O/O
OUT O/O
OUT O/O
OUT O/O
OUT O/O
OUT O/O
OUT O/O
Marshalled via the tripping matrix:
Generator circuit breaker
,!_75,3
8!!_75,3
3U_69_75,3
6_(_)_75,3
,__Θ 75,3
([F___75,3
([F_8_75,3
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
OUT O/O
OUT O/O
OUT O/O
OUT O/O
OUT O/O
OUT O/O
OUT O/O
OUT O/O
De–excitation Generator
,!_75,3
6_(_)_75,3
,__Θ 75,3
____
____
____
____
OUT O/O
OUT O/O
OUT O/O
OUT O/O
Stop valve
Generator circuit breaker
De–excitation
Stop valve
IEE>> TRIP
IEE> TRIP
BrkFailure TRIP
ThOverload TRIP
I>> TRIP
I> TRIP
O/C Ip TRIP
Imp.Z1< TRIP
Imp.Z1B< TRIP
Imp.Z2< TRIP
Imp.T3> TRIP
Ext 1 Gen.TRP
Ext 2 Gen.TRP
Ext 3 Gen.TRP
Ext 4 Gen.TRP
Pr TRIP
Pr+SV TRIP
Pf< TRIP
Pf> TRIP
FNo 1223
FNo 1900
FNo 3977
FNo 3978
FNo 3979
FNo 3980
FNo 4537
FNo 4557
FNo 4577
FNo 4597
FNo 5097
FNro 5098
FNo 5128
FNo 5129
FNo 1809
FNo 1521
FNo 1471
FNo 1226
FNo 1815 Generator circuit breaker
De–excitation
Stop valve
I2 Θ TRIP
S/E/F TRIP
f1 TRIP
f2 TRIP
f3 TRIP
f4 TRIP
Exc<3 TRIP
Exc<1 TRIP
Exc<2 TRIP
Exc<U< TRIP
U/f> TRIP
U/f>th. TRIP
I.En. TRIP
SEF 3H TRIP
U< TRIP
U<< TRIP
U> TRIP
I2>> TRIP
FNo 5239
FNo 5343
FNo 5344
FNo 5345
FNo 5346
FNo 5371
FNo 5372
FNo 5548
FNo 5568
FNo 6539
FNo 6540
FNo 6570
FNo 5160
FNo 5237
FNo 5236
FNo 5193
FNo 5161
FNo 5238
FNo 5187 U0 > TRIP
FNo 6573 U>> TRIP
Relay 17
Relay 18
Relay 19
Relay 17
Relay 18
Relay 19
Appendix
7UM61 Manual A-25
C53000-G1176-C127-1
A.6.3 LED Indicators
1) 7UM612 only
LED Abbreviation FNo Type of
information
Description
LED 1 5HOD\_75,3 ____ OUT O/O Protective relay has tripped
LED 2 5HOD\_3,&.83 ____ OUT O/O Protective relay has picked up
LED 3 ,!_)DXOW_/_ ____ OUT O/O Fault L1
LED 6 ,((!_75,3
8_!_75,3
6_(_)_75,3
____
____
____
OUT O/O
OUT O/O
OUT O/O
Earth fault
LED 7 (UURU_3ZU6XSSO\
)DLO_%DWWHU\
____
____
OUT O/O
OUT O/O
Hardware failure
LED 8...141) /LVW_(PSW\ ____ ---- No functions configured (reserve)
Appendix
A-26 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
A.6.4 Pre–defined CFC–charts
Some CFC Charts are already supplied with the SIPROTEC® device:
Device and System
Logic
The single-point indication “!'DWD6WRS“ that can be injected by binary inputs is converted
by means of a NEGATOR block into an indication “8QORFN'7“ that can be processed
internally (internal single point indication, IntSP), and assigned to an output.
This would not be possible directly, i.e. without the additional block.
:
Figure A-15 Logical Link between Input and Output
Set points Using modules on the running sequence “measured value processing”, a low current
monitor for the three phase currents is implemented. The output message is set high
as soon as one of the three phase currents falls below the set threshold:
FigureA-16 Undercurrent monitoring
_*HQHUDO_!'DWD6WRS_63 287_'HYLFH__8QORFN'7_,QW63
,1__'HYLFH_
IN: Set points IL< LV
IN: Measurement IL1 = MV
OUT: Set points SP. I< OUT
Appendix
7UM61 Manual A-27
C53000-G1176-C127-1
A.7 Interoperability List
1. Physical layer
1.1 Electrical interface
EIA RS-485 Number of loads for one equipment: 32
1.2 Optical interface
Glass fibre F-SMA type connector
Plastic fibre BFOC/2,5 type connector
1.3 Transmission speed
9600 bit/s 19200 bit/s
2. Link layer
There are no choices for the link layer
3. Application layer
3.1 Transmission mode for application data Mode 1 (least significant octet first) as defined in 4.10
of
IEC 60870-5-4
3.2 Common address of ASDU
One common address of ADSU More than one common address of ASDU
(identical with station address)
3.3 Selection of standard information numbers in monitor direction
3.3.1 System functions in monitor direction
0 End of general interrogation 0 Time synchronization
2 Reset FCB 3 Reset CU
4 Start/restart 5 Power on
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4 see separate table in the device manual (Information List in the following section)
3.3.5
3.3.6
3.3.7 Measurands in monitor direction
144 Measurand I 145 Measurands I, V
146 Measurand I, V, P, Q 147 Measurands IN, VEN
148 Measurands IL1,2,3, VL1,2,3, P, Q, f
3.3.8 Generic functions in monitor direction
240 Read headings of all defined groups 241 Read values of all entries of one group
243 Read directory of a single entry 244 Read value of a single entry
245 End of general interrogation generic 249 Write entry with confirmation
data
250 Write entry with execution 251 Write entry aborted
3.4 Selection of standard information numbers in control direction
3.4.1 System functions in control direction
0 Initiation of general interrogation 0 Time synchronization
3.4.2 General commands in control direction
16 Auto-recloser on / off 17 Teleprotection on / off
18 Protection on / off 19 LED reset
23 Activate characteristic 1 24 Activate characteristic 2
25 Activate characteristic 3 26 Activate characteristic 4
XX
X
XX
XX
X
XX
XX
XX
X
XX
X
XX
Appendix
A-28 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
3.4.3 Generic functions in control direction
240 Read headings of all defined groups 241 Read values of all entries of one group
243 Read directory of a single entry 244 Read value of a single entry
245 General interrogation of generic data 248 Write entry
249 Write entry with confirmation 250 Write entry with execution
251 Write entry abort
3.5 Basic application functions
Test mode Blocking of monitor direction
Disturbance data Generic services
Private data
3.6 Miscellaneous
Measurand max. value = rated value x
1.2 2.4
Current L1
Current L2
Current L3
Voltage L1-E
Voltage L2-E
Voltage L3-E
Voltage L1-L2
Active power P
Reactive power Q
Frequency f
XX
X
X
Appendix
7UM61 Manual A-29
C53000-G1176-C127-1
A.8 Settings
NOTE: The following table lists all data which are available in the maximum complement of the
device. Dependent on the ordered model, only those data
may be present which are valid for the individual version.
Addr. Setting Title Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments
201 CT Starpoint Power System Data 1 CT starpoint towards machine
CT starpoint towards starpoint
CT starpoint towards machine CT Starpoint
202 Unom PRIMARY Power System Data 1 0.10..400.00 kV 6.30 kV Rated Primary Voltage
203 Unom SECONDARY Power System Data 1 100..125 V 100 V Rated Secondary Voltage (Ph-Ph)
204 CT PRIMARY Power System Data 1 10..50000 A 500 A CT Rated Primary Current
205 CT SECONDARY Power System Data 1 1A
5A
1A CT Rated Secondary Current
206 Uph / Udelta Power System Data 1 1.00..3.00 1.73 Matching Ratio Ph.-VT to Broken-
Delta-VT
207 CT ANGLE W0 Power System Data 1 -5.00..5.00 ° 0.00 ° Correction Angle CT W0
208 FACTOR IEE Power System Data 1 1.0..300.0 60.0 CT Ratio Prim./Sec. Iee
209 PHASE SEQ. Power System Data 1 L1 L2 L3
L1 L3 L2
L1 L2 L3 Phase Sequence
210 TMin TRIP CMD Power System Data 1 0.01..32.00 sec 0.15 sec Minimum TRIP Command Duration
211 UE CONNECTION Power System Data 1 UE connected to neutral transformer
UE connected to broken delta winding
not connected
UE connected to any VT
UE connected to neutral transformer
UE Connection
212 BkrClosed I MIN Power System Data 1 0.04..1.00 A 0.04 A Closed Breaker Min. Current
Threshold
213 SCHEME Power System Data 1 Direct connected to busbar
Unit transformer connected
Direct connected to busbar Scheme Configuration
214 Rated Frequency Power System Data 1 50 Hz
60 Hz
50 Hz Rated Frequency
217 STAR-POINT Power System Data 1 Starpoint earthing: high resistance
Starpoint earthing: low resistance
Starpoint earthing: high resistance Earthing of Machine Starpoint
Appendix
A-30 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
218 FACTOR UE Power System Data 1 1.0..2500.0 36.4 VT Ratio Prim./Sec. Ue
302 CHANGE Change Group Group A
Group B
Binary Input
Protocol
Group A Change to Another Setting Group
401 WAVEFORMTRIGGER
Oscillographic Fault
Records
Save with Pickup
Save with TRIP
Start with TRIP
Save with Pickup Waveform Capture
402 WAVEFORM DATA Oscillographic Fault
Records
Fault event
Power System fault
Fault event Scope of Waveform Data
403 MAX. LENGTH Oscillographic Fault
Records
0.30..5.00 sec 1.00 sec Max. length of a Waveform Capture
Record
404 PRE. TRIG. TIME Oscillographic Fault
Records
0.05..1.30 sec 0.10 sec Captured Waveform Prior to Trigger
405 POST REC. TIME Oscillographic Fault
Records
0.05..0.50 sec 0.10 sec Captured Waveform after Event
406 BinIn CAPT.TIME Oscillographic Fault
Records
0.10..5.00 sec 0.50 sec Capture Time via Binary Input
1101 U PRIMARY OP. Power System Data 2 0.10..400.00 kV 6.30 kV Primary Operating Voltage
1102 I PRIMARY OP. Power System Data 2 10..50000 A 483 A Primary Operating Current
1108 ACTIVE POWER Power System Data 2 Generator
Motor
Generator Measurement of Active Power for
1201 O/C I> O/C I> (with undervoltage
seal-in)
ON
OFF
OFF Overcurrent Time Protection I>
1202 I> O/C I> (with undervoltage
seal-in)
0.10..8.00 A 1.35 A I> Pickup
1203 T I> O/C I> (with undervoltage
seal-in)
0.00..60.00 sec 3.00 sec T I> Time Delay
1204 U< SEAL-IN O/C I> (with undervoltage
seal-in)
ON
OFF
1205 U< O/C I> (with undervoltage
seal-in)
10.0..125.0 V 80.0 V Undervoltage Seal-in Pickup
Appendix
7UM61 Manual A-31
C53000-G1176-C127-1
1206 T-SEAL-IN O/C I> (with undervoltage
seal-in)
0.10..60.00 sec 4.00 sec Duration of Undervoltage Seal-in
1207 I> DOUT RATIO O/C I> (with undervoltage
seal-in)
0.90..0.99 0.95 I> Drop Out Ratio
1301 O/C I>> O/C I>> (with direction)
ON
OFF
OFF Overcurrent Time Protection I>>
1302 I>> O/C I>> (with direction)
0.10..8.00 A 4.30 A I>> Pickup
1303 T I>> O/C I>> (with direction)
0.00..60.00 sec 0.10 sec T I>> Time Delay
1304 Phase Direction O/C I>> (with direction)
Forward
Reverse
Reverse Phase Direction
1305 LINE ANGLE O/C I>> (with direction)
-90..90 ° 60 ° Line Angle
1401 O/C Ip Inverse O/C Time
Protection
ON
OFF
OFF Inverse O/C Time Protection Ip
1402 Ip Inverse O/C Time
Protection
0.10..4.00 A 1.00 A Ip Pickup
1403 T Ip Inverse O/C Time
Protection
0.05..3.20 sec 0.50 sec T Ip Time Dial
1404 TIME DIAL: TD Inverse O/C Time
Protection
0.50..15.00 5.00 TIME DIAL: TD
1405 IEC CURVE Inverse O/C Time
Protection
Normal Inverse
Very Inverse
Extremely Inverse
Normal Inverse IEC Curve
1406 ANSI CURVE Inverse O/C Time
Protection
Very Inverse
Inverse
Moderately Inverse
Extremely Inverse
Definite Inverse
Very Inverse ANSI Curve
Appendix
A-32 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
1407 VOLT. INFLUENCE Inverse O/C Time
Protection
without
Voltage controlled
Voltage restraint
without Voltage Influence
1408 U< Inverse O/C Time
Protection
10.0..125.0 V 75.0 V U< Threshold for Release Ip
1601 Ther. OVER LOAD Thermal Overload
Protection
OFF
ON
Alarm Only
OFF Thermal Overload Protection
1602 K-FACTOR Thermal Overload
Protection
0.50..2.50 1.11 K-Factor
1603 TIME CONSTANT Thermal Overload
Protection
30..32000 sec 600 sec Thermal Time Constant
1604 Θ ALARM Thermal Overload
Protection
70..100 % 90 % Thermal Alarm Stage
1605 TEMP. RISE I Thermal Overload
Protection
40..200 °C 100 °C Temperature rise at rated sec. curr.
1606 TEMP. RISE I Thermal Overload
Protection
104..392 °F 212 °F Temperature rise at rated sec. curr.
1607 TEMP. INPUT Thermal Overload
Protection
Disabled
4-20 mA
Profibus DP
Disabled Temperature input
1608 TEMP. SCAL. Thermal Overload
Protection
40..300 °C 100 °C Temperature for scaling
1609 TEMP. SCAL. Thermal Overload
Protection
104..572 °F 212 °F Temperature for scaling
1610 I ALARM Thermal Overload
Protection
0.10..4.00 A 1.00 A Current Overload Alarm Setpoint
1612 Kτ -FACTOR Thermal Overload
Protection
1.0..10.0 1.0 Kt-Factor when Motor stops
1615 I MAX THERM. Thermal Overload
Protection
0.50..8.00 A 3.30 A Maximum Current for Thermal
Replica
1616 T EMERGENCY Thermal Overload
Protection
10..15000 sec 100 sec Emergency Time
Appendix
7UM61 Manual A-33
C53000-G1176-C127-1
1701 UNBALANCE LOAD Unbalance Load
(Negative Sequence)
OFF
ON
OFF Unbalance Load Protection
1702 I2> Unbalance Load
(Negative Sequence)
3.0..30.0 % 10.6 % Continously permissible current I2
1703 T WARN Unbalance Load
(Negative Sequence)
0.00..60.00 sec 20.00 sec Warning Stage Time Delay
1704 FACTOR K Unbalance Load
(Negative Sequence)
2.0..40.0 sec 18.7 sec Negativ sequence factor K
1705 T COOL DOWN Unbalance Load
(Negative Sequence)
0..50000 sec 1650 sec Time for cool down
1706 I2>> Unbalance Load
(Negative Sequence)
10..100 % 60 % I2>> Pickup
1707 T I2>> Unbalance Load
(Negative Sequence)
0.00..60.00 sec 3.00 sec T I2>> Time Delay
3001 UNDEREXCIT. Underexcitation Protection
ON
OFF
OFF Underexcitation Protection
3002 1/xd CHAR. 1 Underexcitation Protection
0.25..3.00 0.41 Conductance Intersect Characteristic
1
3003 ANGLE 1 Underexcitation Protection
50..120 ° 80 ° Inclination Angle of Characteristic
1
3004 T CHAR. 1 Underexcitation Protection
0.00..60.00 sec 10.00 sec Characteristic 1 Time Delay
2
2
3007 T CHAR. 2 Underexcitation Protection
3
Appendix
A-34 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
3
3010 T CHAR 3 Underexcitation Protection
3011 T SHRT Uex< Underexcitation Protection
0.00..60.00 sec 0.50 sec T-Short Time Delay (char. &
Uexc<)
3014 Umin Underexcitation Protection
10.0..125.0 V 25.0 V Undervoltage blocking Pickup
3101 REVERSE POWER Reverse Power Protection
ON
OFF
OFF Reverse Power Protection
3102 P> REVERSE Reverse Power Protection
-30.00..-.50 % -1.93 % P> Reverse Pickup
3103 T-SV-OPEN Reverse Power Protection
0.00..60.00 sec 10.00 sec Time Delay Long (without Stop
Valve)
3104 T-SV-CLOSED Reverse Power Protection
0.00..60.00 sec 1.00 sec Time Delay Short (with Stop Valve)
3105 T-HOLD Reverse Power Protection
0.00..60.00 sec 0.00 sec Pickup Holding Time
3201 FORWARD POWER Forward Power
Supervision
ON
OFF
OFF Forward Power Supervision
3202 Pf< Forward Power
Supervision
0.5..120.0 % 9.7 % P-forw.< Supervision Pickup
3203 Pf> Forward Power
Supervision
1.0..120.0 % 96.6 % P-forw.> Supervision Pickup
3204 T-Pf< Forward Power
Supervision
0.00..60.00 sec 10.00 sec T-P-forw.< Time Delay
3205 T-Pf> Forward Power
Supervision
0.00..60.00 sec 10.00 sec T-P-forw.> Time Delay
3206 MEAS. METHOD Forward Power
Supervision
Method accurate
Method fast
Method accurate Method of Operation
Appendix
7UM61 Manual A-35
C53000-G1176-C127-1
3301 IMPEDANCE PROT. Impedance Protection ON
OFF
OFF Impedance Protection
3302 IMP I> Impedance Protection 0.10..8.00 A 1.35 A Fault Detection I> Pickup
3303 U< SEAL-IN Impedance Protection ON
OFF
3304 U< Impedance Protection 10.0..125.0 V 80.0 V Undervoltage Seal-in Pickup
3305 T-SEAL-IN Impedance Protection 0.10..60.00 sec 4.00 sec Duration of Undervoltage Seal-in
3306 ZONE Z1 Impedance Protection 0.05..130.00 Ohm 2.91 Ohm Impedance Zone Z1
3307 T-Z1 Impedance Protection 0.00..60.00 sec 0.10 sec Impedance Zone Z1 Time Delay
3308 ZONE Z1B Impedance Protection 0.05..65.00 Ohm 4.99 Ohm Impedance Zone Z1B
3309 T-Z1B Impedance Protection 0.00..60.00 sec 0.10 sec Impedance Zone Z1B Time Delay
3310 ZONE Z2 Impedance Protection 0.05..65.00 Ohm 4.16 Ohm Impedanz Zone Z2
3311 ZONE2 T2 Impedance Protection 0.00..60.00 sec 0.50 sec Impedance Zone Z2 Time Delay
3312 T END Impedance Protection 0.00..60.00 sec 3.00 sec T END: Final Time Delay
4001 UNDERVOLTAGE Undervoltage Protection
OFF
ON
OFF Undervoltage Protection
4002 U< Undervoltage Protection
10.0..125.0 V 75.0 V U< Pickup
4003 T U< Undervoltage Protection
0.00..60.00 sec 3.00 sec T U< Time Delay
4004 U<< Undervoltage Protection
10.0..125.0 V 65.0 V U<< Pickup
4005 T U<< Undervoltage Protection
0.00..60.00 sec 0.50 sec T U<< Time Delay
4006 U< DOUT RATIO Undervoltage Protection
1.01..1.20 1.05 U< Drop Out Ratio
4101 OVERVOLTAGE Overvoltage Protection
OFF
ON
OFF Overvoltage Protection
Appendix
A-36 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
4102 U> Overvoltage Protection
30.0..170.0 V 115.0 V U> Pickup
4103 T U> Overvoltage Protection
0.00..60.00 sec 3.00 sec T U> Time Delay
4104 U>> Overvoltage Protection
30.0..170.0 V 130.0 V U>> Pickup
4105 T U>> Overvoltage Protection
0.00..60.00 sec 0.50 sec T U>> Time Delay
4106 U> DOUT RATIO Overvoltage Protection
0.90..0.99 0.95 U> Drop Out Ratio
4107 VALUES U> Overvoltage Protection
Voltage protection with U1 (pos.seq.)
Voltage protection with U-Phase-Phase
Voltage protection with U-Phase-earth
Voltage protection with U-Phase-
Phase
Measurement Values for U>
4201 O/U FREQUENCY Frequency Protection OFF
ON
4202 f1 PICKUP Frequency Protection 40.00..65.00 Hz 48.00 Hz f1 Pickup
4204 T f1 Frequency Protection 0.00..600.00 sec 1.00 sec T f1 Time Delay
4214 THRESHOLD f4 Frequency Protection Freq. prot. stage automatic
Freq. prot. stage automatic Handling of Threshold Stage f4
Appendix
7UM61 Manual A-37
C53000-G1176-C127-1
4215 Umin Frequency Protection 10.0..125.0 V 65.0 V Minimum required voltage for operation
4301 OVEREXC. PROT. Overexcitation Protection
ON
OFF
OFF Overexcitation Protection
4302 U/f > Overflux Protection 1.00..1.20 1.10 U/f > Pickup
4303 T U/f > Overflux Protection 0.00..60.00 sec 10.00 sec T U/f > Time Delay
4304 U/f >> Overflux Protection 1.00..1.40 1.40 U/f >> Pickup
4305 T U/f >> Overflux Protection 0.00..60.00 sec 1.00 sec T U/f >> Time Delay
4306 t(U/f=1.10) Overflux Protection 0..20000 sec 6000 sec U/f = 1.10 Time Delay
4313 T COOL DOWN Overflux Protection 0..20000 sec 3600 sec Time for cool down
5001 S/E/F PROT. Stator Earth Fault
Protection
ON
OFF
5002 U0> Stator Earth Fault
Protection
5.0..125.0 V 10.0 V U0> Pickup
5003 3I0> Stator Earth Fault
Protection
2..1000 mA 5 mA 3I0> Pickup
5004 DIR. ANGLE Stator Earth Fault
Protection
0..360 ° 15 ° Angle for Direction Determination
5005 T S/E/F Stator Earth Fault
Protection
0.00..60.00 sec 0.30 sec T S/E/F Time Delay
5101 O/C PROT. Iee> Sensitiv Earth Current
Protection
OFF
ON
OFF Sensitive O/C Protection Iee>
Appendix
A-38 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
5102 IEE> Sensitiv Earth Current
Protection
2..1000 mA 10 mA Iee> Pickup
5103 T IEE> Sensitiv Earth Current
Protection
0.00..60.00 sec 5.00 sec T Iee> Time delay
5104 IEE>> Sensitiv Earth Current
Protection
2..1000 mA 23 mA Iee>> Pickup
5105 T IEE>> Sensitiv Earth Current
Protection
0.00..60.00 sec 1.00 sec T Iee>> Time Delay
5106 IEE< Sensitiv Earth Current
Protection
1.5..50.0 mA 0.0 mA Iee< Pickup (Interrupted Circuit)
5201 SEF 3rd HARM. Stator Earth Fault
Protection 3rdHarm.
ON
OFF
3rdHarm.
5202 U0 3.HARM< Stator Earth Fault
Protection 3rdHarm.
0.2..40.0 V 1.0 V U0 3rd Harmonic< Pickup
5203 U0 3.HARM> Stator Earth Fault
Protection 3rdHarm.
0.2..40.0 V 2.0 V U0 3rd Harmonic> Pickup
5204 T SEF 3. HARM. Stator Earth Fault
Protection 3rdHarm.
0.00..60.00 sec 0.50 sec T SEF 3rd Harmonic Time Delay
5205 P min > Stator Earth Fault
Protection 3rdHarm.
10..100 % 40 % Release Threshold Pmin>
5206 U1 min > Stator Earth Fault
Protection 3rdHarm.
50.0..125.0 V 80.0 V Release Threshold U1min>
7001 BREAKER FAILURE Breaker Failure Protection
OFF
ON
OFF Breaker Failure Protection
7002 TRIP INTERN Breaker Failure Protection
OFF
Start Breaker Failure with Bin.Outp.3
Start Breaker Failure with CFC
OFF Start with Internal TRIP Command
7003 CIRC. BR. I> Breaker Failure Protection
0.04..1.00 A 0.20 A Supervision Current Pickup
7004 TRIP-Timer Breaker Failure Protection
0.06..60.00 sec 0.25 sec TRIP-Timer
Appendix
7UM61 Manual A-39
C53000-G1176-C127-1
7101 INADVERT. EN. Inadvertent Energisation
OFF
ON
OFF Inadvertent Energisation
7102 I STAGE Inadvertent Energisation
0.1..20.0 A 0.3 A I Stage Pickup
7103 RELEASE U1< Inadvertent Energisation
10.0..125.0 V 50.0 V Release Threshold U1<
7104 PICK UP T U1< Inadvertent Energisation
0.00..60.00 sec 5.00 sec Pickup Time Delay T U1<
7105 DROP OUT T U1< Inadvertent Energisation
0.00..60.00 sec 1.00 sec Drop Out Time Delay T U1<
7110 FltDisp.LED/LCD Device Display Targets on every Pickup
Display Targets on TRIP only
Display Targets on every Pickup Fault Display on LED / LCD
8001 FUSE FAIL MON. Measurement Supervision
ON
OFF
OFF Fuse Failure Monitor
8101 MEASURE. SUPERV Measurement Supervision
OFF
ON
OFF Measurement Supervision
8102 BALANCE U-LIMIT Measurement Supervision
10..100 V 50 V Voltage Threshold for Balance
Monitoring
8103 BAL. FACTOR U Measurement Supervision
0.58..0.90 0.75 Balance Factor for Voltage Monitor
8104 BALANCE I LIMIT Measurement Supervision
0.10..1.00 A 0.50 A Current Balance Monitor
8105 BAL. FACTOR I Measurement Supervision
0.10..0.90 0.50 Balance Factor for Current Monitor
8106 Σ I THRESHOLD Measurement Supervision
0.05..2.00 A 0.10 A Summated Current Monitoring
Threshold
8107 Σ I FACTOR Measurement Supervision
0.00..0.95 0.10 Summated Current Monitoring
Factor
8108 SUM.thres. U Measurement Supervision
10..200 V 10 V Summation Thres. for Volt. Monitoring
8109 SUM.Fact. U Measurement Supervision
0.60..0.95 0.75 Factor for Volt. Sum. Monitoring
Appendix
A-40 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
8201 TRIP Cir. SUP. Trip Circuit Supervision
ON
OFF
OFF TRIP Circuit Supervision
8601 EXTERN TRIP 1 External Trip Functions
ON
OFF
8602 T DELAY External Trip Functions
0.00..60.00 sec 1.00 sec Ext. Trip 1 Time Delay
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Appendix
7UM61 Manual A-41
C53000-G1176-C127-1
A.9 List of Information
NOTE: The following table lists all data which are available in the maximum complement of the
device. Dependent on the ordered model, only those data
may be present which are valid for the individual version.
The symbol ’ > ’ indicates that the source of the indication is a binary input.
F.No. Description Function Type Log-Buffers Configurable in
Matrix
IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log On/Off
Trip (Fault) Log On/Off
Ground Fault Log On/
Off
Marked in Oscill.
Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Binary Output
Event Log
Type
Information-No
Data Unit (ASDU)
General Interrogation
3 >Synchronize Internal Real Time Clock (>Time
Synch)
Device SP_Ev * * LED BI BO 135 48 1 GI
4 >Trigger Waveform Capture (>Trig.Wave.Cap.) Oscillographic Fault
Records
SP * * M LED BI BO 135 49 1 GI
5 >Reset LED (>Reset LED) Device SP * * LED BI BO 135 50 1 GI
7 >Setting Group Select Bit 0 (>Set Group Bit0) Change Group SP * * LED BI BO 135 51 1 GI
15 >Test mode (>Test mode) Device SP * * LED BI BO 135 53 1 GI
16 >Stop data transmission (>DataStop) Device SP * * LED BI BO 135 54 1 GI
51 Device is Operational and Protecting (Device
OK)
Device OUT ON OFF * LED BO 135 81 1 GI
52 At Least 1 Protection Funct. is Active (ProtActive)
Device IntSP ON OFF * LED BO 70 18 1 GI
55 Reset Device (Reset Device) Device OUT ON * LED BO
56 Initial Start of Device (Initial Start) Device OUT ON * LED BO 70 5 1
60 Reset LED (Reset LED) Device OUT_Ev ON * LED BO 70 19 1
Appendix
A-42 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
67 Resume (Resume) Device OUT ON * LED BO
68 Clock Synchronization Error (Clock SyncError) Device OUT ON OFF * LED BO
69 Daylight Saving Time (DayLightSavTime) Device OUT ON OFF * LED BO
70 Setting calculation is running (Settings Calc.) Device OUT ON OFF * LED BO 70 22 1 GI
71 Settings Check (Settings Check) Device OUT * * LED BO
72 Level-2 change (Level-2 change) Device OUT ON OFF * LED BO
110 Event lost (Event Lost) Device OUT_Ev ON * LED BO 135 130 1
113 Flag Lost (Flag Lost) Device OUT ON * M LED BO 135 136 1 GI
125 Chatter ON (Chatter ON) Device OUT ON OFF * LED BO 135 145 1 GI
140 Error with a summary alarm (Error Sum Alarm) Device OUT * * LED BO
147 Error Power Supply (Error PwrSupply) Device OUT ON OFF * LED BO
160 Alarm Summary Event (Alarm Sum Event) Device OUT * * LED BO 70 46 1 GI
161 Failure: General Current Supervision (Fail I
Superv.)
Measurement Supervision
OUT ON OFF * LED BO 70 32 1 GI
162 Failure: Current Summation (Failure Σ I) Measurement Supervision
163 Failure: Current Balance (Fail I balance) Measurement Supervision
164 Failure: general Voltage Supervision (Fail U
Superv.)
165 Failure: Voltage Summation Phase-Earth (Fail Σ
U Ph-E)
Matrix
IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log On/Off
Off
Marked in Oscill.
Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Binary Output
Event Log
Type
Information-No
Data Unit (ASDU)
Appendix
7UM61 Manual A-43
C53000-G1176-C127-1
167 Failure: Voltage Balance (Fail U balance) Measurement Supervision
171 Failure: Phase Sequence (Fail Ph. Seq.) Measurement Supervision
175 Failure: Phase Sequence Current (Fail Ph. Seq.
I)
176 Failure: Phase Sequence Voltage (Fail Ph. Seq.
U)
177 Failure: Battery empty (Fail Battery) Device OUT ON OFF * LED BO
181 Error: A/D converter (Error A/D-conv.) Device OUT ON OFF * LED BO
191 Error: Offset (Error Offset) Device OUT ON OFF * LED BO
192 Error:1A/5Ajumper different from setting
(Error1A/5Awrong)
Device OUT ON OFF * LED BO
193 Alarm: NO calibration data available (Alarm NO
calibr)
194 Error: Neutral CT different from MLFB (Error
neutralCT)
197 Measurement Supervision is switched OFF
(MeasSup OFF)
203 Waveform data deleted (Wave. deleted) Oscillographic Fault
Records
OUT_Ev ON * LED BO 135 203 1
272 Set Point Operating Hours (SP. Op Hours>) Set Points (Statistic) OUT ON OFF * LED BO 135 229 1 GI
284 Set Point I< alarm (SP. I<) Set Points (Measured
Values)
OUT on off * LED BO 135 244 1 GI
Matrix
IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log On/Off
Off
Marked in Oscill.
Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Binary Output
Event Log
Type
Information-No
Data Unit (ASDU)
Appendix
A-44 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
361 >Failure: Feeder VT (MCB tripped)
(>FAIL:Feeder VT)
Power System Data 1 SP ON OFF * LED BI BO 150 38 1 GI
394 >UE 3rd Harm. MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
(>MiMaUE3h res.)
Min/Max Measurement
Setup
SP ON * BI BO
396 >I1 MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>I1 MiMaReset) Min/Max Measurement
Setup
SP ON * BI BO
399 >U1 MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>U1 MiMa Reset) Min/Max Measurement
Setup
SP ON * BI BO
400 >P MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>P MiMa Reset) Min/Max Measurement
Setup
SP ON * BI BO
402 >Q MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>Q MiMa Reset) Min/Max Measurement
Setup
SP ON * BI BO
407 >Frq. MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>Frq MiMa
Reset)
Min/Max Measurement
Setup
SP ON * BI BO
409 >BLOCK Op Counter (>BLOCK Op Count) Statistics SP ON OFF * LED BI BO
533 Primary fault current IL1 (IL1 =) Power System Data 2 OUT * ON OFF 150 177 4
601 I L1 (IL1 =) Measurement MV 134 147 9
605 I1 (positive sequence) (I1 =) Measurement MV 134 147 9
606 I2 (negative sequence) (I2 =) Measurement MV 134 147 9
Matrix
IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log On/Off
Off
Marked in Oscill.
Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Binary Output
Event Log
Type
Information-No
Data Unit (ASDU)
Appendix
7UM61 Manual A-45
C53000-G1176-C127-1
621 U L1-E (UL1E=) Measurement MV 134 147 9
624 U L12 (UL12=) Measurement MV
627 Uen (Uen =) Measurement MV 134 147 9
629 U1 (positive sequence) (U1 =) Measurement MV 134 147 9
630 U2 (negative sequence) (U2 =) Measurement MV
639 UE 3rd Harmonic Voltage Minimum (UE3h
min=)
Min/Max Measurement
Setup
MVT
640 UE 3rd Harmonic Voltage Maximum (UE3h
max=)
Min/Max Measurement
Setup
MVT
641 P (active power) (P =) Measurement MV 134 147 9
642 Q (reactive power) (Q =) Measurement MV 134 147 9
644 Frequency (Freq=) Measurement MV 134 147 9
645 S (apparent power) (S =) Measurement MV
650 Uen 3rd harmonic (Uen3h =) Measurement MV
765 Overflux (U/Un) / (f/fn) (U/f =) Measurement MV 134 147 9
766 Calculated temperature (U/f) (U/f th=) Measurement MV
801 Temperat. rise for warning and trip (Θ /Θ trip =) Measurement MV
Matrix
IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log On/Off
Off
Marked in Oscill.
Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Binary Output
Event Log
Type
Information-No
Data Unit (ASDU)
Appendix
A-46 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
802 Temperature rise for phase L1 (Θ /Θ tripL1=) Measurement MV
830 Senstive Earth Fault Current (IEE =) Measurement MV 134 147 9
831 3Io (zero sequence) (3I0 =) Measurement MV
832 3U0 (zero sequence) (3U0 =) Measurement MV
857 Positive Sequence Minimum (I1 Min=) Min/Max Measurement
Setup
MVT
858 Positive Sequence Maximum (I1 Max=) Min/Max Measurement
Setup
MVT
874 U1 (positive sequence) Voltage Minimum (U1
Min =)
Min/Max Measurement
Setup
MVT
875 U1 (positive sequence) Voltage Maximum (U1
Max =)
Min/Max Measurement
Setup
MVT
876 Active Power Minimum (PMin=) Min/Max Measurement
Setup
MVT
877 Active Power Maximum (PMax=) Min/Max Measurement
Setup
MVT
878 Reactive Power Minimum (QMin=) Min/Max Measurement
Setup
MVT
879 Reactive Power Maximum (QMax=) Min/Max Measurement
Setup
MVT
882 Frequency Minimum (fMin=) Min/Max Measurement
Setup
MVT
Matrix
IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log On/Off
Off
Marked in Oscill.
Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Binary Output
Event Log
Type
Information-No
Data Unit (ASDU)
Appendix
7UM61 Manual A-47
C53000-G1176-C127-1
883 Frequency Maximum (fMax=) Min/Max Measurement
Setup
MVT
901 Power Factor (PF =) Measurement MV 134 147 9
902 Power angle (PHI=) Measurement MV
903 Resistance (R=) Measurement MV
904 Reactance (X=) Measurement MV
910 Calculated rotor temp. (unbal. load) (Therm-
Rep.=)
Measurement MV
911 Cooling medium temperature (AMB.TEMP=) Measurement MV
1020 Counter of operating hours (Op.Hours=) Statistics OUT
1021 Accumulation of interrupted current L1 (Σ L1 =) Statistics OUT
1202 >BLOCK IEE>> (>BLOCK IEE>>) Sensitiv Earth Current
Protection
SP ON OFF * LED BI BO 151 102 1 GI
1203 >BLOCK IEE> (>BLOCK IEE>) Sensitiv Earth Current
Protection
1221 IEE>> Pickup (IEE>> Pickup) Sensitiv Earth Current
Protection
OUT * ON OFF LED BO 151 121 2 GI
1223 IEE>> TRIP (IEE>> TRIP) Sensitiv Earth Current
Protection
OUT * ON M LED BO 151 123 2 GI
1224 IEE> Pickup (IEE> Pickup) Sensitiv Earth Current
Protection
Matrix
IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log On/Off
Off
Marked in Oscill.
Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Binary Output
Event Log
Type
Information-No
Data Unit (ASDU)
Appendix
A-48 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
1226 IEE> TRIP (IEE> TRIP) Sensitiv Earth Current
Protection
1231 >BLOCK sensitiv earth current prot. (>BLOCK
Sens. E)
Sensitiv Earth Current
Protection
SP * * LED BI BO
1232 Earth current prot. is swiched OFF (IEE OFF) Sensitiv Earth Current
Protection
1233 Earth current prot. is BLOCKED (IEE
BLOCKED)
Sensitiv Earth Current
Protection
OUT ON OFF ON OFF LED BO 151 133 1 GI
1234 Earth current prot. is ACTIVE (IEE ACTIVE) Sensitiv Earth Current
Protection
1403 >BLOCK breaker failure (>BLOCK BkrFail) Breaker Failure Protection
SP * * LED BI BO
1422 >Breaker contacts (>Break. Contact) Breaker Failure Protection
1423 >ext. start 1 breaker failure prot. (>ext.start1 B/
F)
1441 >ext. start 2 breaker failure prot. (>ext.start2 B/
F)
1442 >int. start breaker failure prot. (>int. start B/F) Breaker Failure Protection
1443 Breaker fail. started intern (int. start B/F) Breaker Failure Protection
1444 Breaker failure I> (B/F I>) Breaker Failure Protection
Matrix
IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log On/Off
Off
Marked in Oscill.
Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Binary Output
Event Log
Type
Information-No
Data Unit (ASDU)
Appendix
7UM61 Manual A-49
C53000-G1176-C127-1
1451 Breaker failure is switched OFF (BkrFail OFF) Breaker Failure Protection
1452 Breaker failure is BLOCKED (BkrFail BLOCK) Breaker Failure Protection
1453 Breaker failure is ACTIVE (BkrFail ACTIVE) Breaker Failure Protection
1455 Breaker failure protection: picked up (B/F picked
up)
1471 Breaker failure TRIP (BrkFailure TRIP) Breaker Failure Protection
1503 >BLOCK thermal overload protection (>BLK
ThOverload)
Thermal Overload
Protection
SP * * LED BI BO
1506 >Reset memory for thermal replica (>RM
th.repl.Θ )
Thermal Overload
Protection
SP ON OFF * LED BI BO
1507 >Emergency start of motors (>EmergencyStart) Thermal Overload
Protection
1508 >Failure temperature input (>Fail.Temp.inp) Thermal Overload
Protection
1511 Thermal Overload Protection OFF (Th.Overload
OFF)
Thermal Overload
Protection
1512 Thermal Overload Protection BLOKKED
(Th.Overload BLK)
Thermal Overload
Protection
1513 Overload Protection ACTIVE (Overload ACT) Thermal Overload
Protection
Matrix
IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log On/Off
Off
Marked in Oscill.
Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Binary Output
Event Log
Type
Information-No
Data Unit (ASDU)
Appendix
A-50 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
1514 Failure temperature input (Fail.Temp.inp) Thermal Overload
Protection
1515 Overload Current Alarm (I alarm) (O/L I Alarm) Thermal Overload
Protection
1516 Thermal Overload Alarm (O/L Θ Alarm) Thermal Overload
Protection
1517 Thermal Overload picked up (O/L Th. Pickup) Thermal Overload
Protection
1519 Reset memory for thermal replica (RM
th.repl.Θ )
Thermal Overload
Protection
1521 Thermal Overload TRIP (ThOverload TRIP) Thermal Overload
Protection
1720 >BLOCK direction I>> stage (>BLOCK dir.) O/C I>> (with direction)
1721 >BLOCK I>> (>BLOCK I>>) O/C I>> (with direction)
SP * * LED BI BO
1722 >BLOCK I> (>BLOCK I>) O/C I> (with undervoltage
seal-in)
SP * * LED BI BO
1801 O/C fault detection stage I>> phase L1 (I>>
Fault L1)
O/C I>> (with direction)
Fault L2)
Fault L3)
Matrix
IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log On/Off
Off
Marked in Oscill.
Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Binary Output
Event Log
Type
Information-No
Data Unit (ASDU)
Appendix
7UM61 Manual A-51
C53000-G1176-C127-1
1806 O/C I>> direction forward (I>> forward) O/C I>> (with direction)
1807 O/C I>> direction backward (I>> backward) O/C I>> (with direction)
1808 O/C prot. I>> picked up (I>> picked up) O/C I>> (with direction)
1809 O/C I>> TRIP (I>> TRIP) O/C I>> (with direction)
1811 O/C fault detection stage I> phase L1 (I> Fault
L1)
O/C I> (with undervoltage
seal-in)
L2)
seal-in)
L3)
seal-in)
1815 O/C I> TRIP (I> TRIP) O/C I> (with undervoltage
seal-in)
1883 >BLOCK inverse O/C time protection (>BLOCK
O/C Ip)
Inverse O/C Time Protection
SP * * LED BI BO
1891 O/C protection Ip is switched OFF (O/C Ip OFF) Inverse O/C Time Protection
1892 O/C protection Ip is BLOCKED (O/C Ip
BLOCKED)
1893 O/C protection Ip is ACTIVE (O/C Ip ACTIVE) Inverse O/C Time Protection
Matrix
IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log On/Off
Off
Marked in Oscill.
Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Binary Output
Event Log
Type
Information-No
Data Unit (ASDU)
Appendix
A-52 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
1896 O/C fault detection Ip phase L1 (O/C Ip Fault
L1)
L2)
L3)
1899 O/C Ip picked up (O/C Ip pick. up) Inverse O/C Time Protection
1900 O/C Ip TRIP (O/C Ip TRIP) Inverse O/C Time Protection
1950 >O/C prot. : BLOCK undervoltage seal-in
(>Useal-in BLK)
seal-in)
1955 O/C prot. stage I>> is switched OFF (I>> OFF) O/C I>> (with direction)
1956 O/C prot. stage I>> is BLOCKED (I>>
BLOCKED)
1957 O/C prot. stage I>> is ACTIVE (I>> ACTIVE) O/C I>> (with direction)
1965 O/C prot. stage I> is switched OFF (I> OFF) O/C I> (with undervoltage
seal-in)
1966 O/C prot. stage I> is BLOCKED (I> BLOCKED) O/C I> (with undervoltage
seal-in)
1967 O/C prot. stage I> is ACTIVE (I> ACTIVE) O/C I> (with undervoltage
seal-in)
Matrix
IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log On/Off
Off
Marked in Oscill.
Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Binary Output
Event Log
Type
Information-No
Data Unit (ASDU)
Appendix
7UM61 Manual A-53
C53000-G1176-C127-1
1970 O/C prot. undervoltage seal-in (U< seal in) O/C I> (with undervoltage
seal-in)
3953 >BLOCK impedance protection (>Imp. BLOCK) Impedance Protection SP * * LED BI BO
3956 >Zone 1B extension for impedance prot.
(>Extens. Z1B)
Impedance Protection SP ON OFF * LED BI BO 28 222 1 GI
3958 >Imp. prot. : BLOCK undervoltage seal-in
(>Useal-in BLK)
Impedance Protection SP ON OFF * LED BI BO 28 30 1 GI
3961 Impedance protection is switched OFF (Imp.
OFF)
Impedance Protection OUT ON OFF * LED BO 28 226 1 GI
3962 Impedance protection is BLOCKED (Imp.
BLOCKED)
Impedance Protection OUT ON OFF ON OFF LED BO 28 227 1 GI
3963 Impedance protection is ACTIVE (Imp. ACTIVE) Impedance Protection OUT ON OFF * LED BO 28
228 1 GI
3966 Impedance protection picked up (Imp. picked
up)
Impedance Protection OUT * ON OFF LED BO 28 229 2 GI
3967 Imp.: Fault detection , phase L1 (Imp. Fault L1) Impedance Protection OUT * ON OFF LED BO 28 230
2 GI
2 GI
2 GI
3970 Imp.: O/C with undervoltage seal in (Imp. I> &
U<)
Impedance Protection OUT * ON OFF LED BO 28 233 2 GI
3977 Imp.: Z1< TRIP (Imp.Z1< TRIP) Impedance Protection OUT * ON M LED BO 28 240 2 GI
3978 Imp.: Z1B< TRIP (Imp.Z1B< TRIP) Impedance Protection OUT * ON M LED BO 28 241 2 GI
3979 Imp.: Z2< TRIP (Imp. Z2< TRIP) Impedance Protection OUT * ON M LED BO 28 242 2 GI
3980 Imp.: T3> TRIP (Imp.T3> TRIP) Impedance Protection OUT * ON M LED BO 28 243 2 GI
Matrix
IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log On/Off
Off
Marked in Oscill.
Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Binary Output
Event Log
Type
Information-No
Data Unit (ASDU)
Appendix
A-54 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
4523 >Block external trip 1 (>BLOCK Ext 1) External Trip Functions
SP * * LED BI BO
4526 >Trigger external trip 1 (>Ext trip 1) External Trip Functions
4531 External trip 1 is switched OFF (Ext 1 OFF) External Trip Functions
4532 External trip 1 is BLOCKED (Ext 1 BLOCKED) External Trip Functions
4533 External trip 1 is ACTIVE (Ext 1 ACTIVE) External Trip Functions
4536 External trip 1: General picked up (Ext 1 pick.
up)
External Trip Functions
4537 External trip 1: General TRIP (Ext 1 Gen.TRP) External Trip Functions
OUT * ON LED BO 51 137 2 GI
4543 >BLOCK external trip 2 (>BLOCK Ext 2) External Trip Functions
SP * * LED BI BO
Matrix
IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log On/Off
Off
Marked in Oscill.
Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Binary Output
Event Log
Type
Information-No
Data Unit (ASDU)
Appendix
7UM61 Manual A-55
C53000-G1176-C127-1
up)
SP * * LED BI BO
up)
SP * * LED BI BO
Matrix
IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log On/Off
Off
Marked in Oscill.
Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Binary Output
Event Log
Type
Information-No
Data Unit (ASDU)
Appendix
A-56 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
up)
5002 Suitable measured quantities present (Operat.
Cond.)
Power System Data 1 OUT ON OFF * LED BO 71 2 1 GI
5010 >BLOCK fuse failure monitor (>FFM BLOCK) Measurement Supervision
SP ON OFF ON OFF LED BI BO 71 7 1 GI
5011 >FFM extern undervoltage (>FFM U< extern) Measurement Supervision
5012 Voltage UL1E at trip (UL1E=) Power System Data 2 OUT * ON OFF 71 38 4
5015 Active power at trip (P=) Power System Data 2 OUT * ON OFF 71 41 4
5016 Reactive power at trip (Q=) Power System Data 2 OUT * ON OFF 71 42 4
5017 Frequency at trip (f=) Power System Data 2 OUT * ON OFF 71 43 4
5083 >BLOCK reverse power protection (>Pr
BLOCK)
SP * * LED BI BO
5086 >Stop valve tripped (>SV tripped) Reverse Power Protection
Matrix
IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log On/Off
Off
Marked in Oscill.
Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Binary Output
Event Log
Type
Information-No
Data Unit (ASDU)
Appendix
7UM61 Manual A-57
C53000-G1176-C127-1
5091 Reverse power prot. is switched OFF (Pr OFF) Reverse Power Protection
5092 Reverse power protection is BLOKKED (Pr
BLOCKED)
5093 Reverse power protection is ACTIVE (Pr
ACTIVE)
5096 Reverse power: picked up (Pr picked up) Reverse Power Protection
5097 Reverse power: TRIP (Pr TRIP) Reverse Power Protection
5098 Reverse power: TRIP with stop valve (Pr+SV
TRIP)
5113 >BLOCK forward power supervision (>Pf
BLOCK)
Forward Power Supervision
SP * * LED BI BO
5116 >BLOCK forw. power superv. Pf< stage (>Pf<
BLOCK)
5117 >BLOCK forw. power superv. Pf> stage (>Pf>
BLOCK)
5121 Forward power supervis. is switched OFF (Pf
OFF)
5122 Forward power supervision is BLOKKED (Pf
BLOCKED)
5123 Forward power supervision is ACTIVE (Pf
ACTIVE)
Matrix
IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log On/Off
Off
Marked in Oscill.
Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Binary Output
Event Log
Type
Information-No
Data Unit (ASDU)
Appendix
A-58 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
5126 Forward power: Pf< stage picked up (Pf< picked
up)
5127 Forward power: Pf> stage picked up (Pf> picked
up)
5128 Forward power: Pf< stage TRIP (Pf< TRIP) Forward Power Supervision
5129 Forward power: Pf> stage TRIP (Pf> TRIP) Forward Power Supervision
5143 >BLOCK I2 (Unbalance Load) (>BLOCK I2) Unbalance Load (Negative
Sequence)
SP * * LED BI BO
5145 >Reverse Phase Rotation (>Reverse Rot.) Power System Data 1 SP ON OFF * LED BI BO 71 34 1 GI
5146 >Reset memory for thermal replica I2 (>RM
th.repl.)
Unbalance Load (Negative
Sequence)
SP ON OFF * LED BI BO
5147 Phase Rotation L1L2L3 (Rotation L1L2L3) Power System Data 1 OUT ON OFF * LED BO 70 128 1 GI
5148 Phase Rotation L1L3L2 (Rotation L1L3L2) Power System Data 1 OUT ON OFF * LED BO 70 129 1 GI
5151 I2 switched OFF (I2 OFF) Unbalance Load (Negative
Sequence)
5152 I2 is BLOCKED (I2 BLOCKED) Unbalance Load (Negative
Sequence)
5153 I2 is ACTIVE (I2 ACTIVE) Unbalance Load (Negative
Sequence)
5156 Unbalanced load: Current warning stage (I2>
Warn)
Sequence)
Matrix
IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log On/Off
Off
Marked in Oscill.
Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Binary Output
Event Log
Type
Information-No
Data Unit (ASDU)
Appendix
7UM61 Manual A-59
C53000-G1176-C127-1
5158 Reset memory of thermal replica I2 (RM th.
repl.)
Sequence)
5159 I2>> picked up (I2>> picked up) Unbalance Load (Negative
Sequence)
5160 Unbalanced load: TRIP of current stage (I2>>
TRIP)
Sequence)
5161 Unbalanced load: TRIP of thermal stage (I2 Θ
TRIP)
Sequence)
5165 I2> picked up (I2> picked up) Unbalance Load (Negative
Sequence)
5173 >BLOCK stator earth fault protection (>S/E/F
BLOCK)
Stator Earth Fault Protection
SP * * LED BI BO
5176 >Switch off earth current detec.(S/E/F) (>S/E/F
Iee off)
5181 Stator earth fault prot. is switch OFF (S/E/F
OFF)
5182 Stator earth fault protection is BLOCK. (S/E/F
BLOCKED)
5183 Stator earth fault protection is ACTIVE (S/E/F
ACTIVE)
5186 Stator earth fault: U0 picked up (U0> picked up) Stator Earth Fault Protection
5187 Stator earth fault: U0 stage TRIP (U0> TRIP) Stator Earth Fault Protection
Matrix
IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log On/Off
Off
Marked in Oscill.
Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Binary Output
Event Log
Type
Information-No
Data Unit (ASDU)
Appendix
A-60 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
5188 Stator earth fault: I0 picked up (3I0> picked up) Stator Earth Fault Protection
5189 Earth fault in phase L1 (Uearth L1) Stator Earth Fault Protection
5193 Stator earth fault protection TRIP (S/E/F TRIP) Stator Earth Fault Protection
5203 >BLOCK frequency protection (>BLOCK Freq.) Frequency Protection SP * * LED BI BO
5206 >BLOCK stage f1 (>BLOCK f1) Frequency Protection SP ON OFF * LED BI BO 70 177 1 GI
5211 Frequency protection is OFF (Freq. OFF) Frequency Protection OUT ON OFF * LED BO 70 181 1 GI
5212 Frequency protection is BLOCKED (Freq.
BLOCKED)
Frequency Protection OUT ON OFF ON OFF LED BO 70 182 1 GI
5213 Frequency protection is ACTIVE (Freq.
ACTIVE)
Frequency Protection OUT ON OFF * LED BO 70 183 1 GI
5214 Frequency protection undervoltage Blk (Freq
UnderV Blk)
Frequency Protection OUT ON OFF ON OFF LED BO 70 184 1 GI
5232 f1 picked up (f1 picked up) Frequency Protection OUT * ON OFF LED BO 70 230 2 GI
Matrix
IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log On/Off
Off
Marked in Oscill.
Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Binary Output
Event Log
Type
Information-No
Data Unit (ASDU)
Appendix
7UM61 Manual A-61
C53000-G1176-C127-1
5236 f1 TRIP (f1 TRIP) Frequency Protection OUT * ON M LED BO 70 234 2 GI
5323 >BLOCK underexcitation protection (>Exc.
BLOCK)
Underexcitation Protection
SP * * LED BI BO
5327 >BLOCK underexc. prot. char. 3 (>Char. 3
BLK.)
5328 >Exc. voltage failure recognized (>Uexc fail.) Underexcitation Protection
BLK.)
BLK.)
5331 Underexc. prot. is switched OFF (Excit. OFF) Underexcitation Protection
5332 Underexc. prot. is BLOCKED (Excit.BLOCKED) Underexcitation Protection
5333 Underexc. prot. is ACTIVE (Excit.ACTIVE) Underexcitation Protection
Matrix
IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log On/Off
Off
Marked in Oscill.
Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Binary Output
Event Log
Type
Information-No
Data Unit (ASDU)
Appendix
A-62 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
5334 Underexc. prot. blocked by U< (Exc. U< blk) Underexcitation Protection
5336 Exc. voltage failure recognized (Uexc failure) Underexcitation Protection
5337 Underexc. prot. picked up (Exc< pikked up) Underexcitation Protection
5343 Underexc. prot. char. 3 TRIP (Exc<3 TRIP) Underexcitation Protection
5346 Underexc. prot. char.+Uexc< TRIP
(Exc<U<TRIP)
5353 >BLOCK overexcitation protection (>U/f
BLOCK)
Overflux Protection SP * * LED BI BO
5357 >Reset memory of thermal replica U/f (>RM
th.repl.)
Overflux Protection SP ON OFF * LED BI BO
5361 Overexcitation prot. is swiched OFF (U/f> OFF) Overflux Protection OUT ON OFF * LED BO 71 83 1
GI
5362 Overexcitation prot. is BLOCKED (U/f>
BLOCKED)
Overflux Protection OUT ON OFF ON OFF LED BO 71 84 1 GI
5363 Overexcitation prot. is ACTIVE (U/f> ACTIVE) Overflux Protection OUT ON OFF * LED BO 71 85 1 GI
5367 Overexc. prot.: U/f warning stage (U/f> warn) Overflux Protection OUT ON OFF * LED BO 71 86 1 GI
Matrix
IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log On/Off
Off
Marked in Oscill.
Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Binary Output
Event Log
Type
Information-No
Data Unit (ASDU)
Appendix
7UM61 Manual A-63
C53000-G1176-C127-1
5369 Reset memory of thermal replica U/f (RM th.
repl.)
Overflux Protection OUT ON OFF * LED BO 71 88 1 GI
5370 Overexc. prot.: U/f> picked up (U/f> picked up) Overflux Protection OUT * ON OFF LED BO 71 89 2 GI
5371 Overexc. prot.: TRIP of U/f>> stage (U/f>>
TRIP)
Overflux Protection OUT * ON M LED BO 71 90 2 GI
5372 Overexc. prot.: TRIP of th. stage (U/f> th.TRIP) Overflux Protection OUT * ON M LED BO 71 91 2 GI
5373 Overexc. prot.: U/f>> picked up (U/f>> pick.up) Overflux Protection OUT * ON OFF LED BO 71 92 2 GI
5396 Failure R/E/F protection Iee< (Fail. REF Iee<) Sensitiv Earth Current
Protection
5533 >BLOCK inadvertent energ. prot. (>BLOCK
I.En.)
Inadvertent Energisation
SP * * LED BI BO
5541 Inadvert. Energ. prot. is swiched OFF (I.En.
OFF)
5542 Inadvert. Energ. prot. is BLOCKED (I.En.
BLOCKED)
5543 Inadvert. Energ. prot. is ACTIVE (I.En. ACTIVE) Inadvertent Energisation
5546 Release of the current stage (I.En. release) Inadvertent Energisation
5547 Inadvert. Energ. prot.: picked up (I.En. picked
up)
5548 Inadvert. Energ. prot.: TRIP (I.En. TRIP) Inadvertent Energisation
Matrix
IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log On/Off
Off
Marked in Oscill.
Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Binary Output
Event Log
Type
Information-No
Data Unit (ASDU)
Appendix
A-64 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
5553 >BLOCK SEF with 3.Harmonic (>SEF 3H
BLOCK)
3rdHarm.
SP * * LED BI BO
5561 SEF with 3.Harm. is switched OFF (SEF 3H
OFF)
3rdHarm.
5562 SEF with 3.Harm. is BLOCKED (SEF 3H
BLOCK)
3rdHarm.
5563 SEF with 3.Harm. is ACTIVE (SEF 3H ACTIVE) Stator Earth Fault Protection
3rdHarm.
5567 SEF with 3.Harm.: picked up (SEF 3H pick.up) Stator Earth Fault Protection
3rdHarm.
5568 SEF with 3.Harm.: TRIP (SEF 3H TRIP) Stator Earth Fault Protection
3rdHarm.
6503 >BLOCK undervoltage protection (>BLOCK U/
V)
SP * * LED BI BO
6506 >BLOCK undervoltage protection U< (>BLOCK
U<)
6508 >BLOCK undervoltage protection U<<
(>BLOCK U<<)
6513 >BLOCK overvoltage protection (>BLOCK O/V) Overvoltage Protection
SP * * LED BI BO
6516 >BLOCK overvoltage protection U> (>BLOCK
U>)
6517 >BLOCK overvoltage protection U>> (>BLOCK
U>>)
Matrix
IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log On/Off
Off
Marked in Oscill.
Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Binary Output
Event Log
Type
Information-No
Data Unit (ASDU)
Appendix
7UM61 Manual A-65
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6530 Undervoltage protection switched OFF (Undervolt.
OFF)
6531 Undervoltage protection is BLOCKED (Undervolt.
BLK)
6532 Undervoltage protection is ACTIVE (Undervolt.
ACT)
6533 Undervoltage U< picked up (U< pikked up) Undervoltage Protection
6537 Undervoltage U<< picked up (U<< picked up) Undervoltage Protection
6539 Undervoltage U< TRIP (U< TRIP) Undervoltage Protection
6540 Undervoltage U<< TRIP (U<< TRIP) Undervoltage Protection
6565 Overvoltage protection switched OFF (Overvolt.
OFF)
6566 Overvoltage protection is BLOCKED (Overvolt.
BLK)
6567 Overvoltage protection is ACTIVE (Overvolt.
ACT)
6568 Overvoltage U> picked up (U> picked up) Overvoltage Protection
6570 Overvoltage U> TRIP (U> TRIP) Overvoltage Protection
Matrix
IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log On/Off
Off
Marked in Oscill.
Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Binary Output
Event Log
Type
Information-No
Data Unit (ASDU)
Appendix
A-66 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
6571 Overvoltage U>> picked up (U>> pikked up) Overvoltage Protection
6573 Overvoltage U>> TRIP (U>> TRIP) Overvoltage Protection
6575 Voltage Transformer Fuse Failure (VT Fuse
Failure)
6851 >BLOCK Trip circuit supervision (>BLOCK
TripC)
Trip Circuit Supervision
SP * * LED BI BO
6852 >Trip circuit supervision: trip relay (>TripC trip
rel)
6853 >Trip circuit supervision: breaker relay (>TripC
brk rel.)
6861 Trip circuit supervision OFF (TripC OFF) Trip Circuit Supervision
6862 Trip circuit supervision is BLOCKED (TripC
BLOCKED)
6863 Trip circuit supervision is ACTIVE (TripC
ACTIVE)
6864 Trip Circuit blk. Bin. input is not set (TripC Prog-
Fail)
6865 Failure Trip Circuit (FAIL: Trip cir.) Trip Circuit Supervision
>Back Light on (>Light on) Device SP ON OFF * LED BI BO
Clock Synchronization (SynchClock) Device IntSP_Ev * *
Matrix
IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log On/Off
Off
Marked in Oscill.
Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Binary Output
Event Log
Type
Information-No
Data Unit (ASDU)
Appendix
7UM61 Manual A-67
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Control Authority (Cntrl Auth) Control Authorization IntSP ON OFF * LED 101 85 1 GI
Controlmode LOCAL (ModeLOCAL) Control Authorization IntSP ON OFF * LED 101 86 1 GI
Controlmode REMOTE (ModeREMOTE) Control Authorization IntSP ON OFF * LED
Error Systeminterface (SysIntErr.) Protocol IntSP ON OFF * LED BO
Fault Recording Start (FltRecSta) Oscillographic Fault
Records
IntSP ON OFF * LED BO
Group A (Group A) Change Group IntSP ON OFF * LED BO 70 23 1 GI
Group B (Group B) Change Group IntSP ON OFF * LED BO 70 24 1 GI
Hardware Test Mode (HWTestMod) Device IntSP ON OFF * LED BO
IL< under current (IL<) Set Points (Measured
Values)
LV
Interlock.: User Double Command 1-CLOSE
(UsrDC1-CL)
Protocol IntSP
(UsrDC2-CL)
Protocol IntSP
(UsrDC3-CL)
Protocol IntSP
(UsrDC4-CL)
Protocol IntSP
Interlocking: User Double Command 1-OPEN
(UsrDC1-OP)
Protocol IntSP
(UsrDC2-OP)
Protocol IntSP
Matrix
IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log On/Off
Off
Marked in Oscill.
Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Binary Output
Event Log
Type
Information-No
Data Unit (ASDU)
Appendix
A-68 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
(UsrDC3-OP)
Protocol IntSP
(UsrDC4-OP)
Protocol IntSP
Stop data transmission (DataStop) Device IntSP ON OFF * LED BO 70 20 1 GI
Test mode (Test mode) Device IntSP ON OFF * LED BO 70 21 1 GI
Unlock data transmission via BI (UnlockDT) Device IntSP
User CFC-SinglePointIndication(input) 1
(UsCfcSpI1)
Protocol IntSP * * LED BI BO C
B
(UsCfcSpI10)
B
(UsCfcSpI11)
B
(UsCfcSpI12)
B
(UsCfcSpI13)
B
(UsCfcSpI14)
B
(UsCfcSpI15)
B
(UsCfcSpI16)
B
Matrix
IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log On/Off
Off
Marked in Oscill.
Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Binary Output
Event Log
Type
Information-No
Data Unit (ASDU)
Appendix
7UM61 Manual A-69
C53000-G1176-C127-1
(UsCfcSpI2)
B
(UsCfcSpI3)
B
(UsCfcSpI4)
B
(UsCfcSpI5)
B
(UsCfcSpI6)
B
(UsCfcSpI7)
B
(UsCfcSpI8)
B
(UsCfcSpI9)
B
User CFC-SinglePointIndication(output)1
(UsCfcSpO1)
Protocol SP * * LED BI BO C
B
(UsCfcSpO10)
B
(UsCfcSpO11)
B
(UsCfcSpO12)
B
Matrix
IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log On/Off
Off
Marked in Oscill.
Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Binary Output
Event Log
Type
Information-No
Data Unit (ASDU)
Appendix
A-70 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
(UsCfcSpO13)
B
(UsCfcSpO14)
B
(UsCfcSpO15)
B
(UsCfcSpO16)
B
(UsCfcSpO2)
B
(UsCfcSpO3)
B
(UsCfcSpO4)
B
(UsCfcSpO5)
B
(UsCfcSpO6)
B
(UsCfcSpO7)
B
(UsCfcSpO8)
B
(UsCfcSpO9)
B
User Double Command 1 (UsrDC1) Protocol CF_D4 ON OFF * BO
Matrix
IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log On/Off
Off
Marked in Oscill.
Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Binary Output
Event Log
Type
Information-No
Data Unit (ASDU)
Appendix
7UM61 Manual A-71
C53000-G1176-C127-1
User Double Command 1 (UsrDC1) Protocol DP ON OFF * BI C
B
B
B
B
User Single Command 1 (UsrSC1) Protocol CF_S ON OFF * BO
User Single Command 1 (UsrSC1) Protocol SP ON OFF * BI C
B
User Single Command 10 (UsrSC10) Protocol C_S ON OFF * BO
Matrix
IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log On/Off
Off
Marked in Oscill.
Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Binary Output
Event Log
Type
Information-No
Data Unit (ASDU)
Appendix
A-72 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
B
B
B
UserSinglePointIndication(ON/OFF) 11 (Usr-
SpO/O11)
B
Matrix
IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log On/Off
Off
Marked in Oscill.
Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Binary Output
Event Log
Type
Information-No
Data Unit (ASDU)
Appendix
7UM61 Manual A-73
C53000-G1176-C127-1
SpO/O12)
B
SpO/O13)
B
SpO/O14)
B
SpO/O15)
B
SpO/O16)
B
SpO/O17)
B
SpO/O18)
B
SpO/O19)
B
SpO/O20)
B
SpO/O21)
B
SpO/O22)
B
SpO/O23)
B
Matrix
IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log On/Off
Off
Marked in Oscill.
Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Binary Output
Event Log
Type
Information-No
Data Unit (ASDU)
Appendix
A-74 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
SpO/O24)
B
SpO/O25)
B
SpO/O26)
B
SpO/O27)
B
SpO/O28)
B
SpO/O29)
B
SpO/O30)
B
SpO/O31)
B
SpO/O32)
B
SpO/O33)
B
SpO/O34)
B
SpO/O35)
B
Matrix
IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log On/Off
Off
Marked in Oscill.
Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Binary Output
Event Log
Type
Information-No
Data Unit (ASDU)
Appendix
7UM61 Manual A-75
C53000-G1176-C127-1
SpO/O36)
B
SpO/O37)
B
UserSinglePointIndication(OPEN/CLOSE) 1
(UsrSpO/C1)
B
(UsrSpO/C10)
B
(UsrSpO/C2)
B
(UsrSpO/C3)
B
(UsrSpO/C4)
B
(UsrSpO/C5)
B
(UsrSpO/C6)
B
(UsrSpO/C7)
B
(UsrSpO/C8)
B
(UsrSpO/C9)
B
Matrix
IEC 60870-5-103
Event Log On/Off
Off
Marked in Oscill.
Record
LED
Binary Input
Function Key
Binary Output
Event Log
Type
Information-No
Data Unit (ASDU)
Appendix
A-76 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
A.10 Protocol-Dependent Functions
n
Protocol → IEC 60870–5–103 Profibus FMS
(on request)
Profibus DP DNP3.0
(not yet supported)
Modbus ASCII/RTU Additional interface
(optional)
Function ⇓
Operational measured
values
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Metered values Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Fault recording Yes Yes No. Only via additional
service interface
No. Only via additional service
interface
interface
Yes
Remote relay setting No. Only via additional
service interface
Yes No. Only via additional
service interface
interface
interface
Yes
User-defined messages
and switching objects
Yes Yes Pre-defined “User-defined
messages” in CFC
Pre-defined “User-defined
messages” in CFC
Pre-defined “User-defined
messages” in CFC
Yes
Time synchronization Via protocol;
DCF77/IRIG B;
Interface;
Binary input
Via protocol;
DCF77/IRIG B;
Interface;
Binary input
Via DCF77/IRIG B;
Interface;
Binary input
Via protocol;
DCF77/IRIG B;
Interface;
Binary input
Via DCF77/IRIG B;
Interface;
Binary input
–
Messages with time stamp Yes Yes No Yes No Yes
Commissioning aids
• Measured value indication
blocking
Yes Yes No No No Yes
• Creating test messages
Yes Yes No No No Yes
Physical mode Asynchronous Asynchronous Asynchronous Asynchronous Asynchronous –
Transmission mode Cyclically/Event Cyclically/Event Cyclically Cyclically/Event Cyclically –
Baudrate 4800 to 38400 Up to 1.5 MBaud Up to 1.5 MBaud 2400 to 19200 2400 to 19200 2400 to 38400
Type RS232
RS485
Optical fibre
RS485
Optical fibre
• Single ring
• Double ring
RS485
Optical fibre
• Double ring
RS485
Optical fibre
RS485
Optical fibre
RS232
RS485
Optical fibre
Index
7UM61 Manual Index-1
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Index
Numerics
100–%–stator earth fault protection with 3rd
harm. 6-103, 10-33
21 6-65, 10-25
24 6-86, 10-29
27 6-75, 6-112, 10-26, 10-35
27TN (3.H.) 6-103, 10-33
32F 6-62, 10-24
32R 6-58, 10-23
40 6-50, 10-22
46 6-43, 10-20
49 6-34, 10-18
50 6-18, 6-112, 10-12, 10-35
50BF 6-107, 10-34
50GN 6-99
51 6-18, 6-27, 10-13
51GN 10-32
59 6-78, 10-27
59N 6-91, 10-31
59TN 6-103, 10-33
64F 10-32
64G 6-91, 10-31
64R 6-99
67 6-18, 10-12
67G 6-91, 10-31
74TC 10-38
81 6-81, 10-28
90–%–stator earth fault protection 6-91, 10-31
A
Accessories A-4
Ambient temperature 6-39
Analog Inputs 1-2, 10-2
Annunciations 4-9
Auxiliary and Reference Voltages 6-118
Auxiliary contact of VT protective switches 8-26
Auxiliary voltage supply 8-23
B
Battery A-4
Battery Replacement 9-4
Binary Inputs 1-3, 10-3
Binary Inputs and Outputs 1-3
Binary Outputs 1-3, 10-3
Block connection 6-3
Blocking Data Transmission 8-20
Breaker Control 6-150
Breaker Failure Protection 1-10, 6-107, 6-
110, 10-34
Breaker Failure Scheme 8-29
Buffer Battery 6-119
Bus Address 8-14, 8-16
Busbar connection 6-3
C
Calibrating the impedance protection 8-35
Calibrating the reverse power protection 8-48
CFC 4-15, 4-23, 4-24, 5-30
CFC–charts A-26
Changeover Contact for BO 17 8-15
Changing Setting Groups with Binary Inputs 8-6
Chatter Blocking 5-28
Chatter Suppression 5-16
Check
Overexcitation 8-37
Phase rotation 8-35
Phase sequence 8-37
Checking Connections 8-19
Checking the correct connection polarity 8-46
Checking the earth fault protection 8-38
Checking the voltage circuits 8-36
Climatic Stress Tests 10-10
Clock 10-7, 10-39
Command Sequence 6-151
Commands 5-7
Communication 4-3
Communications Interfaces 10-4
Configuration Matrix 4-7, 4-21, 5-10
Configuration of Functions 5-2
Configuration of Inputs and Outputs 4-21
Configuring
an Indication Buffer as a Destination 5-25
Control Display as a Destination for
Command Initiation 5-26
Default Display and Control Diagram as a
Destination 5-26
Measured Value Window as a Destination 5-
26
Index
Index-2 7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Metered Value Window as a Destination 5-
26
SCADA Interface as a Destination 5-25
Connection Examples A-10
Connections 8-5
Consistency check 5-34
Construction 10-11
Control 4-14
Control Functions 1-6
Control Messages 7-45
Control of Switchgear 7-34
Control Voltages for Binary Inputs 8-8
Coolant temperature 6-39
Correction angle 6-10
Coupling Unit A-5
Covering Caps 2-9
CT’s Nominal Values 6-10
Cubicle Mounting 2-2
Current and Voltage Rotation 6-122
Current Flow Monitoring 6-12
Current Inputs 10-2
Current limiting 6-35, 6-39
Current Symmetry 6-121
Current Terminals 2-8
D
Date and Time Setting 3-11
Date and Time Stamping 5-47
DCF77 4-30
Default Settings A-23
Binary Inputs A-23
Binary Outputs A-23
LED Indicators A-25
Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection 10-12
Definition of the Active Power Measurement A-
17
Destination 5-14
DIGSI REMOTE 4 A-5
DIGSI® 4 Tool 4-7
Dimensions 10-41
Directional check with c.t.'s in Holmgreen
connection 8-44
Disassembling the Device 9-9
Displacement voltage 6-11, 6-91
Display 4-6
Display Contrast 3-5
Display Contrast Setting 3-5
Display Editor A-5
DNP3.0 4-3, 4-31
DNP3.0 LWL 10-6
DNP3.0 RS485 10-6
E
Earth differential protection 6-94
Earth short-circuit protection 6-102
Electrical Check 3-3
Electrical Communication Interfaces 2-14
Electrical Tests 10-8
EMC Tests for Immunity 10-8
EMC Tests For Noise Emission 10-9
Emergency starting 6-39
Energy 7-17
Energy count values 6-146
ENTER Key 2-3, 2-15
ESC Key 2-3, 2-15
Establishing Information Properties 5-14
Event Log 3-5, 3-10
Event Messages 3-5, 3-10
Exiting the Setting Mode 6-6
Extension of Time Constants 6-39
External trip commands 6-133
F
Filtering 5-16
Forward active power supervision 6-62, 10-24
Frequency follow-up circuit 1-3, 8-33
Frequency Protection 1-9, 6-81, 6-83, 10-28,
10-34
Front Elements 1-3
Function Keys 2-3, 2-15, 4-22
Fuse-Failure-Monitor 6-116
G
General Device Pickup 6-138
General Diagrams A-6
Graphic Tools A-5
Graphical Analysis Program DIGRA A-5
H
Hardware Monitoring 6-118
Hardware Test Dialog Box 8-27
HMI 4-5
Index
C53000-G1176-C127-1
I
IEC 60870-5-103 4-3
Iee transformation ratio 6-11
Impedance protection 6-65, 10-25
Impedance stages 6-70
Inadvertent energization 6-112, 10-35
Indications 5-6
Information 5-13
Initialize device 9-7
Installation 8-2
Instantaneous values 6-147
Insulation Tests 10-8
Interface Cable A-4
Interlocking 6-152, 7-41
Interoperability List A-27
Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection 10-13
IRIG B 4-30
J
Jumpers on the Printed Circuit Boards 8-8
K
k- factor 6-37
Keys 2-3, 2-15, 4-6
L
LED Key 2-3, 2-16
LEDs 2-3, 2-16, 4-6
List of Information A-41
Live StatusContact 8-11
Loop selection 6-65
M
Manual Overwriting 4-16, 7-38
Measured Values 10-36
Measured Values Monitoring 6-118
Measured Values Supervision 10-37
Measurement Viewing 3-5, 3-9
Measurements 4-11, 6-144
Measuring voltage failure 6-116
Mechanical Stress Tests 10-9
Memory Components 6-119
MENU Key 2-3, 2-15
Metered Values 5-18, 7-17
Microcomputer System 1-3
Min/Max Report 10-37
Minimum and Maximum Values 6-146, 6-147
MODBUS 8-17
MODBUS ASCII/RTU 1-6, 4-3, 4-31
MODBUS LWL 10-7
MODBUS RS485 10-7
Monitoring Functions 1-10
Monitoring of External Current Transformer
Circuits 6-121
Mounting Rail for 19"-Racks A-4
N
No Trip – No Flag 6-140
NO/NC Contact R4 8-13
Nominal Currents 8-7
Nominal rated values 6-16
Numerical Keys 2-3
Numerical Values 6-5
O
Operating Hours Counter 10-38
Operating mode 6-12
Operating Panel 4-5
Operating range of the protection functions 8-33
Operating Serial Interface 4-6
Operating Software DIGSI® 4 A-4
Operator Control Panel 3-4
Optical Communication Interfaces 2-13, 2-18
Optical Fibers 8-20
Ordering Information A-2
Ordering Number 3-3, 3-4
Oscillographic Recordings 8-33
Output Relays 10-3
Overcurrent Protection 6-18, 6-20, 10-12
Overexcitation (Overflux) protection 6-86, 10-
29
Overview of the masking features A-19
Overvoltage protection 6-78, 10-27
P
Packing 3-2
Panel Flush Mounting 2-2, 8-2
Panel Surface Mounting 2-15, 8-5
Password 4-15, 4-33
Index
C53000-G1176-C127-1
PC Front Interface 8-19, 10-4
Performing Configuration 5-20
Phase Rotation 6-11, 6-136
Pin Connectors A-4
Plug & Play 3-7
Plug-In Terminals 2-10, 2-11
Polarity of Current Transformers 6-10
Power Supply 1-4, 10-2
Power Supply Voltage 8-7
Power System Data 4-26
Power System Data 1 6-10
Power System Data 2 6-16
Power-Up 3-3
Pre–defined CFC–charts A-26
Preset Configurations 5-27
PROFIBUS 4-3, 4-31, 8-17
PROFIBUS DP 1-6
PROFIBUS FMS 1-6
Programmable Logic CFC 4-24
Protective Functions 1-6
Protocol-Dependent Functions A-76
R
R.m.s. values 6-147
Rack Mounting 8-3
Rated Frequency 6-12
Rear Service–/Modem– Interface 10-4
Reassembling the Device 8-18, 9-11
Regionalization 6-2
Repairs 9-9
Replacing the Battery 9-4
Replacing the Power Supply Fuse 9-10
Restoring Factory Settings 6-16
Return 9-13
Reverse power protection 6-58, 10-23
Rotor earth fault protection 6-99
Routine Checks 9-3
RS232 10-4, 10-5
RS485 10-4, 10-5
Run-Time Properties 5-30
S
SCADA Interface 8-19, 10-5
Sensitive earth current protection 6-99, 10-32
Serial Interfaces 4-31, 5-39, 8-8
Service Conditions 10-11
Set Status 7-39
Setting Groups 4-27, 6-14, 6-16, 8-6
Settings A-29
Short Circuit Links 2-8, A-4
SIMATIC CFC A-5
Software Monitoring 6-120
Source 5-14
Spill current 8-45
Spontaneous Messages 6-138
Starpoint earthing 6-12
Statistical Counters 6-141, 7-12
Statistics 10-38
Stator earth fault protection 6-101
Stop valve 6-58, 8-48
Storage 3-12
Switching Authority 6-155, 7-43
Switching Mode 6-156, 7-43
T
Tagging 4-16, 7-42
Terminal Block Covering Caps A-4
Terminating resistors 8-16
Termination 8-20
Test Dialogue Box 8-21
Test Mode 8-20
Text Values 6-5
Thermal measured values 6-146
Thermal Overload Protection 6-34, 10-18
Threaded Terminals 2-6, 2-17
Time Constant 6-38
Time for cool down 6-47, 6-89
Time Stamping 10-38
Time Synchronization 4-30
Time Synchronization Interface 8-20
Transferring Metering Values 5-27
Trip and Close Command Duration 6-12
Trip Circuit Monitoring 8-6, 10-38
Trip Log 10-38
As Per ANSI 10-15
As Per IEC 10-13
Tripping Logic of the Entire Device 6-139
Troubleshooting 9-7
U
UE transformation ratio 6-11
Unbalanced load protection 6-43, 10-20
Underexcitation protection 6-50, 10-22
Undervoltage blocking 6-51
Undervoltage protection 6-75, 10-26
Index
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Undervoltage seal–in 6-18, 6-65
Unpacking 3-2
Uph/Udelta adaptation factor 6-11
User Defined Functions with CFC 5-30
User Interface 3-4
Using DIGSI® 4 3-7
V
Vibration and Shock Stress 10-9, 10-10
Voltage Inputs 10-2
Voltage Protection 1-9, 6-75
Voltage Symmetry 6-121
Voltage Terminals 2-7
W
Watchdog 6-120
Waveform Capture 4-4, 4-13, 6-147, 10-38
Z
Z1B overreach zone 6-72
Zone Controlled/Bay Interlocking 6-153
Index
C53000-G1176-C127-1
Corrections
7UM61 Manual
C53000-G1176-C127-1
To
Siemens AG
Dept. EV S SUP2
D–13623 Berlin
Germany
Dear reader,
printing errors can never be entirely eliminated:
therefore, should you come across any when reading
this manual, kindly enter them in this form together
with any comments or suggestions for improvement
that you may have.
From
Name:
Company/Dept.:
Address:
Phone no.: Fax no.:
Corrections/Suggestions
Subject to technical alteration
Copying of this document and giving it to others and the use
or communication of the contents thereof, are forbidden without
express authority. Offenders are liable to the payment of
damages. All rights are reserved in the event of the grant of
a patent or the registration of a utility model or design.
Order-no.: C53000-G1176-C127-1
Available from: LZF Fürth-Bislohe
Printed in Germany/Imprimé en Allemagne
AG 0900 0.2 FO 538 En
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft

Siprotec Multifunction Generator Protection Relay 7UM611/7UM612

Transféré par

Informations du document

Description originale:

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Siprotec Multifunction Generator Protection Relay 7UM611/7UM612

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

C53000-G1176-C127-1

Hardware and Connections

Hardware and Connections

Hardware and Connections

Hardware and Connections

Hardware and Connections

Hardware and Connections

Figure 4-3 DIGSI® 4, Annunciation

Figure 4-6 DIGSI® 4 Measured value display, Example

Figure 4-12 Setting a SIPROTEC® 4 device using DIGSI® 4

Figure 4-15 DIGSI® 4, Setting the Device Configuration, Example

Figure 4-16 Viewing Device Configuration from the HMI, Example

• In the next menu, select 0DVNLQJ__,_2_ → e.g. %LQDU\_,QSXWV.

Figure 4-23 DIGSI® 4, Entering Settings for a Protective Function, example

Figure 4-27 Readout of Time Synchronization Settings from the HMI

Figure 5-47 Parameters for a FO port

Figure 6-6 Navigating using DIGSI® 4 — example

Figure 6-17 Definition of the parameters _____3KDVH_'LUHFWLRQ and _____/,1(_

Figure 6-18 Pick-up value voltage restraint

& O/L Th. Pickup

Figure 6-30 Power diagram of a salient-pole generator, indicated per unit

Figure 6-75 Standard Interlocking Arrangements

Control During Operation 7

Figure 7-18 Selection of measured values on the front — example

Installation and Commissioning 8

Installation and Commissioning

Installation and Commissioning

Installation and Commissioning

Routine Checks and Maintenance 9

Routine Checks and Maintenance

Vous aimerez peut-être aussi